Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Israel
Eliezer Katzenstein .
Program Interface
Database Reference Manual
(Version 16)
Document Edition 25
The Manufacturer reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in
equipment design or specifications.
This document may contain flaws, omissions or typesetting errors; no warranty is granted nor
liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in the Manufacturer's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained herein is periodically updated and
changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please
notify the Manufacturer. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
All trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective holders.
Foreword
Welcome to the Coral system Program Interface and Database
Reference Manual. Flexibility is one of the great strengths of the Coral
Systems. This manual is a highly detailed explanation of the core of
the Coral™ FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller), 5000, 6000;
Coral™ IPx Office; Coral™ IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000; CDRS 200E,
the Program Interface (PI). By means of the PI, virtually all present
and future communication needs can be customized for each site or
location. The Program Interface is an integral part of the Coral product
and is designed to allow you to serve your client creatively.
Record of Changes
Issue No. Issue Date Brief Description Entered by:
Table of Contents
TOC-1
PI Reference Manual
1 Introduction
General Description .............................................................................................. 1-2
PI Terminal Device................................................................................................. 1-4
Hardware Setup ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Access to the Programming Interface .................................................................. 1-11
PI Terminal Control Function Commands ............................................................ 1-14
Conventions Used in this Document .................................................................... 1-17
Country Codes ..................................................................................................... 1-19
2 Programming Requirements
Default System....................................................................................................... 2-2
Typical Site-Specific Programming ........................................................................ 2-3
Additional Programming......................................................................................... 2-4
Programming and Entering Time Units .................................................................. 2-6
Programming Functions ......................................................................................... 2-7
Locating Data Fields .............................................................................................. 2-8
Direct Access Abbreviations (DAA)........................................................................ 2-9
Entering Yes/No and Remove.............................................................................. 2-10
Authorization Items .............................................................................................. 2-11
3 Installation
Installation .............................................................................................................3-2
Feature Authorization ............................................................................................3-5
TOC-2
PI Reference Manual
4 Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
Sizes Definition ......................................................................................................4-2
Sizes Tab ............................................................................................................4-24
URC-Card (IPx Office, IPx 500 and CDRS 200E) ...............................................4-33
URC-Default Configuration ..................................................................................4-35
URC-Current Configuration .................................................................................4-37
URC-Card Database ...........................................................................................4-40
System Engineering Options ...............................................................................4-41
Music Sources .....................................................................................................4-44
Units ....................................................................................................................4-47
5 Numbering Plan
General Numbering Plan .......................................................................................5-3
General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) ......................................................5-7
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) ......................................................5-17
Special Feature Codes ........................................................................................5-50
FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes ...........................................................5-53
SHOW TYPE of NUMBER ..................................................................................5-55
TOC-3
PI Reference Manual
6 System
Feature Timers ......................................................................................................6-2
System Features ...................................................................................................6-7
System Features - Outgoing Trunks .....................................................................6-8
System Features - Incoming Trunks ...................................................................6-19
System Features - Station Options .....................................................................6-20
System Features - Intercept/Incomplete .............................................................6-34
System Features - Call Forwarding .....................................................................6-39
System Features - Camp-On ..............................................................................6-41
System Features - Hotel ......................................................................................6-42
System Features - Messaging .............................................................................6-44
System Features - Tones ....................................................................................6-51
System Features - Diagnostics ...........................................................................6-53
System Features - ISDN .....................................................................................6-55
System Features - Network .................................................................................6-56
System Features - Wireless ................................................................................6-57
Card List ..............................................................................................................6-60
Port List ...............................................................................................................6-68
Port List - Physical Location ................................................................................6-69
Port List - Dial Numbers ......................................................................................6-74
Digital Port Bus List .............................................................................................6-92
Tone Plan ............................................................................................................6-96
Ringers ..............................................................................................................6-103
7 Class of Service
Station and Trunk COS .........................................................................................7-2
Attendant Class of Service ..................................................................................7-33
Tenant Class of Service ......................................................................................7-44
TOC-4
PI Reference Manual
8 Trunk Controls
General Trunk Timers ...........................................................................................8-3
Trunk Timers .........................................................................................................8-7
MFR Card Database ...........................................................................................8-10
General Trunk Definitions ....................................................................................8-11
Trunk Group Definition ........................................................................................8-18
Alternate Route ...................................................................................................8-34
DID/E&M Groups .................................................................................................8-36
Offset Filters ........................................................................................................8-42
Power Fail Trunk Definition .................................................................................8-44
LS/GS (Loop/Ground Start) Trunks .....................................................................8-46
4T/8T LGS Port Database ...................................................................................8-50
4T/8T Card Database ..........................................................................................8-52
4TEM - E&M Continuous .....................................................................................8-58
E&M Continuous Timers .....................................................................................8-59
4TEM (E&M Continuous) Card Database ...........................................................8-62
4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) .........................................................................................8-64
............................................................................................................................8-64
4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Port Database .................................................................8-65
4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database ................................................................8-67
4TWL Trunk Card Database ...............................................................................8-84
E&M Trunk Definition ..........................................................................................8-87
DID Trunk Definition ............................................................................................8-90
8DID Card Database ...........................................................................................8-91
T1 and 30T/x Card Configuration ........................................................................8-95
T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x, 2DT Synchronization ........................................................8-98
2DT Card Database ..........................................................................................8-102
2DT Card Database: DEFAULT Configuration ..................................................8-103
2DT Card Database: CURRENT Configuration ................................................8-105
T1 and 30T Card Database ...............................................................................8-108
T1 and 30T Port Database ................................................................................8-111
30T/M Cards ......................................................................................................8-113
30T/M Card Database .......................................................................................8-114
30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database ................................................................8-120
30T/M DDI Port Database .................................................................................8-122
30T/M Timers ....................................................................................................8-123
TOC-5
PI Reference Manual
9 Station Controls
Station Timers .......................................................................................................9-2
SLT Definition ........................................................................................................9-5
SLT: iDSP Card (Caller ID Type Bellcore/ETSI) Database .................................9-19
SLT Card Database .............................................................................................9-20
Keyset Timers .....................................................................................................9-27
Keyset Ring Cadence ..........................................................................................9-29
Keyset Definition .................................................................................................9-31
Keyset Button - Programming .............................................................................9-76
Keyset Fixed System Keys - Programming .......................................................9-102
Keyset Soft Keys Idle Set ..................................................................................9-103
Keyset Preference - Programming ....................................................................9-117
APA, PEX/APA and APDL RS-232 Setup .........................................................9-119
Wireless Stations - CoralAIR .............................................................................9-122
Magneto 8SM Card Database ...........................................................................9-125
TOC-6
PI Reference Manual
10 Groups
Hunt Group ..........................................................................................................10-2
Boss Group .......................................................................................................10-18
Pickup Group .....................................................................................................10-23
Zoned Voice Page Group ..................................................................................10-24
Bell/UNA Group .................................................................................................10-25
Group Calls .......................................................................................................10-26
ELA Group .........................................................................................................10-38
11 Libraries
Public Library .......................................................................................................11-2
Private Library .....................................................................................................11-9
Serial Library .....................................................................................................11-12
Large Public Library - Overview ........................................................................11-18
Large Public Library Numbering Plan ................................................................11-20
Large Public Library Contents ...........................................................................11-22
Directory ............................................................................................................11-25
Directory - Systems (Shared) Directory Entries ................................................11-26
Directory - Personal Directory ...........................................................................11-29
12 Night Service
Night Service - Timers .........................................................................................12-2
Night Service- Definition ......................................................................................12-5
Weekend Timers .................................................................................................12-6
Holiday Timers ....................................................................................................12-7
13 Toll Barriers
Toll Barrier ...........................................................................................................13-2
TOC-7
PI Reference Manual
14 SMDR
SMDR Control .....................................................................................................14-2
Report Control ...................................................................................................14-10
Format Params ..................................................................................................14-11
Auto On-Line .....................................................................................................14-13
Charge Table .....................................................................................................14-16
16 Room Status/
User Canned Messages
Names .................................................................................................................16-3
Status/Message Select ........................................................................................16-5
Status_Display/Message .....................................................................................16-6
Busy Display ........................................................................................................16-7
Terminal ..............................................................................................................16-8
TOC-8
PI Reference Manual
17 Service Terminals
Password and Site Name ....................................................................................17-2
Message Control .................................................................................................17-4
Message Select ...................................................................................................17-6
Terminal Destination ...........................................................................................17-8
CoralVIEW Traffic (CVT) Terminal Destination ...................................................17-9
Call Trace ..........................................................................................................17-10
Terminal Setup ..................................................................................................17-11
KB0 Setup Through Attendant Console - Feature .............................................17-29
Terminal Reset ..................................................................................................17-30
Terminal Clear ...................................................................................................17-31
iVMF Remote Maintenance ...............................................................................17-32
18 Features
Feature Control ...................................................................................................18-2
20 Wakeup
Wakeup Control ...................................................................................................20-2
Wakeup Report ...................................................................................................20-4
TOC-9
PI Reference Manual
Database Control
& Duplication Systems
Database Control ................................................................................................21-2
First Initialization ..................................................................................................21-3
Backup ................................................................................................................21-4
Database Control: Disk (FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000) ...................................................21-5
Save Database (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ........................................................................21-6
Load DBS (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ..................................................................................21-7
Copy Files (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) .................................................................................21-8
Show Dir (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ..................................................................................21-10
Auto-Backup (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ..........................................................................21-11
Database Control: FLASH (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS
200E) ............................................................................................................................................21-12
FLASH: Save (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) .....21-14
FLASH: LOAD DBS (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400, 5000, IPx 500, 800, 3000, CDRS 200E) ....21-15
FLASH: SHOW FILE INFO (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS
200E) ..................................................................................................................21-16
ROOT,0,10,2,2,2 ...............................................................................................21-16
FLASH: AUTO BACKUP (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) 21-17
FLASH: ERASE (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) ..............21-18
FLASH: INIT DUMP (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) .......21-19
Duplication (FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 dual control) ..........................................................21-20
HSB (FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000/R redundant control) ......................................................21-25
22 Diagnostics
Diagnostic Tests ..................................................................................................22-2
Diagnostic Alarms ...............................................................................................22-5
TOC-10
PI Reference Manual
24 VFAC
Verified Forced Account Code ............................................................................24-2
26 ISDN
System Features - ISDN .....................................................................................26-2
BCCOS Templates ..............................................................................................26-3
BCCOS Control ...................................................................................................26-5
NSF .....................................................................................................................26-6
Call by Call ..........................................................................................................26-8
Alternate Line ID ..................................................................................................26-9
ISDN Card Signaling .........................................................................................26-11
ISDN Card Signaling: Signaling Channel ..........................................................26-12
ISDN Card Signaling: Card location ..................................................................26-13
TOC-11
PI Reference Manual
28 ISDNet™
System Features - Network .................................................................................28-3
Node NPL ..........................................................................................................28-10
Node Content ....................................................................................................28-12
Special Numbering Plan Functions ...................................................................28-15
TOC-12
PI Reference Manual
29 IP — Voice Over IP
UGW (Universal Gate Way) ................................................................................29-7
UGW: Default Configuration ................................................................................29-9
UGW: Current Configuration .............................................................................29-13
IP Ports ..............................................................................................................29-27
IP_Keyset ..........................................................................................................29-28
IP_SLT ..............................................................................................................29-36
IP_LGS ..............................................................................................................29-38
IP_Net ...............................................................................................................29-40
SIP Ports ...........................................................................................................29-41
SIP Terminal ......................................................................................................29-43
SIP Trunk ..........................................................................................................29-52
IP: Telephony Gateway (Coral Teleport) ...........................................................29-62
IP: General ........................................................................................................29-68
IP: Statistics .......................................................................................................29-79
IP: NET ..............................................................................................................29-80
IP: ZONE ...........................................................................................................29-82
IP: SIP DOMAINS .............................................................................................29-88
IP: SENTINEL Pro .............................................................................................29-89
Software Upgrade .............................................................................................29-93
UGW Software Upgrade: Activate .....................................................................29-94
UGW Software Upgrade: Cancel ......................................................................29-97
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Activate ..............................................................29-99
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Activate by Dial Number ..................................29-100
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Activate by IP Address .....................................29-102
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Cancel ..............................................................29-103
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Cancel by Dial Number ....................................29-104
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Cancel by IP Address ......................................29-105
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Activate ...............................................................29-106
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Activate by Index Number ..................................29-107
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Activate by IP Address .......................................29-109
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Cancel ................................................................29-110
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Cancel by Index Number ....................................29-111
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Cancel by IP Address .........................................29-112
TOC-13
PI Reference Manual
TOC-14
1 Introduction
1-1
Introduction PI Reference Manual
General Description
The Program Interface (PI) is a detailed, menu-driven, interface system for
programming the Coral System. It also provides access to the diagnostic facilities
contained within the system software.
The PI can be accessed through any of the following types of connecting devices:
• video display data terminal
• keyboard send/receive (KSR) printer data terminal
• a data terminal and modem
• PC with VT emulator
• PC with CoralVIEW Designer (CVD)
• PC with CoralVIEW Administrator (CVA)
• PC via Telnet Terminal Emulation (requires STIP, MAP or LIU)
An additional PI function allows saving and restoring the entire database contents
to a binary disk file, using a personal computer (PC) and save/restore software.
Backups are also updated to the IMC-8/16 or CFD flash memory cards.
See Database Control: Disk (FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000) beginning on page 21-5.
See Database Control: FLASH (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx
500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) beginning on page 21-12.
In the Coral FlexiCom 400,5000,6000 and Coral IPx 800, 3000,4000 the PI data
terminal is connected to the Coral through one of the three RS-232 interfaces on
the RMI card (RS-232C) or 8DRCM-2/8DRCM/ 8DRCF card (RS-232E) at the
cable pinouts on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) or through the internal
modem interface on the card. One RS-232E interface is provided at the front panel
of the MEX-IP2, or MCP-ATS card in the Common Control (see Figure 1-1).
In the Coral IPx Office Main Unit the PI is connected to one RS-232E interface.
One KB0 is provided at the front side of the Coral IPx Office.
Additionally, the PI can be connected through an internal modem (KB4) located on
the U-RMI Office or RMI Office card.
For Coral IPx Office Systems with optional IPx 800X expansion unit the PI data
terminal is connected to the Coral through one of the three interfaces (KB5,6,7) on
the RMI card (RS-232C), or 8DRCM/8DRCF/8DRCM-2 card (RS-232E) at the
cable pinouts on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) or through the internal
modem interface (KB8) on the card.
In the CDRS 200E and Coral IPx 500M Main Unit the PI is connected to one of
four RS-232E interfaces. One KB0 is provided at the front side of the MCP-IPx2
card. Another three interface connectors, KB1, KB2 and KB3 are provided at the
upper left side at the auxiliary I/O entry of the main cage (MSBipx card).
Additionally, the PI can be connected through an internal modem (KB4) located on
the MSBipx card.
1-2
PI Reference Manual Introduction
For Coral IPx 500 Systems with optional IPx 800X expansion unit the PI data
terminal is connected to the Coral through one of the three interfaces (KB5,6,7) on
the RMI card (RS-232C), or 8DRCM-2/8DRCM/8DRCF card (RS-232E) at the
cable pinouts on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) or through the internal
modem interface (KB8) on the card.
Multiple but simultaneous, independent PI sessions from different monitors are
possible, though this practice is not recommended.
Access to the PI is restricted to trained and qualified technicians. Uncertified
personnel can unknowingly cause serious damage to the communication system
database.
The terminal or printer displays Coral-generated prompts (questions, instructions,
options, etc.) in plain English; the programmer can make an entry, skip to the next
prompt, or exit the programming function. The various card functions can be
accessed using a written command, e.g. NPL to “jump” directly to the Numbering
Plan or accessed stepwise, e.g. (0,0,5).
Entries are made using a standard keyboard; the keyboard DELETE
(not BACKSPACE) key is used on most terminals to erase incorrect characters.
Entries are displayed as they are keyed. Changes entered, take effect in “real time”;
i.e., as soon as the ENTER key is pressed, the change is entered into the system
memory, and immediately takes effect.
1-3
Introduction PI Reference Manual
PI Terminal Device
The Program Interface (PI) terminal device should be either an asynchronous,
ASCII video display data terminal, a Personal Computer (PC) with terminal
emulator software, a KSR printer equipped with a serial interface (RS-232E), a
Bell 103/212A/V.90 compatible data modem (see Table 1-1 below). Either one of
two popular video display terminal emulations are supported for character
attributes, cursor positioning and screen refresh. If the video display terminal
connected to the Coral system does not emulate one of the two supported
emulations, or a portable data printer is used instead of a video display terminal,
use the Printer definition in Terminal Setup beginning on page 17-11. The Modem
setup definition is described in the same branch.
RS-232 Data Transfer Rate 9,600 bps Default Baud Rate for all systems.
8DRCM-2, 8DRCF, 8DRCM, RMI, See BAUD RATE (page 17-26) for a detailed list when changing
MEX-IP2, MCP-ATS, MCP-IPx2, baud rates.
MSBipx (Coral IPx 500M and CDRS 200E),
MCB Office (Coral IPx Office)
To use the “SNAP” (real time display) functions available in some programming
areas, the PI device must emulate a Digital Equipment Corporation VT-100 or a
Qume Corporation QVT-101. This function is not essential for programming;
however, it is beneficial when the PI device is also used for system diagnostics.
While the PI terminal device communication specifications may be altered, the
default values listed in the above table, default upon first initialization, and must be
used in order to initially enter the Coral system programming interface. Afterwards
they may be changed.
1-4
PI Reference Manual Introduction
Hardware Setup
The PI terminal device can be connected to:
• Telnet Terminal Emulation via an LIU, STIP or a MAP card
• An RS-232 type interface on the system; KB0 in all Coral systems, and KB1,
KB2, KB3 in IPx 500 and CDRS 200E systems or to the RMI/8DRCM/8DRCF
internal modem.
All features and functions are available through either connection.
Telnet Terminal Emulation via a MAP Connection
The MAP card (IP port 11010) offers integrated Coral system IP
connectivity with:
• Faster and more reliable connections than the serial RS-232
connections or even the LIU IP connections
• Up to four concurrent users can connect via the same TCP/IP network
socket.
In the Coral IPx Office the MAP card is embedded as a software only application
on the MCB Office (main board of the Coral IPx Office).
In the Coral IPx 500 and in the CDRS 200E the MAP card is installed on the
MCP-IPx2 main control processor card.
In the Coral IPx 800,3000 and FlexiCom 400,5000 the MAP card is installed on
the MEX-IP2 main control processor card.
For further information about the MAP card refer to Chapter 6 of the Coral
Control Cards (for CDRS 200,200E; IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom
200,300,400,5000) Manual.
The MAP does not support Initialization messages, GP messages and other
online Alarm messages, when used to communicate with the PI (Program
Interface) over IP.
Telnet Terminal Emulation via an LIU Connection
The LIU card (IP port 11001) enables the MCP-IPx2 and the MEX-IP2 main
control processor card to communicate with the PI via the RJ-45 LAN
connector. Without this card, communication via the RJ-45 connector cannot
take place, and all interaction with the PI must occur via the KB0 RS-232 port
(unless a MAP card is installed. When a MAP card is installed, communication
via the RJ-45 connector can take place and the LIU card is redundant).
The LIU card translates the RS-232 protocol used by the KB0 to the IP
protocol. In order for the LIU to function, it is necessary to move DIP switch
1-5
Introduction PI Reference Manual
#1 on the front panel of the MCP-IPx2 and the MEX-IP2 cards to the left and
do one of the following. (See Figure 1-1):
• To connect the RJ-45 port to the LAN, connect an ordinary cable between the
RJ-45 port and the LAN outlet.
• To connect the RJ-45 port directly to a workstation, connect a cross-over cable
between the RJ-45 port and the workstation.
For further information about the LIU card refer to Chapter 7 of the Coral
Control Cards (for CDRS 200,200E; IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom
200,300,400,5000) Manual.
Telnet Terminal Emulation via a STIP module Connection
The STIP module enables all Coral main control processor cards to
communicate with the PI via the RJ-45 LAN connector.
The STIP is a Serial RS-232 to IP translator. The STIP enables serial devices to
connect to the Internet. The STIP provides transparent serial data-to-Internet
protocol conversion and Internet protocol to serial conversion. Connection of
the STIP to a serial device (Coral systems) and modem makes the Coral
systems IP-compatible. The STIP connects with any device that has a serial
RS-232 port that requires communication with an IP interface.
For further information about the STIP refer to the STIP Reference (Installation
and Configuration) Manual.
On-Site RS-232 Connection
The PI terminal is connected to the MEX-IP2/MCP-IPx2/MCP-ATS/Coral IPx
Office front panel DB9 connector, KB0. Note that the connector is wired as a Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) device. Verify that electrical connections between the
KB0 port and PI terminal reflect a DTE to DTE or Null Modem connection.
Many video display terminals require only the Transmit Data (Tx), Receive Data
(Rx) and Signal Ground conductors to be connected between the PI terminal
device and the KB0/KB1 or 8DRCM/8DRCF/8DRCM-2/RMI serial data port. The
Qume QVT-101 terminal requires that the Clear to Send conductor be active or
high (+3 to +12Vdc) to display received data.
Figure 1-2 shows the connections for using a standard PC (COM1 or COM2) with
the KB0 interface.
Figure 1-3 shows the connections for using a VT-100 or Qume QVT-101 with the
KB0 interface.
Some portable data printer terminals require that one or more status conductors
(e.g. Carrier Detect or Clear to Send) of the terminal be high, active, or asserted
for the terminal to be on-line or in a communications mode. The Request to Send
and Data Terminal Ready conductors of the KB0 connector are kept high and may
be connected to conductors of the terminal device for this purpose. If the terminal
device appears unresponsive after it is connected to the Coral, consult the
1-6
PI Reference Manual Introduction
Option
Option Switches
Switches
Set DIP Switch# 1
KB0 to the Right for
KB0
KB0 Connections
Reset
Reset
RESET
IMC-4/8
FMsl IMC-8 /16
Release
Button
IMC-4/8
Release Button IMC-8/16
KB0
RS-232 E
KB0 Connections
KB0
SAU SAU
Reset
Indicator
Lights
HS
MCP-IPx2 MEX-IP2 MCP-ATS
Coral IPx 500 Coral IPx 800, 3000 Coral IPx 4000
FlexiCom 200 FlexiCom 300, 400V, 400, 5000 FlexiCom 6000
CDRS 200, 200E
CPU
UGW
GC
FAN
MAINT.
MRC
GC ACT.
POWER
KB0 UGW LAN 2 4 6 8 WAN PRINTER N.C.
COM RESET
SYS.
MEMORY DISK RESET
1 3 5 7
1-7
Introduction PI Reference Manual
1 N/A ---
5 GND Ground
9 N/A ---
* Pins 2, 3 and 5 are sufficient to connect the Coral system.
1-8
PI Reference Manual Introduction
3 TRANSMIT DATA - 3
2 RECEIVE DATA - 2
6 6
1 CARRIER DETECT - 1
KB0
PROGRAMMING PORT 9 PIN PC ASYNC. SERIAL PORT
(USE FEMALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR) (USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR)
1-9
Introduction PI Reference Manual
Remote Connections
Remote connections are made by connecting the PI terminal device to a modem
and establishing a voice call from the remote terminal modem to the Coral Modem.
Coral IPx Office system requires the installation of a U-RMI Office or RMI Office
card to accommodate remote access, or the installation of an external, customer
provided modem to the KB0 interface.
Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E systems are equipped with a built in modem.
Coral FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 and Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 systems require
the installation of an 8DRCM, 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2 or RMI card to accommodate
remote access, or the installation of an external, customer provided modem to the
KB0 interface.
Figure 1-4 illustrates the necessary connections between the KB0 interface and a
typical external modem, however, the connections to some modems may vary.
1-10
PI Reference Manual Introduction
PI Software Structure
The PI software is a menu-driven and branch oriented system. The programmer can
select a specific branch, which branches out into more detailed lists. In addition,
the programmer is able to jump from one menu to another with no restrictions,
except those demanded by specific password levels.
When the PI software is first accessed, the ENTER PASSWORD prompt appears.
After a valid password is entered, the Root Menu appears.
1-11
Introduction PI Reference Manual
Entering the word ROOT anywhere within the PI, will take you to this
menu.
Figure 1-5.
PI Interface
Root Menu (ROOT)
CCS 16.03.00
Copyright (c) 2001-2012 Tadiran Telecom (TTL) L.P. (“Tadiran”)
(M) or (S)
or (Active)
NAME -
SAU # -
0-CONFIG
1-DIAGN
2-TABLES
3-ADMIN
4-ROUTING/COST
5-ISDN
6-DATA
7-CoraLINK
8-NETWORK
9-IP
• This manual describes all of the root menu options except 1-Diagn and
2-Tables. Tables programming is reserved for the manufacturer’s internal
use.
• In Coral FlexiCom 5000 and Coral IPx 3000 with Dual Control systems, the
letter M (Master) or S (Slave) appearing after the version number indicates the
PI side definition.
• In Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral IPx 4000 systems, the letter A (Active), S
(Standby) (if feature authorization is present for duplication) or M
(Maintenance) or the word “Faulty” appear after the version number indicating
the PI side definition.
• SAU shows the Software Authorization Unit (SAU) unique serial number
(without the leading zeros). This number is verified during system operation.
When a mismatch is detected during operation, a system alarm is issued and an
error message is displayed.
1-12
PI Reference Manual Introduction
1-13
Introduction PI Reference Manual
[CTRL] H Defines a new “Escape” or Home menu; The ASCII character code defines
When [CTRL] H is entered the following message appears: [CTRL] H as the BACKSPACE
ESC will place you in this Node character. Some terminal keyboards
This PI menu is now displayed whenever pressing [ESC]. can be configured to send a DELETE
Note: character when backspacing. When
Entering ROOT from anywhere within the PI will always place available on the terminal, select this
you in the Root menu. option to avoid changing the Escape
menu.
1-14
PI Reference Manual Introduction
[CTRL] P Ends the PI session; password entry is required to start a new PI There is an automatic logout upon
session. Pressing [CTRL] P is recommended when exiting in inactive terminal (see AUTO_LOGOUT
order to prevent unauthorized operators from entering the PI and and AUTO_LOGOUT_TIME on page
causing damage. When changes are made to systems that do 17-25).
not include an automatic backup, the following message appears:
CAUTION!!! Auto backup NOT available
<<DATABASE SAVE Recommended After Changes>>
Quit Anyway (Y/N)? Y
Typing N(o) returns to the current PI mode. Typing Y(es) will
leave the session.The default is Y(es) [CR].
[CTRL] Q Turns off the [CTRL] S command (below). [CTRL] Q and [CTRL] S functions are
commonly referred to as X-On/X-Off or
DC1/DC3. Some terminal keyboards
include a SCROLL LOCK key, which
alternately sends a [CTRL] S and
[CTRL]Q to toggle scrolling.
[CRTL] R Shows the current menu path from the Root Menu.
Utilized by KB0 only.
1-15
Introduction PI Reference Manual
[CTRL] W Toggles the 25-line scroll function on (display scrolls 25 lines and
stops) and off (display scrolls to the end of the menu, list, etc.).
ESC Pressing the Escape key in any location returns the session to
the PI Home Menu as defined by [CTRL] H. The Root Menu is
the default; any menu or list may be specified by moving to the
desired menu and entering [CTRL] H.
1-16
PI Reference Manual Introduction
Many option headings offer alternative routes; the first route given is the shortest
route and may be used from any point in the PI menu structure. An example is:
“FE.T” (also called Direct Access Abbreviation) may be keyed to access the
feature timers from any location in the PI structure. FE.T cannot be accessed when
in Name fields.
The route shown by digits and commas is used only from the Root Menu.
50..80..500 ms or 0..80
where 80ms is the default in both cases and is designated by a pointed arrow on top
of the number.
When no default is designated, the default is Not Applicable.
For ranges that may include more than one default, the defaults are listed
separately. For example, the defaults for the PAGE parameter in Station and Trunk
COS, is shown as:
Yes/No
Yes: COS 0-9
No: COS 10-15
Explanation:
• The range is Yes or No.
• For COS 0-9 the default is Yes.
• For COS 10-15 the default is No.
1-17
Introduction PI Reference Manual
When a system range is not relevant, None is shown as the entry. In addition, when
a range specification is not applicable for a specific option, the abbreviation N/A is
given instead of data.
When a system default is not available or not applicable, no arrows are shown and,
thereby, no default designated.
Display Only Parameters
Parameters which are read-only options, (i.e. Display Only) appear with the
following icon before the Range. The example below indicates that the parameter
value may vary between 0 and 60 units. The actual value is indicated on the PI
screen.
0..60
Database Forms
A document called Database Forms is provided for writing down the various site
programming definitions that differ from the defaults presented in this manual.
Database Forms provides a convenient notebook for programmers to record
specific site data and information. This information can then be used in order to
redefine the various PI parameters. The headers of each major option in the
Database Forms mirror the titles of each Coral branch i.e., major options in this
document.
1-18
PI Reference Manual Introduction
Country Codes
The Coral incorporates two different system types. System Type 0 and System Type 2.
System Type 0, designated as CC (Contry Code), is used for most countries. The countries that use System
Type 0, but with slight differences for their ranges and/or default values are listed as CCn types (where n is
a number). The relevant country type is listed below.
System Type 2, designated as Eu, is generally used for European countries. The countries that use System
Type 2, but with slightly different ranges and/or defaults are listed as Eun, where n indicates the specific
country.
Table 1-4: Country Codes
System Type Country Code Country
System Type 0 CC0 USA
Country Codes: CCn (n CC1 Israel
= any number) CC2 Mexico
CC3 Brazil
CC4 Venezuela
CC5 Argentina
CC6 China
CC7 Poland
CC8 India
CC9 ROW (Rest Of World), i.e. all other
countries not included in this list.)
CC10 Russia
System Type 2 Eu European systems
Country Codes: Eun (n = Eu0 Netherlands
any number) Eu1 Belgium
Eu2 Germany
Eu3 Spain
Eu4 Hungary
Eu5 Greece
Eu6 Australia
Eu7 New Zealand
Eu8 Czech Republic
Eu9 Italy
Eu10 Caribbean Islands
System type and Country Code (CC) numbers are displayed during Installation or
in the Install branch, see SYSTEM_TYPE and COUNTRY on page 3-2.
1-19
Introduction PI Reference Manual
1-20
2 Programming Requirements
Default System defines the default databases according to the country, system
type and Common Control card type.
Programming and Entering Time Units defines the PI time unit notation.
Locating Data Fields and Direct Access Abbreviations will help you locate
the desired parameter, data field or branch needed to program the PI.
Entering Yes/No and Remove Range and General Rules for Entering
Names describe the general rules for entering Yes, No, Remove and Names in
the parameter range.
Authorization Items list the specific features that need software authorization
before they can be implemented.
Programming Requirements PI Reference Manual
Default System
The configuration of the Common Control cards determines the default database
that is installed upon First Initialization, as shown below.
Coral IPx Office, Coral FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 as well as the
CDRS 200E, Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000 and 4000 systems default to a
Coral system with 4GC, with authorized features defined by the SAU unit.
Should a particular parameter impact upon a different option, the relation between
the two is explained in the relevant description.
2-2
PI Reference Manual Programming Requirements
2-3
Programming Requirements PI Reference Manual
Additional Programming
Depending upon site requirements, the following major options may need
additional programming.
Groups (Chapter 10)
Defines ACD/UCD Hunt Groups, Boss Groups, Pickup Groups, Zoned Voice Page
Groups, Bell/UNA (Night Answer Groups), Group Calls and ELA Groups.
DID/E&M Groups and Trunk Groups are defined in Trunks Chapter 8.
Libraries (Chapter 11)
Defines public (system-wide) and private (station-related) speed call libraries as
well as the parameters for the System Directory.
Night Service (Chapter 12)
Defines night service timers as well as incomplete and intercept call destinations.
Toll Barrier (Chapter 13)
Sets toll restrictions (barriers) on outgoing calls.
Station Message Detail Recording (Chapter 14)
Controls the system’s detailed call reporting to external SMDR systems.
Routing (Chapter 15)
Defines Routing and Cost Calculation parameters.
Room Status (Chapter 16)
Controls the system’s room status feature.
Service Terminals (Chapter 17)
Defines the various system parameters for service terminals.
Features (Chapter 18)
Defines port features which can be activated from either the PI terminal or the
Attendant Console.
Voice Transmission Controls (Chapter 19)
Controls voice transmission across ports and cards. Also included in this chapter is
the Network Balancing System.
Wakeup (Chapter 20)
Defines the Wakeup controls and Wakeup report production.
Special System Options (Chapter 21)
Defines those features that control the database, duplication system as well as the
Hot Standby Coral Systems.
Diagnostics (Chapter 22)
Defines those options that perform the various diagnostic tests and check the
system alarms.
2-4
PI Reference Manual Programming Requirements
2-5
Programming Requirements PI Reference Manual
AM Hours PM Hours
Time Enter Time Enter
Midnight 00 Noon 12
1 01 1 13
2 02 2 14
3 03 3 15
4 04 4 16
5 05 5 17
6 06 6 18
7 07 7 19
8 08 8 20
9 09 9 21
10 10 10 22
11 11 11 23
• Minutes are entered as two digits (00 through 59). All time entries are hh:mm,
where hh = hour (00-23) and mm = minutes (00-59).
• For single-digit hours, 1AM to 9 AM, a leading 0 can be added as required by
the programmer; for example: 8 am can be defined either as 8:00 or 08:00.
• A colon (:) must be entered between the hour and minutes.
2-6
PI Reference Manual Programming Requirements
Programming Functions
The following table presents the eight programming functions that can be applied
to the Program Interface. Only functions relevant to a specific branch are available
in that branch or option.
2-7
Programming Requirements PI Reference Manual
2-8
PI Reference Manual Programming Requirements
The layout and order of the Direct Access Abbreviations shown above is
slightly different from the on-line version; this is for the sake of clarity
only.
2-9
Programming Requirements PI Reference Manual
YES NO Remove
YE N Remove
Y NON Rem
NONE R
2-10
PI Reference Manual Programming Requirements
Authorization Items
Software Upgrades, new Feature Activations and increasing Feature Sizes, require
Software Authorization.
Generic software and feature activation, features sizes and software authorization
information are all included on the IMC8 or CFD flash memory card.
The Authorization set includes a serial number which must match the Software
Authorization Unit (SAU) physically installed on the following cards:
• MCB Office (Coral IPx Office right panel)
• MCP-IPx2 (Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E)
• MEX-IP2 (Coral FlexiCom 400 and Coral IPx 800)
• MEX-IP2 (Coral FlexiCom 5000 and Coral IPx 3000)1
• 32GC (Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral IPx 4000)2
A unique SAU number is assigned per system. The SAU information determines
the feature implementation capabilities or feature access authorization for a
customer.
Loading unauthorized updates will cause the system to shut down after 14 days
unless the proper authorization (SAU) is provided.
Authorization allows for up to 50 software subversion upgrades, allows increasing
the system sizes and activating specific features.
The latest software version allowed for the site is verified by the Coral prior to the
complete software installation. Attempting to install an unauthorized version, the
Coral will abort the process without overwriting the current software version.
Any attempt to exceed limited or maximum numbers, e.g. sizing, results in an error
message.
When a feature is not authorized in the system, any attempt to access that feature
results in the following message:
(feature name) is not authorized in the system.
In the following pages all options that are controlled by the authorization system
are assigned Authorization Limit or Authorization Control.
1. For the FlexiCom 5000 and Coral IPx 3000 systems with duplicated control, an identical yet sep-
arate IMC8 is required for each system side. Each IMC8 includes its own unique Software
Authorization number.
2. For the FlexiCom 6000/R and Coral IPx 4000/R systems with dual redundant control, an identi-
cal yet separate CFD is required for each system side. Each CFD includes its own unique Soft-
ware Authorization number.
2-11
Programming Requirements PI Reference Manual
2-12
3 Installation
This branch presents certain system defaults, based on the Software Authorization
Unit (SAU), at the time of initial installation. Installation parameters configure the
system logic, allocate memory, establish default system sizes and set port and
feature defaults; all according to the type of system specified.
Installation and Feature Authorization display fields are described on the following
pages:
Installation ....................................................................................................3-2
Feature Authorization ...................................................................................3-5
3-1
Installation PI Reference Manual
The following fields show the presently defined system type, and country of
installation. Used for display purposes only.
SYSTEM_TYPE 0..2
0 (Most Countries),
1 (Special Applications),
2 (European system);
See Table 3-1 below.
This parameter defines a set of countries or authorities with similar specifications.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
0 1 2
3-2
PI Reference Manual Installation
CABINET_TYPE 0..1
Notes!
• Upgrading from Version 15 sets this parameter to 0-None!
• A value of 0-None indicates that there is no expansion unit integrated in
this IPx Office system and prevents the peripheral cards in the
expansion units from initializing.
Table 3-2: IPx Office Expansion Unite Types
3-3
Installation PI Reference Manual
UPDATE? Yes/No
** WARNING **: System initialization will be performed **
ARE YOU SURE? is a prompt to help protect against accidentally initializing the
system. This allows backing out of the initialization procedure at the last moment.
3-4
PI Reference Manual Installation
When the Coral database exceeds 1.5MB requires replacing the IMC8
Flash Memory card with an IMC16 Flash Memory card.
Whenever an updated version of the Coral software is released, the upgrade is
delivered to the sites either on 3.5” diskettes, e-mail, or via other electronic media
file transfer. The upgrade is contained in a self-extracting compressed file, specific
for the site. The upgraded generic feature software and authorization must be
extracted by a PC via the FMprog utility, and then written from the PC hard disk
into the memory card.
The SAU number on the memory card must match the SAU number on the physical
New Coral IPx 3000 and Coral FlexiCom 5000 (0/0 systems) are supplied
with an IMC16 card.
For redundant systems (Coral IPx 4000/R and FlexiCom 6000/R), only one
SAU number is used per side. Therefore, the SAU number on the physical SAU
device must match the SAU number on the CFD memory card for that side.
For more information, see Authorization Items on page 2-11.
3-5
Installation PI Reference Manual
0 - DISPLAY Displays the current authorization set, limitations and feature capabilities.
CURRENT (see Table 3-3 below)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
In the following
table:
FEATURE The following FEATURE parameters (Ports, Stations, SLTs, SLT-IPs, Keysets,
Keysets_IP, SIP_Terminals, Wireless, Trunks, etc.) may be defined in excess of
their Authorization Limit in the Sizes Definition (page 4-2) branch (SIZ) in order to
avoid a First Init when adding stations. However, attempting to use equipment in
excess of its Authorization Limit results in the UNAUTHORIZED message and
the attempt fails.
Feature Authorization FEAT,1
3-6
PI Reference Manual Installation
1 PORTS 6000 (max) Shows the maximum ports (stations and trunks)
336: IPx Office allowed in the system.
200: IPx 500 The total number (sum) of the following types of
ports must be less than the number of PORTS:
144: CDRS 200E
• 2-KEYSETS
• 3-SLTS
• 4-TRUNKS
• 5-FlexSets
• 6-KEYSETS_IP
• 7-T2xxM
• 8-FLIPS (SOFTPHONE)
• 9-SENTINEL
• 10-SLT_IP
• 11-LGS_IP
• 12-NET_IP
• 13-SIP TERMINAL
• 14-TADIRAN SIP TERM (former T2xxS)
3-7
Installation PI Reference Manual
2 KEYSETS XXXX (or 1-3400*) Shows the maximum number of available Coral
whichever is smaller Keyset units for this system. The total number
(sum) of the following types of keysets must be
less than the number of KEYSETS:
• FlexSet
• FlexAPDL
• APDL
• CPA
• EKT
• DKT
• DST
• GKT
• VDK
• VM keyset ports
• FlexAir Wireless handsets
• CoralAIR Wireless handsets
Therefore, for example, if you have 100 DKTs and
100 FlexSets in your system, KEYSETS would have
to be at least 200 and FlexSets (below) would have
to be at least 100.
XXXX indicates that the KEYSETS limit is equivalent
to the number of PORTS.
3 SLTS XXXX (or 1-4000*) Standard Single Line (SLT or FXS) telephones
whichever is smaller includes the following types of stations:
• Magneto (8SM and 8SMipx cards)
• Type 500
• Type 2500
10-SLT_IP is not included here and must be defined
below for SLT IP sets.
Feature Authorization FEAT,1
3-8
PI Reference Manual Installation
5 FlexSets XXXX (or 1-3400*) Includes the following types of Coral FlexSet
whichever is smaller models:
• Coral FlexSet 120
• Coral FlexSet 120D
• Coral FlexSet 120L
• Coral FlexSet 120S
• Coral FlexSet 121S
• Coral FlexSet 280
• Coral FlexSet 280D
• Coral FlexSet 280D-Z
• Coral FlexSet 280D-HS
3-9
Installation PI Reference Manual
6 KEYSETS_IP XXXX (or 10-1950) Includes the following types of IP Keyset models:
whichever is smaller • Coral FlexSet-IP 280S
• Coral Sentinel (Terminal/I/II)
7-T2xxM is not included here and must be defined
below for Coral T207M, T208M, T207M/NP,
2: IPx Office T208M/BL (MGCP IP) keysets.
14-TADIRAN SIP TERM (former T2xxS) is not included
here and must be defined below for Coral
SeaBeam, P-335, P-450, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328 (SIP IP)
keysets.
XXXX indicates that the KEYSETS_IP limit is
equivalent to the number of PORTS,
but the total number of KEYSETS_IP, T2xxM, FLIPS
(SOFTPHONE), SENTINEL, SLT_IP, LGS_IP, NET_IP, SIP
TERMINAL, TADIRAN SIP TERM (former T2xxS) and SIP
TRUNK cannot exceed 1950.
7 T2xxM XXXX (or 2-1950) Includes the following types of Coral MGCP IP
whichever is smaller Keyset models:
• Coral T207M
• Coral T208M
• Coral T207M/NP
• Coral T208M/BL
XXXX indicates that the T2xxM limit is equivalent to
the number of PORTS,
but the total number of KEYSETS_IP, T2xxM, FLIPS
(SOFTPHONE), SENTINEL, SLT_IP, LGS_IP, NET_IP, SIP
TERMINAL, TADIRAN SIP TERM (former T2xxS) and SIP
TRUNK cannot exceed 1950.
3-10
PI Reference Manual Installation
10 SLT_IP XXXX (or 0-1950) Includes all Type 500 or Type 2500 standard
whichever is smaller Single Line Telephones (SLTs) connected via
Third Party MGCP gateways, Coral Teleport/FXS
MGCP gateways units to the Coral IP Network.
XXXX indicates that the SLT_IP limit is equivalent
to the number of PORTS,
but the total number of KEYSETS_IP, T2xxM, FLIPS
(SOFTPHONE), SENTINEL, SLT_IP, LGS_IP, NET_IP, SIP
TERMINAL, TADIRAN SIP TERM (former T2xxS) and SIP
TRUNK cannot exceed 1950.
11 LGS_IP XXXX (or 0-1950) Includes all CO analog trunks (loop start and
whichever is smaller ground start) connected via Third Party MGCP
gateways, Coral Teleport/FXO MGCP gateways to
the Coral IP network.
XXXX indicates that the LGS_IP limit is equivalent
to the number of PORTS,
but the total number of KEYSETS_IP, T2xxM, FLIPS
(SOFTPHONE), SENTINEL, SLT_IP, LGS_IP, NET_IP, SIP
TERMINAL, TADIRAN SIP TERM (former T2xxS) and SIP
TRUNK cannot exceed 1950.
12 NET_IP XXXX (or 0-1950) Includes all Coral IP QSIG Network connections
whichever is smaller for this Coral system via PUGW, UGW and
UGW-E cards.
3-11
Installation PI Reference Manual
13 SIP TERMINAL XXXX (or 0-1950) Includes several third-party SIP terminals
whichever is smaller (of the shelf), such as:
• Third-party SIP PC-SoftPhones
• Third-party SIP IP-Phones
• Third-party FXS SIP gateways
• SLT/IST stations (behind Coral Teleport/FXS SIP gateway)
• Third-party SIP Voicemail
• LxCMC (Repartee LX) Unified Messaging
Office:
• Can go higher then 8 ports.
• Does not use the SeaMail Controller. The
technician can browse directly to it for
administration.
10-SLT_IP (above) is not included here and must
be defined for SLT Type 500 or Type 2500
standard Single Line Telephones (SLTs) connected
via Third Party MGCP gateways.
14-TADIRAN SIP TERM (former T2xxS) (below) is not
included here and must be defined for
Feature Authorization FEAT,1
3-12
PI Reference Manual Installation
NOTE
• P-335 and P-450 are Tadiran branded
Polycom SIP Terminals.
• T322 and T328 are Tadiran branded
Yealink SIP Terminals.
• T207S, T208S, T207S/NP and T208S/BL
are Tadiran branded Tecom SIP Terminals.
• A branded SIP terminal has the Tadiran
Logo and is equipped with a Tadiran MAC
address. This SIP terminal requires the
3-13
Installation PI Reference Manual
15 SIP TRUNK XXXX (or 0-1950) Displays the maximum number of SIP trunks (from
whichever is smaller a public service provider or behind FXO/BRI/PRI
SIP gateways) that are authorized for use in this
16 MEDIA_CHAN. XXXX (or 0-3400*) Defines the maximum number of Media Channels
whichever is smaller supported throughout this Coral system:
• MG
• MRC
This number should not exceed the number
defined in IP_MEDIA_CHANNELS (page 4-28) (Sizes
Tab branch (SYSGEN,2)).
Feature Authorization FEAT,1
3-14
PI Reference Manual Installation
17 APA XXXX (or 1-3400*) Includes the following types of APA and iAPA ports
whichever is smaller allowed throughout this Coral system.
iAPA (IP) may be installed for these units:
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
• DKT 1000 series
• DKT 2000 series
• FlexSet 120, 120D, 120L, 120S, 121S
• FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 280S, 281S
3-15
Installation PI Reference Manual
20 URC CLID 0/XXXX FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) tone transmitters for
displaying Caller ID (CLID) on SLT phones,
applicable for:
• Coral IPx 500 systems with MSBipx Hardware
Issue-0200X1000 or higher
• Coral IPx Office systems with U-RMI Office or
U-MR Office cards
• CDRS 200E
Defines the maximum number of URC CLID
Feature Authorization FEAT,1
3-16
PI Reference Manual Installation
3-17
Installation PI Reference Manual
24 SIP VOICE MAIL 0/XXXX Defines the maximum number of SIP ports
dedicated for Voicemail.
Includes the following types of SIP Voicemail port
connections:
• Third-party Voicemail
• LxCMC (Repartee LX) Unified Messaging
Office:
• Can go higher then 8 ports.
• Does not use the SeaMail Controller. The
technician can browse directly to it for
administration.
XXXX indicates that the SIP VOICE MAIL limit is
equivalent to the number of SIP TERMINAL.
25 2DT WITH 2 Number of 2DT Defines the maximum number of 2DT cards with
3-18
PI Reference Manual Installation
monitor.
The integration of Coral systems and Microsoft Office
Communications Server (OCS) 2007 present enterprise users
with a solution that consists of a real-time multimedia
communication system with web conferencing (sharing data,
audio, and video), instant messaging, and audio/video
conversations.
Microsoft OCS and Exchange Server 2007 Unified Messaging
(UM) work together to provide users with Outlook Voice
Access. This makes email messages and voice messages
accessible from Outlook both locally or over the phone via an
access number assigned by the Exchange UM administrator.
Coral in conjunction with the Communicator 2007 client,
provides users with an easy way to communicate with users
from other locations using a wide range of communication
options.
29 SMDR BACKUP YES/NO This parameter is only relevant when SMDR data
is transmitted through a predetermined RS-232
port (RMI, 8DRCM, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCF, or MSBipx
card) and when SMDR_DEST [14] (page 14-6) is set to
3-19
Installation PI Reference Manual
30 2nd LANGUAGE YES/NO Defines the other languages that may be used by
the KEYSET displays.
35 ACD YES/NO Defines the ACD Hunt Group type features. When
the authorization is not present, only UCD groups
are available.
• Check In/out
• Wakeup
• Call Charge
NOTE: This feature is mutually exclusive with the
65 - CANNED MESSAGE feature. Therefore, using
this feature preempts the use of CANNED MESSAGE
in the same Coral system.
3-20
PI Reference Manual Installation
42 HSB YES/NO/NA This parameter is relevant for Coral IPx 4000 and
Coral FlexiCom 6000 systems only.
Enables the following systems operation with Dual
Common Control:
• Coral IPx 4000/R
• Coral FlexiCom 6000/R
3-21
Installation PI Reference Manual
47 CALL TRACE YES/NO Malicious Call Trace allows the Called Party or an
Attendant to compile a list of all incoming calls to
the “Called” station. The Attendant can compile a
list for more than one station.
3-22
PI Reference Manual Installation
52 SPLIT MONITOR YES/NO When set to Yes, the system enables the
authorized user to silent monitor only one party of
a conversation at a time.
Default feature code: #1448
3-23
Installation PI Reference Manual
56 AUTO SET YES/NO When set to Yes, the Auto Set Relocate
RELOCT. (Portability) feature enables swapping telephone
profiles.
3-24
PI Reference Manual Installation
3-25
Installation PI Reference Manual
3-26
4 Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
This chapter defines the system size parameters. In order to allocate the memory
resources efficiently, the SIZE topics are divided as follows:
Sizes Definition ............................................................................................4-2
Sizes Tab.....................................................................................................4-24
URC-Card (IPx Office, IPx 500 and CDRS 200E) ...................................4-33
URC-Default Configuration................................................................ 4-35
URC-Current Configuration ............................................................... 4-37
URC-Card Database............................................................................ 4-40
System Engineering Options ......................................................................4-41
Music Sources.............................................................................................4-44
Units............................................................................................................4-47
Sizes Definition and Sizes Tabulation relate to the parameter sizes, updating,
displaying and tabulating the parameter sizes based on the different types of
keysets and system ports available.
Music Sources defines the music source set-up for the system and for
individual keyset users. Up to four different music sources are available.
Units describes the number of time slots used system-wide as well as allows
the user to know which PB card and Power Supplies exist and on which system
shelf.
4-1
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
Sizes Definition is used to set the system size parameters. Sizes must be
programmed before all other parameters.
Size parameters allocate the Coral memory resources efficiently for a particular
installation. Modifying the size table utilizes unused memory space for active
features.
The maximum size allowed per parameter is listed in parenthesis on the terminal
screen. The listings in this manual may differ from actual maximums usually
indicating a recommended maximum.
Note:
Sizes may be defined in excess of their corresponding authorization limit
in order to enable system growth without the need for a First Initialization
procedure (i.e. returning all Sizes to their system defaults).
CURRENT_Config Default/Modified
To return to the DEFAULT configuration, First Initialization must be
Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]
4-2
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
CURRENT MEMORY
SIZE INFORMATION
Displays the memory details for the current database and Coral Software version.
The information is accurate and can be used for relevant calculations, such as
increasing or decreasing the database sizes.
xxxxxx BYTES USED BY DATABASE, AUTO BACKUP AVAILABLE
xxxxxx BYTES USED BY RAM
For systems where Auto backup has not been defined, then the first
xxxxxx BYTES LEFT IN MEMORY
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-3
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
! IMPORTANT!
The sizes listed in this database are established by program default and
can be changed.
The sizes are, however, ultimately limited by the SAU.
Changes may affect other sizes or operational relationships within the
system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-4
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
STATIONS:
Maximum Stations 6000 - Defined automatically by System Type
Shows the maximum station capacity for all FlexSet, IP Keyset, SLT, EKT, DKT,
DST, GKT, and Wireless stations. The maximum number of stations cannot be
changed.
Notes:
• The total number of SLT, SLT_IP, KEYSETS 1, KEYSETS 2, KEYSETS 3,
KEYSETS_IP, SIP_TERMINAL and WIRELESS cannot exceed Maximum
Stations.
• The total number of current SLTs, KEYSETs and TRUNKs cannot
exceed the Max Ports value.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The total number of SLT and SLT_IP ports cannot exceed Max SLTs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SLT 4..16..4000
Defines the current capacity for Magneto and Type 500 or Type 2500 standard
Single Line Telephones (SLTs) connected via the SLT station cards:
• Full size: 8SM, 8/24SA, 8/16/24SLS, or 4/8/16SH card
• IPx 500 and CDRS 200E: 8SMipx, 8/16/24SAipx or 8/16SLSipx card
• IPx Office: 4/8/16/24SA Office, 4/8/20S Office, 4SA+8Fx Office,
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SLT_IP 0..8..1950
4-5
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
KEYSETS 1 0..3400
Shows the current keyset capacity for the following sets:
• FlexSet 120/120D/120D-Z/120L/120S/121S
• DKT21XX, DKT1XXX
• DST
• CPA
• EKT1XX
• VDK121
• iVMFipx, IPC/SFC and uCMC card ports are also allocated by this parameter
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
KEYSETS 2 0..3400
Shows the current keyset capacity for the following sets:
• EKT2XX
• VDK221
Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
KEYSETS 3 0..16..3400
Shows the current keyset capacity for the following sets:
• FlexSet 280/280D/280D-Z/280D-HS/280S/281S (also with PEX or APA)
• FlexSet 80S/80P (GKT)
• DKT23XX
• EKT3XX
• VDK321
• FKT
• APDL
• iCMC (each iCMC card requires 24 KEYSET1 allocations)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-6
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
KEYSETS_IP 0..60..1950
4-7
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
SIP_TERMINAL 0..60..1950
tested third-party equipment and along with their test data. Authorized
partners can view the list by accessing the interoperability.aspx file under
the partners section of the manufacturer's website at
http://www.tadirantele.com.
These units require PUGW or PUGWipx card support, see UGW (Universal Gate
Way) beginning on page 29-7.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-8
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
WIRELESS 0..50..3400
Shows the current capacity for portable handsets, such as:
• CoralAIR handsets
• FlexAir handsets
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TRUNKS:
Max Trunks Defined automatically by Coral System Type
3400: FlexiCom 6000 or IPx 4000
1500: All other systems
Shows the maximum trunk capacity for all PRI, TBR, LGS, LGS IP, NET IP, E&M
and DID trunks. The maximum number of trunks cannot be changed.
Notes:
• The total number of LGS, E&M, DID, PRI, TBR, LGS_IP, NET_IP and SIP_
TRUNK cannot exceed the Max Trunks value.
• The total number of current SLT, KEYSETS and TRUNKS cannot
exceed the Max Ports value.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-9
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1. The maximum number of D-Signalling channels for PRI and BRI (TBR) trunks combined
may not exceed 254.
Every two BRI ports provide one D-channel, every 24 PRI-23 ports provide one D-channel
and every 30 PRI-30 or IPG ports provide two D-channels.
4-10
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
4-11
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
LIBRARIES:
Maximum Libraries 14096, Defined automatically by System type
Shows the maximum number of PRIVATE and PUBLIC libraries. The maximum
number of libraries cannot be changed.
The total number of PRIVATE and PUBLIC Libraries cannot exceed the maximum
value listed here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PRIVATE 0..500..10000
Shows the current capacity for station related private speed call numbers on Coral
Main Database Storage.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PUBLIC 0..500..4096
Shows the current capacity of the system public libraries.
When LARGE_PUB Library (below) is used, it is advisable to reduce PUBLIC
capacity to the minimum required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
LARGE_PUB 0..65000
Shows the current capacity of the system Large Public Libraries.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
LARGE_NPL 0..1000
Shows the available number of memory units for the Large Public Library
Numbering Plan.
The values entered into LARGE_NPL define the quantity of memory units available.
They do not define the number of entries. Each entry may use more than one
memory unit. The relationship between the value entered and the number of entries
Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-12
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
DIRECTORY Yes/No
Set this parameter to Yes to enable the Coral System Directory. This feature enables
the keyset user to have the names of external parties appear on the keyset display
instead of the calling number, when it exists in the directory.
A public directory is automatically created, from which a personal directory can be
derived at each user station.
Tip: Check the system memory sizes before enabling this feature, 61 bytes
are needed per directory entry.
• Shared Directory Memory =
[Public Library+Hunt Group+Boss Group+N_Stations] x 61 bytes.
• Personal Directory Memory =
[ N_Stations x 42 bytes] + [ENTRIES PER USER x 61 bytes x N_Keysets].
• Public Library = PUBLIC (page 4-12) parameter value
• Boss Group = BOSS (page 4-14) parameter value
• Hunt Group = HUNT (page 4-14) parameter value
• N_Stations = the total number stations defined for: SLT + SLT_IP +
KEYSETS 1 + KEYSETS 2 + KEYSETS 3 + KEYSETS_IP + WIRELESS.
• N_Keysets = the total number of stations defined for: KEYSETS 1 +
KEYSETS 2 + KEYSETS 3 + KEYSETS_IP + WIRELESS
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-13
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
GROUPS:
BELL/UNA 0..3..6
Shows the current capacity for Bell/Universal Night Answering (UNA) groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ELA 0..3000
Shows the current capacity for ELA groups.
The number should be the number of users plus the number of departmental
groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MAX_ 0..1024
SIMULTANEOUS_
ELA_CALLS
The total for MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_ELA_CALLS and BOSS cannot
exceed 1024.
Defines the maximum number of simultaneous active ELA calls and active Boss
group calls allowed for this Coral system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BOSS 0..80..1024
PICKUP 0..60..512
Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]
HUNT 0..30..500
Shows the current capacity for UCD/ACD Hunt Groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
GRP_CALL 0..250
Shows the current capacity for Conference Group calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-14
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
TRUNKS 0..31..250
Defines the maximum number of Trunk Groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PEM/DPEM/TEM 0..64..240
Shows the current capacity of the Programmable Expansion Modules:
• DPEM and PEM for DKT keysets
• FlexSet 40B for FlexSet 280/281 series
• TEM for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL modules
The PEM/DPEM/TEM size must be less than, or equal to, the number of keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8DRCF/8DRCM/RMI/ 1..2..6
ASU
Shows the current capacity for U-RMI/U-MR/RMI/MR Office cards, 8DRCF,
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2, RMI or ASU cards (and MSBipx in the Coral IPx 500, or
CDRS 200E).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OFFSET_FILTER 0..4..250
Shows the current number of offset filters defined.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-15
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
N_FILTER_ELEMENTS 0..32..64
PER OFFSET FILTER
Defines an identical number of elements for each offset filter used system wide.
See also Offset Filters on page 8-42.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
COS 16..250
Shows the current number of Classes of Service.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SMDR_BACKUP 0..100..950
Shows the available number of records for SMDR backup buffer when SMDR data
is transmitted through a predetermined RS-232 port (RMI, 8DRCM, 8DRCM-2,
8DRCF, or MSBipx card) and when SMDR_DEST [14] (page 14-6) is set to 1-24.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TBCT_SMDR 0..10,000
4IAA_PORTS 4..32..128
Shows the current number of ports available for the 4IAA card. Each 4IAA card
requires 8 entries. Set this parameter to the total number of 4IAA cards installed
multiplied by 8.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TOLL_BAR_DIGITS_ 1..7..51
(AVG)
Defines the maximum number of digits for a Toll Barrier Element. This parameter
is linked to the next parameter, TOLL_BAR_ELEMENTS_(AVG), by the following
formula: ((Toll Bar Digits x 2) +5) x Toll Bar Elements < 32,000.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-16
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
TOLL_BAR_ 0..78..1680
ELEMENTS_(AVG)
Defines the maximum number of system Toll Barrier Elements. This parameter is
linked to the previous parameter, TOLL_BAR_DIGITS_(AVG), by the following
formula:
((TOLL_BAR_DIGITS_(AVG) x 2) +5) x TOLL_BAR_ELEMENTS_(AVG) < 32,000.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CONF_CKTS 0..10..100
Shows the available number of multi-party Conference ports that can be utilized
per Coral system.
Required # of
Card Type #
Entries per Card
CNF (defined as CONF in Card List on page 2
6-59)
8DRCF 1
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2 1
U-MR Office (Coral IPx Office only) URC2 1-6*
U-RMI Office (Coral IPx Office only) URC2 1-6
*
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DYNAMIC_CONF 0..100
DVMS_PORT 0..4..960
Shows the available number of DVMS ports that can be utilized (one 4VSN card
is equipped with four DVMS ports).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PAGE_Q 0..10..2000
Defines the maximum number of software identification numbers (index) that can
be assigned to the Page Queue numbering plan.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
VFAC_ACCT 0..65000
Shows the available number of Account Codes that can be utilized in VFAC. The
total number is also dependent on #ACCT_DGTS in [SFE].
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-17
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
WAIT_QUE 0..5..128
Shows the maximum number of destinations for calls waiting for routing access.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CAMP_ON 1..30..500;
FlexiCom 5000, 6000: 1..60..500
Defines the maximum number of stations that can simultaneously camp-on to busy
or unanswered network stations or Boss Groups defined as a network stations. This
feature is not relevant for external calls.
The Camp On duration is defined in Feature Timers, see CAMP_ON_DURATION [5]
on page 6-2.
Recommendation:
For large systems, this parameter should be
set to 5% of the number of stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Sizes Definition SIZ [0,0,0,1]
4-18
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
INTERNAL
TRAFFIC:
NO_OF_TRAFFIC_ 0..10..27
EVENTS_AND_
Define the maximum number of traffic events and features combined that are to be
FEATURES used in the Internal Traffic reports. A maximum of 28 traffic events and/or features
can be monitored and reviewed per report.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TOTAL_NO_OF_ 0..1..7
DAYS_TO_STORE_
Enter the maximum number of days for which the traffic data must be stored. Data
TRAFFIC can be stored for a maximum of 7 days/periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IP:
EXTERNAL_GW 0..2..250
Defines the maximum number of different types of Coral Teleport MP-1xx analog
VoIP gateway units allowed in this system.
Coral Teleport gateway units include the FXO and FXS external units used to
connect SLTs and LGS trunks to the Coral IP network.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ZONE 0..8..32
Defines the maximum number of IP Zones allowed for this system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SIP:
MAXIMUM_ 0..10..20
PERSONAL_
Define a maximum length for personal passwords to be used by the P-335, P-450,
PASSWORD_LENGTH
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone,
third-party SIP terminals and SIP trunks. Relevant for the following parameters:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FOREIGN_PROXY 0..4..30
Defines the maximum number of providers that can be defined as a SIP trunk. See
SIP_TRUNK [23] under LCR,3 [ROOT,4,0,3]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-19
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
NETWORKING:
NETWORK Yes/No
Defines whether this Coral system is part of a Private Network.
If Yes - a default for NET_NODES and NET_FEATURES is set.
If No - NET_NODES and NET_FEATURES are set to 0 by the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NET_NODES 0..10..250
ISDN:
NETWORK_ 0..16..250
FACILITIES
Shows the available number of Public Network Service Facilities (NSF). For
example: MCI, SPRINT, AT&T.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NUMBER OF 0..64..10,000
ALTERNATE ID
Shows the number of Alternate Line Identification (ALI) numbers
For the E911 feature, 2 ALI numbers are required for each station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
N_SPID_DN_PER_DSL 0..8
CC0: 2..8
4-20
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
ROUTING:
ROUTING ACCESSES 0..1..4
Shows the current capacity for Routing Accesses and defines the different
numbering plans for programming ISDN.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
COST_ELEMENTS 0..10..50
Shows the available number of Cost Calculation Elements.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ROUTING_ELEMENT_ 0..5..MAX2
NPL_SIZE
Calculate the average size (average amount of digits per Element) of all the
Routing Numbering Plan Elements.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ROUTING_NPL_ 0..100..MAX2
ELEMENTS
Estimate the number of Routing Numbering Plan elements used in the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
2. MAX: (Both parameters) are defined by and limited by the following equation:
ROUTING_ACCESSESx[ROUTING_NPL_ELEMENTS x ((ROUTING_
ELEMENTS_NPL_SIZ x 2) + 5)] <32,000
4-21
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
When Coral IPx 4000 and Coral FlexiCom 6000 systems include
CoraLINK authorization (CoraLINK on page 3-21) and a 4/8XMM
daughterboard, then 2MB of the 4/8XMM memory is allocated for the
CoraLINK application, even when a CLA-ATS card is not installed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-22
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
4-23
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
! Attention:
The sizes in this database are established by Program default and may
be changed.
Changes may affect other sizes or operational relationships within the
system.
Sizes Tabulation relate to the parameter sizes, updating, displaying and tabulating
the parameter sizes based on the different types of keysets and system ports
available.
CURRENT_Config Default/Modified
Shows whether or not a change was made in SIZ. If a change was made, the screens
displays the MODIFIED message. If no change was made, then the screen will
show the DEFAULT message.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-24
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
RESOURCES 0..64..250
Defines the number of ports needed for all the Shared Service cards together in the
system.
Required Number of
Card Type
Ports per Card
16MFR (MFC-R2) 16
4DTR 4
8DRCF 22
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2 22
8DTD 8
8DTMF 8
8DTR 8
CNF card (defined as C3Way in Card List 8
on page 6-59)
iDSP 64
MR Office 0
RMI 0
RMI Office 0
U-MR Office (Coral IPx Office URC2) 64 - 112*
U-RMI Office (Coral IPx Office URC2) 64 - 112*
URC2 (IPx 500M and CDRS 200E)† 64 - 112*
‡
MRC-8 (up to 32 DTR and MFR) 32
MRC-16 (up to 64 DTR and MFR) 64
MRC-32 (up to 64 DTR and MFR) 64
MRC-64 (up to 128 DTR and MFR) 128
* For the URC2 resources, see Meet Me on page 4-38
† MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 or higher
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-25
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
CALLS_Q 0..150..1000
Defines the number of calls that can be simultaneously placed on Hold, Page_Q,
Park or Multi-Appearance.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ACD_STATISTICAL_ Yes/No
SEARCH?
In order to enable the statistical search feature in ACD Hunt groups, this parameter
must be set to Yes. The statistical search procedure requires an idle time counter
for every group member. This parameter, when set to Y, allows you to define ACD
groups with statistical search type (see Hunt Group, Chapter 10).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ISDN_TRANSIT_ 0..50..250
SETUPS
Defines the maximum number of ISDN call setup information to be stored
simultaneously. ISDN call information is used for completing the call setup.
IP Networks:
Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]
Note: This number should be increased when IP Network ports are defined for the
system in the UGW card(s). The increase is traffic dependent and should be at least
2 times the estimated maximum number of calls setup per second.
For Example: For systems where 20 calls can be expected to be setup per second,
increase this parameter by 40.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NETWORK_SERVICES 0..50..500
Defines the maximum number of Network Supplementary Feature procedures that
can be performed simultaneously. Network Call Transfer is one example of a NSF
procedure.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-26
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
INTERNAL_SMDR_IN_ Yes/No
SYSTEM
Set this parameter to Yes to instruct the system to allocate memory to support the
display of internal calls on the SMDR report.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NO_OF_CALL_ 0..100..32000
TRACE_RECORDS
Defines the maximum number of incoming calls that may be recorded and listed
(“traced”) for the entire system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NO_OF_SILENT_ 0..8..128
MONITORS
SAU Requirement
The Silent Monitor features require Software Authorization. Corresponding
default feature dial number:
• #1981 Silent Monitor (2-Way)
• #1448 Split Silent Monitor (1-Way).
This parameter defines the maximum number of simultaneous silent monitors in
the system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SKW_BASE_ 0..128..256
Required # of
Card Type # base stations
per Card
8SKKipx 8
FlexAir 8SKK 8
16SKK 16
2SKW 2
CoralAIR
4SKW 4
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-27
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
IP_MEDIA_ 0..60..3400
CHANNELS Note: Default = 0 when upgrading from non-IP systems
MRC-8 8 8 8 8 32
MRC-16 16 16 16 16 64
MRC-32 32 24 32 32 64
MRC-64 64 64 32 64 128
* MRC module, is a daughter board installed on PUGW card, PUGWipx card and MCB Office
card.
MG-15 15
UGW, UGWipx,
MG-30 30
UGW-E, UGW-Eipx
Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]
MG-60 60
MG-24 24
MG-72 72
Certain Coral features require the intervention of media channels. The MG and
MRC modules provide media channels used to convert PCM calls to IP Packets.
Media channels are also needed when one of the calling parties is not an IP host.
No media channels are needed for pure IP-to-IP (peer-to-peer) connections
(direct-connects).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-28
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
NO_OF_LAR_ 0..40..526;
SERVICE_TIMERS IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000: 0..40..1096
PENDING_SMS_MSG_ 0..20..250
POOL
This parameter is relevant only for FlexAIR systems.
Defines the maximum number of SMS messages that the system can buffer
simultaneously for the Wireless handsets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SOFT_KEYS_MENU Fixed/Selectable
Defualt:
• Coral version 15.85.17 or higher: Selectable
• Coral version 15.85.16 or lower: Fixed
This system-wide parameter controls the Soft Keys display menu options for the
following keysets:
• FlexSet 120S, 280S (installed with Key software versions 3.50 or higher)
• FlexSet 121S, 281S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
This parameter is irrelevant for:
• FlexSet 120S, 280S (installed with Key software versions 3.49 or lower)
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• FlexSet 80 (GKT)
4-29
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
N_CALL_LOGS_ Range: 0....130,000 for IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems
RECORDS Range: 0....32,000 for all other systems
Default: Total number of Keysets, excluding SIP terminals and wireless
handsets, multiplied by 20/3
This parameter is displayed only when SOFT_KEYS_MENU, above, is set to
Selectable and is relevant only for the following keysets:
• FlexSet 120S, 280S (installed with Key software versions 3.50 or higher)
• FlexSet 121S, 281S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
Defines the maximum number of Call Log records that can be saved in this Coral
system. Each call log record can be a maximum of 60 bytes. The number of system
Call Log records is dependant on system hardware (DBX, DBM or XMM
expansion memory cards). The records are allocated only during system
initialization. If the number of call log records exceeds the available memory
resources, a warning is displayed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! Caution:
Changing this value, erases all Call Logs for the above keysets.
This parameter enables the Coral to allocate memory resources for keysets using
the Call Log feature and defines the maximum number of Incoming and Outgoing
Call Logs permitted per keyset. If all the call records for the keyset has been fully
Notes:
utilized, no more call logs are saved.
4-30
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
NO_OF_SIP_ 0..65000
SUBSCRIPTIONS
Defines the number of resources needed for all the SIP endpoints together in the
system.
Required Number of
SIP Endpoint
Subscriptions per Endpoint
Coral SeaBeam softphone 0
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL 1
P-335 0
T322, T328, P-450, P-560, P-670 Number of DSS* buttons
Third-party SIP IP-phones used for BLF feature and
number of buttons used for
Boss/ELA group Line,
as defined in SIP Terminal
as defined in SIP Terminal
definitions N_BLF_BUTTONS
[13] (Coral version 16.01
or higher) parameter on page
29-48
Third-party SIP PC-softphones 0
Third-party FXS SIP gateways 0
SLT/IST station (behind Coral Teleport/FXS 0
SIP gateway)
SIP Trunk 0
Required Number of
Telephony Feature
Subscriptions per System
Call Transfer feature 20% of the total number of
SIP endpoints in the system
Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) feature Number of SIP terminals
defined with MWI
Total:
Default:
20% of all SIP ports (trunks + terminals) + number of SIP terminlas (1 entry
for MWI) + 2*number of Coral SIP terminals (for T207S, T208S, T207S/NP,
T208S/BL standard BLF).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-31
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
! The sizes listed in this database are established by program default and
can be changed.
Changes can affect other sizes or operational relationships within the
system.
Instructs the system to display the database memory status. When the System Size
table is displayed without modification, CHECK MEMORY? displays how much
memory remains in the system database. When changes are made to the System
Size table, CHECK MEMORY? displays the system memory status as if changes
made to the current sizes were updated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Loads the modified Size information and resets the system. When No is entered,
all previous entries are ignored and the system SIZES remain as previously
programmed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Sizes Tab SYSGEN,2 [0,0,0,2]
4-32
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
The following parameters are used to define the resources ports on:
• Coral IPx Office (URC2: Slot #7, Shelf # 1) U-RMI and U-MR Office cards
• IPx 500M: MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 (X= Country Initial) or
higher (URC2: Slot #14, Shelf # 0)
• CDRS 200E (URC2: Slot #14, Shelf # 0)
The URC (Universal Resources Card) is configured with 2DSPs, such that its
current card name, as shown in Card List on page 6-59, is URC2 and includes the
following resources:
• DTMF Receivers (DTR)
• Dial Tone Detectors (DTD)
• Caller ID (CID) FSK iDSP transmitters for SLT stations
• Meet Me (CONF) 14 party Conference Bridge:
Enables a conference of a maximum of 84 participants.
• 3-Way Conference (C3WAY)
Enables 3-way conferences of Digital and IP Channels, FlexSet-IP 280S,
T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexAir/CoralAIR wireless sets.
SAU Requirement, (see page 3-16)
Separate Software Authorization is required to allocate the DTMF, 3WAY, CONF
(Meet-Me), CID – URC and MFR resources.
URC Features
The URC is completely managed by its own PI Card Database - Current and
Meet Me Conference
Conference Modes
The Meet-Me conference can be defined to operate in one of two different modes:
• Summation:
Enables all conference participants to be heard simultaneously during the
conference.
• Strongest Win:
Enables only the loudest speaker to be heard during the conference.
The technician is able to define a maximum number of participants when using the
Summation mode. When this maximum is exceeded, the system automatically
4-33
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
switches the conference to the Strongest Win mode (see CONF MEMBERS and
CONF SWITCH DELAY (page 4-40), in URC,11,2).
Chained Meet Me Conference Groups
Requires URC Software Versions 1.29 or higher.
The URC has 6 circuits that may be allocated as Conference ports. Each of these
ports can enable one conference of 14 participants. Alternatively, these conference
ports can be chained together internally by the URC, without using extra time slots,
so that a conference with a maximum of 84 participants can be created. The “chain”
definition is created via the PDB branch, see LINKED TO CONF DIAL#
[4] (page 23-6).
URC Database Programming
The configuration option is used to determine the number of circuits for individual
resource types on a URC card.
Access is accomplished by entering the physical location of any current card (shelf
and slot), or before installing the card, by defining the default.
Once this route is selected the following option menu is available:
Option Description
4-34
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
DTD 32 1 16 1x16
3-WAY 24 4 8 4x8
TOTAL 66 120
* A maximum of 120 Resource Points is allowed per URC2 card. Therefore, the Full Assembly is
never used. Allocate your resources such that you use a maximum of 120 Resource Points. For
example, increasing the number of 3-way circuits, forces you to decrease one or more of the
other resources.
DTMF 0..24
SAU Requirement
Defines the default maximum number of DTMF Receiver (DTR) resources to be
enabled by the system URC cards. Each DTMF receiver requires one (1) resource
point, see Note! in UPDATE, below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-35
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
Meet Me 0..2..6
C3WAY 0..8..24
CID 0..16..32
DTD 0..16..32
Defines the default maximum number of Dial Tone Detector (DTD) resources to
be enabled by the system URC cards. Each DTD circuit requires one (1) resource
URC-Default Configuration CDB,11,0
UPDATE Yes/No
Updates system with the current changes that were entered when entering Yes in
this parameter.
Note!
The card configuration is limited to a total maximum of 120 resource
points! A configuration error is displayed and the card cannot be
configured (see Table 4-1 for Resource Point computations) if more than
120 resource points are used.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-36
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
For Coral IPx Office systems (U-RMI Office and U-MR Office cards):
The URC is installed in shelf 1, slot 7.
Each URC card can be separately configured according to any of the ranges listed
in Table 4-1 on page 4-35.
4-37
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
DTMF 0..24
Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - DTMF on page 4-35 and is
ultimately limited by its SAU requirement.
SAU Requirement URC DTMF (page 3-16).
Enter the number of URC DTMF receivers to be allocated from this card. Each
DTMF receiver requires one resource point, see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Meet Me 0..2..6
Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - Meet Me on page 4-36 and is
ultimately limited by its SAU requirement.
SAU Requirement URC CONF (page 3-17)
Enter the number of URC Meet Me conference circuits to be allocated from this
card. Each Multi-Party (Meet-Me) conference circuit requires 16 resource points,
see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
C3WAY 0..8..24
Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - C3WAY on page 4-36 and is
ultimately limited by its SAU requirement.
SAU Requirement URC 3WAY (page 3-17)
Enter the number of URC 3Way conference circuits to be allocated from this card.
Each 3-way conference circuit requires 4 resource points, see Note! in SEND TO
CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Enter the number of URC CID transmitter circuits to be allocated from this card.
Each CID transmitter circuit requires one resource point, see Note! in SEND TO
CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DTD 0..16..32
Default is defined in URC-Default Configuration - DTD on page 4-36
Enter the number of URC DTD circuits to be allocated from this card. Each DTD
circuit requires one resource point, see Note! in SEND TO CARD below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-38
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
4-39
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Relevant only for Strongest Win conference mode (see CONF MEMBERS).
Define the time delay required before switching from summation to strongest win
and vice versa (i.e., before switching from the previous loudest party to the new
loudest party). This time delay allows the URC card to avoid switching speakers
because of sudden spikes heard by the conference circuit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-40
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
Access to the System Engineering Options is allowed only for qualified personnel
and is controlled by password Level 2.
Once this route is selected the following System Engineering Optionsoption menu
is available:
0 Partial Initialization
Process
• BOSS_AND_UCD_NEW_TS_ALGORITHM
(Y/N)
For IPx Office systems, if this parameter is
set to Y, then CYCLIC_TIME_SLOT_ALLOCATION on
page 4-42 must be set as N=Terminal.
See CAUTION: below.
• LINK_TRAPS_ON (Y/N)
• ** WARNING ** update will cause system init
! CAUTION:
Relevant for Coral IPx Office systems !!!
Never define the following two parameters as Yes.
If one is defined as Yes the other must be defined No.
Always refrain from the following programming combination:
• BOSS_AND_UCD_NEW_TS_ALGORITHM (Y/N) = Y
• CYCLIC_TIME_SLOT_ALLOCATION =Y (Cyclic)
Using this combination may cause unexpected audio problems and
therefore should be avoided.
4-41
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
ACD_NEW_ Yes/No
ALGORITHM
For manufacturer’s use, only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
LAR_BLOCK_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE_CONTROL
For manufacturer’s use, only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MLPP_BLOCK_ Yes/No
FEATURE
For manufacturer’s use, only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ALLOW_TRUNK_ Yes/No
GROUP_IN_
When defined as Yes, this parameter allows the EXTENDED INTERNAL DIAL_
EXTENDED_
SERVICE [8] parameter (on page 15-13) to be applied for a trunk group. When
System Engineering Options SYSGEN,3,2 [0,0,0,3,2]
INTERNAL_DIAL_ EXTENDED INTERNAL DIAL_SERVICE [8] is also defined as Yes, calls can be
SERVICE re-routed externally AND via trunk groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PREFIX#_FOR_ NONE, R(Remove), or any number that meets the following conditions:
LEADING_ZERO • First digit 0
• Defined value + dialed number 8 digits
• Defined value + dialed number has not already been defined in the
Numbering Plan on page 5-1
Defines the prefix number to be automatically added to the dialed numbers by the
Coral if the first digit is a 0 (leading zero). Leading zero dial numbers are not
displayed when entered in the FROM_DIAL# field. They are automatically
displayed in the TO_DIAL# field.
For example, if this parameter is defined as 46, a phone number defined within the
numbering plan as 005805 becomes 46005805. Leading zero dial numbers will not
be shown in the "From" or "To" fields. They must be entered manually.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-42
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
REBUILD_SYSTEM_ Yes/No
DIRECTORY_INDEX?
For manufacturer’s use, only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-43
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
4-44
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
# OF MUSIC 1..4
SOURCES (1-4) IPx 500 and CDRS 200E: 1.. 2
Determines the total number of music sources, external and internal, that can be
used for the multiple music source feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FROM 0..3;
TO 0..3;
MUSIC-SOURCE Coral IPx 500: 0(Music-1, pin 19/44), 1(Music-2, pin 18/43)
CDRS 200E: 0(Music-1, pin 19/44), 1(Music-2, pin 18/43)
RMI and ASU: 0(M/P1), 1(M/P2)
8DRCF, 8DRCM, and 8DRCM-2: 0(M1), 1(M2)
Coral IPx Office U-RMI/U-MR/RMI/MR: 0(M1), 1(M2/P)
Enter the required range of music sources index numbers. FROM indicates the
lowest source index number; TO indicates the highest source index number.
The range is limited by the # OF MUSIC SOURCES (1-4) (page 4-45) parameter above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-45
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Loads the modified Music information, initializes the database, and resets the
system. When No is entered, any previous updates are ignored and the system
remains at its pre-programmed sources.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Music Sources SYSGEN,4 [0,0,0,4]
4-46
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
Units describes the number of time slots used system-wide as well as which PB
card and Power Supplies are installed in the system and also describes their
location in the system via the shelf number.
This branch indicates whether the unit is local or remote.
The following pages describe the Units branch for the following systems:
Coral IPx Office: Systems Only on page 4-48.
Coral IPx 500, 800, CDRS 200E and FlexiCom 400: HDC Systems Only on page 4-49.
Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000: 4GC Systems Only on page 4-50.
Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000: 32GC Systems Only on page 4-52.
4-47
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TIME-SLOTS [2]
The iGC provides 512 time slots for the Coral IPx Office systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-48
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
Coral IPx 500, 800, CDRS 200E and FlexiCom 400: HDC Systems Only
From/To 0..7
UNIT# 0..7;
(0..0: Coral FlexiCom 400);
(0..1: Coral IPx 500, 800, CDRS 200E)
Enter the required range of UNIT numbers. FROM the lowest UNIT number TO
the highest.
For Coral FlexiCom 400 systems, enter 0 only. The system can have a maximum
of one shelf, Shelf # 0, and therefore only one Unit (a Unit is comprised of two
shelves).
For Coral IPx 500, 800 and CDRS 200E systems, enter 0 and/or 1 only.
Unit 0, includes Shelves # 0 and 1.
Unit 1 can include only one shelf (Shelf # 2).
Shelf 3: Not Used
Unit 1
Shelf 2: Exp.2
Coral IPx 500 or 800
Shelf 1: Exp.1
Unit 0
Shelf 0: Main
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SHELVES [0] (0,1): FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller) systems (Read-Only)
(0,1),(2,3): IPx 500, 800 and CDRS 200Esystems
Displays the system shelves that define this Unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-49
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
The system can have a maximum of 16 shelves or 8 UNITs. When a UNIT is not
installed, only the SHELVES [0] and ACTIVE_UNIT [1] parameters (see below) are
displayed for that UNIT.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! Do not set this parameter to No when there are active cards located on
the Unit’s shelves!
4-50
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
When ACTIVE_UNIT [1] is set to No the following parameters are not displayed.
NUMBER OF 128/256/512 (Check the LED indicator on the PB24 Card front Panel)
TIME-SLOTS [2]
Enter the number of time slots to be used per PB24 card: 128, 256 or 512. The
number of time slots is defined in the PBD24M card hardware. One of the three
LEDs on the PB24 card front panel, marked with 128, 256 and 512, indicates (when
plugged in) how many time slots should be defined.
The Coral FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 can be configured for the maximum
number of ports in use simultaneously, according to the telephony traffic volume.
There are three options available:
• 128 time slots per one or two peripheral shelves
• 256 time slots per one or two peripheral shelves
• 512 time slots per one or two peripheral shelves
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
If the time slots was changed in this branch, the following message is displayed
before an UPDATE can be performed:
4-51
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
0 (0,1)
1 (2,3)
2 (4,5)
3 (6,7)
4 (8,9)
5 (10,11)
6 (12,13)
7 (14,15)
The system can have a maximum of 16 shelves or 8 UNITs. When a UNIT is not
installed, only the SHELVES [0] and ACTIVE_UNIT [1] parameters (see below) are
displayed for that UNIT.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
If the UNIT is installed (i.e. a PB-ATS or FLMS card is installed on the even shelf),
then the system sets this parameter to Yes, defining this Peripheral Shelf Unit as an
Active Unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-52
PI Reference Manual Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition
Before the technician can remove a PB-ATS card, a working PB-ATS card
must be defined in this parameter.
If the selected PB-ATS does not exist or is faulty, the following error message
appears: SELECTED PB IS NOT ACCESSIBLE. TRY AGAIN!
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-53
Sizes/URC/Music/Units Definition PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
4-54
5 Numbering Plan
The Numbering Plan (NPL) is used to determine the Coral system-wide numbering
scheme. Two types of numbering Plans are given, a General Numbering Plan and
a Special Numbering Plan. The General Numbering Plan establishes the system
pattern dialing plan. It is the System Dialing Plan that determines all hardware and
many software identifiers used for programming purposes. The Special NPL
defines and identifies special feature codes. Details for the Numbering Plans are
found on the following pages.
General Numbering Plan ..............................................................................5-3
General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) ...........................................5-7
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) ...........................................5-17
Special Feature Codes ................................................................................5-50
FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes .................................................5-52
Dialing digits via the keypad or programmed buttons on the keyset, is the user’s
method of instructing the Coral system to call another user, access a Trunk and dial
out, access internal facilities or activate features.
The specific structure of the digit patterns used in the Coral for various system
instructions is defined in the Numbering Plan.
The Numbering Plan includes two parts, the main plan: GENERAL NPL and the
secondary numbering plan: SPECIAL NPL.
The main Numbering Plan defines the access codes of each of the physical ports in
the system. Additionally, the Numbering Plan defines the access codes for Groups,
Speed Calling Libraries and features.
A dial number is assigned to each Coral feature. The access codes are changed by
the UPDATE function. There are also feature access codes that need to be
REMOVED or ADDED. In such cases, the system programmer must have a
reference tool to relate a dial number to a specific feature. That reference tool is an
internal software number which is also known as the index number which relate
features to dial numbers, e.g. index number 51 relates Call Forward All to a dial
number (141 is the Call Forward All dial number default).
For example, assume Call Forward All is not defined in the system and it is
requested. Such a change is accomplished in the PATTERN NUMBERING PLAN.
The system programmer selects ADD, and then DIAL NUMBER 141,chooses
FEATURE and then enters the requested INDEX NUMBER, 51 which actually
relates 141 to Call Forward All.
5-1
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
The Special Feature Codes (page 5-50) establish the dial codes used for certain
system features typically dialed following a hookswitch flash (for example:
Camp-On, Snooze, or Break-In).
The FlexiCall/IRSS (Freedom) Feature Codes (page 5-52) establish the dial codes
used for the FlexiCall and IRSS Freedom features allowing non-Coral stations to
access Coral services and systems by creating a virtual Coral station via the
established connection between the Coral and non-Coral stations.
5-2
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
The General Numbering Plan is used to assign system dial numbers to the system
hardware (shelf, slot, circuit) and software (index numbers) in the flexible
numbering scheme. The general numbering plan also assigns Network numbers to
the Network nodes.
INDEX NUMBER: An index number is a software identification number (SID) which identifies a
feature, speed dial library, node number or group.
Each system feature and key function is identified by a specific index number
regardless of the dial number assigned to it by the Numbering Plan. The first
feature is identified by index 0.
Similarly, each group of any group type, whether Hunt, Pick-up, or Trunk, etc., and
each number of the public speed dial library is identified with a specific index
number regardless of the dial number assigned to it. Thus, the first trunk group is
index 0, the first hunt group is index 0, the first public library number is index 0,etc.
In general, the number of groups or libraries established in the System Sizes
determines the quantity of index numbers allocated. The first 100 public speed dial
NODE NUMBER: Each private exchange in a network represents a network node and is designated
by a corresponding network node number. The network node number is limited to
8 digits and is not part of the general numbering plan.
The network has its own network numbering plan used for network
communications.
INDEX/CKT: This is a virtual address for IP SLT and IP LGS stations serviced by IP gateways.
The index number represents the IP gateway number as known to the Coral. The
Circuit number (CKT) represents the station on the gateway.
5-3
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
SYSTEM DIAL The system dial number is used to access the related equipment or feature. The dial
NUMBER: number range (START to END numbers) may be greater or smaller, depending on
the information entered in the NUM_PLAN (page 4-15) in the Sizes Definition from
branch (SIZ). START and END numbers must have the same number of digits
(e.g., 0-9, 00-99, 000-999...).
The following arrow symbol Ô appears when the range END number depends on
the maximum number listed in the database as defined in Sizes Definition (page 4-2)
branch (SIZ). Hence, a number listed after Ô is not necessarily the exact END
number for the range and only a suggestion. No number listed after Ô indicates that
the END number is defined in the SIZES database.
OPTION Description
5-4
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
0- FROM OLD DIAL#: Enter the first existing dial number of the range that requires
UPDATE updating.
TO OLD DIAL#: Enter the last existing dial number that requires updating. If only
a single number is required, enter the same number as FROM
OLD DIAL #.
FROM NEW DIAL#: Enter the first new dial number, in the range that was defined
under the old dial number. (Once the first number is entered the
rest of the defined range is automatically calculated).
1- FROM DIAL#: Displays the first dial number defined in the display range.
DISPLAY
TO DIAL Displays the last dial number defined in the display range.
NUMBER#:
TYPE: Displays the port, feature or type of group for which dial
numbers are assigned.
TO NEW DIAL#: Enter the last new dial number to be added. If only a single
number is required, enter the same number as FROM NEW
DIAL #.
FROM OLD DIAL#: Appears when Yes is selected. Enter the old dial number.
CHOOSE TYPE: Enter the number of the port, feature or group to which dial
numbers are assigned.
When a port type is selected, the following message appears:
-ENTER (SHELF,SLOT,CKT)
Enter the physical location of the first new dial number.
When any other type is selected the following message appears:
- ENTER INDEX #
Enter the index of the first new dial number.
5-5
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
3- FROM OLD DIAL#: Enter first existing dial number of the range that requires
REMOVE removal.
TO OLD DIAL#: Enter last existing dial number that requires removal. If only a
single number is required, enter the same number as FROM
OLD DIAL #. After the number is typed and [CR] pressed, if the
number was successfully removed the following message
appears:
NUMBERS REMOVED
The requested dial numbers are immediately removed from the
numbering plan.
CHOOSE TYPE: Enter the type (item) number of the port, feature or group to
which dial numbers are assigned. Once this type number is
selected an informative table showing the dial numbers, type
and location of the requested item will appear.
Press [CR] to display a list of all items, as in the Display option.
5-6
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
Use the following table to locate features by name. To view a list of features by
feature number, see Table 5-3 on page 5-22
BREAK-IN special 3
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-7
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-8
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-9
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
FOLLOW ME 9 99 #189
General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0
HOLD 9 81 #171, #4
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-10
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-11
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
MESSAGE 9 85 #175, #5
MESSAGE special 5
NODE ID# for Current Node 9 219 None: see page 28-14
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-12
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
PAGE_Q 33 0Ô 7060Ô
PREFERENCE 9 11 #131
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-13
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
REMINDER 9 82 #172
ROUTING ACCESS 37 0Ô 80
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-14
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
SECURITY 9 87 #17700
T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL Voice Page Numbers 0Ô see page 5-47
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
5-15
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as: #( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
General Numbering Plan (Alphabetical Order) NPL,0
5-16
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
NPL Type The following list includes all the different NPL types that the Coral supports. An
NPL type must be defined for each dial number in the system. There are many
different NPL types which include among others: dial numbers, trunk numbers,
features, group numbers, dial services, and more. A complete list is given below.
Numbers shown in square brackets ([ ]) are field numbers used while in the Add (2)
or Show (5) submenu of the General Numbering Plan. These bracketed numbers
allow quick access to the various numbering plan types (the parameter name) by
immediately skipping to the requested field.
Note on NPL Type Range Definitions:
When the default range/s in the following parameters define a range of dial
numbers, the dial number is used to access the related equipment or feature. The
dial number range (START to END numbers) may be greater or smaller, depending
on the information entered in Sizes Definition (page 4-2) branch (SIZ) and the
number of ports authorized by the SAU (see Chapter 3). START and END dial
numbers must have the same number of digits (e.g., 0-9, 00-99, up to eight digits
00000000-99999999).
The following arrow symbol Ô appears when the range END number depends on
the maximum number listed in the database as defined in Sizes Definition (page 4-2)
branch (SIZ). Hence, a number listed after Ô is not necessarily the exact END
number for the range and only a suggestion. No number listed after Ô indicates that
the END number is defined in the SIZES database.
Note:
! Warning:
Modifying any NPL port number (not feature number) causes:
1. An initialization of the CLA or CLA-ATS card.
2. CoraLINK applications to be interrupted (calls are unaffected).
Before the update is performed, the following message prompts:
INIT CLA CARD WITH UPDATED NPL (Y/[N])?
Enter Y to complete the update and wait for the following message to be
shown:
CLA initialization completed successfully.
5-17
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
SLT [1]
Coral System Default Dial #s
Coral IPx Office 2000..2015
(Eu2: 3000..3015)
(Eu9: 4000-4015)
FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 2000..2319
IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 (Eu2: 3000..3319)
CDRS 200E (Eu9: 4000-4015)
Designates a range of Single Line Telephone station dial numbers for Magneto and
type 500 or 2500 SLT equipment, beginning at an SLT hardware ID number in the
system. Numbers are given in a range commencing with a START number and
concluding with an END number. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
KEYSET [2]
Coral System Default Dial #s
Coral IPx Office 4000 Ô 4015
(Eu2:1000 Ô 1015)
(Eu9: 2000 Ô 2015)
FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 4000 Ô 4159
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
5-18
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
KEYSET_V_PAGE [3]
Coral System Default Dial #s
Coral IPx Office 7400 Ô 7415 (Eu9:7400 Ô 7415)
FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 7400 Ô 7559 (Eu9:7400 Ô 7599)
IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000
CDRS 200E
Designates a range of keyset voice page dial numbers (used to voice page a station),
beginning at a FlexSet, CPA, DKT, DST, EKT or GKT hardware ID number in the
system.
FlexSet-IP 280S sets have their own Voice Page numbers defined by the
IP_KEY_VPG [44] (page 5-47) NPL type.
Numbers are given in a range commencing with a start number and concluding
with an END number. (Enter Physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TRUNK GRP [4] Any valid Trunk Group number (max: 8 digits);
5-19
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
5-20
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
FEATURE [9] Designates a range of feature dial numbers beginning at a Feature software ID
number (enter index number). Dial the feature dial number to access or activate the
specific feature. The dial number can also be used to identify the feature for Keyset
button programming purposes.
Changing the dial number of a feature that can only be accessed or activated by a
Keyset/FlexSet button serves no useful purpose.
The following table presents the PI features currently available. Although the
default dial number can be changed, the index number remains as the feature
identification (this index number cannot be changed).
The table below lists the default feature dial and index numbers by dial numbers.
To view a list of the features by name in alphabetical order see Table 5-2.
5-21
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
Not 219 Node ID# for N/A Defines a single and unique Node ID dial number
Available current node for the current Coral Network Node. This dial
number is used for the Path Replacement feature
and cannot be used by a station user.
Once this Node ID# is defined, it must be added to
the NPL of each of the other Network nodes as a
NETWORK [39] (page 5-45) number.
Not 220 Auto Set SLT Allows swapping station profiles between similar
Availablec Relocate sets, either temporarily or permanently.
See Auto Set Relocate (Portability) List per Device Type
on page 18-11.
#120 0 Speaker Keyset This function has a dual purpose and is dependent
Prog. Key upon system programming:
- Activates/Deactivates the speakerphone.
- Acts as a connect/release (on/off) key.
#121 1 Loop Keyset Defines a two-way loop key used to originate calls
Prog. Key or answer calls directed to the station number.
Prog. Key
call.
#125 5 Loop Originating Keyset Defines a one-way loop key to be used for
Only Prog. Key originating calls only.
#126 6 Boss/Secretary Keyset Defines a line key that is reserved for Boss Group
Line Prog. Key use.
#127 7 OCC or Tone Keyset Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) for Other Common
Prog. Key Carrier (OCC).
Enables a user to send additional digits (DTMF
tones) using the dial pad over non-DTMF trunks
and stations during any call (to trunk, to keyset,
3-Way Conference, Meet-Me Conference, etc.).
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-22
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#128 8 Name to Dial Keyset Converts the displayed name to a dial number.
Number DSP
Display
Prog. Key
#129 9 Call Elapsed Keyset Shows the time elapsed since the origination or
Time Display DSP answer of a trunk call.
#1300 10 Stop Dial Keyset Forces the termination of a dial out situation,
Prog. Key thereby enabling an outgoing call to transfer to
another station and avoid the inter-digit delay.
#c N/A Stop Dial SLT
(during dialing)
#1303 32 Last Party Keyset Enables any one of the multi-party conference
Release Prog. Key members to release the last party that was added to
(Multi-Party the conference (excluding himself).
Conference
Only)
#1304 33 Group Call Keyset Allows the Group Call Operator, while still a
Operator-Add member of the group call, to add members to the
Member ongoing group call.
#1305 34 Group Call Keyset Allows the Group Call Operator, while still a
Operator- member of the group call, to release members from
Release the ongoing group call.
Member
#133 13 Voice Page Keyset Enables control of the incoming voice page auto
Auto Answer answer feature. Allows the user to answer a voice
page call manually or handsfree.
#134 14 Voice Page Keyset Enables the incoming voice page feature to be
On/Off switched on or off (Do Not Disturb for voice page).
#135 15 Music On/Off Keyset Enables background music to be switched on or off.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-23
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#137 17 Idle Display Keyset Enables switching the clock/date and station
On/Off DSP number display on or off, while the station is idle.
#138 18 Auto Answer Keyset Enables a keyset to control the auto answer feature
(auto answer on/off).
#1324 24 Voicemail Keyset Enables the keyset user to program a button for
(Used only Sequence contacting Voicemail on an SLT. The sequence
in Version includes the SLT (Voicemail) dial number + #1324 +
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
#1325 25 Calls Waiting Keyset Enables a keyset user with display to view the
Display DSP number of calls waiting to be answered.
Prog. Key
#1328 28 Multilingual Keyset Enables the user to set the keyset display
Display DSP language.
#1329 29 Multiple Music Keyset Enables the user to select the background music
Source from the multiple music sources.
Selection
* see notes above on page 5-21
J
Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-24
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#1301 30 LED On/Off Keyset Enables the user to program a key to operate a
Prog. Key series of features while having the LED controlled
by the key pressing order.
#1302 31 Headset Only Keyset Enables the headset and disables the keyset
microphone and loudspeaker.
Note: Relevant for IP Keysets only when Headset
is connected.
#140 50 Call Forward SLT Enables the user to forward calls to a defined
Busy destination if the user station is busy.
#141, #8 51 Call Forward SLT Enables the user to forward all calls to a another
All destination.
#142 52 Call Forward SLT Enables the user to forward calls to a another
No-Answer destination if a call to the user station remains
unanswered.
#143, (c) 53 Last Number SLT Enables the user to automatically redial the last
Redial external or internal number dialed. (The system can
redial the last internal number dialed only when
INTERNAL_LAST_NUMBER (Station Options,
[SFE,2]) is set to Yes.
#145 55 Do Not Disturb SLT Enables a user to block calls to the station.
#147, #2 57 Call Forward SLT Enables the user to forward calls to a designated
Busy/No Ans station if the user is busy or a call remains
unanswered.
#148 58 Phone Lock SLT Enables the user to lock the station dial (the entire
keypad is locked).
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-25
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#149 59 COS Switchover SLT Enables the user to switch his Class of Service
between primary and secondary.
#150 60 Flash on trunk SLT Enables the user to send a hookflash signal
(Calibrated (Calibrated Opening) over a trunk.
Opening) Not available for P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328,
SeaBeam softphone, and third-party SIP terminal.
#151 61 Originate Only ATT Enables an attendant to permit any system station
Station the ability to make, but not receive calls.
#152 62 Terminate Only ATT Enables an attendant to permit any system station
Station the ability to receive, but not make calls.
#153 63 Block Station ATT Enables an attendant to block any station from
making or receiving any calls.
#155 65 Trunk Busy Out ATT Enables an attendant to “busy out” any system
trunk, effectively blocking all incoming or outgoing
calls on a specific trunk.
#157 67 Trunk CO ATT Enables an attendant to display the trunks that are
Blocked Display blocked by the central office.
#159 69 Reserve Trunk ATT Enables an attendant to reserve any trunk or trunk
group to any designated station or station group.
5-26
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#168 78 Call Forward All ATT/Boss Enables an attendant or boss group member to
Destination Group forward all calls of a station or group
(ACD/UCD/Boss) to another destination.
#171c, #4c 81 Call Hold SLT Enables a station user to place a call on hold.
Not available for P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam
softphone, and third-party SIP terminals.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-27
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#172 82 Reminder SLT Enables a station user to ring the station at specific
times.
#173 83 Wakeup SLT Enables a station user to ring the station at specific
times.
#1740 203 Malicious Call SLT Enables the station user to activate a Call Trace
Trace record.
#1741 204 Malicious Call SLT Enables the station user to print the Call Trace
Print record.
#1742 205 Malicious Call ATT Enables the Attendant to activate Call Trace records
Trace for one or more stations.
#1743 206 Malicious Call ATT Enables the Attendant to print Call Trace records for
Print one or more stations.
#1744c 207 Whisper Page - SLT Enables a user to Whisper Page another party
Announcing engaged in an ongoing conversation.
Not available for P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328,
SeaBeam softphone, and third-party SIP terminals.
#1745 c 208 Whisper Page - SLT Enables a user to deny any Whisper Pages to
Do Not Disturb his/her station.
#1746 209 ACD Group, ATT Enables the Attendant to define the maximum
Max Calls number of waiting calls for an ACD group.
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
#17701 221 CF Busy SLT Enables the user to forward external calls only to
- External another destination if the station is busy.
#17702 222 CF All SLT Enables the user to forward all his/her incoming
- External external calls to a another destination.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J
Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-28
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#17703 223 CF No Answer SLT Enables the user to forward his/her incoming
- External external calls to another destination when the user’s
station is not being answered.
#17704 224 CF Timed SLT Enables the user to forward all his/her incoming
- External external calls to another destination during system
defined time periods.
#17705 225 CF Busy/NoAns SLT Enables the user to forward all his/her incoming
- External external calls to another destination when the
station is not answering or is busy.
#17708 228 CF No Answer ATT/Boss Enables the attendant or boss group member to
- External Group forward external calls of a non-answering station or
boss group to another destination.
#17709 229 CF Timed ATT/Boss Enables the attendant or boss group member to
- External Group forward external calls of a station or group
(ACD/UCD/Boss) to another destination at
pre-determined system time intervals.
#17710 230 FlexiCall All SLT Enables a station user to define an additional Coral
or non-Coral system telephone as a remote
#17711 231 FlexiCall SLT Enables a station user to define an additional Coral
Internal or non-Coral system telephone as a remote
destination. This feature causes all the internal calls
arriving at the station to arrive also at the remote
phone destination. Answering the call at one
destination stops the other destination from ringing.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-29
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#17712 232 FlexiCall SLT Enables a station user to define an additional Coral
External or non-Coral system telephone as a remote
destination. This feature causes the all the external
calls arriving at the station to arrive also at the
remote phone destination.
Answering the call at one destination stops the
other destination from ringing.
#17713 233 Follow-Me SLT Enables a user to collect his/her external calls at
-External another system station.
#17714 234 Individual SLT The IRSS feature, also known as Freedom, allows a
Remote System user to define an off-site phone with the capability
Services (IRSS) of dialing into the Coral and becoming a virtual
Freedom Coral station for the duration of the call.
#17715c 237 Multi-Level SLT The Multi Level Precedence and Preemption
Precedence and (MLPP) service allows ranked Coral users (graded
Preemption from 1 to 4) to prioritize calls causing calls with a
(MLPP) lower priority to be dropped when resources are low
or when the call is of higher precedence than
routine calls on a per call basis.
Not available for P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328,
SeaBeam softphone, and third-party SIP terminals.
#17716 238 Group Call- SLT Defines a Group Call Operator that can continue to
Define Operator be an active member of the group call when adding
or releasing members.
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
#17717 239 Call Forward SLT Assigns a Call Forward Destination for stations in
Undefined an Undefined call state (cannot be defined by ATT):
• FlexIP SoftPhone or IP stations/trunks which have
lost their Primary Call Agent because of Network or
UGW card problems.
• FlexIP SoftPhone users not currently connected to
a Network
• Unplugged FlexSets/Keysets
• SLTs connected to extracted Line Cards or
Malfunctioning Cards
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-30
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#17718 240 ELA Line Key - Keyset Enables the ELA group member to program ELA
Programming Line Keys at his station.
#178 88 Auto Redial Keyset Enables a station user to activate the system
(ACNR) automatic redial feature.
• Version 16 or higher (applicable on PRI and SIP
trunks, while other trunk type requires an an 8DTD,
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCF or
U-RMI/U-MR Office card with dial tone detectors
installed in the system to activate this feature).
• Version 15 (all trunks type require an 8DTD,
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCF or
U-RMI/U-MR Office card with dial tone detectors
installed in the system to activate this feature).
• Version 14 or lower (all trunks type require an
8DTD, 8DRCM, 8DRCF or U-RMI/U-MR Office
card with dial tone detectors installed in the system
to activate this feature).
#181, 76 91 Dial Call Pickup: SLT Enables a station user to answer a ringing station
Group by dialing a group code.
#183, #7, 93 Call Park SLT Enables a station user to park a call and pick it up
79 at any system station.
P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL,
T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone, and
third-party SIP terminals cannot “Park” a call.
However, they may pick up the parked call.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-31
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#188 98 Time and Date ATT Enables an attendant to set the system time and
Setting date.
#189 99 Follow Me SLT Allows a station user to reroute calls intended for a
designated station to the station invoking this
feature.
#190 100 Trunk Outgoing ATT Enables an attendant to limit a trunk's use to
Only outgoing calls only.
#191, #3 101 Voice Page SLT Enables a station user to voice page any other
system keyset station.
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
#192, 78 102 Night Answer SLT Enables a group member to answer a call directed
Bell/UNA Pickup to the UNA bell.
Group
#193 103 Private Library: SLT Enables a station user to add, delete, or change
Programming information in the Private (station speed call)
Library.
#194 104 Public Library: ATT Enables an attendant to add, delete, or change
Programming information in the Public (system-wide speed call)
Library.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-32
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#195c 105 Series SLT When transferring a call, use the Series function to
have the caller return to you after the transferred
call is completed.
Not available for P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328,
SeaBeam softphone, and third-party SIP terminals.
#196c, #9c 106 Saved / Repeat SLT Enables saving and/or redialing the last number
Number dialed.
Not available for P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328,
SeaBeam softphone, and third-party SIP terminals.
#1980 108 Wakeup ATT Enables an attendant to set a wakeup time for any
designated system station.
#1990 109 Account Code SLT Enables the user to dial an account code per client,
before or during the call, in order to print out call
statistics. The code designated calls are assigned to
a particular client account, instead of to a telephone
number.
7026-7041 126 - Room Status / SLT Enables a user access to the Room Status/Canned
141 Canned Messages features.
Messages NOTE: see Table 16-1 Room Status / Canned Message
- Names and Access Codes on page 16-4.
5-33
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#1993 144 Day/Night ATT Enables an attendant to switch the system between
Transfer manual and automatic (on time) day/night transfer.
(auto/manual)
#1994 145 Directory Keyset Enables the user to search the Directory as well as
DSP to use its contents to place calls.
Not 37 Directory: Keyset Enables the keyset user to toggle between entering
Available Alphanumeric DSP digits or characters via the Keyset dial pad for use
(only from Mode with the Directory.
Directory) This feature requires a programmed button.
Not 45 Directory: Keyset Enables keyset users to toggle between upper and
Available Lower/UpperCase lower case letters being entered via the keyset dial
CAPS LOCK DSP
(only from pad for use with the Directory.
Directory) This feature requires a programmed button.
#1996 147 KB0 Setup ATT Enables a technician to reconfigure the KB0
Keyset program interface data terminal port.
DSP
Prog. Key
#1997 148 Alarm ATT Enables an attendant access to the system alarm
Keyset message list.
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
DSP
Prog. Key
#1999 155 Don't Disturb ATT Enables an attendant to activate Do Not Disturb on
any designated station.
#1970 157 Check In/Out ATT Enables an attendant to set room station to
check-out or check-in state.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-34
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
N/A 161c Serial Library SLT Enables the addition of a fifth digit to a public library
Prefix numbering plan.
#1972 162 Call Charge ATT Enables an attendant to send the Call Charge Print.
Print
#1973 163 Load ID SLT Enables an ACD member to enter his ID when
(ACD Hunt entering the system.
Group)
#1974 164 Log In/Out SLT Enables an ACD group member to Log In/Out of the
(ACD Hunt system.
Group)
#1975 165 Release from all SLT Reinstates an ACD/UCD group member that was
ACD/UCD Hunt automatically released (if AUTO_RELEASED_ALL
Groups [19] (page 9-9)-SLT or AUTO_RELEASED_ALL
[19] (page 9-36)-KEY is set to Yes) while the member
was inactive for one call or more.
#1977 167 Wrap Up Code SLT Enables ACD group member to send a Wrap-Up
#1978 168 Call Charge ATT Enables an attendant to reset and print the
Reset with accumulated call charge table.
Printout
#1979 169 LAR Block ATT Enables an attendant to block/unblock trunks and/or
Dial Services and thereby reroute calls.
5-35
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#1981 171 Silent Monitor SLT Enables authorized station users to silently monitor
(2-Way) other ports (both conversing ports are monitored
#1983 173 Conference SLT Enables the station user to release a conference
Release/Inspect participant.
#1984 174 Call Forward ATT/Boss Enables an attendant or boss group member to
Timed Group forward all calls of a station or group
(ACD/UCD/Boss Group) to another destination at
pre-determined system time intervals.
#1985 175 Call Forward SLT Enables a user to forward calls to a designated
Timed station according to system-wide defined periods.
16.01.16
#1987 177 Party Keyset Enables manufacturer’s programmers to display
Information on relevant information about parties connected to a
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
DSP
Ports specific port.
CC1: 3999 186 DID Test DID Used by the CO in order to check the DID line. A
(Eu1,Eu2: Number successful test results in a 3-second DIAL_TONE.
#286) Used only in CC1, Eu1 and Eu2 systems when either
8DID, 8BID or 8GID cards are installed.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J
Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-36
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#1441 190 Conference Keyset Locks out additional members from joining an
Lock ongoing regular Meet-Me conference.
This feature requires a programmed button.
#1442 191 Primary Login SLT Enables an ACD group member to login to a
(ACD Hunt primary group in order to receive all queuing calls
Group) on that group before receiving calls from other
groups.
#1443 192 HELP Keyset Enables a keyset station user to call another keyset
Prog. Key station equipped with a display for help, without
disrupting the call in progress.
This programmed button is used also for “Request
to Speak” in a Group Call Conference.
#1444c 193 Calling ID SLT While making outgoing ISDN calls, Calling ID
Control Control allows/restricts presentation of the calling
party's phone number, possibly with additional
address information to the called party.
Not available for P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328,
SeaBeam softphone, and third-party SIP terminals.
#1445 194 Divert Call Keyset Enables a keyset station user to divert an incoming
Prog. Key call to another destination without answering the
call.
#1447 196 Group Call- SLT Enables authorized station users to terminate (force
Release release) a Group Call (all the chained Group Calls
or just one of the Group calls in the chain).
To use this feature, NEXT GROUP (page 10-36) must be
defined for the Group calls involved.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J
Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c
Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
5-37
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
#1448c 197 Silent Monitor- SLT Enables authorized station users to silently monitor
(1-way) Splitting one conversing port at a time.
SAU Requirement SPLIT MONITOR on page 3-23
to enable this feature .
N/A 199 Large Public SLT Enables the addition of up to eight digits to a large
Library Prefix public library numbering plan.
* see notes above on page 5-21
J Default Dial Numbers for Eu0, Eu1 & Eu2 systems are defined as:#( Index number + 100).
For Example: Call Forward All (Station) is defined for all systems with Index 51. Therefore, its default dial number for
these systems is defined as #151.
Not Available for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL and FlexSet-IP 280S.
c Not Available for SIP terminals (P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone)
General Numbering Plan (Field/Index Order) NPL,0
5-38
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
#2 4 Scroll advances in Keyset Advances through a scroll list one step at a
discrete steps time. Use the up VOL key on a keyset.
Used to scroll forward (Next) port by port
through available ports. While scrolling, the
port name/number appears on the top line.
#4 6 Scroll backward in Keyset Advances backwards through the scroll list one
discrete steps step at a time. Use the down VOL key on a
keyset.
Used to scroll backward (Previous) port by port
through available ports. While scrolling, the
port name/number appears on the top line.
#5 7 Fast scroll backward Keyset Allows rapidly going backward (FastDown) to
the previously assigned feature in a scroll list.
5-39
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
24 IPx 500M main Cage on the motherboard (Shelf #0, Slot #13)
24 CDRS 200E on the motherboard (Shelf #0, Slot #13)
7 RMI
23 IPx Office U-RMI/U-MR/RMI/MR Office (Shelf #1, Slot #6)
• The PAGE number is irrelevant when the 2nd Music Source is used by
the RMI, U-RMI/U-MR/RMI/MR Office card. The caller receives an
ILLEGAL message and a reorder tone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-40
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DID_NUMS [14]
Coral System Default Dial #s
Coral IPx Office 5100 Ô 5107
FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000 (Eu2: 76XX)
IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 (Eu9: 7600 Ô 7607
CDRS 200E
8GID and ALS70-DID (Eu systems) are defined in TRUNK [0] (page 5-18).
Designates a range of direct inward dial (DID) trunk numbers beginning with a
DID trunk hardware ID number in the system. These numbers are used exclusively
5-41
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
Keyset Zone Page designates a range of zone page dial numbers to voice page a
group of EKT, VDK, DKT, DST, GKT, CPA, FlexSet 120/280/121/281 series,
FlexSet-IP 280S, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, beginning at a Zone Page
software ID number (enter index number). Numbers are given as a range
commencing with a START number and concluding with an END number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-42
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-43
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
DVMS_PORTS [32]
Coral System Default Dial #s
Coral IPx Office 7042 Ô 7045
FlexiCom 400, 5000, 6000
IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000
CDRS 200E
Designates a range of 4VSN (Voice Synthesizer Facility) dial number card ports
with four ports per card. (Enter physical location: Shelf, Slot, CKT). For additional
information, see Chapter 23, Special Port Facilities.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Designates a range of dial service dial numbers (used for outgoing calls) beginning
at a DIAL SERVICE Software ID number (enter the index number).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-44
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
WAIT_QUE [38] Range: Any valid Dial Number (max: 8 digits); No Default values
Eu9: 5605 Ô 5609
! Warning:
Modifying the NPL (port numbers only-not feature numbers) causes:
1. An initialization of the CLA or CLA-ATS card.
2. CoraLINK applications to be interrupted (calls are unaffected).
Before the update is performed, the following message prompts:
INIT CLA CARD WITH UPDATED NPL (Y/[N])?
Enter Y to complete the update and wait for the following message to be
shown:
CLA initialization completed successfully.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
At each handset, the specific index number assigned by the Coral system
must be entered into the HID # 0 field in the SYSTEM CONFIG. menu of
the handset (See the relevant Coral Installation Manual for details).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-45
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
5-46
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
5-47
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
• LxCMC (voicemail)
• SeaMail (voicemail)
• SeaBeam softphone
• Third-party SIP PC-SoftPhones
• Third-party SIP IP-Phones
• Third-party FXS SIP gateways
T328 sets, SeaBeam softphone and other third-party SIP phones approved
by the Coral manufacturer.
Designates a range of dial numbers for SIP Terminals. An index number is assigned
for each dial number (no shelf, slot and circuit numbers are needed for SIP
terminals).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-48
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
5-49
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
This option is used to set the dial numbers for special features such as Camp on,
Snooze, Message, etc. Any single dial number can be used only once.
Notes:
• A special feature code is always activated in response to an
implemented feature or after a hookflash (not applicable for P-Series,
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam softphone,
and third-party SIP terminals) to initiate a feature. Therefore, no
conflict exists between the Special Feature number and the General
Numbering Plan.
• Only one number (between 0 and 9 or * and #) can be utilized per
feature. When an attempt is made to define another feature with an
existing code, the feature code is erased and a question mark (?) is
displayed instead. This allows you to then enter another number.
• If you attempt to define a feature with a number that was previously
used, the following message appears:
# Plan Err, TRY AGAIN
BREAK_IN Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..3..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
Used to activate the break-in (forced 3-way conference) feature to an existing
conversation following warning tone. This option is also used to activate DND
override.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CAMP_ON (Callback) Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..2..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
Special Feature Codes NPL,1 [0,0,5,1]
MSG Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..5..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
Used to allow the user to leave a message at a busy or unanswered station (Ring/No
Answer).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SNOOZE Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..4..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
Instructs the system to repeat a wakeup or reminder ring after the time-out interval
set in the Feature Timer option.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-50
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
ATT_MSG Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..7..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
Attendant Stations Only
Used when leaving a message indication from the Attendant Console at a busy or
unanswered station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
V_PAGE Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..6..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
Used to voice page a busy or idle keyset.
For Voice Paging Network Stations, dial its Voice Page number (Hookflash 6
cannot be used to activate Voice Page for Network stations).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SILENT_MON Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
SAU Requirement
Silent Monitoring (2-Way) is used to monitor any system port (except data and
conference) in any state, without audio or visual warning to the monitored party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CAMP_OFFHK Any one (single digit) of the following: , #, 0..8..9 inclusive, or N (for none)
Used to camp-on a busy station as multi-appearance.
This feature is also known as CALL WAITING or Call Offer by other
manufacturers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-51
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
This option defines the FEATURE_PREFIX dial number and the special feature
codes (such as NEW_CALL, TRANSFER, DIVERT, etc.) used to establish the
FlexiCall and IRSS (Freedom) features.
• The FlexiCall feature allows a user to define an off-site phone as a
supplementary phone which rings simultaneously with his/her Coral station.
Only when the call is answered at the remote phone, are these Coral features
enabled at the remote phone.
• The IRSS feature, also known as Freedom, allows a user to define an off-site
phone with the capability of dialing into the Coral and becoming a virtual Coral
Notes:
station for the duration of the call.
NEW_CALL Any one (single digit) of the following: 0..1..9, or , #, or R (for remove)
Define the dial number for the remote phone user to initiate a new call via the Coral
system. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_PREFIX
defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TRANSFER Any one (single digit) of the following: 0..2..9, or , #, or R (for remove)
Define the dial number for the remote phone user to initiate a call transfer via the
Coral system. The Transfer type is based on the station’s COS Call Transfer and
3-way definition. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_
PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
5-52
PI Reference Manual Numbering Plan
DIVERT Any one (single digit) of the following: 0..3..9, or , #, or R (for remove)
Define the dial number for the remote phone user to divert the answered call to any
Coral station. The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_PREFIX
defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
VM_ACCESS Any one (single digit) of the following: 0..4..9, or , #, or R (for remove)
Define the dial number for the remote phone user to enable DTMF dialing to the
Voicemail system (or IVR) and circumvent the Coral DTMF receivers (such as
8DTMF and 8DTR cards). The feature dial number must be preceded by the
FEATURE_PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DIVERT_TO_LOCAL_ Any one (single digit) of the following: 0..5..9, or , #, or R (for remove)
STATION
Define the dial number for the remote phone user to divert the answered FlexiCall
call to his/her Coral station. The feature dial number must be preceded by the
FEATURE_PREFIX defined above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CALL RECORDING / Any one (single digit) of the following: 0..6..9, or , #, or R (for remove)
HELP REQUESTING
Defines the dial number for the remote phone user to activate the HELP
REQUESTING feature (keyset default feature code: #1443) via the Coral system.
The feature dial number must be preceded by the FEATURE_PREFIX defined above.
The HELP REQUESTING destination for all FlexiCall and Freedom callers is
defined in FLEXICALL/FREEDOM HELP DEST [3] (page 6-43), in Station Messaging
(SFE,7).
5-53
Numbering Plan PI Reference Manual
This NPL branch enables the technician to display requested dial numbers against
their NPL types.
The PI displays a range of entered dial numbers against their NPL Types.
• Optional TYPEs:
BOSS_GRP, DID_NUM, HUNT_GRP, DVMS_MSG, GROUP-CALL,
WIRELESS, IP-KEYSET, IP-SLT, IP-NET, SIP-TERMINAL, SIP-TRUNK,
PUBLIC-LIB, PRIVATE-LIB, DIAL-SERV, DVMS-PORT, BELL, PAGE-Q,
MODEM, PAGE, ROUTING-ACC, TRUNK, TRUNK-GRP, RELAY, CONF,
KEYSET-V-PA, KEYSET-Z-PA, WAIT-QUE, FEATURE, NETWORK,
FEATURE, KEYSET, SLT, etc.
• The Net_Node column shows the Node numbers assosiated with each
NETWORK number. This column is only relevant for NETWORK numbers.
For Example:
Other type of numbers are shown as “--”.
220 SLT --
420 KEYSET --
55055 NETWORK 0
7000 PRIV LIB --
5-54
6 System
This chapter is used to program the system-wide parameters and contains the
following sections:
Feature Timers ..............................................................................................6-2
System Features............................................................................................6-7
Card List .....................................................................................................6-59
Port List ......................................................................................................6-67
Digital Port Bus List...................................................................................6-91
Tone Plan ....................................................................................................6-95
Ringers ......................................................................................................6-102
The Card List parameters determine the system hardware configuration, while
the Port List parameters identify the equipment location, port by port.
Tone Plan determines the tone frequencies and duration of each tone.
Ringer parameters are used to define and protect the Ringer Power Supplies
from overloading.
• RPS units are installed in Coral FlexiCom 5000 and 6000 systems
• PS19 DC-D units are installed in Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 systems
6-1
System PI Reference Manual
Feature Timers are used to define the timer intervals used in the different Coral
feature operations for the entire system.
Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).
Feature Timers FE.T [0,0,1,0]
DURATION [5]
For Networks:
Define this timer identically for all the network PABXs.
Determines the duration of the CAMP-ON feature. After this time-out interval,
camp-on feature is automatically canceled.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-2
PI Reference Manual System
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BELL_RING Defines the cadence of both internal (station-to-bell) and external (trunk-to-bell)
Central Bell/UNA calls. Related equipment: RMI, 8DRCM, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCF,
U-RMI Office, U-MR Office, RMI Office, MR Office, IPx 500M, CDRS 200E.
6-3
System PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This timer is irrelevant for Group Call and Meet-Me conference calls. The
duration of the conference call alert tone (i.e. when an additional user
Feature Timers FE.T [0,0,1,0]
joins or leaves the call) is set to one second and cannot be modified.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-4
PI Reference Manual System
BREAKIN_ Defines the background tone that is heard by the two parties engaged in a call
WARNING during the entire break-in period. The tone warns the conversing parties that a third
party is listening. This tone can only be activated when the BREAK-IN_WARNING
[1] (page 6-50) is set to Yes. The combination of OFF/ON periods determines the
tone character.
DTMF_TONE The following two parameters define the character of the DTMF tone administered
by the Coral system over a DTMF trunk when placing outgoing calls.
6-5
System PI Reference Manual
6-6
PI Reference Manual System
System Feature parameters allow, deny, or modify the feature operations at the
system level. The following SFE options are available:
6-7
System PI Reference Manual
TK_TO_TK_CONNECT Yes/No
[0]
Allows or denies trunk to trunk connections. For example, trunks can remain
connected after the station originating a 3-way conference call, involving two
trunks, goes onhook (disconnects); or an incoming E&M dial trunk call can
continue dialing out on another trunk once the station has disconnected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Trunk To Trunk To Station Connection allows or denies all stations the ability to
establish a 3-way conference call using two trunks. After the station goes onhook,
the trunks are disconnected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Allows or denies all stations the ability to transfer an established trunk call to
another station. (This feature is also restricted in station Class Of Service.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PASS_TK_DIAL_ Yes/No
TONE [3]
Allows or denies ll stations the ability to pass the trunk dial tone to another station.
(This feature is also restricted in station Class Of Service.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
HF_ON_ALERTING_ Yes/No
ISDN [4]
Allows outgoing ISDN calls to the PSTN (via PRI trunks) to be transferred in alert
(while ringing) without waiting for the call to be answered by the external
destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MAX_DGTS_ON_TK 0..51
[5]
Determines the maximum number of digits available for dialing out on a trunk
(applies also to Routing, SMDR and Toll Barrier Analysis). This does not affect the
numbers dialed after a calibrated opening instruction.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-8
PI Reference Manual System
SAVE_&_SEND_DTMF Yes/No
[6]
Determines whether the system will store DTMF digits before the trunk dial tone
is present. The system transmits the stored digits after dial tone is detected when
this parameter is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Determines the length (number of digits) of the system call account codes that are
used for call charges (billing). Selecting a number between 5 and 16 causes the
SMDR On-Line report to print two lines per call record, the second line includes
the dial number. Changes made in this parameter will also change all codes in the
VFAC table. The total number of VFACs is dependent on: VFAC_ACCT in SIZ (see
Chapter 4- Sizes Definition), which must be defined first, and #ACCT_DGTS as
shown in the following table.
4 100
5, 6 1,000
7 10,000
8-16 65,000
When VFAC. (below) is set to Yes, its range is between 4 and 16; when
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-9
System PI Reference Manual
PASS_ACCT_CODE_ Yes/No
FOR_TK_TO_TK_
Determines whether an account code that was defined for the 1st trunk will
XFER [8]
automatically be passed to the 2nd trunk upon transferring.
An extension is connected with trunk no. 1. The extension user defines an ACCT_
CODE. The extension user transfers trunk no. 1 to another trunk, no. 2, and
disconnects. This parameter defines whether the ACCT_CODE that was defined
for trunk no. 1 will be automatically defined for trunk no. 2 and is printed in the
SMDR record.
Mainly for Caller ID application, see MFC_CALLER_ID [17] (page 6-12). Transfer
the extension # (account code), on Outgoing trunk for CLI SMDR. The extension
# (account code) is originated by the Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
VFAC. [9] Yes (All account numbers are checked and verified)
No (Account numbers are neither checked nor verified)
Determines whether or not the VFAC feature is used for making outgoing calls.
Additionally, defining VFAC. to Yes ensures that all dialed Account Codes are
checked and verified according to the VFAC Code table. If #ACCT_DGTS above is
set to less than 4, then VFAC. must be defined as No (see Chapter 24).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CHARGE_TYPE [10] M (Metering pulses and AOC), C (cost calculation based on call duration)
Default: C, Eu and CC1: M
Meter Pulse/Cost - Call Duration determines whether charge calculation is based
upon a Metering Pulse (Mtr and AOC) or the Call Duration (Cost calculation
System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]
feature).
For advice of charge (AOC) feature, enter M.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
METER_BEFORE_ Yes/No
CONNECT [11] Eu and CC1: Yes
6-10
PI Reference Manual System
AOC Advice of Charge includes the following three parameters when CHARGE_
TYPE [10] (above) is set to Meter and METERING_UNIT_CHARGE (page 8-31) is
not set to N.
C O S T $ $ $ x x x x x . y y
C O S T $ $ $ z z z z z z z z
C O S T x x x x x . y y $ $ $
C O S T z z z z z z z z $ $ $
Upon termination of a call, the call cost is displayed in one of the above
options according to the following three parameters:
CURRENCY_UNIT [12] Enter 3 printable keyboard characters.
Any lower case letters entered will be displayed as a capital letters.
For space/blank, enter underscore: “_”
Default: “$_ _” , Eu2: “DM_”, CC1: “NIS”
Defines the three characters of currency unit, used in a country. These characters
that represent the currency unit, appear on a caller’s keyset display, along with the
outgoing call price.
The currency unit for SMDR and CHARGE records is defined by the
SMDR/CHARGE_CURRENCY_UNIT [13] (Coral version 15.85.30 or higher)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CURRENCY_FORMAT 1 (xx,xxx.y 5 digits for integer number, with a decimal point for ten’s digit)
[14] 2 (zz,zzz,zzz 8 digits for integer number, without decimal point)
6-11
System PI Reference Manual
ALI [18]
This parameter is relevant for outgoing trunks routing calls to Emergency
or E911 centers.
Define a default second alternate line ID number to be used for calls routed via a
dial service that requests a Second Alternate Line ID but the caller’s number is
unavailable or the Second ALI is not defined (see SEC_ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [67]
on page 9-62 for Keyset definitions or SEC_ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [29] on page 9-13
for SLT definitions).
When no ANI is provided for the specific call (e.g., for calls that do not have a dial
number from the Coral Numbering Plan “NPL”), this parameter defines an
alternate Line ID for the PSTN.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-12
PI Reference Manual System
NUMBER_OF_CAMA_ 7 or 10
ANI_DIGITS [20]
CCO only
6-13
System PI Reference Manual
For version 16.01 or lower, the parameter does not operate on Call
Forward No-Answer.
If this parameter is set to No, the external call forwarded destination views the
caller ID for the Coral station that activated call forward, as opposed to the original
external caller’s ID.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
{V16.02.03 or Higher}
If this parameter is set to No, then SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_RETENTION
[23] (page 6-26) (SFE,2), is inoperable.
For outgoing calls that originated from an internal destination, set this parameter to
Yes to have the original internal caller’s ID sent to the station’s external call
forward destination (for Coral Call Forward All, Busy, No-Answer, Timed,
System Features - Outgoing Trunks SFE,0 [0,0,4,1,0]
6-14
PI Reference Manual System
6-15
System PI Reference Manual
This parameter is NOT relevant for outgoing numbers in the call log. (i.e.,
numbers dialed by the user. Outgoing call log numbers are routed as
originally dialed.
For example, if the user dialed 80 and then 1234567, Coral will route the
number as 801234567, even if the CALLBACK ROUTING DESTINATION [27]
parameter is defined differently.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ACNR_Requires_DTD Yes/No
[28]
Defines whether the ACNR (Automatic Called Number Redial, also known as
(V. 16.01.10 or higher)
ADNR) feature functions with or without DTD installed in the Coral system.
No Yes No No No No
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-16
PI Reference Manual System
BUSY TRUNK
GROUP
SKIP_AVAILABLE_ Yes/No
TRUNK_CHECK [29]
Defines, system-wide, whether or not the system searches a trunk group for an
available trunk after finding all trunks busy in a previous search.
The system searches the trunk group again if one of the trunks in the trunk group
becomes available or if the number of dialing attempts on the trunk group exceeds
the value defined in MAX_SKIPS [30], the next parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter appears only if the previous parameter was set to Yes.
When the system is programmed to skip the search for available trunks, (see
parameter above), the system will search again only when one of the trunks in the
trunk group is freed or when the number of dialing attempts on the busy trunk
group exceeds the value specified by this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-17
System PI Reference Manual
E&M_CONT_DIAL_ Yes/No
System Features - Incoming Trunks SFE,1 [0,0,4,1,1]
TONE [3]
E&M Continuous Second Dial Tone determines whether a dial tone is sent in
response to an incoming seizure on incoming E&M continuous trunks before the
digits are received from a distant PABX.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
E&M_PULSE_DIAL_ Yes/No
TONE [4]
E&M Pulsed Second Dial Tone determines whether a dial tone is sent in response
to an incoming seizure on incoming E&M pulsed trunks before the digits are
received from a distant PABX.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OPERATOR_ACCESS S/D
(Single-0/Double-0X)
Defines whether an incoming GID trunk can dial a single digit “0” (zero) or leading
[5]
“0” (zero) followed by an additional digit as defined by the DID Group Filter, see
Eu2 only DID/E&M Groups beginning on page 8-36, and the System Numbering Plan for
attendants.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-18
PI Reference Manual System
FlexiCom 400 (with Defines the total number of SLTs which can ring
HDC controller) simultaneously
FlexiCom 5000, 6000 • Defines the number of SLTs which can ring
simultaneously per Peripheral Shelf Unit.
• See Ringers beginning on page 6-102 to
properly define the Ringer software
configuration depending on the Ringer
hardware configuration.
IPx Office, IPx 500 and MAX_RING_PER_CARD [2] Coral IPx 500,
CDRS 200E CDRS 200E and IPx Office only below
replaces this parameter
IPx 800, 3000, 4000 Defines the number of SLTs which can ring
systems supported by simultaneously per shelf
PS19 AC or PS19 DC
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-19
System PI Reference Manual
DIGIT_ONE_AS_H.F. Yes/No
[5]
In noisy areas this parameter should be set to No.
Defines the digit 1 as a hookflash (Enter Y) or a 1 digit that is ignored (Enter N).
This parameter applies to any SLT, keyset, or trunk port during internal or QSIG
network calls or when the ring/busy tone is heard.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]
INTERNAL_LAST_ Yes/No
NUM_REDIAL [6]
Defines the LAST NUMBER REDIAL feature to include internal numbers as well as
external numbers.
Internal numbers include any legal station destination within the system. It does not
include feature codes and Page-Q.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-20
PI Reference Manual System
TEMPORARY_AUTO Yes/No
SET RELOCATE [8]
When this parameter is set to Yes, stations are allowed to activate the Auto Set
Relocate feature either temporarily or permanently by defining
Permanent/Temporary_AUTO SET RELOCATE [34] (page 9-15) in the SLT Definition
branch (SLT) or
Permanent/Temporary_AUTO SET RELOCATE [72] (page 9-64) in the Keyset
Definition branch (KEY).
When set to No, this parameter allows stations, system-wide, to activate the Auto
Set Relocate feature only on a permanent basis and disables temporary relocation.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
emergency call camps on the busy trunk and waits until the trunk is freed.
This parameter is irrelevant for Coral systems that serve as transit nodes leading to
the Coral with the emergency destination. Regardless of the PREEMPTION TYPE
settings in the Coral assigned for emergency purposes, a transit emergency call will
MAX_DIGITS_TO_ 5..16
VERIFY_IRSS_
Defines the maximum number of digits required by the system to identify an
CALLER [10]
external caller’s number as that of an IRSS (Freedom) destination. The Coral
checks the last few digits (5 to 16 digits, defined in this parameter) of the external
calling number to verify that it is an IRSS destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-21
System PI Reference Manual
The offsite caller pays for the portion of the call during which the
announcement is heard. SMDR records are generated (to the user's
internal phone) for incoming trunk calls that are answered by the callback
announcer. See DISPLAY_IN [1] on page 14-2 in SMDR Control.
The announcer is a device with a prerecorded message. This device can be
connected either to a SLT port, DVMS port, SeaMail SIP port, iVMFipx keyset
port, IPC/uCMC or IPC/SFC keyset port, etc.
• When defined as NONE, the call is disconnected immediately, and callback is
activated.
• When defined as Wait Que, the Coral sends a simple tone as notification
without answering.
• In order to install an ANNOUNCER device in an SLT port, the SLT Definition
must be defined as ANNOUNCER [23]=YES, (see page 9-10).
System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]
• In order to use a DVMS port, special DVMS MSG must be programmed (see page
23-2).
• When using iVMFipx keyset ports as announcers (Coral IPx 500 and CDRS
200E systems), update the ANNOUNCER [34] (page 9-42)=Yes in the Keyset
Definition branch.
• When using IPC/uCMC, or IPC/SFC keyset ports (Simplicity) as
announcers, update the ANNOUNCER [34] (page 9-42)=Yes in the Keyset
Definition branch.:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-22
PI Reference Manual System
SHORT_CALL_MSG Yes/No
[13]
Defines a shortened message display on the user’s keyset.
Setting this parameter to No, enables the full keyset display for incoming calls in
the format: A call B. The following example of a keyset display shows the trunk
number followed by the ANI of the calling party. Susan is the called internal
station.
78840 5553067 CALL Susan
Setting this parameter to Yes, enables a shortened display where only the caller ID
is presented while the called station number, or name, is omitted. The following
example of a keyset display shows that only the external number is display during
the call.
78840 5553067
This shortened format allows users with smaller keyset displays (FlexSet 120
series) to view the entire calling party’s ANI.
When used together with NAME_NUM_DISPLAY [14], this parameter defines the
combinations of names and numbers viewed on the display panel of the phone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME_NUM_DISPLAY Yes/No
[14]
Enables both the name(s) and number(s) of a call to be seen on the display panel of
the phone. When N (No) is displayed, either the name or the number of the party is
displayed. When Y (Yes) is displayed, the name AND the number of the party is
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-23
System PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
display on Keysets/FlexSets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
HOLD_AUTO_ACTIVE Yes/No
[18]
When defined as Yes, the keyset user can press the hold key to automatically
recover a call already placed on hold (i.e., there is no need to dial the activation
code: 11 or *1).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-24
PI Reference Manual System
USER_CANNED_ Yes/No
6-25
System PI Reference Manual
SYSTEM_WIDE_ Yes/No
NAME_RETENTION
[23]
If SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_RETENTION [23] is set to Yes, the next parameter,
ACD/LIB_NAME_RETENTION [24], does not appear.
Set this parameter to Yes in order to firstly present the calling party’s name on all
system keyset displays as well as to retain the name/number when the call is
transferred on to further stations or groups.
Also, set this parameter to Yes in order to use a Public Library name as a message.
Create the Public Library in LIB, 0 (see page 11-2).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ACD/LIB_NAME_ Yes/No
RETENTION [24]
Set this parameter to Yes in order to present the calling party’s name on the keysets
of all direct calls to ACD Hunt Groups and Public Library groups and to retain the
name/number when the call is transferred.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME_RETENTION_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE_2nd_LINE
[25]
This parameter does not appear if the above two parameters, SYSTEM_
WIDE_NAME_RETENTION [23] and ACD/LIB_NAME_RETENTION [24] are
both set to No.
Defines whether the second line of the keyset can be overridden with the name of
the calling party name and/or number when either SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_
RETENTION [23] or ACD/LIB_NAME_RETENTION [24] is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-26
PI Reference Manual System
FROM_3WAY_BOSS_ Yes/No
TO_CONF_CALL [28]
Boss Groups Only
When a boss group line is engaged in a 3-way conversation, set this parameter to
Y in order to allow a fourth participant to join the conversation. The system does
this by transferring the line to an available conference circuit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FLASH_CALL_ Yes/No
BUTTON_IN_
Defines whether or not a keyset call buttons (DSS, LINE, TRUNK or LOOP button)
OUTGOING_CALLS
can be configured to flash when a call is made and during ringback tone. When set
[31]
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL Yes/No
_EQUAL_RING [32]
When set to Y (Yes), all keysets and SLT ring will be identical for internal and
external incoming calls. And will be as internal call.
When set to N (No), all keysets and SLT ring will be different for internal and
external incoming calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-27
System PI Reference Manual
DKT: The following parameters apply to T200M series, DKTs and FlexSets:
DSP48_NAME_FIELD S/F
(Short/Full) [34]
This parameter applies only to T207Ms, DKTs, FlexSet 120D equipped
with a DSP48 module (2 rows x 24 characters).
and to FlexSet 120S and 121S
Each Port is given a Short name-up to 5 characters and a Long name-up to 16
characters (see page 6-72). This parameter defines the Name Field characteristics
by determining whether the Port Names are Short or Full names. A Short Name
includes all five characters of the Short Name and a Full Name includes the first
nine (or 16 when available) characters of the Long Name.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DSP48_ELAPSE_ Short/Full
TIME_MODE [35]
Defines whether the Keyset Elapsed Time Display (feature code: #129) is shown
in Short (S) or Full (F) mode.
The Full display leaves the ANI displayed on the left and the Elapsed Time in
hour:minute:seconds format on the right. If the ANI is too long the words EXT
ANSWER may be shortened and the ANI may be shortened or deleted.
This display mode is used for DSP80 units.
System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]
The Short display deletes the ANI. The Elapsed Time remains in its
hour:minute:second format on the left side of the display and the word “ELAPSE”
appears on the right side of the display.
This display is used for DSP48 or DSP32 units.
00:12:10 ELAPSE
John Doe 2264
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-28
PI Reference Manual System
MAGNETO_DISC_ Yes/No
RING [36]
Magneto Disconnect Ring determines whether or not a Magneto Station (8SM and
8SMipx card ports) is disconnected after sending a ring voltage to the Coral, while
a call is established (see RING_SIG_RJCT [9] on page 9-127).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
RECALL_TK_AFTER_ Yes/No
HKFLS [37] CC1: No
An extension is connected with a trunk. When the extension implements a
hookflash and replaces the handset; this parameter defines whether to return the
trunk to the extension or to release the trunk. Because of spikes on the telephone
line, the Coral first identifies a hookflash and afterwards an onhook.
This parameter is designed to prevent “arbitrary ringing” when the extension is connected
with the trunk; the extension decides to disconnect and replaces the handset.
Enter Y to return the trunk to the extension.
Enter N to release the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
HF_FOR_HOT_ST_ Yes/No
INTERNAL_SERVICES
Defines, system wide, whether a Hot-Immediate SLT user can access internal dial
[38]
tone when set to Yes. This immediate releases the trunk seized so that it may be
used by other users.
The Hot Immediate station user hears one of the following when lifting the
6-29
System PI Reference Manual
CID_NAME_SUPPORT Yes/No
[40]
Enables the caller name (up to 15 characters) in addition to the number to be
displayed on SLT sets or Caller ID display devices.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CID_NUMBER_ 1..10..16
LENGTH [41]
Defines the maximum number of digits that may be displayed on an SLT with
built-in display or Caller ID external device.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
N_CID_ON_IDSP_ 0..32..128
CARD [42]
Defines the maximum number of FSK tone generators out of the maximum
available on each one of the following cards:
• iDSP
• U-RMI Office
• U-MR Office
• IPx 500M (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 or higher)
System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]
• CDRS 200E
This setting determines the maximum number of Caller IDs that can be
simultaneously transmitted by each card installed in the Coral system for analog
trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-30
PI Reference Manual System
APPLICATION
BUSY/IDLE
EVENT:
CAP_MSG_ A (All), S (Specific)
DESTINATION [43]
When more than 100 APA units are to be installed and used by the system,
this parameter should be set to Specific (S) so that a Primary and
Secondary message destination may be defined.
This parameter defines a universal message destination for busy/idle messages to
units defined as PCC or CAP. In this manner, the messages for all the units may be
concentrated at one Specific destination. Otherwise, the busy/idle messages for all
the PCC or CAP defined units will continue to be sent to each and every unit (All).
When Specific is defined, a Primary and Secondary destination can be defined in
the next two parameters.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PRIMARY [44] None or Keyset Dial Numbers defined as PCC in PROTOCOL TYPES: PCC
[46] on page 9-47 of the Keyset Definition.
Defines the primary destination for busy/idle messages of all the PCC or CAP
defined units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SECONDARY [45] None or Keyset Dial Numbers defined as PCC in PROTOCOL TYPES: PCC
[46] on page 9-47 of the Keyset Definition.
CAP/ACD_ST_ Yes/No
LOCKOUT_REPORT
Defines, system-wide, whether or not the Coral reports to ACD or PCC
[47]
applications when SLTs are locked out.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the ACD/PCC receives messages when the SLT
station enters Lockout and when it returns to idle.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-31
System PI Reference Manual
APPLICATION
“PRESENT”
EVENT:
CAP_ Yes/No
REINTRODUCTION_
Defines whether or not a CAP application is prompted with a PRESENT message
OF_MA_QUEUED [48]
while a multi-appearance station receives a second (wait) call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CAP_REPORTS_ Local/Network
STATION_NUMBER
Non-UDP Networks only
[49]
Defines, system-wide, the Coral caller number to be reported to the CAP
application: either the local station number or the network number. The network
number is composed of the local number and the node prefix.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CAP_THIRD_PARTY_ Yes/No
D.N./ANI [50]
When a station in the Coral initiates a call, a PRESENT message is sent to the CAP
via APA. If the caller placed the call on a special hold (“on the back”, by pressing
Xfer), the Coral can include the third party identification in the PRESENT
message. Some CAP applications require the third party information while other
do not.
This parameter defines whether or not the third party information is included in the
PRESENT message if there is a third party held by the calling party.
The third party is identified either by its dial number if it is an internal destination,
or by its ANI, if it is an external destination.
System Features - Station Options SFE,2 [0,0,4,1,2]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
VM SOFTKEYS Yes/No
SUPPORT [51]
This parameter is relevant only when Version Q915, iCMC cards support
FlexSets equipped with softkeys (FlexSet 280S/120S-Version 3.5).
The Q-915 iCMC card does not support the Voicemail controlled by softkeys.
Set this parameter to No to enable Voicemail on FlexSets 280S/120S with version
3.50 supported by the iCMC cards with Version Q915. A full array of Voicemail
features is provided for these FlexSets by using the keypad as opposed to the
softkeys.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-32
PI Reference Manual System
The Intercept parameters relate only to calls that are intercepted and is divided into
Intercept Origin and Intercept Relevant sections which help define how the
intercepted calls will be routed. The intercept destinations, however, are defined in
System - Night Service - Definition.
Intercept Origin parameters define whether a call will be intercepted, i.e. routed to
another destination or offer a reorder tone (based on where the call originated from:
station or type of trunk). Other relevant parameters for the call, defined in Intercept
Relevant, may also define whether to route the intercepted call to another
destination or only offer a reorder tone.
INCOMPLETE_ The following parameters apply only to incomplete calls when the destination is
ROUTING- busy.
ON BUSY
6-33
System PI Reference Manual
Service Definition, Chapter 12) or caller hears a busy tone. The destination is
typically the Attendant Console (the system default).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-34
PI Reference Manual System
INCOMPLETE The following parameters apply only to incomplete calls defined as when the
ROUTING - ON destination does not answer or is considered an illegal destination or the destination
ILLEGAL station in DND mode or PWDS calls after SUPV_RECALL Time-out.
6-35
System PI Reference Manual
Determines whether illegal calls that originated at an E&M trunk are routed to the
intercept call destination (Y) or if the caller hears reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Determines whether illegal calls that originated from a Direct Inward Dialing trunk
are routed to the intercept call destination (Y) or if the caller hears reorder tone (N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Determines whether illegal calls that originated at a preassigned trunk are routed to
the intercept call destination (Y) or if the caller hears reorder tone (N).
DISA calls are treated by the Coral as calls from an internal station and are allowed
to dial within the system and access system features using DTMF signaling.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-36
PI Reference Manual System
When Toll Barriers are in effect, TOLL_BAR routes the call to an intercept
destination when set to Yes. The caller hears a reorder tone, when set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-37
System PI Reference Manual
CF_NO_ANS
INT/EXT
ONE_STEP [0] Yes/No
Eu: Yes
Call Forward No Answer One Step determines whether a call should keep
forwarding when calls reach a “No Answer” situation (N) or the call should be
forwarded only once (Y). Enter Yes to limit an infinite ring condition when two or
more stations defined with CF_NO_ANS call forward each other.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TIMED_ Determines the system-wide time period for forwarding calls. Two such time
FORWARD periods can be defined. The start and stop times for each period are independently
INT/EXT defined. The user has the option to override the timed call forward by not invoking
it at his or her station. The user can also override any system-wide defined
destinations that are programmed into the database.
Some typical usages for Timed Call Forward include:
• Extended Care Facilities
System Features - Call Forwarding SFE,4 [0,0,4,1,4]
• Geriatric Institutes
• School Dormitories
• Business environments requiring collective calls forward features during lunch
breaks or after normal business hours to Voicemail or other specific
destinations.
• Network applications where calls coming into a remote site after working
hours are automatically forwarded to the hub.
6-38
PI Reference Manual System
6-39
System PI Reference Manual
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL Yes/No
_EQUAL_PRIORITY
When both an internal and external call arrive at a busy station concurrently, this
[3]
parameter defines whether the calls have equal priority to enter the system (Yes) or
System Features - Camp-On SFE,5 [0,0,4,1,5]
6-40
PI Reference Manual System
Wakeup
ANN_DEST [0] None (Wakeup Announcer is fed from MUSIC SOURCE #0),
Station Number, Trunk Number, Trunk Group, Routing Access,
Dial Service, Hunt Group, Boss Group, Public Speed Call Library,
DVMS port number
Defines the wakeup announcer destination when answering wakeup calls.
When defined as none, music is played from MUSIC SOURCE #0.
Music is defined at the FROM TO MUSIC-SOURCE on page 4-45 (IP Stations hear
tones and no music).
Wakeup report destination is defined through Wakeup Control beginning on page
20-2.
Simultaneous Wakeup Calls: When required, simultaneous wakeup calls can be
made to individuals requesting “wakeup” at the same time. This is particularly
useful for hotel/motel applications, when guest groups need to wakeup at the same
hour. To program multiple simultaneous wakeup requests, the announcer should be
defined as the destination. The announcer device can be attached to an SLT port or
a dedicated message can be programmed for a DVMS port.
When attached to an SLT port the port should be defined both as ANNOUNCER [23]
and MULTI_APPEARANCE [24] (page 9-11).
When attached to a DVMS port, a specific DVMS wakeup message must be
INCOMPLETE_ALERT Yes/No
[1]
Determines whether an alert call is generated whenever a wakeup attempt fails.
The fail indication is routed to the designated incomplete call destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-41
System PI Reference Manual
CHECK IN/OUT The following parameters are available when the Check-Out or Check-In feature is
activated.
PCC_UPDATE_COS Yes/No
[3]
Determines whether or not the COS status of the Check-In port can be changed.
When this parameter is set to Yes, then the COS can be changed via the PCC/CAP
terminal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CANCEL_CFWD Yes/No
INT/EXT [6]
Determines whether the existing station Call Forward features are canceled while
Check-Out or Check-In is activated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
System Features - Hotel SFE,6 [0,0,4,1,6]
6-42
PI Reference Manual System
ATT_MSG_HOT_LINE Yes/No
[0]
Attendant Message Hot Line determines whether activating an attendant message
causes a station to be defined as a hot line to the attendant. As soon as the user
operates a telephone feature, the station is routed to the attendant who left the
message and the message lamp goes out. When set to No, attendant messages can
only be canceled by the attendant and the feature can be operated only by pressing
a key programmed with this feature.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CLA_MSG_ None, Any valid port or station dial number or Hunt group
ORIGINATOR [2]
Defines the station originator for Attendant Messages from the CoraLINK Adapter
(via CLA or MAP cards).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-43
System PI Reference Manual
MSG_LAMP_&_RING Yes/No
[4]
For SLTs, the system must be equipped with Single Line Telephone
• Full size: 8/24SA, 8/16/24SLS, or 4/8/16SH card
• IPx 500: 8/16/24SAipx or 8/16SLSipx card
• CDRS 200E and CDRX 200E: 8/16/24SAipx or 8/16SLSipx card
• IPx Office: 4/8/16/24SA Office, 4/8/20S Office, 4SA+8Fx Office, 4SA+16Fx
Office, 8SA+8Fx Office or 8SA+16Fx Office card
With the Jumper Setting in the SH position plus message waiting lamps
physically installed on the telephones.
Message Waiting Lamp With Ring, when set to Yes, the message waiting indication
consists of both an illuminated message lamp and a message ring for SLTs and
Keysets. When set to No, only the message lamp lights. This parameter applies
when ATT_MSG_HOT_LINE (above) is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DKT/DST_MSG_LAMP Yes/No
[5] Eu2: No
This parameter applies only to the special message lamp for keysets and
does not affect the MSG programmed key LED or any other programmed
LEDs.
Lights a blinking message lamp for all pending messages for Keysets/FlexSets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-44
PI Reference Manual System
WHISPER_PAGE_ Music/Silence
PARTNER_HOLD [8]
When a user is engaged in a conversation and he receives a whisper page, he can
place the other side of the conversation on hold and answer the whisper page. The
party on hold can hear music or silence as defined in this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-45
System PI Reference Manual
DVMS: The following parameters apply to systems equipped with a 4VS or 4VSN card.
FWD_NANS INT/EXT None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in
[11] PDB, see Chapter 23
Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to the
Call Forward No Answer destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FWD_BUSY INT/EXT None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in
[12] PDB, see Chapter 23
Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to the
Call Forward when Busy destination.
System Features - Messaging SFE,7 [0,0,4,1,7]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FWD_ALL INT/EXT None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in
[13] PDB, see Chapter 23
Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to a
Forward All Calls destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INCOMPLETE_NANS None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in
[14] PDB, see Chapter 23
Determines which DVMS message is provided before the call is forwarded to the
Incompleted Calls Destination When No Answer.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INCOMPLETE_BUSY None, DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in
[15] PDB, see Chapter 23
Determines which DVMS message is provided before a call is forwarded to an
Incompleted Calls Destination when Busy.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-46
PI Reference Manual System
MLPP Special
Announcements
BLOCKED None, any keyset defined ANNOUNCER [34] on page 9-42, SeaMail port,
PRECEDENCE ANN DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in PDB
(BPA) [16]
This DVMS message is provided to MLPP calls that could not be pre-empted
because the called party was busy with a call of equal or higher precedence.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
UNAUTHORIZED_ None, any keyset defined ANNOUNCER [34] on page 9-42, SeaMail port,
PRECEDENCE_ DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in PDB
LEVEL_ANN (UPA)
This DVMS message is provided to station users that try to use a higher MLPP
[17]
precedence level than their COS allows.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BUSY STATION NOT None, any keyset defined ANNOUNCER [34] on page 9-42, SeaMail port,
EQUIPPED FOR DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in PDB
PREEMPTION (BNEA)
This DVMS message is sounded to the calling party when the called party is not
[18]
pre-emptable because its station COS is defined with PREEMPTABLE
[80] (page 7-24) set to N.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ISOLATED CODE None, any keyset defined ANNOUNCER [34] on page 9-42, SeaMail port,
ANNOUNCEMENT [19] DVMS MSG dial number or DVMS Port with Special MSG defined in PDB
This DVMS message is used to indicate to the caller that the system is currently
malfunctioning and the call cannot be completed as requested. The user should try
again at a later time.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-47
System PI Reference Manual
SLT/KEY_V.M: The following parameters apply only to systems equipped with Voicemail:
DISCONNECT_SEQ None
[20] Up to an 8 character string comprised of the following 16 DTMF signals:
*, #, 0..9, A-D
Defines the DTMF tone sequence to be sent to the Voicemail on SLT/Keyset
system indicating an onhook situation (disconnect) at the Coral for calls. When
NONE is selected, no keys will transmit DTMF signals. Therefore, in order for
DTMF signals to be sent during disconnect, any option other than NONE must be
selected.
This feature is useful for any application that requires reports to be sent whenever
a station answers or disconnects a call. For example, numerous billing systems
require accurate information regarding the exact time a call was initiated and
completed for the purpose of billing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-48
PI Reference Manual System
DEFAULT_ None;
DESTINATION [22] Any valid internal dial number or network number via Public Library
This parameter determines the system Voicemail center (e.g. SeaMail, LxCMC,
WiCMC, etc.) access code.
This access code also enables a T200M series, FlexSet-IP 280S,
FlexSet 281S/121S/280S/120S user to access the Voicemail by pressing a soft key.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-49
System PI Reference Manual
BREAK-IN_WARNING Yes/No
[1]
Break In Warning Tone sets a Break-In warning tone to be heard by the conversing
parties during the entire break-in period (when set to Yes). The Break-In tone
cadence is defined in Feature Timers beginning on page 6-2.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ORIGINATOR_CALL_ Yes/No
WAITING_TONE [2] CC1: Yes
Defines which ringback tone is sent to the CALLING station when the busy
destination is defined as Multi Appearance or when using Call Offer (i.e., by
dialing XFER-8 the caller alerts the busy destination that a call is waiting by
sending a tone.)
This parameter defines whether the caller hears a second ringback (see 2nd R.back
on page 6-97), when set to Yes or regular Ringback tone, when set to No.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! Warning:
System Features - Tones SFE,8 [0,0,4,1,8]
For Keysets/FlexSets: Increasing the gain from the default value may
enable the connected side which should not hear the whisper page, to
hear the whisperer.
Decreased Increased
Gain Gain
Also, if the whisperer uses a loud voice, the connected side that should
not hear the whisper page, may hear the whisperer.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-50
PI Reference Manual System
Determines the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) encoding standard used by the
system to digitize voice signals for digital trunks and PRI trunks.
• A-LAW method is in common use in Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia,
Australasia, South America, and many countries in other continents.
• M_LAW method (-Law, pronounced M-YOO Law, sometimes spelled
Mu-Law) is the standard used by common carriers in North America.
Neither method has any particular advantage over the other.
Changing this parameter requires a hardware change to the MCB Office, MSBipx,
HDC, 4GC or 32GC card as well.
For further details, refer to Section 8 in the relevant Coral Installation Manual.
When the 4IAA or iCMC card is installed, the card definition must be identical to
the definition here (see the 4IAA or iCMC manual).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FLEXAIR/SIP_ Tick/Silence
SEARCH_TONE [5]
Define a search tone to be sounded for callers to a FlexAir handset, P-Series,
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and third-party SIP
terminals.
The Tick Tone, when set, can indicate to the caller that the Coral system is
currently trying to locate the user. A ringback or busy tone is given only after the
station is located or timeout period has expired.
Enter T for a Tick tone.
Enter S for Silence (no tone).
6-51
System PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ENABLE_BLOCK_ Yes/No
ON_FAULT [3]
Determines whether the system automatically tests T1/E1 digital trunks (T1, 30T,
T1, 30T/x only
30T/E, 30T/M and all 30T/x) for RED alarms. When set to Yes, all trunk cards
failing the test are blocked for outgoing calls, but incoming calls are allowed. When
set to No, the test is not activated and all trunks are released for outgoing calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ENABLE_BLOCK_ Yes/No
ON_FAULT [4]
Determines whether the system automatically tests ISDN trunks (4TBR,8TBR) for
4/8TBR only
alarms. When set to Yes, all BRI trunk cards failing the test are blocked for
outgoing calls, but incoming calls are allowed. When set to No, the test is not
activated and all trunks are released for outgoing calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-52
PI Reference Manual System
ENABLE_BLOCK_ Yes/No
ON_FAULT [5]
Determines whether the system automatically tests ISDN trunks (PRI-23, PRI-30
PRI23/30, IPG only
and IPG) for alarms. When set to Yes, all PRI and IPG trunk cards failing the test
are blocked for outgoing calls, but incoming calls are allowed. When set to No, the
test is not activated and all trunks are released for outgoing calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-53
System PI Reference Manual
6-54
PI Reference Manual System
6-55
System PI Reference Manual
Notes:
• Not for FlexAir systems.
• Use the SAU device #
• For the Coral FlexiCom 5000 or Coral IPx 3000 systems with
Duplicated Common Control, use the Master Side SAU device #.
• For the Coral FlexiCom 6000/R or Coral IPx 4000/R systems with Dual
Common Control, use the Active Side SAU device #.
Note: A System ID# must be entered before continuing to change the values of the
related parameters.
Enter this system number to identify the system towards each of its wireless
handsets thereby preventing cross-signalling between unrelated systems and
handsets. This system ID number is automatically programmed into each handset
belonging to the particular Coral system.
This system ID number is defined and supplied by the manufacturer’s Service
Center.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Enter the number of SKK Clusters to be used in this Coral system. The number of
Clusters determines the number of SKK Master cards installed system-wide.
Each Master card can support 7 additional SKK slave cards physically linked
together.
The Coral limits the use of SKK cards to a maximum of 32 8SKK and
16 16SKK cards per Coral system. See the FlexAir Installation Manual
for further RBS and Repeater limitations and details.
Enter 0 when no FlexAir system is used in this Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-56
PI Reference Manual System
Slot Options:
1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller)
1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000
The SKK physical Master card must be initiated before the other FlexAir
cards. Otherwise, the FlexAir system will not function properly.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-57
System PI Reference Manual
Entering a new code may cause one of the following error messages to appear:
INVALID UTAM CODE: Authorization (SAU#) mismatch error
OUTDATED UTAM CODE: Invalid time and/or date.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-58
PI Reference Manual System
Card List (CLIS) parameters identify the location, type, logical status and software
version of the various system plug-in cards. Card List is also used for assigning a
database (Card DB) to each card.
6-59
System PI Reference Manual
P_TYPE [2] Any shared service or peripheral card type. See Tables 6-5 and 6-6.
Present Card Type identifies the Peripheral or Shared Service card type which is
currently located in the designated slot.
2DT cards (with firmware Version 60 or higher) are displayed with the
number of defined peers (circuits), as follows: 2DT/1 or 2DT/2.
If no card is currently located in the slot, the NO_CARD message appears.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
I_TYPE [3] Any peripheral card type or NO_CARD. See Table 6-5 and 6-6.
Identifies the Peripheral card type initialized (first time card identified by system)
in the designated slot. Shared Service cards do not appear in this field since no
memory is reserved for them. This field can be updated even if the slot is currently
empty in order to assign the desired new peripheral card type.
• For a CNF card, to change the card mode from C3Way to Conference,
type CONF.
• To clear an empty slot, type NO_CARD.
• Enter NO_CARD to clear a slot equipped with a P_TYPE Resource
card, or to display a P_TYPE card when equipped with an I_TYPE.
! CAUTION: NO_CARD erases all the port dial numbers associated with
the slot. All these dial numbers are erased from the NPL, Trunk Groups,
Hunt Groups, Boss Groups, etc.
• Check Default Configuration (see page 8-95), before any Digital Card
(2DT, T1 and 30T/x) Installation.
• To assign a slot for a specific peripheral card, although no card is
installed (i.e. P_TYPE is set to No_Card, enter the card type in I_Type.
This is also known as 0/0 DATABASE PROGRAMMING, see below.
0/0 DATABASE The user can program the system without actually installing the peripheral cards.
PROGRAMMING This is a special engineering feature that allows programmers to prepare an entire
Card List CLIS [0,1,0]
6-60
PI Reference Manual System
Notes:
• When CARD_DB# is set to N/A for this card type, "___" is displayed.
• Entering an incorrect CARD_DB# displays an ERROR message.
• Do not change the CARD_DB# of the PRI card.
• This parameter is irrelevant for 2DT cards (with firmware Version 60 or
higher). The CARD_DB# number assigned for 2DT card is defined per
each peer in another branch. See 2DT Card Database on page 8-102.
Table 6-2: Criteria for Installing Card_DB#*
*This table shows the relation between P_TYPE and I_TYPE, which define
the Card Database number.
6-61
System PI Reference Manual
VERSION [5]
Displays the designated card software version.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SUBVERSION [6]
Displays the designated card software subversion.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
STATUS [7]
Displays the current logical status of the designated slot. Primarily used by
maintenance personnel. Status messages are described in Table 6-3.
The following parameter has exceeded its SAU with the appropriate amount
Authorization Definition: of 2DT peers. Ask your dealer for
an authorized upgrade.
• 2DT WITH 2 CKTS on page 3-18
Readjust Sizes Definition on page
Any of the following trunk parameters 4-2, to support unsupported
has exceeded its Sizes Definition: peers or trunks for peer #1.
• Max Ports on page 4-4,
• Max Trunks on page 4-9
• E&M and DID on page 4-9 (for T1, 30T and
30T/M, requires 2DT firmware 61 - future
option Check Availability)
• PRI on page 4-10.
6-62
PI Reference Manual System
For the UGW card only: • Enter the correct UGW MAC
• UGW MAC address is either incorrectly entered address
or not registered • Check that the network cables
• There is no network connection to Media and/or properly connected
Signalling • Fasten the MRC/MG/ULI/ULI-1
• MG/MRC module is not installed properly modules securely
• ULI/ULI-1 module is not installed properly • Check the network
• Network Configuration problem configuration
6-63
System PI Reference Manual
6-64
PI Reference Manual System
IPx Office expansion cage only: Define the type of the expansion
This error is displayed when inserting a units connected to the IPx Office
peripheral or service card to an expansion cage system.
before the expansion units are properly See EXPANSION_TYPE Coral IPx
recognized by the IPx Office main processor. Office only (page 3-3) under
Installation branch, route:SYSGEN,0
[0,0,0,0].
After defining the expansion unit
in this parameter, the system
must be re-initialized (soft
re-boot) in order to initialize the
cards.
NOT_COMPAT Coral software version 14.5x or higher requires Install a UGW card- Version 2 or
UGW Card only UGW version 2 or higher higher and re initialize the card.
6-65
System PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Card List CLIS [0,1,0]
6-66
PI Reference Manual System
The Port List (PLIS) parameters identify individual ports on a peripheral card.
The port parameters may be updated either by accessing their:
Physical location (Route: PLIS,0), see Port List - Physical Location below, or their
Dial numbers (Route: PLIS,1), see Port List - Dial Numbers below.
Access Port List by entering the physical location of the port (Shelf, Slot, CKT),
or the dial number assigned to the port. In either case the displayed information is
identical, except for the order of appearance.
When entering the Port List by its mnemonic (PLIS) or the root menu (0,2,0), the
PI prompts the user to enter a “0” for access by physical location or a “1” for access
by dial number.
In both Physical Location and Dial Number, direct access is possible by entering
either the parameter name or the field number enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
Details for the Port List are found on the following pages:
Port List - Physical Location......................................................................6-68
Port List - Dial Numbers............................................................................6-73
6-67
System PI Reference Manual
PHYSICAL Physical Location is used to display or modify port information by entering the
LOCATION port’s physical location in the system. The name of the port, and in the case of trunk
ports, the port database may be modified.
Each 2DT card includes one or two peers (circuits), the number of trunks
(CKTs) listed per peer is as follows:
Peer#0, CKT 0-31, Peer#1, CKT 32-63
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-68
PI Reference Manual System
SHELF# [0]
0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller)
0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000
SLOT# [1]
1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller)
1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000
CKT# [2]
0-n, where n = number of ports on card –1
Identifies the circuit (CKT), on the card associated with the port.
For 2DT card only:
Each 2DT card includes one or two peers (circuits), the number of trunks (CKTs)
listed per peer is as follows:
• Peer#0, CKT 0-31
• Peer#1, CKT 32-63
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-69
System PI Reference Manual
TYPE [3]
Any Shared Service or Peripheral card type (see Table 6-5 and Table 6-6)
Identifies the Shared Service (Resources) or Peripheral card type on which the port
is located (e.g., PRI23, PRI30, T1, 4TEM, 8T-C, 8DRCF).
For 2DT card only:
There are two messages that may be displayed adjacent to the 2DT card port type,
as follows:
SHELF/SLOT/CKT TYPE DIAL# PORT_DB# VERS SHORT & FULL NAMES
0 / 1 / 33 PRI23 NO_RSRC 7190 --- --- BLANK :BLANK
0 / 1 / 34 PRI23 UNAUTHR 7191 --- --- BLANK :BLANK
• NO_RSRC - indicates that there are not enough resources allocated for the
relevant port
• UNAUTHR - indicates that the second peer is not authorized or there are
insufficient SAU ports to support all trunks supplied by peer #1
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NO_CARD PORT I_TYPE NO_CARD I_TYPE 0/0 state: The Port card was
initialized in the past, but is not
installed. Install the card. If this is to
be a permanent condition, then
release the slot through the Card List
option.
PORT <>PORT I_TYPE NO_CARD I_TYPE A Port card was initialized for a
certain type of card, but a different
Port card is currently installed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-70
PI Reference Manual System
Notes:
• When PORT_DB# is not applicable for this port type, “-- --” is
displayed.
• Entering an incorrect PORT_DB# displays an ERROR message.
Identifies the port database number assigned to the port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-71
System PI Reference Manual
NAME
SHORT (5) [8] Maximum of 5 ASCII characters; R (Remove for BLANK);
CO trunks: CO-01..CO-jj
DID trunks: DID00..DIDnn: where nn = number of DID trunks minus 1
All other port types: BLANK
Defines the port short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters), which appears on
keysets equipped with a display of less than 80 characters that are engaged in a call
with this port. A port name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset
display and the keyset displays its dial number. See General Rules for Entering
Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-72
PI Reference Manual System
Port List parameters display or modify port information by first entering the port
type, and then the port dial number. The port name, and the port database may be
modified. After selecting Port List by dial number, the PI prompts for the type of
port to be listed. By entering a number corresponding to the port type, a specific
type of port may be selected, or all port types may be selected. Each port type is
identified by a number as shown below; all ports may be listed by entering the word
ALL.:
OPTION Description
0 - Trunk • NET_IP (Includes all Coral IP QSIG Network connections for this Coral
system via PUGW, UGW and UGW-E cards)
• LGS_IP (Includes all CO analog trunks, loop start and ground start,
connected via Coral Teleport/FXO MGCP gateways to the Coral IP network)
• SIP trunks (from a public service provider or behind FXO/BRI/PRI SIP
gateways) that are authorized for use in this Coral system
• Analog trunks: E&M (4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEM/P)
• Analog trunks: LS/GS, loop start and ground start
(4/8T, 4/8T-C, 4/8T-CID, 4TMR, 4TNI, 4TWL)
• Digital trunks: E1(30T, 30T/M, 2DT-30T, 2DT-30T/M, 30T/E)
• Digital trunks: T1(T1, 2DT-T1, UDT-T1)
• PRI (PRI-23, PRI-30, 2DT-PRI23, 2DT-PRI30, UDT-PRI23, IPG)
6-73
System PI Reference Manual
2 - keyset • Type 500 or Type 2500 stations (connected via Coral Teleport/FXS SIP
gateways units to the Coral IP Network)
• Third-party SIP PC-SoftPhones
• Third-party SIP IP-Phones
• Third-party FXS SIP gateways
• Coral SeaBeam softphone
• Coral FlexIP SoftPhones (FLIPS)
• P-Series
• Coral T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
• Coral T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL
• Coral T322, T328
• FlexAir Wireless handsets
• Coral FlexSet-IP 280S
• Coral FlexSet 120, 120D, 120L, 120S, 121S
• Coral FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 280D-HS, 280S, 281S
• Coral FlexAPDL
• iCMC (each iCMC card requires 24 entries for VM keyset ports)
• Coral Sentinel
• CPA, EKT, DKT, DST, GKT, VDK, APDL
• CoralAIR Wireless handsets
6-74
PI Reference Manual System
TYPE [0]
Any Shared Service or Peripheral card type (see Table 6-5 and Table 6-6)
Identifies the Shared Service or Peripheral card type on which the port is located
(for example, PRI23, PRI30, 4TEM, 8T-C, 8DRCF, WLESS for Wireless).
For 2DT card only:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
>NOTE [1]
This parameter appears when the condition of a card within a slot is valid, but not
desirable.This condition can cause system problems and should be corrected as
soon as possible. See Table 6-4 for more information concerning >NOTE.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-75
System PI Reference Manual
SHELF [2]
0: Coral FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller);
0..15: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000
0..2: CDRS 200E
1..3: Coral IPx Office
0..2: Coral IPx 500, 800
0..15: Coral IPx 3000, 4000
Identifies the shelf on which the port is located.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SLOT [3]
1..16: Coral FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller)
1..18: Coral FlexiCom 5000, 6000
CKT [4]
0 to n, where n = number of ports on card minus 1
Identifies the circuit (CKT) on the card associated with the port.
For 2DT card only:
Each 2DT card includes one or two peers (circuits), the number of trunks (CKTs)
listed per peer is as follows:
• Peer#0, CKT 0-31
• Peer#1, CKT 32-63
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-76
PI Reference Manual System
Notes:
• When PORT_DB# is set to Not Applicable for this card type, “-- --” is
displayed.
• Entering an incorrect PORT_DB# displays an ERROR message.
Identifies the port database number assigned to the port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-77
System PI Reference Manual
NAME [7]
SHORT Maximum of 5 ASCII characters; R (Remove for BLANK);
CO trunks: CO-01..CO-jj
DID trunks: DID00..DIDnn: where nn = number of DID trunks minus 1
All other port types: BLANK
Defines the port short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters), which appears on
keysets equipped with a display of less than 80 characters that place or receiver a
call to or from this port. A port name defined as BLANK does not appear on the
keyset display and the keyset displays its dial number.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-78
PI Reference Manual System
T1 T1 0-3 0-3
4TWL 4TWL 4TWL 4TWL 0 0-3 New Zealand and India only.
Two Way Loop (DID & DOD)
4TWLipx
4TWLsl 1, 2, 3
ALS70 - trunk 4/8ALS 4/8ALS/S 4/8ALS 0-3 0-3 Holland: European systems only.
ALS70 (Abonnee Lijn Signalering
1970) Trunk circuit card - Netherlands
Standard
DID - trunk 8DID 8DID 8DID N/A 0 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) circuit card
8DID/S 8DID/S
DIGITAL - trunk $DPC N/A N/A N/A N/A Digital Protocol Converter
Converter
6-79
System PI Reference Manual
DIGITAL - trunk 30T 30T 30T 0-3 0-3 30 Digital Trunk circuit card - CEPT/E1
(E1) 30T European Standard carrying an 2048
30T Office 8, 10 Kbps signal that meets ITU-T
(30T or 30TM Rec.G.703
jumper
selection)
30Tipx
30Tsl 1, 2, 3
/DDO)
E&M (Analog 4TEMipx 4TEM 4TEM N/A 0-2 Four Trunk E&M (Ear and Mouth
trunk) Continuous 4TEM/S signaling) Tie-Line (2/4 wire
4TEMsl 1, 2, 3 inter-exchange) circuit card
4TEM
4TEM/S
E&M (Analog 4TEM/P 4TEMP 4TEMP 0-3 0-3 Four Trunk E&M Pulsed Tie-Line (2/4
trunk) Pulsed wire inter-exchange) circuit card
6-80
PI Reference Manual System
6-81
System PI Reference Manual
8TBRPipx
8TBRPsl 1, 2, 3
ISDN PRI trunk PRI-23, PRI23 PRI23 N/A 1 Do not change CARD_DB#:
UDT (PRI-23) AT&T,4ESS
PRI-23ipx,
UDTipx (PRI) UDT, UDTipx and UDT Office - jumper
set to PRI
PRI-23sl, 1, 2, 3
UDT Office 8, 10
(PRI)
PRI-30ipx
PRI-30sl 1, 2, 3
LS - trunk 4/8T-Cipx FJ 4T-C 4T-C 0-5 0-3 4 Loop Start trunk ports.
Includes 4 Power Fail circuits.
4T Office 4T-C 10
Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]
6-82
PI Reference Manual System
4/8T-Csl 1, 2, 3
4/8T-CIDsl 1, 2, 3
4TMR-PFsl, 1, 2, 3
4TMR-PFsl-G
4TMRsl 1, 2, 3
8T 8T
8T/S 8T/S
8T/S PF
Station (Analog) 8SM 8SM 8SM N/A 0-2 Military Magneto Telephone circuit
Magneto - station card
8SM/S 8SM/S
8SMipx 8SM/S
6-83
System PI Reference Manual
Station Analog 4/8/16/24SA 4/8/16/24 4/8/16/24 N/A 0-3 4, 8, or 20 port 2-wire SLT and
2, 4
(SA) SLT - with Office SLS/H-C SLS message waiting (MSW) lamp.
Message Lamp
8/24SA 8/24 8/24
Programmed to SLS/H-C SLS
(SH)
8/16/24SAipx 8/16/24 8/16/24 IPx 500 Card version 4.xx and higher supports
SLS/H-C SLS and SLT-Caller ID feature.
CDRS
200E
Only
Jumper set to (S) 8/16/24 SLS 8/16/24 8/16/24 Card version 3.xx and lower
SLS SLS
8/16SLSipx 8/16 8/16 IPx 500 Card version 4.xx and higher supports
SLS-C SLS and SLT-Caller ID feature.
Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]
CDRS
200E
Only
6-84
PI Reference Manual System
8/16SLSipx 8/16 8/16 IPx 500 Card version 4.xx and higher supports
SLS/H-C SLS and SLT-Caller ID feature.
CDRS
200E
Only
Station (Analog) 8//24 SA 8/24 8/16/24 N/A 0-3 Supports SLT-Caller ID feature and
SLT - with SLS/H-C SLS Message Lamp
Message Lamp
(Coral Version
9.5x - 15.xx)
6-85
System PI Reference Manual
Voicemail iCMC iCMC 16iCMC/16 24SDT N/A N/A 24 KEYSET1 entries are allocated in
8iCMC/8 SIzes for each iCMC, however, only
16iCMC CKTs 0 to 15, 17 &18 are used.
CKTs 16, & 19-23 are not used and
8iCMC can be removed from the system
database.
iCMCipx
Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]
iCMC-200 1, 2, 3
IPCipx/SFC 8SDT
IPC/SFC 24SDT 2, 4
Office
IPC/WiCMC 24SDT 2, 4
Office
6-86
PI Reference Manual System
Wireless handset 8/16SKK 8/16SKK 8/16SKK N/A N/A 8/16 RBS (Radio Base Stations)
FlexAir /M04 or M=master card
8SKKipx S04 S=slave card
04=four channels per RBS
8SKKsl 1, 2, 3
8DRCM N/A 0
• See Table 6-7 for Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E Shared Resources Service Cards.
• See Table 6-8 for Coral IPx Office Shared Resources Service Cards.
6-87
System PI Reference Manual
4IAA - card 8SD N/A N/A 4-Integrated Automated Attendants with software
version 40.xx: Card Discontinued
iDSP iDSP N/A 0 PLIS shows iDSP/xxx where xxx is the number of
FSK tone generators defined in N_CID_ON_IDSP_
CARD [42] on page 6-30.
8DRCM N/A 0
8DRCM N/A 0
• See Table 6-7 for Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E Shared Resources Service Cards.
• See Table 6-8 for Coral IPx Office Shared Resources Service Cards.
6-88
PI Reference Manual System
Table 6-7: Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E: Shared Resources Service Ports
* 8DRCF, RMI-F and URC2 units must be installed for these ports to be defined in Card List.
† The circuit definitions depend on the maximum number of ports defined for each URC resource in CDB, 11,1. For
example, if only 5 DTMF receivers are defined in the card’s current configuration, then only Circuits 0 to 4 are
available for the DTMF receivers.
6-89
System PI Reference Manual
* The circuit definitions depend on the maximum number of ports defined for each URC resource in CDB, 11,1. For example,
if only 5 DTMF receivers are defined in the card’s current configuration, then only Circuits 0 to 4 are available for the DTMF
receivers.
Port List - Dial Numbers PLIS, 1 [0,2,0,1]
6-90
PI Reference Manual System
The Digital Port List parameters identify individual digital ports on a Digital
Terminal or Telephone Peripheral card:
8/16/24SFT, 8/16SFTipx, 8/16/24SFT Office, 4/8S+8/16Fx Office, 8/16SFTsl,
8F8Ssl, 8/16/24SDT, 8/16SKD and 8SVD. To access the Digital Port List, enter the
physical location of the port (Shelf, Slot, CKT).
The cards contain eight, sixteen or twenty-four identical ports (CKTs) respectively,
which provide a two-wire interface called UP0. The ports must be connected to
external devices. Up to eight external devices can be connected to each digital port
while the limit is 32 devices per card. Devices that can be connected and are
available with this Coral Software version include FlexSet, GKT, DKT, DST and
DPEM sets and CPA, APDL terminals.
For more information about the physical installation, refer to the Coral Terminal
Equipment - Installation Manual.
The eight external devices relate to the port as if connected to a logical
identification number. The ID numbers range from 0 to 7 in each port.
ISDN convention stipulates that instead of having only one piece of equipment
plugged into the ISDN phone line (point-to-point communication), the multi-drop
feature allows connection of up to eight devices to each single ISDN line.
6-91
System PI Reference Manual
ID. 0..7
Identifies the logical location of the indicated P_Type and I_Type.
Identifies the logical connection to the port. Every external device is logically
connected to internal Bus UP0. A maximum of eight devices can be connected to
one physical port where each device is associated with a different logical location.
The logical locations are identified by numbers 0 to 7.
Digital Port Bus List DLIS [0,1,1]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-92
PI Reference Manual System
I_TYPE Any external device type (see Table 6-9) or R (Remove) for --(No device)
Identifies the external device type initialized (first time, the external device
identified by the system - but not necessarily installed) in the designated ID.
This field can be updated, even if the slot or port is currently empty, in order to
assign the desired new device type.
• To clear an empty ID., type R (Remove).
• To assign an ID for a specific external device, although no device is
physically installed, enter the device type according to the table listed
below.
! Caution:
Any entry (R or changing the current ID) erases the database associated
with the CKT. The dial number is erased from the Trunk Groups, Hunt
Groups, Boss Groups, etc. The associated speed call libraries are
erased, etc.
Table 6-9 describes the various options available for connecting external devices
to a digital port. A maximum of eight external devices can be connected per port
and defines the related ID# for the external device.
• The main operating device is always defined as ID# 0.
• The first DPEM is always defined as ID# 4.
• The second DPEM is always defined as ID# 5.
• The third DPEM is always defined as ID# 6.
• A single DPEM connected cannot be defined as ID# 0, 1, 2, 3 or 7.
6-93
System PI Reference Manual
• FlexSet 80S
• FlexSet 80P
• GKT 4320, GKT 4321
• DKT 2322
• DKT 2000 Series with APA
• DKT APDL
6-94
PI Reference Manual System
The system Tone Plan includes 18 internal tones. These tones are programmed
according to type, number of segments, Basic Tones and Basic Tone duration. Each
tone can be defined as a combination of any of the basic tones.
NAME
See Tables 6-10 and 6-11
Displays the Tone Name. This name cannot be changed and is for display only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-95
System PI Reference Manual
MS - Time 0..5100 ms
See Tables 6-10 and 6-11 for default tone durations
and Table 6-13 for the Basic Tone (Tone 0 to Tone 7) Frequency
Defines the duration of each Basic Tone segment in milliseconds.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
Sends the new tone configuration to the MSBsl/MSBipx/HDC/32GC/4GC Control
cards immediately.
When No is entered, routine diagnostics periodically resend the tone plan to the
card database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]
6-96
PI Reference Manual System
Tone NAME TYPE* #SEG 1TN TIME** 2TN TIME 3TN TIME 4TN TIME 5TN TIME 6TN TIME
#
2 Dial 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 Distinct. 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 Silence 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 Tick 3 2 5 60 0 1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 BRK_ 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
In/Out
11 PL Conf 2 2 61 2000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19 DISA dial 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 PL 3 2 58 1640 0 360 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
R.BACK
25 PL 1 1 59 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Preempt
*TYPE Defintions:
Type 1: Only the first basic tone (1TN) is used for a continuous tone.
TIME is determined by the system according to the actual use of the tone.
Type 2: The relevant basic tones are sounded in turn, only once.
Type 3: The relevant basic tones are sounded cyclically, i.e.one after the other (1TN to 6TN and then beginning
again with 1TN: (multi-burst).
**TIME: milliseconds
6-97
System PI Reference Manual
TONE_PLAN
NO. NAME TYPE #SEG 1TN TIME 2TN TIME 3TN TIME 4TN TIME 5TN TIME 6TN TIME
CC0:
5 Ringback 3 2 2 2000 0 4000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 PL Conf 2 2 61 2000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 PL R.BACK TBD
25 PL Preempt TBD
CC2:
1 Busy 3 2 3 260 0 260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Eu1:
9 Confirm 3 2 1 40 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17 DISA dial 1 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Eu2:
2 Dial 3 6 1 180 0 180 1 180 0 180 1 180 0 1000
Eu9:
Tone Plan TON [0,0,4,2]
2 Dial 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 Distinct. 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 Silence 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19 DISA Dial 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6-98
PI Reference Manual System
6-99
System PI Reference Manual
6-100
PI Reference Manual System
CC1,CC7, 0 Hz 350/440 440 440 440 440 1000 400 780/540 660/540
CC9, CC10
Eu3, Eu5
CC2, CC3, 0 Hz 420 420 420 420 420 1000 420 780/540 660/540
CC5
CC6 0 Hz 450 450 450 450 450 1000 450 780/540 660/540
CC8 0 Hz 420/370 420/370 400 420 400 1000 420 780/540 660/540
Eu6, Eu7 0 Hz 420 400/450 420 420 420 1000 420 780/540 660/540
In CC0 systems these tones are coded using M-Law. All other systems use A-Law (see M_LAW [4]
on page 6-51).
6-101
System PI Reference Manual
Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 and FlexiCom 5000, 6000 Systems Only
The parameters for this branch are configured differently for the two different types
of systems:
• See IPx 800, 3000 or 4000 Configuration to define the PS Ringers for IPx
systems.
• See FlexiCom 5000 or 6000 Configuration to define the PS Ringers for FlexiCom
systems.
Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]
6-102
PI Reference Manual System
6-103
System PI Reference Manual
Shelf # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ringer P. S. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
located on
Shelf #
By default, MAX_RING [0] (page 6-19) is distributed per shelf, thereby supporting
the Normal Power and Double Power mode.
Notes:
• Do not change these defaults for the Normal and Double Power modes.
Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]
6-104
PI Reference Manual System
PS19 Shelf# X
Double Power:
Max_Ring
DC-D
Shelf #: X Y
PS Ringer: X Y (Coral Default)
Max_Ring
DC-D set for Double Power systems.
PS19 Shelf# X
DC-D
Max
_R i n
Economical:
Shelf #: X Y
Shelf# Y g PS Ringer: X X
Shelf# X
Max
_Ri n
Economical:
Shelf #: X Y
PS19
DC-D
Shelf# Y g PS Ringer: Y Y
Max
DC-D PS Ringer: Y Y
_ Ri n or
PS19
DC-D
Shelf# Y g Shelf #: X
PS Ringer: X
Y
X
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-105
System PI Reference Manual
Even Shelves One RPS is installed per even each EVEN shelf.
Only shelf AND no odd shelves exist in
the system.
* MAX_RING [0] (page 6-19) defines the maximum number of SLTs that can
simultaneously ring per one or two Shelves depending on the hardware configuration.
FROM/ 0..15
TO 0..15
SHELF#
Enter the required shelf number range to display or update, that carry SLS cards,
FROM the lowest shelf number TO the highest shelf number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
RINGER # 0..15;
Default: See Table 6-15 for FlexiCom systems
Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]
Defines the shelf number in which there is an RPS unit that supplies power to the
current SHELF# (i.e. the one chosen in the parameter FROM/ TO SHELF# above).
Different shelves defined with the same RINGER # cause MAX_RING [0] to be
distributed among all the shelves that share the same RINGER # definition.
! Do not define the same PS Ringer Shelf # for more than two shelves.
6-106
PI Reference Manual System
Shelf # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ringer P. 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 12
S. located
on Shelf #
By Coral default, MAX_RING [0] (page 6-19) is distributed over every 4 shelves.
Therefore if MAX_RING [0] is set to 20, only 20 SLTs of all the SLTs installed on
shelves 0 to 3 may ring simultaneously.
See Figure 6-2 for examples showing how to define the Ringer PS for the different
FlexiCom Power Modes.
6-107
System PI Reference Manual
Max
_Ri n
Economical:
Shelf #: 0 1 2 3
Shelf# 1 g PS Ringer: 0 0 2 2
Shelf# 0
Max
_Ri n
Economical:
Shelf #: 0 1 2 3
Redundant:
Max
RPS Shelf #: 0 1 2 3
Shelf# 0
PS Ringer: 1 1 3 3
_ Ri n or
RPS Shelf# 1
g Shelf #: 0
PS Ringer: 0
1
0
2
2
3
2
Max_Ring
RPS Shelf# 0
Even Shelves Only:
Ringers RPS [0,0,4,3]
Shelf #: 0 1 2 3
PS Ringer: 0 NA 2 NA
Max_Ring
definition for the odd shelves are irrelevant.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-108
7 Class of Service
This chapter describes all Class of Service (COS) parameters. The COS types are
listed below along with the page number where their descriptions appear:
Notes:
• COS #1 default is initialized for stations defined as attendant.
• COS #10 default is initialized for trunks.
• COS #11 default is initialized for DID trunks.
• COS #0, and COS #2-9 default is initialized for stations.
7-1
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
Establishes the basic Class of Service table for all stations and trunks.
Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).
The Hunt Group COS is always determined by the COS defined for the
first member of the Group.
FROM/TO COS# 0 to maximum number defined in Sizes, see COS on page 4-16
All
Enter the required COS numbers FROM the lowest TO the highest COS number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME (16) [1] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the COS name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters). Use the COS name to
indicate what it restricts, for example, “MANAGERS Only”, or “NO_INTL_
CALLS”.
A name defined as BLANK displays only the COS number. Use “_” (underscore)
for space. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]
7-2
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
TOLL_BAR The following three options, DIGIT_ANLS [2], NO_MATCH (P/B) [3], and PTRN_
TABLE (0-7) [4], apply to stations and incoming trunks when making external calls:
Applies only to stations and incoming trunks when making external calls.
Digit Analysis determines the toll barrier digits condition as follows:
Pass: All outgoing calls are released without toll barrier checks.
Block: All outgoing calls are blocked.
Check: Check the information of the toll barrier digits based on the elements in the
pattern table as determined by the next two parameters: NO_MATCH (P/B) [3] &
PTRN_TABLE (0-7) [4].
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Applies only to stations and incoming trunks when making external calls.
Defines when the default toll barrier condition passes or blocks digits.
This option is relevant when the dialed number does not match one of the ranges
defined in Toll Barriers (see Chapter 13).
Relevant only when Check (C) is entered in the DIGIT_ANLS [2] above.
Pass: All digits will be passed except those Blocked in toll barrier elements.
Block: All digits will be blocked except those Passed in toll barrier elements.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Applies only to stations and incoming trunks when making external calls
7-3
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
F.A.C_TK_ Any valid trunk group(s) and/or Routing Access code(s) or ( ) None
GRPS/ROUTING
Forced Account Code Trunk Groups and Routing Access allows dialing defined
ACCESS
Trunk Groups and Routing Access only after dialing an Account Code. Trunk
[6] Group and Routing Access numbers are entered between parenthesis, with each
group separated by commas or spaces. ACCT [58] (page 7-18) must be set to Yes.
Enter information under the display line.
• To add number(s), enter: (A, number, number 2,...)
• To remove number(s), enter: (R, number, number 2,...)
• To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
defined as Yes.
To enable emergency (E911) dialing without entering an Account Code, define a
Routing Access with several Dial Services to reach the PSTN, where one Dial
Service is for emergency calls and does not require an Account Code. The other
trunk groups in the Dial Services can be defined to require an Account Code by
defining them in the above parameter F.A.C_TK_GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS [6].
This procedure enables avoiding the necessity to define required Account Codes
for Routing Access’.
7-4
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CALL DURATION Any valid trunk group(s) and/or Routing Access code(s) or ( ) None
LIMIT:
Ensures a maximum duration for outgoing calls initiated by trunks, trunk groups
TK_GRPS/ROUTING
and routing access’ listed here. The call duration is quantified in CALL_DURATION_
ACCESS [9] LIMIT [25] (page 6-6) in the Feature Timers branch (FE.T).
Enter information under the display line.
• To add number(s), enter: (A, number, number 2,...)
• To remove number(s), enter: (R, number, number 2,...)
To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-5
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1 Broker Service Allows the user to put a call on hold and then
converse privately with a third party, while
switching between the two calls. The party not in
conversation is put on hold and cannot hear any
other conversation. Xfer/hookswitch can be used
to switch between parties any number of times,
but 3-way conversation is not possible.
Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]
7-6
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-7
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
7-8
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-9
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
7-10
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-11
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
When a dialed station is busy, the calling party may send a call-waiting tone to
indicate that his/her call is waiting. The calling party then hears a ringback tone
(see ORIGINATOR_CALL_WAITING_TONE [2] on page 6-50 to see which ringback
tone the caller hears).
This feature is also known as “Call Offer”.
Corresponding default feature dial number: hookflash (or Transfer)-8.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-12
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
DIRECTED_PICKUP Yes/No
[37]
Yes: COS 0-10 and 12-249;
No: COS 11
Defines whether or not a station user, or trunk, can answer any ringing station by
first dialing the directed Pickup code and then dialing the ringing station’s number.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #180 or 77.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-13
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
Boss Group Privacy defines whether or not a station user can activate the Boss
Group Privacy feature to prohibit another group member from joining an
in-progress call.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #186 or #6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-14
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-15
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-16
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
LARGE_CONF_ Yes/No
FORC_REL [52]
Defines whether or not an idle station user is allowed to force release a single
participant from an ongoing Group Call (or chained Group Call).
This parameter must be set to Yes for COS defined Group Call Operators to operate
the release member from an active group call (default feature code #1305).
Corresponding default feature dial numbers:
Any idle station user can release member: #1446
Group Call Operator: Release member from within Group Call: #1305.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
GROUP_CALL_ Yes/No
RELEASE_ALL [53]
Defines whether or not a user is allowed to terminate (disconnect) an entire Group
Call (all the chained Group Calls or just one of the Group Calls in the chain).
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1447.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
GROUP_CALL_ Yes/No
7-17
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
ADD_ON_ Yes/No
CONFERENCE [55]
Defines whether or not a station user is allowed to establish a temporary Group
Call. The Group Call being used for this purpose must have the ADD_
ON (page 10-32) parameter set to Yes.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1449.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This option does not require the station user to dial an account code. To
require a user to dial an account code, F.A.C_TK_GRPS/ROUTING ACCESS
[6] on page 7-4 must be defined.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1990.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-18
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
DIRECT_DIALING_
ON_DIAL_SERVICE Yes/No;
[62]
Defines whether or not the port user is allowed to access destinations by directly
dialing the dial service number.
Set this parameter to Yes to enable the F.A.C_DIAL_SERVICE [7] (page 7-4)
parameter (i.e. enable VFAC on Dial Service).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PASS_TK_DIAL_TONE Yes/No
[63]
Yes: COS 0-10 and 12-249;
7-19
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
ACCEPT_TRUNKS_ Yes/No
XFERD [66]
Defines whether or not a station user or trunk can accept a trunk transfer by another
user. The purpose of this option is to deny specific users access to external calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TK_TK_XFER_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE [67]
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Override allows a station to establish a connection
between two trunks. Entering Yes allows a trunk to remain connected after the
station involved in a 3-way conference, between two trunks, onhooks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]
7-20
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-21
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
7-22
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
DIAL_TONE 0..3
MESSAGE SOURCE 0..1: IPx 500 and CDRS 200E
[78] R (--): Remove for None
None (--) (Default - normal dial tone is heard)
SAU Requirement
When feature authorization exists (MUSIC DIALTONE on page 3-25), use this
parameter to define which Music Source is to be used instead of a Dial Tone. The
music source may also be a taped recording.
• This source cannot replace Distinctive Dial Tone.
• The music source must be connected via a RMI, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM,
8DRCF or U-RMI/U-MR/RMI/MR Office. Otherwise only normal dial
tone can be heard.
When None (--) is entered, normal dial tone is heard.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-23
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
MLPP:
PREEMPTABLE [80] Yes/No
Set this parameter to Yes to enable MLPP call preemption by this station user.
An established call where one of the parties is defined with COS Preemption set to
No, cannot be pre-empted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Precedence
Description
Capabilities
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-24
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
RELEASE_RESUME_ Yes/No
ALL [88]
Yes: COS 0-9;
No: COS 10-249
Determines whether or not an ACD/UCD group member can independently
Release/Resume to or from all groups of which he or she is a member.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1975.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-25
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
RELEASE_RESUME_ Yes/No
SINGLE_UCD [89]
Yes: COS 0-9;
No: COS 10-249
Determines whether or not a UCD group member can independently
Release/Resume from a single UCD group.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1991.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-26
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
KEYSET ONLY: The following options apply only to the following Keysets.
• FlexSet
• FlexSet_IP 280S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
• CPA
• Wireless handsets (FlexAir/CoralAIR)
• GKT
• DKT
• DST
• EKT
• VDK
AUTO_ANS_V_PAGE Yes/No
[92]
Yes: COS 0-9;
No: COS 10-249
Determines whether or not a keyset station user can activate automatic answer
7-27
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
7-28
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-29
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
ISDN: The following three parameters, BCCOS [101], ISDN_ONLY [102], and CALLER_ID_
CONTROL [103], apply to ISDN sets or stations that access ISDN features:
CALLER_ID_ Yes/No
CONTROL [103]
Defines whether or not a station user can access the feature allowing or restricting
(temporarily) the presentation of their telephone number to the called party.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1444.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]
7-30
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
IP:
SECURED CALLS Yes/No
[104]
Defines whether to secure IP calls by encoding the call. When set to Yes, the call
is encoded according to the highest coding allowed by both sides of the call.
The FlexSet-IP 280S reports its coding abilities in the registration message after
initialization.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-31
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
40ms. The system continues looking for matching compressions within both
COSs.
If no compression matches both COSs, then the call is denied and a CODEC
MISMATCH error ensues.
Enter information under the display line.
• To add a single number or more, enter: (A, number 1, number 2,...)
• To remove a single number or more, enter: (R, number 1, number 2,...)
• To remove all numbers, enter: ( )
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SIP:
TRANSPARENT_SDP Yes/No
[106]
Set this parameter to Yes to do the following:
• Instruct the Coral system to match the Codecs chosen by SIP to SIP stations
(P-Series, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and
third-party SIP terminals), without Coral interference, regardless of whether or
not the Coral can support the Codecs (i.e. video, data, or future audio
CODECs).
• Instruct the Coral to accept external fax transmissions via T.38.
Additionally, this SDP mode also enables three terminals to conduct 3-way SIP to
SIP to SIP calls, or video calls with audio CODECs not recognized by the Coral.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Station and Trunk COS COS,0 [0,0,2,0]
7-32
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
The following features apply only to stations defined as Attendant (see ATT [17] on
page 9-8:SLT and on page 9-35:Keysets/FlexSets). The attendant controls are
divided into three categories: Station Controls, Trunk Controls and System
Controls.
Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).
ST CONTROL: The following parameters determine the ability of an Attendant station user to (a)
change some non-Attendant station definitions (such as originate/terminate only),
(b) establish “hot” destinations, (c) block stations and trunks, (d) set wakeup and
call forward assignments for stations.
NAME (16) [1] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the COS name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters). Use the COS name to
indicate what it restricts, for example, “MANAGERS Only”, or “NO_INTL_
CALLS”.
A name defined as BLANK displays only the COS number. Use “_” (underscore)
for space. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-33
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
7-34
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-35
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
CALL_TRACE_PRINT Yes/No
Attendant Class of Service COS,1 [0,0,2,1]
[17]
Defines whether or not the Attendant can print the Call Trace Records created. This
parameter is only relevant when CALL_TRACE above is set to Yes.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1743.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-36
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-37
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
TRUNK The following parameters determine an Attendant’s ability to modify certain trunk
CONTROL: operations.
Defines whether or not an attendant can set or reset the Auto Guard status of
individual trunks. When set to Yes, Auto Guard Active automatically checks trunks
for dial tone and removes trunks from service if no dial tone is present (see also,
AUTO_GUARD [2] on page 6-52).
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1998.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-38
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-39
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
7-40
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-41
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
The Attendant may add, change, or delete public speed call libraries, but
may not change the Toll Barrier Override and Name parameters of an
entry (Public Library). The Toll Barrier Override default is No and can be
changed only via a PI service terminal.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #194.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-42
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
WAKEUP_REPORT Yes/No
[40]
Yes: COS 0-9;
No: COS 10-249
SAU Requirement
Defines whether or not an attendant can send a request to receive a wakeup report
on a monitor or printer. If no Authorization exists when dialing, the message
ILLEGAL appears on the station attendant’s keyset.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1971
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CHARGE_PRINT_ Yes/No
AND_RESET [42]
Yes: COS 0-9;
No: COS 10-249
SAU Requirement
Defines whether or not an attendant can send a request to receive a printout and
then reset the system Charge Table. If no Authorization exists when dialing, the
ACD_CALLS_FOR_ Yes/No
BUSY [43]
Defines whether or not the attendant is allowed to determine the maximum number
of calls waiting for any ACD group in the system.
Corresponding default feature dial number: #1746.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-43
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
The Tenant COS is an optional programming tool which allows the system to be
segmented into as many as 64 (0-63) unique Tenant Groups. Each tenant group is
a “separate virtual system”. It can be independently configured to operate as a key
system, hybrid system or private branch exchange.
Tenant programming is usually applied when one Coral has to serve several groups
of users. Tenant COS allows intra-system calling to be segmented as if each tenant
group owns a dedicated system.
Hierarchical orders can be established through tenant groups. For example, a
manager can be defined to enable placement of calls to assistants, but the assistants
can be defined so that they cannot directly call the manager. Instead, their calls can
be routed to another destination.
The Tenant COS feature may require altering the maximum number of Classes of
Service provided in the system size programming (see Chapter 4 - System Sizes).
The COS entry in system sizes should allow each tenant its own Class of Service.
By assigning different COS numbers to particular ports, groups may be composed
solely of trunks, of stations, or a combination of trunks and stations.
Tenant stations may be allowed or denied access to other group stations and trunks.
Inter-tenant calling may be allowed either one-way only or two-way (by defining
the Tenant Groups and Group Access’s accordingly). When Tenant COS is defined
as one-way, Tenant A stations can call Tenant B stations, but Tenant B stations
cannot call Tenant A stations. When defined as two-way, both tenant groups can
call each other.
COS defaults to tenant group 0. There may be as many as 64 (0-63) unique tenant
Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]
groups and as many as 250 Classes of Service, as defined in Sizes (see page 4-16),
allowing an average of up to four different Class Of Services for each tenant group.
Figures 7-1, 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4 below, illustrate typical tenant group applications.
7-44
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
GRP. ACCESS Defines the group access, i.e., all ports with the same current COS that can make
calls to other ports whose TNNT_GRP number is defined in this parameter.
The Group Access are divided into four groups, 0-15, 16-31, 32-47, and 48-63.
Each group has its value defined as Multiple.
Notes:
• Enter information under the display line.
• The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order
and separated by a space or comma.
• Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).
7-45
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
COS 1 COS 2
Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]
TNNT_GRP 1 TNNT_GRP 2
TNNT_GRP 63
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-46
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
VP. ACCESS Allows defining all ports with the same current COS that can make voice page calls
to other keysets whose VP_TNNT_GRP number is defined in this parameter.
Notes:
• Enter information under the display line.
• The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order
and separated by a space or comma.
• Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).
7-47
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
Figure 7-2.Tenant
Group-Voice Page COS 0
Access
VP_TNNT_GRP 0
COS 1 COS 2
VP_TNNT_GRP 1 VP_TNNT_GRP 2
VP_TNNT_GRP 63
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-48
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
Defines the Silent Monitor access, i.e. all ports with the same current COS
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SM.ACCESS
that can silent monitor other ports whose SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_
GRP number is defined in anyone of the following four parameters: Notes:
• Enter information under the display line.
• The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order
and separated by a space or comma.
• Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).
7-49
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 0
COS 1 COS 2
SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 1 SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 2
SILENT_MONITOR_TNNT_GRP 63
7-50
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
BRK.ACCESS Defines the Break-In access, i.e. all ports with the same current COS that can
break-in to established calls of other ports whose BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP number
is defined in anyone of the following four parameters:
Notes:
• Enter information under the display line.
• The number(s) must be entered between parentheses, in ascending order
and separated by a space or comma.
• Closed parentheses indicate that access is denied (no link).
7-51
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP 0
COS 1 COS 2
BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP 1 BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP 2
BREAKIN_TNNT_GRP 63
7-52
PI Reference Manual Class of Service
7-53
Class of Service PI Reference Manual
Tenant Class of Service COS,2 [0,0,2,2]
7-54
8 Trunk Controls
8-1
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-2
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
General Trunk Timers are used to set the system timers for all trunks. Specific
trunk types (for example, E&M, DID) may have additional timing parameters
which must also be programmed.
Recall determines the time interval a transferred or camped on trunk call remains
unanswered at the transfer-to station before recalling to the call originator or
rerouting to the Incomplete Call Destination. This feature is not relevant when a
station is defined as Multi-Appearance.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-3
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
INCOMING: The following options are relevant for incoming calls only.
Determines the time period that an incoming external caller on a trunk defined as
DISA [0] (page 8-11) must hear a ringback tone before the incoming call is answered
with system dial tone, for further inward dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Determines the maximum system waiting time for receiving the first dialed digit,
General Trunk Timers TK.T,0 [0,0,1,2,0]
Determines the maximum system waiting time between any two dialed digits in an
incoming call on a DID, E&M or DISA remote access trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-4
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Determines the maximum system waiting time to detect tone on outgoing trunks.
The delay operates under the following conditions:
• While waiting for trunk dial tone (if so defined) in order to start outdialing
• After an E6 (#6) command while waiting for second trunk dial tone (speed and
routing dialing).
• While waiting for ringback or busy tone by the Auto Called Number Repeat
feature. Tone detection requires an 8DTD, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM or 8DRCF in
card installed in the system. These cards are not required in the CDRS 200E
and IPx 500.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Determines the maximum system waiting time, after trunk seizure, for the first
dialed digit on outgoing trunk calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-5
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-6
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Each trunk port is assigned one of the five Trunk Timers Table profiles (TK TIMER
[2] (page 8-11)). Loop-start/Ground-start (LS/GS) and Direct Inward Dial (DID)
trunks default to values listed in Table 0, E&M trunks default to values listed in the
first Table. Additional timers may be required for specific trunk types.
FROM 0..4
TO 0..4
TK_TIMER#
Enter the required range of trunk timers profiles; FROM the lowest TO the highest.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Defaults:
Timer 0: Timer 1:
CC0: 67 CC0: 60
CC1: 60 CC7: 20
Eu0: 10 Other Systems: 40
Eu1-Eu8:14
Other systems: 6
H.Flash (i.e. Calibrated Opening) determines the duration of the pulse sent as a
hookswitch flash on a trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INCOMING: The following parameters are relevant only during incoming calls on trunks, and
may be adjusted to match the protocol for the terminating end.
8-7
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
OUTGOING: The following options are relevant only during outgoing calls on trunks, and may
be adjusted to suit the receiving end protocol.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-8
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Notes:
• If an 8DTD, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, 8DRCF or U-RMI/U-MR Office card
is installed in the Coral system, this time is added to TONE_DELAY in
General Trunk Timers (see page 8-5).
• Relevant to Eu3 systems only: After dialing 07 (the first two digits of
outside numbers) the system automatically stops sending digits and
waits for a dial tone from the CO, before sending the remaining
digits.The wait period for sending the remaining digits is defined
through the SECOND DIAL TONE parameter, above. (However, TONE_
DELAY is not added to the wait time.) If the dial tone is not detected
before time-out, the system disconnects the call. This parameter
operates in a manner similar to the E6 key when programmed into
Speed Dial Numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-9
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
The Multi-Frequency Receiver (MFR) is a shared service card that allows defining
the MFR resource card parameters. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).
Notes:
• An MFR card must be installed in order to utilize the MFC in the
following cards and countries: 30T-DOD: CC1; 30T/E-DID/DOD and
4/8BID: Eu1; 30T/M-DID/DOD: CC2,CC3,CC5,CC6,Eu4,Eu6; 8DID /S-Z:
CC3,CC4.
• Programming the MFR card must be accompanied by defining MFC_
ACK [3] (page 8-4).
FROM/TO CARD_DB# 0
Enter the card database table number. Currently only zero (0) is allowed, which is
assigned to all MFR cards.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
Transfers the updated data immediately to the card database. This parameter is used
only in Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-10
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Trunk Definitions are used to specify the general trunk definitions per trunk dial
number. The general definition of a Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk does not
include all fields, although field position numbers do not change. Additional
programming is required for each trunk type. Field Numbers appear in square
brackets ([ ]).
In this table, a sign indicates a field used for DID trunk definition.
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid trunk dial number; Default: All defined trunks
Enter the required range of trunk dial numbers, FROM the lowest trunk dial
number TO the highest trunk dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-11
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
MFC[3] Yes/No
Determines whether the trunk signaling type is MFC. Generally, the MFC is used
in the following countries and cards:
30T-DOD: CC1; 30T/E-DID/DOD and 4/8BID: Eu1;
30T/M-DID/DOD: CC2, CC3 , CC5 ,CC6, Eu4,Eu6; 8DID/S-Z: CC3,CC4.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the following TYPE parameter is not displayed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
• In European systems this parameter is not used for BID and 30T/E-DDI
trunks; MFC is used instead.
• For 4TWL trunk card version 1.02 and lower, set this parameter to 1
(DTMF). Pulse dialing on the 4TWL requires card version 1.03 or
higher.
Determines the type of trunk signaling method used for dialing.
Type Description
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-12
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
When the Trunk TYPE [4] above is defined as 3-CAMA, then this parameter
should be defined as Y to prevent the trunk from receiving calls and thus
keeping it available for outgoing emergency calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-13
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-14
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Notes:
• Relevant for Loop Start trunks.
• Also relevant in European systems for ALS70-Non DID trunks.
• When the Trunk TYPE [4] above is defined as 3-CAMA, then this
parameter should be defined as Y.
Disconnect Supervision determines if system call processing logic can expect
disconnect supervision from the Central Office. If N is entered, the trunk is
considered a Port Without Disconnect Supervision (PWDS), and when connected
to another PWDS, will recall to the incomplete calls destination periodically to
determine if a conversation is still in progress between the two ports. N should be
entered if disconnect supervision is not provided, or not consistently provided on
the trunk. Should disconnect supervision appear on the trunk, an N in this entry will
inhibit its recognition by the system. If Y is entered, supervision must be provided
by the Central Office.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-15
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
RECEIVE_SPKR_ Yes/No
STATUS [20]
When set to Yes, this parameter enables the far-end user over a trunk to receive an
alert tone indicating that the second conversing party (called or calling party) is in
Speaker Mode (activated for handsfree or group conversation).
This feature is only relevant when the second party is a keyset (FlexSet, FlexSet-IP,
DKT, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL) station user.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IP_FAX_ENABLED Yes/No
[21]
PRI Trunks Only
Defines whether the MG/MRC module should try and detect Fax tones from this
trunk.
The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can
mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt
voice calls.
The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there
is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have
Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components
that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when
one of the parties is a SIP station or a SIP Trunk. The parameter in irrelevant for
MGCP stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l v91536*/
IP_MODEM_ENABLED Yes/No
[22]
Defines whether the MG/MRC module should try and detect modem Tones from
this trunk.
General Trunk Definitions TRK,0 [0,2,1,0,0,0]
The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can
mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt
voice calls.
The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there
is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have
Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components
that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when
one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BLOCK_REORDER_ Yes/No
TONE(VM) [23]
Disable the reorder tone sent to the trunk that continues to seize the 2-way call at
disconnect when the other party has already onhooked.
Tip: Set this parameter to Yes for trunks ports servicing only Voicemail.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-16
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
KEEP_RTP_AFTER_ Yes/No
3WAY [25]
This parameter is relevant when a trunk port participates in a 3WAY call where at
least one of the parties is a NET-IP trunk. When Y (Yes) is selected, RTP is
maintained after one of the parties exits the 3WAY call. When N (No) is selected
for all of the ports engaged in a 3WAY call, RTP is discontinued after one of the
parties exits the 3WAY call, and is then re-established for the remaining two
parties.
Figure 8-2 NET- IP trunk NET- IP trunk
A A
3WAY 2WAY
B C C
Any port Any port Any port
Only when the parameter for all three ports that participate in a 3WAY
call is defined as No, will RTP be discontinued (regardless of the branch
under which it is defined). See:
KEEP_RTP_AFTER_3WAY [43] (page 9-18) (SLT Definition (SLT) and
KEEP_RTP_AFTER_3WAY [85] (page 9-70) (Keyset Definition branch (KEY).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-17
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Trunk Group Definition defines the features that are relevant for all the trunks
listed in the selected Trunk Group. The features and trunks group members are
defined in this section.
After the trunk group parameters are entered into the database and before they are
updated, the following message is displayed:
ADD/REMOVE MEMBERS MAY EFFECT CLA EVENTS. RESTART CLA IF
NEEDED.
For CAMA (E911) Trunks:
It is strongly recommended to create a trunk group with only CAMA trunks
all having the same parameter definitions for DTD Override (Yes) and
Dialing Method (Enblock) to enable Emergency 911 service.
The first trunk group in the system is trunk group index 0. The default
Numbering Plan defines this Trunk Group’s dial number as 9 (or 0 for Eu0,
Eu1, Eu2 and Eu9 countries).
FROM/TO Any valid trunk group access code number; Default: All
TK_GRP#
Enter the required range of trunk group dial numbers; FROM the lowest trunk
group number TO the highest trunk group number.
The first trunk group in the system is trunk group index 0. The default
Numbering Plan defines this Trunk Group’s dial number as 9 (or 0 for Eu0,
Eu1, Eu2 and Eu9 countries).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]
NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum 5 ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the trunk group’s short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters), which
appears on keysets equipped with a display when the group is accessed for an
outgoing call. A group name defined as BLANK does not appear on the keyset
display and the keyset displays its dial number. See General Rules for Entering
Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-18
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
IP_ZONE 0..max defined in Sizes for ZONE (page 4-19) or R for (--) None
Define the IP Zone to be used for this IP Network Trunk group. Only one Zone can
be defined per Trunk Group. (Note: IP_NET [45] (page 5-48) dial numbers may be
defined only in QSIG Trunk groups).
The following warning is issued:
All NET IP calls in this group will disconnect upon
Update!
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
QSIG Yes/No
When changing trunk group types from QSIG to non-QSIG, first remove all
the trunks from the trunk group and then change from Y to N or vice
versa.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DTMF_DIGITS_ Yes/No
BEFORE_ANSWER
Relevant only for Network Calls at the outgoing Gateway PINX.
This parameter relates to the PINX connected to an external application (usually a
Voicemail system) or a CO trunk. The technician must check the external
application to determine whether the Coral should send the DTMF digits before or
after an answer signal is received from the external application or CO trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-19
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
CPN x
CPN x
Network QSIG screened
CPN y ANI
Coral Screen ISDN (PRI, BRI) Public
Gateway CPN y
Send Network screened
PINX (Filter)
Public ISDN CPN z
CPN z Network screened
one of these trunks, the resulting ANI includes the station number, thus creating an
unidentifiable ANI which is not accepted by the CO.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1. The Site_LDN # (if defined) is sent regardless of the SITE LDN ALL CALLS (Route: LCR, 1)
definition.
2. When the NPID of the received CPN is Private, then the UNAVAILABLE IE is sent.
8-20
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
DTD OVERRIDE No (Follow originating port COS), Yes (Disregard originating port COS)
• Irrelevant for ISDN (IPG, PRI, BRI) trunks.
• For CAMA trunks, set this parameter to Yes. (It is strongly
recommended to create a separate trunk group for CAMA trunks with
this definition group wide.)
Override Dial Tone Detector determines whether outgoing access to a member of
the group allows dialing on the trunk before dial tone is detected, regardless of the
originating port Class of Service requirement to wait for dial tone before dialing.
Dial tone detection (entering an N) requires an 8DTD, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM or
8DRCF card to be installed in the system (see DTD [70] on page 7-21).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OGR_OVERRIDE Yes/No
Defines whether a station defined as Outgoing Restricted is allowed to use this
specific trunk group to make outgoing trunk calls, overriding the restriction.
For example: hotel guests who have already checked out can still access Voicemail
connected over an E&M trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
COLLECT_TONE_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE?
This parameter is relevant only if COLLECT_CALL_REJECT_TONE [40] on
page 9-17 (SLT) or 9-65 (KEY) is set to YES.
Defines whether or not an incoming collect call arriving via this trunk group to a
station may override the collect call restriction, if defined for the station.
This is relevant when a Coral user needs permission to accept collect calls from a
specific destination only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-21
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
PAGING Yes/No
This feature applies to groups of E&M trunks connected to the paging system
known as ESPA protocol (European Selective Paging manufacturers Association)
Notes:
• This feature is mutually exclusive with SDT, above. If Yes is selected for
PAGING, then SDT must be set to No.
• When selected, the E&M trunk must be defined as DTMF (see page
8-12) or IMMEDIATE (see page 8-87)
Eu0 (Netherlands)
0 6 -- -- -- 2
0 9 -- -- -- 2
0 7 any digit -- -- 3
0 1,2,3,4,5 or 8 0 -- -- 3
0 1,2,3,4 or 5 3 -- -- 3
0 1,3,4,5 or 8 5 -- -- 3
0 3 or 5 8 -- -- 3
Eu1 (Belgium)
0 0 -- -- -- 2
Eu3 (Spain)
0 7 -- -- -- 2
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-22
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
TK_TK_CONNECT_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE
When the trunk group includes ISDN trunks defined as NETWORK_SIDE,
this parameter must be set to YES.
Trunk to Trunk Connect Override allows or denies a trunk group member to
connect to another trunk within the same group, as well as within another group.
This parameter is relevant only if TK_TO_TK_CONNECT [0] on page 6-8 is set to No,
and TK_TK_XFER_OVERRIDE [67] on page 7-20 is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BCCOS 0..63
ISDN only
Defines which Bearer Capability COS is applied for trunks defined as ISDN when
dialing in or out of the Coral System. See BCCOS Control beginning on page 26-5.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
LAR_MAX_ 0..2..10
ASYNCHRONOUS_
Defines the maximum number of Look Ahead Routing (LAR) attempts
FAILS
(undertaken within a specific trunk group) to re-route a call to the trunk next in
order to the one that has failed with an identifiable cause pointing to asynchronous
8-23
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
LAR_TRIGGERS_SET 0..3
Defines the Look Ahead Routing (LAR) Trigger set for this Trunk Group.
A LAR trigger set groups together ISDN/QSIG causes launching LAR. Each set
pertains to a specific network, e.g. Public Network, Private QSIG Network, IP
Network or Analog Network. (see NAME (16) [1] (page 15-34) in the Look Ahead
Routing Triggers beginning on page 15-32).
When an asynchronous failure occurs over a call sent via that trunk group the call
is rerouted in the specified network.
An asynchronous failure occurs when the signaling sequence that sets up the call
is completed before the connection establishment confirmation has been received
from the terminating end.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter provides the Alternate Line ID (i.e. caller number information) for
incoming tandem (transit) calls that do not possess Caller ID information by
marking the call with an ALI index number. The index number given in this
parameter (i.e., 0 to 3200) is defined with Caller ID info in the ISDN/ALI tables in
the Alternate Line ID (page 26-9) branch (ROOT,5,3).
The Caller ID information is displayed at the terminating end and can be used for
call recording systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-24
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
DIAL IN/CALLER OUT 0..to Max defined in SIZ (see OFFSET_FILTER (page 4-15);
OFFSET R (Remove for None)
Defines which offset filter is relevant for E&M or DID members when dialing into
the Coral system (see page 8-42). Trunks dialing into the system are interpreted as
the specification of the filter (see Offset Filters beginning on page 8-42).
In the absence of an extended filter (NONE), default, each digit is separately
verified according to the numbering plan without filtering.
When an offset filter is defined, the incoming digits are modified to match the
system numbering plan. Applies also to outgoing calls by reverse defining the ANI.
If DIAL IN FILTER above is defined, then the incoming number is first filtered by
that Dial In filter and then filtered according to this offset filter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-25
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
CALLER # OUT Delete Digits using “Rn”: where n is the number of digits to be removed
FILTER from the beginning of the ANI
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-26
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
First Incoming The following parameters define the ANI modification required based on the type
ANI Filters: of the incoming number.
A second, additional, ANI modification can be defined by defining the parameters
for Second Incoming ANI Filters:, below, however, this set of filters are applied to
the ANI before the Second Set.
ADD/INSERT Digit string from trunk: 156 Defines the required digits to be added to
DIGITS Desired digit string: 4156 the beginning of the ANI call number.
Filter entry: 4
DELETE Digit string from trunk:123456 Enclose the digit pattern that should be
MATCHING DIGITS Desired digit string: 456 matched and deleted between square
(Conditional Extraction) brackets ([ ]).
Filter entry: [123]
DELETE DIGITS Digit string from trunk:396354 Define the number of digits to be deleted
Desired digit string: 354 from the beginning of the ANI call
number by entering R followed by the
Filter entry: R3 quantity of digits to delete.
If more than 9 digits must be removed
using the Rn (where “n” = any digit from
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-27
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Relevant Define the type/s of ANI number to which the above filters are to be applied.
Number Types: More than one type of number may be defined as Yes.
UNKNOWN Yes/No
Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined
above, for incoming ANI call numbers of an UNKNOWN type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INTERNATIONAL Yes/No
NATIONAL Yes/No
SUBSCRIBER Yes/No
8-28
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Second This is the second set of parameters that define the ANI call number modification
Incoming ANI required, based on the type of incoming number. This set of filters is applied on the
Filters: ANI number only after the first set is applied.
To alter the ANI for a range of stations, use the OFFSET below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-29
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Relevant Define the type/s of ANI number to which the above filters are to be applied.
Number Types: More than one type of number may be defined as Yes.
UNKNOWN Yes/No
Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined
above, for incoming ANI call numbers of an UNKNOWN type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INTERNATIONAL Yes/No
NATIONAL Yes/No
Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined
above, for incoming ANI call numbers of a NATIONAL type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SUBSCRIBER Yes/No
Set this parameter to Yes to apply the two filters (FILTER and OFFSET), defined
above, for incoming ANI call numbers of a SUBSCRIBER type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Trunk Group Definition TGDEF [0,5,1,0]
8-30
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
METERING_UNIT_ 0.00 to 65000.99 (for systems with decimal definitions for cents)
CHARGE 0 to 65000 (for systems defining only integers)
N (number of pulses is displayed, instead of cost)
INCOMING_CLI_ Yes/No
REQUEST
Determines if a request should be made to the CO for Calling Line Identification
(CLI) on an incoming call.
Enables the display of incoming caller identification (CID or CLI) to telephone
with a display unit. During ringing, the incoming caller identification display
allows the called party to decide whether to answer the call or not. The CLI number
will remain on display for the call duration, both in the CAP and the SMDR listing.
The incoming CLI can be received via 4/8T-CID Loop-Start analog trunk cards and
via MFC trunks. Likewise in DTMF signaling, only from E&M continuous with
Wink Start trunks.
Notes:
• To display the incoming call (CLI) in the SMDR listing, ON_LINE
EXTENDED_SMDR_INFORMATION [7] on page 14-4 (SMDR SMDR
Control branch (SMDR,0 [3,2,0])) must be defined.
• This parameter is also defined in the DID/E&M Groups (page 8-36).
• The CLI feature for analog Loop-Start / Ground-Start trunk requires
8-31
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
SEND_ANI_USING_ Yes/No
DTMF/MFC
Not Relevant for QSIG groups or when ANI_SCREENING_SEND, above, is
set to Omit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DISABLE_DTMF_ Yes/No
SUPERVSION
Defines whether DTMF resources will be used to process the incoming digits over
this trunk line. When this parameter is set to Yes, DTMF receivers are not used.
Set this parameter to No if this trunk group will be used to serve applications where
Coral DTMF analysis is required, such as external Voicemail., Answering
Machines and FlexiCall.
Set this parameter to Yes only if this trunk group will be used exclusively to serve
applications where Coral DTMF analysis is not required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-32
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
MEM # Default: Trunk Group Index 0: All LS/GS trunks in ascending order,
equipped at First Initialization,
Default for all Other Groups: None
Range: Any valid outgoing trunk dial numbers;
Max: 95 members
In European systems all ALS70 and GID trunks are (by default) also
members of trunk group index 0.
Identifies the dial number of each trunk, in ascending order, assigned to the group.
Each trunk can be a member of only one trunk group. A trunk need not be a
member of any group, however outgoing access to a trunk cannot be denied by
Class of Service unless the trunk is a member of a trunk group.
Entering R removes the member currently displayed from the group and
decrements the MEM# of following group members, filling the void left by the
removed member.
Always remove a trunk from a trunk group before the trunk dial number is
removed from the numbering plan.
8-33
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Alternate Route is used to determine the outgoing call route when all trunks of a
selected trunk group are busy. While not intended to take the place of true Routing
Access (which requires additional authorization), alternate routing is a simple
method of accommodating trunk group overflow conditions.
Each Alternate Route entry specifies a primary trunk group, one or more alternate
trunk groups or public library numbers, and the time of day the alternate route is
available. Each trunk group can have only one alternate route available at any given
time of day. If more than one alternate route is entered, the time period that each
alternate route is available must not overlap or conflict with the time period of any
other entry.
Alternate Route is a type of “cascade route”. If Trunk Group A alternate routes to
Trunk Group B, and Trunk Group B alternate routes to Trunk Group C, when Trunk
Groups A and B are both busy, an outgoing call attempt to Trunk Group A selects
a trunk from Trunk Group C if one is available.
Alternate Route programming is not necessary when routing access is implemented
in the system.
A trunk group is limited to 96 trunks. To add additional trunk groups, the Alternate
Route branch can be utilized to route incoming calls via different trunks (in
addition to outgoing calls).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-34
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-35
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
DID/E&M Groups establish from one to four unique Direct Inward Dial (DID) and
E&M trunk groups. Each group has an individual digit filter, allowing incoming
digits from the trunks within a specific group to be modified thus matching the
system numbering plan. A DID/E&M trunk may be a member of a DID/E&M
group consisting of one or more DID/E&M trunks, however a trunk can be a
member of only one DID/E&M group.
If a DID/E&M line belongs to a DID/E&M group, the number of digits received
by the Coral is defined when the group was assigned its identifying numbers. The
number assigned to a group can consist of between one and ten (1 - 10) digits. Once
the number is assigned it is fixed unless changed through the filter. By using the
filter the DID/E&M number can be changed to suit various system requirements by
making it compatible to the system numbering plan. The number pattern is verified
and acted on by the system only after all digits are received as defined.
If a DID/E&M line does not belong to a DID/E&M group, then each digit of the
numbering plan is separately verified for acceptance. Only after all the digits have
passed and the numbering plan is correct, communication continues without
filtering.
Legal DID group members may be defined through the following types of cards:
• 4TWL • 8DID • 4GID • 30T/E
• 8GID • 4BID • 30T
• 8BID • 30T/M
DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]
8-36
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
FROM 0..3
TO 0..3
DID/E&M_GRP#
Enter the required range of DID/E&M group index numbers FROM the lowest
DID/E&M group index number TO the highest DID/E&M group index number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum: 5 ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the trunk group’s short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) and full
name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters), associated with the trunk group. This
entry is used only for programming purposes. Incoming trunk calls display the
individual trunk name, not this group name. See General Rules for Entering Names
on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-37
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
When more than one group of stations or when the capability to address a
fragmented numbering plan is required, use the INCOMING_OFFSET_FILTER listed
below.
ADD/INSERT Digit string from trunk: 156 Enter the required digits at the position in the
DIGITS Desired digit string: 4156 filter where the insertion is desired. Additional
digits are inserted before any remaining digits
are received from the trunk. Digits cannot be
Filter entry: 4 added to the end of a digit string received
from the trunk.
DELETE Digit string from trunk:123456 Enclose the digit pattern that should be
MATCHING DIGITS Desired digit string: 456 matched and deleted between square
(Conditional brackets ([ ]). Digits will only be deleted if the
Extraction) pattern appears starting with the first digit
Filter entry: [123] received from the trunk. The received pattern
must match the pattern within the brackets,
exactly. Entering D in the digit string matches
any digit received in that position.
DELETE DIGITS Digit string from trunk:396354 A specific number of digits may be deleted
Desired digit string: 354 within the string by entering R followed by
the quantity of digits to delete. Digits are
always deleted from a received string starting
Filter entry: R3 with the first digit received. Digits in the
middle of the received string may not be
deleted.
INSERT DELAY Digit string from trunk: 1234 Incoming calls routed from the system to
Desired digit string: other switching systems in a network may
6000,14 second delay,1234 require delays (pauses) during the digit string
transmission. Delays are entered into the
filter string at any position by entering D
Filter entry: *6000D9D5 followed by a single digit (1-9). If more than 9
DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-38
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
INCOMING_CLI_ Yes/No
REQUEST
Determines if a request should be made to the CO for Calling Line Identification
(CLI) on an incoming call.
Enables the display of incoming caller identification (CID or CLI) to telephone
with a display unit. During (Loop-Start analog trunk) ringing, the incoming caller
identification display allows the called party to decide whether to answer the call
or not. The CLI number will remain on display for the call duration, both in the
CAP and the SMDR listing.
Notes:
• This parameter is also defined in the DID/E&M Groups (page 8-36) branch
(DIDG [0,5,6]).
• The CLI feature for analog Loop-Start / Ground-Start trunk requires
Authorization for Caller ID.
• The CLI display feature for SLT requires a 8/16/24SLS (software
version 3.xx or higher) or 8/24SA peripheral card, iDSP card,
Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit
installed on the SLT port.
• In the Coral IPx Office systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires
a U-RMI Office or U-MR Office card, Authorization for SLT-CID, and
an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port.
8-39
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
• In the IPx 500 systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires an
MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 or higher, Authorization for
SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port.
• In the CDRS 200E systems the CLI display feature for SLT requires
Authorization for SLT-CID, and an FSK compatible display unit
installed on the SLT port.
• For display of the incoming call (CLI) in the SMDR listing, the
“On-Line Extended SMDR Information” parameter on the SMDR SMDR
Control (page 14-2) branch (SMDR,0 [3,2,0]) must be defined.
• This parameter is also defined in Trunk Group Definition beginning on
page 8-18.
When a particular trunk is defined in both the above tables during an incoming call,
the CLI parameter in the DID/E&M Groups (page 8-36) branch (DIDG [0,5,6]) is the
determining factor.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
COLLECT_TONE_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE?
This parameter is relevant only if
COLLECT_CALL_REJECT_TONE [40] (page 9-17) (SLT Definition branch (SLT
[or IST or ROOT,0,2,1,1])) or
COLLECT_CALL_REJECT_TONE [75] (page 9-65) (Keyset Definition branch
(KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0])) is set to YES.
Defines whether or not an incoming collect call arriving via this trunk group to a
DID/E&M Groups DIDG [0,5,6]
station may override the collect call restriction, if defined for the station.
This is relevant when a Coral user needs permission to accept collect calls from a
specific destination only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-40
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
MEM # Any valid DID or E&M trunk dial number up to 255 members, None
Identifies the dial number of the DID or E&M trunk in the DID/E&M group. The
prompt appears each time an entry is made and [ENTER] is pressed.
If an attempt is made to define a member that is not a DID or E&M trunk number
this error message appears:
NOT DID/E&M TK#.
A trunk can be a member of only a single DID/E&M group. If an attempt is made
to define a trunk that is already defined, the following message appears:
To insert a DID or E&M trunk dial number into an existing list, press
ALREADY DEFINED IN GRP#?
[CR] at the trunk dial number which is to follow the inserted trunk. Enter
A and the new trunk dial number. In order to remove a trunk from the
group, enter [R]. All trunks must be removed from a group before the
group can be deleted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-41
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Offset Filter #1
8-42
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Once this filter is selected, the following option menu becomes available:
Option Description
ERROR MESSAGES The following error messages may be received when programming Offset Filters:
8-43
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Power Fail Trunk Definition establishes the database for power fail (PF) trunks.
Power fail programming applies only to LS/GS (Loop Start or Ground Start) analog
trunks. Power fail trunks are standard Ground Start or Loop Start trunks connected
to a Power Fail trunk card, along with any one of the following cards:
• 4T cards with four (4) PF ports (CKT# 0, 1, 2, and 3):
4TPF, 4T/S-PF-ES, 4TMR/S-12PF-ES, 4T/S PF-G, 4TMR/S-12/16PF,
4TMR/S-12/16PF/S, 4TMR-PF-G, 4TMR/S-50/16-PF-G
4TMR-PFipx, 4TMR/S-12/16-PF-Gipx, 4ALS
4T-C, 4T-Cipx, 4T Office, 4T-CID, 4T-CIDipx and 4T-CID Office
• 8T cards with four (4) PF ports (CKT# 2, 3, 4, and 5):
8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T/S PF-G, 8TPF, 8ALS,
8T-Cipx, 8T-CIDipx, 8T Office, 8T-CID Office
Each LS/GS trunk port may have one station dial number assigned to it, along with
any one of the following cards:
• 2/4/8SK (Cards Discontinued)
• Full size: 8/24SA, 8/16/24SLS, or 4/8/16SH card
• IPx 500: 8/16/24SAipx or 8/16SLSipx card
• CDRS/CDRX 200E: 8/16/24SAipx or 8/16SLSipx card
• IPx Office: 4/8/16/24SA Office, 4/8/20S Office, 4SA+8Fx Office, 4SA+16Fx
Office, 8SA+8Fx Office or 8SA+16Fx Office card
• station card circuit, plus a SLT
• station card circuit, plus a power fail EKT301-PF or EKT321-PF. (Discontinued)
Power Fail Trunk Definition TRK,4 [0,2,1,0,0,4]
In European systems 4ALS and 8ALS trunks have the Power Fail option
when defined as Loop Start or NonDID type trunks. Incoming trunk seize
must be accompanied with a ring current, see CHECK_RING for the
relevant Port Database.
8-44
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid LS/GS analog trunk dial numbers/All LS/GS analog trunks
8-45
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid LS/GS trunk number // All defined LS/GS trunks
Enter the required range of trunk numbers, FROM the lowest TO the highest.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-46
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
trunk. Should disconnect supervision appear on the trunk, an N in this entry will
inhibit its recognition by the system.
Entering Y requires Central Office supervision.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
POLAR RVRS
UPON:
ANSWER [5] Yes/No
Polarity Reverse Upon Answer determines whether the first polarity reverse after
outgoing seizure is interpreted as answer supervision. If Y is entered, ANSWER_
DELAY [9] on page 8-5 (General Trunk Timers) is active, and battery reverse must
occur before the trunk can be held or transferred.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-47
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-48
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
The Caller ID information is sent to a Coral Caller ID (CID) box port on a RS-232
serial interface port terminal. The terminal should be defined in TERM as CID (see
page 17-22).
For more information refer to Engineering Note -120EN9700, Caller ID On
Analog Trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-49
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
The Trunk Port Database allows programming the trunk port database tables for
Loop Start and Ground Start trunk ports connected to 4T or 8T card types.
• 4T, 4TMR, 4TMR-PF, 4TPF, 8TPF
• 4T-C, 8T-C, 4T-CID, 8T-CID
• 4T-Cipx, 8T-Cipx, 4T-CIDipx, 8T-CIDipx
• 4T Office, 8T Office, 4T-CID Office, 8T-CID Office (LS only)
There are 6 Trunk Port Databases (0-5), one of which is assigned to each Loop Start
and Ground Start trunk port (see Port List - Chapter 6). Field numbers appear in
square brackets ([ ]).
FROM: 0..5
TO: 0..5
PORT_DB#
Enter the required range of 4T/8T Port Database tables, FROM the lowest 4T/8T
Port Database table number TO the highest 4T/8T Port Database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal must continuously
remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an
outside party. SUSP_SZE results in prohibiting outgoing calls thus preventing a
glare condition, or double seizure (see Figure 8-3 on page 8-51).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-50
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Minimum Seize time determines the additional period that an incoming call signal
must continuously remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as an
incoming call. In other words, incoming recognition time is measured as SUSP_
SZE + MIN_SZE (see Figure 8-3 on page 8-51).
Figure 8-3.
INCOMING CALL
Incoming Trunk Call
Seize Timers
MINIMUM SEIZE
IDLE
time
8-51
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
FROM: 0..3
TO: 0..3
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of Card Database tables; FROM the lowest Card Database
table number TO the highest Card Database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-52
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Outgoing Make Time determines the period that loop current is restored during a
rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a rotary dialing trunk port during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-53
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
METER (4TMR):
f0 [7] 0(16kHz), 1(12kHz), 2(50Hz)
Eu0: 2
Eu8: 0
METER_AFTER_ Yes/No;
DISCONNECT [9] Yes: CC2, Eu2, Eu3
Defines the system waiting time for more pulses before a disconnect is actually
performed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-54
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
In an incoming call, if the person called is restricted by COS to accept collect calls,
the Coral signals the CO accordingly. The signaling is implemented by
disconnecting and connecting the line according to the following time intervals:
• Line closed for T1 interval
• Line opened for T2 interval
• Line closed for T3 interval
• Line opened for T2 interval
• Line closed for T1 interval
• Line opened for T2 interval
• Line permanently closed
If the incoming call is a collect call, the CO will disconnect the line after
identification of the above pulse sequence.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-55
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
! If A-(GS/LS) is changed, all established calls on all 4T/8T trunk cards are
dropped, and all 4T/8T cards re initialize.
Determines whether the CKT (trunk port) on all cards with this database are
Ground Start or Loop Start. The system default is determined by the COUNTRY
field in the Installation entry (see Chapter 3-Installation). If 0 (USA/North
America) is defined as the COUNTRY code, the default for all CKTs is Ground
Start; in other countries the default is Loop Start. Check card to confirm strapping
matches the software entry. This entry must match LS/GS (TRK, 2) (see page 8-46).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-56
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
C-gs with ring Yes (Loop Start or Ground Start w/Ring)/No (Ground Start w/o Ring);
The table below presents the various circuit defaults
Ground Start with Ring determines whether the trunk recognizes, and waits for,
ringing as an incoming call signal. If N is entered, a Ground Start trunk interprets
a ground on the tip conductor as an incoming call. If Y is entered, a Ground Start
trunk interprets a ground on the tip conductor as a CO Block condition and waits
for ring generator to appear before reporting an incoming call.
Country Code
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
8-57
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Details for the E&M Continuous are found on the following pages:
E&M Continuous Timers.................................................................... 8-59
4TEM (E&M Continuous) Card Database ......................................... 8-62
4TEM - E&M Continuous TKDB
8-58
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
Each E&M Continuous trunk port (4TEM and 4TEMipx card) is assigned one of
two E&M Continuous Timer tables, see E&M_CONTINUOUS_TIMERS # [1] on page
8-87. These timers determine the disconnect and recognition timers for E&M
continuous trunks only. In addition to General Trunk Timers, E&M timers must be
programmed for all E&M Continuous trunks. Field numbers appear in square
brackets ([ ]).
These timers are not relevant for E&M Pulsed trunks connected to 4TEMP
card.
FROM 0..1
TO 0..1
E&M_CONT_TIMERS#
Enter the required range of E&M Timer table numbers; FROM the lowest E&M
Timer table number TO the highest E&M Timer table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-59
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
INCOMING: The following options apply only to incoming E&M trunk calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OUTGOING: The following options apply only to outgoing E&M trunk calls.
8-60
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-61
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Installation note: When using 4TEM/S card, layout B (issue 3 and higher),
the jumper on JMP4 must be set to “C” position.
FROM: 0..2
TO: 0..2
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of Card Database tables; FROM the lowest Card Database
table number TO the highest Card Database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INCOMING: The following parameters are relevant only for incoming E&M calls.
timer expires, the trunk card interprets the restoral as a pause between digits or as
end of digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OUTGOING: The following parameters are relevant only to outgoing E&M calls.
8-62
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-63
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Details for the E&M Pulsed are found on the following pages:
4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Port Database................................................ 8-65
4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) Card Database............................................... 8-67
4TEMP (E&M Pulsed) CDB,3
8-64
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
FROM/ 0..3
TO 0..3
PORT_DB#-
Enter the required range of 4TEMP card database tables; FROM the lowest table
number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-65
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-66
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
FROM: 0..3
TO: 0..3
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of 4TEMP card database tables; FROM the lowest table
number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The following two fields are relevant for all Pulsed E&M trunks.
The duration of a flash pulse sent by the Coral is defined in Trunk Timers
beginning on page 8-7.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-67
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
BLOCKING BY
PULSE:
<N/A> The following Blocking By Pulse fields are relevant for trunks, only when
CO_BLOCK [5]=P is defined in its 4TEMP Port Database.
BLOCK_BY_PULSE Yes/No
[2]
Enter “No” to skip to (the next prompt) BLOCK_BY_CONTINUANCE.
Press “Enter” to display BLOCK_BY_PULSE fields.
This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
When BLOCK_BY_PULSE above is set to Yes, the following six fields are
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
available:
Incoming lower limit recognition time of Block pulse. This pulse is sent by the
far-end to the Coral in order to block the tie-line.
This timer determines the minimum period that an “E” lead must remain in an
active state before the Coral 4TEMP trunk recognizes a far-end Blocking signal.
The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse BLOCK signal only if the pulse is shorter
than I/C_MAX_BLOCK defined below and longer than I/C_MIN_BLOCK
defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-68
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-69
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
BLOCK BY
CONTINUANCE:
<N/A> The following Blocking By Continuance fields are relevant for trunk, only
when CO_BLOCK [5] (page 8-66) = C is defined in its 4TEMP Port
Database.
BLOCK_BY_ Yes/No
CONTINUANCE [9]
Enter “No” to skip to (the next prompt) BLOCK_BY_NO_RESPONSE.
Press “Enter” to display BLOCK_BY_CONTINUANCE fields.
This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
8-70
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
BLOCK BY NO The following Blocking By No Response fields are relevant for a trunk, only when
RESPONSE: CO_BLOCK [5] (page 8-66) is defined as N in its 4TEMP Port Database.
Examples causing a trunk to enter a blocking condition include:
• Sze Ack is not accepted after Seize was sent for outgoing call.
• Answer is not accepted after digits were sent to the far-end station.
• Clear Ack is not accepted after Clear was sent for ending a call.
• Digits are not accepted after incoming Seize.
BLOCK_BY_NO_ Yes/No
RESPONSE [13]
Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) CLEARING: (page 8-74).
Press Enter to display BLOCK_BY_NO_RESPONSE fields.
This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-71
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-72
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-73
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
CLEARING: Two clearing types are available for call disconnect, one of which is selected to
each trunk in its port database. The following fields are relevant only to Clearing
fields.
The Clearing signals duration should be different from all other pulses
(except Blocking signals) and it is recommended that it should have the
longest duration.
8-74
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-75
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
The following Clearing_By_Pulse fields are relevant for trunk, only when
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CLEAR BY
PULSE: CLEAR [2] (page 8-65) is defined in its 4TEMP Port Database.
CLEAR_BY_PULSE Yes/No
[31]
Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) CLEAR BY CONTINUANCE: <N/A> (page 8-78).
Press Enter to display CLEAR_BY_PULSE fields.
This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
When CLEAR_BY_PULSE above is set to Yes, the following six fields are
available:
pulse is sent by the Coral to the far-end, on an outgoing call when the caller initiates
clearing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-76
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-77
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
CLEAR BY CON- The following Clearing_By_Continuance fields are relevant for trunk,
TINUANCE: only when CLEAR [2] (page 8-65) is defined as C in its 4TEMP Port
<N/A> Database.
CLEAR_BY_ Yes/No
CONTINUANCE [38]
Enter No to skip to (the next prompt) INCOMING: (page 8-79) fields.
Press Enter to display Clear_By_Continuance fields.
This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
“M” lead must remain in an active state, for the far-end trunk to recognize a Clear
Forward indication. This signal is sent by the Coral to the far-end on an outgoing
call, when the caller initiates clearing in order to end the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-78
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
INCOMING: The following fields are relevant only during incoming calls.
8-79
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
In addition to this delay, a Seize Ack does not start until Coral resources
(for example DTMF receiver) are available to process the call.
This timer is relevant for trunk, only when SZE_ACK [0] (page 8-65) is defined as
Yes, in its 4TEMP Port Database.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-80
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse BREAK signal only if the pulse is shorter
than MAX_BREAK defined below and longer than MIN_BREAK defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OUTGOING: The following fields are relevant only during outgoing calls.
8-81
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse SZE_ACK signal only if the pulse is shorter
than MAX_SZE_ACK defined below and longer than MIN_SZE_ACK defined
here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-82
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
The 4TEMP trunk detects a valid pulse ANSWER signal only if the pulse is shorter
than MAX_ANSWER defined below and longer than MIN_ANSWER defined
here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[62]
Transfer the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of
entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the Card Database to the cards,
including any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-83
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
FROM/ 0..3
TO 0..3
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of 4TWL card database tables; FROM the lowest table
number TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Suspect Seize determines the period that an incoming call signal must continuously
remain at a trunk port before the signal is recognized as a possible seize from an
outside party. SUSP_SZE results in prohibiting outgoing calls thus preventing a
glare condition, or double seizure (see Figure 8-3 on page 8-51).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-84
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-85
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-86
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
E&M Trunk Definition is used to define the trunk signaling parameters for E&M
trunks connected to 4TEM, 4TEMipx, 4TEMP, T1, 30T, 30T/E, 30T/M, 30T/x
cards. These parameters apply only to E&M trunks, and are used in addition to
General Trunk Definitions beginning on page 8-11. Field numbers appear in square
brackets ([ ]).
E&M_CONTINUOUS_ 0..1
TIMERS # [1]
Determines which E&M Continuous Timer table, 0 or 1, (see E&M Continuous
Timers beginning on page 8-59) is used to define the trunk operating
characteristics.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
• Selecting 2W or 4W must match the wire strap on the card (See relevant
Coral Installation Manual).
• Wire selection directly influences the Network Balance (see Balancing
Network beginning on page 19-24). The 2-wire mode uses 2 as the
Balancing Network, while 4-wire mode uses 0. After selecting the
appropriate mode, the Coral system automatically selects the proper
balancing network.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-87
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
ANSWER_ Yes/No
MANDATORY [3]
Provides answer supervision for E&M Continuous trunks, by either disconnecting
Continuous trunk only
or connecting the trunk when the answer signal is not detected.
Entering Yes doesn’t accept an answer and automatically releases the outgoing
trunk after time-out.
Enter No so that if the answer is not accepted, the outgoing trunk connects after
time-out.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
cards only
When Y is selected, 2W/4W (see above) must be set to 4W, and
ANS/DISC_PULSE_ON_XFER (see below) must be set to Y.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
page 8-67.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CONNECTED_TO_ Yes/No
PUBLIC_EXCHANGE
This parameter determines how the Coral relates to an incoming call.
[7]
Enter N to define regular E&M line.
When entering Y, the Coral relates to the line as an incoming call from a CO. In
this case, if the internal called station is busy, the call camps-on automatically to
the busy station or enters as a second call in the multi-appearance to avoid sending
a busy tone.
Enter Y to enable an incoming call to a busy station to act as a CO trunk; the call
rings as multi-appearance or camp-on (instead of busy tone).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-88
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
ANS/DISC_PULSE_ Yes/No
ON_XFER [8]
Answer/Disconnect Pulse After Transfer determines whether the system sends a
Continuous trunks only
signal when a call is either answered or disconnected by a third party (Yes). This
parameter functions when a transferred call appears on a currently busy E&M
Continuous trunk. This parameter is typically used when a trunk is connected to a
Voicemail system or automatic attendant. Using this parameter allows immediate
Voicemail response to the transferred call. ANS/DISC duration is defined by
ANS/DISC_PULSE_WIDTH [4] on page 8-60, in E&M Continuous Timers. The signal
is sent over the E&M Continuous trunk from the third party to the first party.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MUSIC_ON_ 0..3;
HOLD/TRANSFER [9] Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E: 0 (MP-1), 1 (MP-2);
Determines which music source is sounded on the called party’s line after being
placed on hold or transferred by the E&M trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter is relevant only for E&M Trunks defined as “Wink Start”.
This parameter defines whether or not a wink signal is sent, in addition to the busy
tone, when the called party is busy. This wink signal can be used to activate
applications which run only on E&M lines (such as Voicemail).
The wink signalling is defined in Trunk Timers beginning on page 8-7.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-89
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
DID Trunk Definition is used to program the trunk signaling parameters for each
Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk installed in Coral systems. This parameter applies
only to DID trunks connected to 8DID, 30T, 30T/E, 30T/M, 30T/x, ALS, BID,
GID, 4TWL cards and is used in addition to General Trunk Definitions beginning
on page 8-11.
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid DID trunk dial number; All defined DID trunks
Enter the required range of DID trunks, FROM the lowest DID trunk dial number
TO the highest DID trunk dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
• This entry must match CKT 0-7 defined in“8DID Card Database” (see
page 8-91).
• In European systems the equivalent BID trunk ports must be set to zero
(0). The parameter displays:0 = IMM/BID, 1 = WINK/DELAYED.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DID Trunk Definition TRK,3 [0,2,1,0,0,3]
8-90
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
This menu is not relevant for 4TWL, ALS70-DID, BID or GID cards.
FROM/ 0..3
TO 0..3
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number
TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-91
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
In an incoming call, if the person called is restricted by COS to accept collect calls,
the Coral signals the CO accordingly. The signaling is implemented by
disconnecting and connecting the line according to the following time intervals:
• Line closed for T1 interval
• Line opened for T2 interval
• Line closed for T3 interval
• Line opened for T2 interval
• Line closed for T1 interval
• Line opened for T2 interval
• Line permanently closed
If the incoming call is a collect call, the CO will disconnect the line after
identification of the above pulse sequence.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Determines the maximum period that loop current can remain interrupted during a
rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MAX_(BREAK+ 48..200..252 ms
MAKE) [13]
Determines the maximum rotary (pulse) dial cycle (Break + Make) duration, while
a digit is rotary dialed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-92
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-93
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[22]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of
entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards,
including any update which has been made. This parameter is used only in the
Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8DID Card Database DIDB
8-94
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
0 - DEFAULT This option is used to display or modify the default configuration of the digital
Configuration cards. It determines the protocol type for individual channels on the digital trunk.
This default will be given to the digital card that will be installed in the future. For
cards already installed, the configuration can be modified by using the 1-CURRENT
Configuration option below.
Each trunk can be separately configured according to any of the following ranges:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-95
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
1-CURRENT This option is used to display or modify signaling protocol for each installed digital
Configuration trunk according to card location, by entering the card’s physical location in the
system. The system automatically skips over slots not equipped with digital cards.
Each trunk can be separately configured according to any of the ranges listed in the
0 - DEFAULT Configuration table above.
Before entering Current Config, the system checks for a previous update that is still
pending. If such an update is detected then the following message appears:
** WARNING ** DGTL CARD in config mode
override configuration? (Y/N)
Entering Yes causes the system to ignore all entries made in the previous card
configuration. Entering No causes the system to return to the previous mode level.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-96
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
UPDATE? Yes/No
8-97
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
The 2DT card can select one of the two clock sources in the board. The
clock source is extracted from peer# 0 or from peer# 1. The selection
between these two clock sources is controlled by the Coral system main
control card.
A 2DT card can NOT support both primary and secondary synchronization
simultaneously.
A card operating in Slave Clock mode has the backplane pre-wired at the factory
and cards must be installed only in the proper slot. For further details, see Table
8-5 below and refer to the relevant Coral Installation Manual.
Attempting to define a location when no ISDN or digital card (2DT, T1, PRI-24,
T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x, 2DT Synchronization DTDB,3
PRI-30, 4TBR, 8TBR or 30T/x) is installed in the defined card slot, causes the
following error message to appear:
NOT DGTL TRK CARD.
The attempt will be refused.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-98
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-99
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
ADDR (Shelf,
Slot)
! Changing the clock reference source through the following parameters,
resets the current digital trunk card.
PRM Any (Shelf,Slot) as listed in Table 8-5 under PRM SYNC, or R(Remove “--,--“)
Determines which of the digital trunk cards is utilized as the Primary (PRM) clock
reference source.
Shelf and Slot numbers are entered between parenthesis, separated by a comma.
Entering R removes the card slot location reference.
When Remove is entered or (—,—) is displayed the system selects the clock source
automatically.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEC Any (Shelf,Slot) as listed in Table 8-5 under SEC SYNC, or R(Remove “--,--“)
Determines which of the digital trunk cards is utilized as the Secondary (SEC)
clock reference source.
Shelf and Slot numbers are entered between parenthesis, separated by a comma.
Entering R removes the card slot location reference.
When Remove is entered or (—,—) is displayed the system selects the clock source
automatically.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-100
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
PRM - Shows the diagnostic status for the primary digital trunk card.
SEC - Shows the diagnostic status for the secondary digital trunk card.
• PEER 0 - Shows the diagnostic status for the secondary Peer #0 of a 2DT card.
• PEER 1 - Shows the diagnostic status for the secondary Peer #1 of a 2DT card.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-101
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
* The enabling of the second trunk circuit on the card requires authorization,
see 2DT WITH 2 CKTS on page 3-18.
The PI allows configuring the protocol type for individual peers on the 2DT card,
whether a card is currently physically installed or not yet installed. Access is
2DT Card Database CDB,12
accomplished by entering the physical location of any current 2DT card (shelf and
slot), or before installing the card, by defining the default:
• To define protocol type parameters before physically installing a 2DT card,
enter the 2DT Card Database: DEFAULT Configuration (page 8-103) branch
[CDB,12,0]. The parameter definitions in this branch will apply to all 2DT
cards installed in the future.
• After a 2DT card is physically installed or defined in Card List on page 6-59, its
protocol type definitions may be changed in order to customize the individual
peers. These changes are made in the 2DT Card Database: CURRENT
Configuration (page 8-105)branch [CDB,12,1].
Details for the 2DT cards are found on the following pages:
2DT Card Database: DEFAULT Configuration ............................... 8-103
2DT Card Database: CURRENT Configuration .............................. 8-105
8-102
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-103
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
UPDATE? Yes/No
Accept the new default card configuration to the 2DT card database,
for all 2DT cards that will be installed in this Coral system.
2DT Card Database: DEFAULT Configuration CDB,12,0
8-104
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-105
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
CURRENT CARD_2DT
CONFIGURATION l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-106
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-107
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
FROM/ 0..3
TO 0..3
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number
TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-108
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
E&M: The following parameters apply only to incoming E&M Continuous calls.
DDO: The following parameters apply only to DDO calls via 30T card.
The following parameters are only used for 30T DDO cards and are not used
in CC0 (USA) systems.
8-109
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
DID: The following parameters apply only to DID calls via 30T card.
The following parameters are only used for 30T DDI cards and are not used in
CC0 (USA) systems.
Minimum Break Time determines the minimum period that loop signal must be
interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary
dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Maximum Break Time determines the maximum period that loop signal can remain
interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize rotary
dialing.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[14]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of
entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards,
including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-110
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
FROM/ 0..3
TO 0..3
PORT_DB#
Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest table number
TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-111
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-112
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
30T/M Cards ç
Details for the 30T/M trunks are found on the following pages:
30T/M Card Database ....................................................................... 8-114
30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database............................................. 8-120
30T/M DDI Port Database................................................................ 8-122
30T/M Timers ................................................................................... 8-123
30T/M Cards
8-113
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
FROM/ 0..1
TO 0..1
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number
TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Outgoing Make Time determines the period between two successive “Break”
intervals during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle from a trunk programmed as a pulse
dialing trunk, during an outgoing call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-114
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
DISCONNECT Yes/No
RECALL [3] Mexico (CC2): Yes/No
Notes:
• Relevant for CC1, CC2, CC3, CC5 and CC6 systems only.
• This feature is only available for 30TM cards with
Issue# 021004812 or higher.
Outgoing Calls Only: This parameter determines whether to ignore the CO_DISC
[2] (page 8-120) time interval and use a longer time interval: DISCONNECT RECALL
TIME [5] defined in the 30T/M DDI/DDO/BI-D Port Database beginning on page
8-120 for this card.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The following four parameters are presented in order to define the signal
indicating the Call Collect Block.
During an incoming call, if the system destination is restricted by COS to accept
collect calls, the Coral signals the CO accordingly. The signaling pulse is defined
by the CCB_Tx time intervals as described in the sketch (CCB_T3 can be set to 0):
8-115
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Figure 8-4.
CCB Pulse Signal
Line Answer CCB_T2 CCB_T2
CCB Pulse
The CO aborts a call if the destination responds with a CCB pulse pattern
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Incoming Calls Only: When ENABLE CCB? [5] above is set to Yes, this parameter
defines the CCB_T3 time period.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-116
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
METER:
MIN_ON [11] 20..130..140 ms (in 10 ms increments)
Minimum Meter Pulse Recognition determines the minimum meter pulse duration.
The metering pulse interval must be between MIN_ON and MAX_ON in order to
be recognized by the 30T/M trunk. A metering pulse shorter than MIN_ON is not
recognized.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-117
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
DID: The following options are relevant only during incoming calls on DID type trunks.
E&M: The following parameters are relevant only for E&M Continuous type trunks.
30T/M Card Database DTDB,1,2
8-118
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[26]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of
entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards,
including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-119
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Central Office Block determines the timing of a blocking signal received from the
Central Office.
This parameter defines the minimum period for the system to interpret the signal
as a block signal. In a CO block state the trunk is considered busy, thereby
preventing further use of the trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-120
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-121
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
DISCONNECT N/A
RECALL TIME [4]
Not Relevant for DDI.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-122
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-123
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
30T/E Cards ç
Details for the 30T/E trunks are found on the following pages:
30T/E Card Database ........................................................................ 8-125
30T/E DDI Port Database................................................................. 8-130
30T/E DDO Port Database ............................................................... 8-132
30T/E NonDDI Port Database .......................................................... 8-133
30T/E Cards
8-124
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
FROM/ 0..1
TO 0..1
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of card database tables; FROM the lowest table number
TO the highest table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
METER:
MIN_ON [3] 20..100..120 (in 10 ms increments)
Minimum Meter Pulse Recognition. The 30T/E trunk detects an active metering
pulse signal only if the pulse is shorter than MAX_ON defined below and longer
than MIN_ON defined here.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-125
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-126
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
DID: The following options apply only during incoming calls on DID type trunks.
8-127
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
E&M: The following parameters apply only to E&M Continuous type trunks.
allows defining the system logic according to this general European standard.
TDMX (TADIMUX- another communication product made by the same Coral
manufacturer) that allows defining the system so that 30 calls (analog or digital
channels, 64 Kbps data per channel) can be communicated along a pair of standard
telephone wires for remote subscribers. A choice of analog or digital channels
permits the interconnection of analog or digital PABXs, telephones or terminals.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-128
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[16]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of
entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards,
including any update. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-129
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-130
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-131
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter appears only when RECONNECT [6], above, is set to Yes.
30T/E DDO Port Database DTDB,2,1,1
Defines the system waiting time (in seconds) before a reconnect is actually
performed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-132
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-133
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-134
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
The suffix /M added to the card name means: Built-In Metering Hardware,
8-135
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
CARD
4ALS, 8ALS
Displays the initialized card name. The prefix digit indicates the total number of
available ports.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-136
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
! Changing the DID definition excludes the trunk from the DID/E&M
group.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! When ALS is installed, selecting Yes resets the card and disconnects
all established calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-137
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
INCOMING: The following options apply only during incoming calls on ALS70-DID trunks.
DID Maximum Break Time determines the maximum period that a loop signal can
remain interrupted during a rotary (pulse) dial cycle for the trunk card to recognize
rotary dialing. A break-time greater than the defined period is not recognized by
the system as a break.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-138
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
OUTGOING: The following options apply only during outgoing calls on ALS70 trunks.
8-139
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
METER: The following parameters define the METER signal (sent by the CO in order to
define a meter pulse). This option applies to 4ALS/M and 8ALS/M cards only.
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
ALS70 Card Database TRUNK 3,1 [0,2,1,0,3,1]
[15]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of
entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the database to the cards, including
any updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-140
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-141
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-142
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-143
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
and DTMF dialing. The EOS is sent by the CO to the Coral after the last dialed digit
is accepted by the CO. The Coral responds by a line terminator of 0 - 560. This
signal is also called Number Received signal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-144
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-145
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
The BID card cannot operate without an MFR card installed in the system.
The following BID options are available and are described in the following pages:
BID Trunk Port Database ................................................................. 8-147
BID Trunk Timers............................................................................. 8-149
8-146
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-147
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-148
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-149
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
GID is compatible only with pulse dialing. Do not program with DTMF.
The following GID options are available and are described in the following pages:
GID Card Database ........................................................................... 8-151
GID Port Database ............................................................................ 8-155
GID Timers ....................................................................................... 8-157
8-150
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
INCOMING: The following options apply only during incoming calls on GID trunks.
8-151
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
Clear Down: The following two parameters define the Clear Down pulse duration allowed by the
Coral.
Clear Down is a disconnect pulse sent from the LEX to the Coral. Clear Down is
a 90Vrms/50Hz pulse and can be initiated by the LEX at any stage. When a Clear
Down signal is sensed, the Coral switches to idle.
The following two parameters define the Flash Clear pulse sent by the Coral.
Flash Clear: Is a Clear Backward signal sent from the Coral. This Clear Backward pulse initiates
a disconnect while Coral is in the connect state. To send this pulse, the GID card
sends a series of on/off pulses on the TR lead, which are created by connecting a
small resistance to the line for a brief period (on), and stopping the pulse for an
additional period (off). The combination of brief on/off pulses causes the Flash
Clear signal. The duration of these pulses is defined through Coral parameters
FLASH_CLEAR_OFF and FLASH_CLEAR_ON, described below.
8-152
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
OUTGOING: The following options apply only during outgoing calls on GID trunks. The pulse
signaling method is defined in TYPE [4] (page 8-12).
METER: The following parameters identify METER (the frequency sent by the LEX (CO)
to define a meter pulse). The first metering pulse sent from the LEX is guaranteed
only after the Coral has made the transition to connect state.
8-153
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
TRUNK CODE: Used for long distance LEX (CO) incoming DID calls. Applicable only for EWS01
and DIVO Central Offices. Used in Western Germany.
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[22]
Transfers the updated database immediately to the trunk cards. Regardless of entry,
routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any
updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-154
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
FROM 0..3
TO 0..3
PORT_DB#
Enter the required range of port database tables; FROM the lowest port database
table number TO the highest port database table number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8-155
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
8-156
PI Reference Manual Trunk Controls
8-157
Trunk Controls PI Reference Manual
GID Timers TRUNK 5,2 [0,2,1,0,5,2]
8-158
9 Station Controls
The Station Controls contain the programming instructions for all the different
station types.
Station Timers...............................................................................................9-2
SLT Definition ..............................................................................................9-5
SLT: iDSP Card (Caller ID Type Bellcore/ETSI) Database......................9-19
SLT Card Database.....................................................................................9-20
Keyset Timers .............................................................................................9-27
Keyset Ring Cadence .................................................................................9-29
Keyset Definition........................................................................................9-31
Keyset Button - Programming ...................................................................9-77
Keyset Fixed System Keys - Programming.............................................9-103
Keyset Soft Keys Idle Set ........................................................................9-104
Keyset Preference - Programming ........................................................... 9-118
APA, PEX/APA and APDL RS-232 Setup ..............................................9-120
Wireless Stations - CoralAIR ...................................................................9-123
Magneto 8SM Card Database ..................................................................9-126
9-1
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Station Timers define the various timers for all station features system wide.
Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).
Defines the ringback tone duration to an internal station before the system
disconnects or forwards the call to a call forward no answer destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This timer is also utilized for 1Boss Groups, see Note 1 on page 10-21.
Multi-Appearance Ringback defines the ringback tone duration to an internal
multi-appearance station before the system disconnects.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Defines the duration of the hold interval after which the call returns to the
originating station. An automatic ring indicates that the call has returned.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-2
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Defines the hard hold duration after which the call returns to the originating station.
An automatic ring indicates that the call has returned. When HARD_HOLD is
utilized the station is considered busy towards new incoming calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Hookflash Filter determines the hookflash filter period following the completion
of a valid offhook (for answer). During this period the system ignores all SLT
electrical circuit changes or load changes. The Hookflash filter provides a flexible
anti-bounce parameter. The anti-bounce filter provides a way of avoiding false
signaling problems when an SLT answers a call. Because of the nature of this
parameter, all intentional dialing and hookflashing during this period are ignored.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-3
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
This parameter is only relevant when the station has defined a Call
Forward No Answer destination (default dial #142) or Call Forward No
Answer External destination (default dial #17703).
Defines the ringing duration to a called station before the station’s calls are
forwarded to its Call Forward No Answer destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-4
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
PRM_COS [0] 0..249 (or maximum defined in SIZES, see COS on page 4-16)
Sets the station’s primary Class of Service (COS). A COS may be assigned to a
single station, several stations or all stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEC_COS [1] 0..249 (or maximum defined in SIZES, see COS on page 4-16)
Sets the station’s secondary COS. This is typically the COS applied to the station
when the system is in Night 1 or Night 2 mode. COS ranges are the same as for
PRM_COS.
PRIV_LIBS [2] 0..10..255 (or maximum defined in SIZES, see PRIVATE on page 4-12)
This parameter determines the maximum number of speed call (Private Library)
numbers available to the station.
A Private Library can be used to speed dial long numbers. Also, a Private Library
is used to dial external or network numbers for features that allow only internal
destinations such as Call Forward, Divert and Hunt features.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-5
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Yes: Busy for incoming calls and idle for making additional calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-6
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
RECEIVE_SPKR_ Yes/No
STATUS [13]
When set to Yes, this parameter enables the SLT user to receive an alert tone
indicating that the second party (called or calling party) is in Speaker Mode
(activated for handsfree or group conversation).
This feature is only relevant when the second party is a keyset (FlexSet, FlexSet-IP,
DKT, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL) station user.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-7
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
IP_FAX_ENABLED Yes/No
[15]
Set to Yes only for SIP stations.
Defines whether the MG module should try and detect Fax tones from this IP
station.
Set this parameter to Yes if this SLT station is able to send or receive fax calls.
General
The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can
mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt
voice calls.
The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there
is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have
Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components
that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when
one of the parties is a SIP station or a SIP Trunk. The parameter in irrelevant for
MGCP stations.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l v91536*/
IP_MODEM_ENABLED Yes/No
[16]
Set to Yes only for IP stations.
Defines whether the MG module should try and detect modem tones from this
station.
Set this parameter to Yes if this SLT is able to send or receive modem calls.
General
The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can
SLT Definition SLT [or IST or ROOT,0,2,1,1]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-8
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
AUTO_UNATT_TRANS Yes/No
[18]
Applies only to Attendant Stations (ATT [17] above, must be set to Yes).
Allows unanswered calls to an attendant station to be automatically transferred to
another destination, after a system wide defined time-out period.
When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS is set to Yes, the attendant console will enter the
unattended mode automatically, but only after the system defined time-out period
AND:
• The attendant’s calls are then transferred to an Alternate Attendant Destination
(attendant feature code: #146).
• If no alternate attendant destination is defined, then all calls to this attendant
station receive the UNATTENDED message.
• The attendant’s calls automatically return to the attendant station the next time
the attendant offhooks.
When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS is set to No, the attendant console continues
ringing unless it is manually answered.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
AUTO_RELEASED_ Yes/No
ALL [19]
ACD&UCD only
Defines whether or not the system will automatically release (i.e. invoke
ACD&UCD Release/Resume, feature code #1975) an agent that does not answer
a call within a predetermined time interval (defined by TIME_TO_NEXT_
MEM (page 10-12) in the HUNT branch).
Once the agent is released, no calls are transferred to the agent, thereby improving
the ACD/UCD group response time.
9-9
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Type Description
Selecting 1 permits DTMF and pulse dialing on the same line, called
MIXED SLT. When an answering machine or other common carriers
or any DTMF controlled auxiliary equipment is connected, the type
should be set to 1.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-10
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
MULTI_APPEARANCE Yes/No
[24]
Multi-Appearance defines whether a station can receive several internal calls on a
single line, even though the station is active (busy).
When set to Yes, the busy called station receives a call-waiting tone and the calling
station party hears a ringback tone (see ORIGINATOR_CALL_WAITING_TONE [2] on
page 6-50 to define which ringback tone is heard). When set to No, the busy called
party does not receive any indication and the calling party hears a busy tone.
Always set this parameter to No when:
The station is an ACD member, see MEM # (A/R/CR) (page 10-17).
Notes:
•
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-11
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_CALLER_ID Yes/No
[27]
This parameter defines whether the calling station’s telephone number is displayed
on the called station’s keyset display panel.
Enter Yes to send the caller ID information for this station.
Enter No to restrict the caller’s ID on external calls. To further restrict the ID on
SLT Definition SLT [or IST or ROOT,0,2,1,1]
internal and internal network calls, set CLIR on Internal Calls [7] (page 6-20) in
Station Options (SFE, 2) to Yes.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the user can override this setting (i.e., not send
Caller ID info) on a per-call basis (default feature code #1444) for external calls
and for internal calls only when CLIR on Internal Calls [7] is also set to Yes.
Regardless of this parameter setting, when CLIR on Internal Calls [7] is set
to No, the Caller ID can be restricted only on external calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-12
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Notes:
• This number is used for information for E911 emergency centers.
• This number is only used when USE SECOND ALI [19] (page 15-16) in
Dial Services is set to Yes (when set to No, this Second Alternate Line
ID is ignored.)
This parameter defines a second alternate Line ID number for a caller’s line to be
displayed at the terminating end. It should be used to provide a phone number that
is recognized by the emergency center in order to physically locate the calling
station user.
AFTER applying the Auto Set Relocate feature (see page 5-22), enter the
Second ALI number originally assigned to the user’s new location before
the profiles were swapped.
The ID number is defined in the ISDN/ALI Table (see Alternate Line ID beginning
9-13
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Over Public Exchange (OPX) Station defines whether to light the message lamp
indicator on SLT stations.
For SLTs that are directly connected to and operated from the Coral, set this option
to No and the station lamp will light for waiting messages.
For SLTs connected to the Coral by means of another PABX or through the CO,
this option should be set to Yes (disable message lamp) to prevent high voltage
pulses from being sent over long distances.
This parameters only apply to the following cards with their related jumper set to
the “SH” position, or when SA cards are configured to “SH” mode:
• 4/8/16SH/S(-LL), jumper JMP4
• 8/16/24SLS, jumper JP1
• 8/16SLSipx, jumper JU1
• 4/8/20S Office, 4S+8Fx Office, 4S+16Fx Office, 8S+8Fx Office,
8S+16Fx Office, jumper JU
• SA cards programmed to “SH” mode via IpProgramm
Tip: Set this parameter to Yes, to prevent unnecessary damage to electrical circuits,
Voicemail systems, facsimile machines and modems that may be overly sensitive
to the message lamp voltage signal sent. A distinctive tone indicating a waiting
message is still sent over the line and heard.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SLT Definition SLT [or IST or ROOT,0,2,1,1]
HOOK_FLASH_ Yes/No
RELEVANT [31]
Determines whether the Hookflash operation (i.e. dialing 1 or pressing flash) by the
SLT can be accepted by the system. Entering No disables the hookflash operation
(i.e. pressing the onhook or 1 button).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-14
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Permanent/Temporary P/T
_AUTO SET
RELOCATE [34]
Notes:
• When TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [8] on page 6-21 is defined to
NO in the System Features - Station Options branch (SFE,2), then this
parameter is automatically defined as Permanent and cannot be
changed to Temporary.
• When TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [8] on page 6-21 is defined to
YES, then this parameter can be defined as Permanent or Temporary.
Define this parameter as:
• Permanent so that the station relocation holds until reverse relocation is
performed.
• Temporary to automatically reverse the relocation at midnight (only when
TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [8] on page 6-21 is set to Yes).
This parameter should be set identically for both source and destination stations. It
allows swapping station profiles between similar sets, either temporarily or
permanently.
See Auto Set Relocate (Portability) List per Device Type on page 18-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-15
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SLT_VM_CAMP_ON Yes/No
[37]
Enables the SLT line serving as a Voicemail interface to camp on (i.e. set system to
redial when called party is free) to a busy station when defined as Y. The line might
need to camp on to a busy station as an Automated Attendant service requirement.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ANSWER_ None/Answer/Disconnect/Both
DISCONNECT_
Defines whether the station will hear the DTMF signals transmitted.
SIGNAL [38]
Entry Description
answers
Both DTMF signals will be transmitted when the SLT station both
answers and disconnects
None DTMF signals will not be transmitted either when the SLT
station answers or disconnects
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MUSIC_ON_ 0..3
HOLD/TRANSFER [39] IPx 500 and CDRS 200E: 0(M1), 1(M2)
Defines which music source is sounded on the held (called party’s) line when the
SLT station places a call on hold or transfers the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-16
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
COLLECT_CALL_ Yes/No
REJECT_TONE [40]
On an incoming call, this parameter defines whether to send a special tone to the
Central Office (PTT) attendant indicating that the CORAL called party may not
accept a collect call. Set this parameter to Yes to send a collect call reject tone
(defined in Tone Plan, see page 6-97) to the Central Office (PTT) attendant. The
attendant, upon hearing this tone, should deny the request for a collect call
connection and disconnect the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-17
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
BLOCK_REORDER_ Yes/No
TONE(VM) [41]
Tip: Set this parameter to Yes for ports defined as Voicemail.
Set this parameter to Yes to disable the reorder tone sent to this SLT when it did not
yet onhook after a 2-way call disconnect.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
KEEP_RTP_AFTER_ Yes/No
3WAY [43]
This parameter is relevant when an SLT port participates in a 3-way call where at
least one of the parties is a NET-IP trunk. When Y (Yes) is selected, RTP is
maintained after one of the parties exits the 3-way call. When N (No) is selected
for all of the ports engaged in a 3-way call, RTP is discontinued after one of the
parties exits the 3-way call, and is then re-established for the remaining two parties.
Figure 9-1 NET- IP trunk NET- IP trunk
A A
SLT Definition SLT [or IST or ROOT,0,2,1,1]
3WAY 2WAY
B C C
Any port Any port Any port
Only when the parameter for all three ports that participate in a 3-way
call is defined as No, will RTP be discontinued (regardless of the branch
under which it is defined).
See KEEP_RTP_AFTER_3WAY [25] on page 8-17 for a trunk port
and KEEP_RTP_AFTER_3WAY [85] on page 9-70 for a keyset port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-18
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the cards. Regardless of entry,
routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any
update made. This parameter is accessible only through the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-19
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
FROM 0..3
TO 0..3
CARD_DB#
Enter the required range of card database tables FROM the lowest card number TO
the highest card number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SLT Card Database STDB
9-20
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
INT_RING (S): The following two entries (Fields 0 and 1) control the ring cadence for internal
(station-to-station) calls.
These parameters only apply to the following cards with their related jumper set to
the S position:
• 4/8/16SH/S(-LL), jumper JMP4
• 8/16/24SLS, jumper JP1
• 8/16SLSipx, jumper JU1
• 4/8/20S Office, 4S+8Fx Office, 4S+16Fx Office, 8S+8Fx Office,
8S+16Fx Office, jumper JU1
• SA cards programmed to “S” mode via the IpProgrammer application
Ringing Silence
OFF
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-21
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
EXT_RING (S): The following six parameters (Fields 2 - 7) set the ring cadences for incoming
trunk calls.
These parameters only apply to the following cards with their related jumper set to
the S position:
• 4/8/16SH/S(-LL), jumper JMP4
• 8/16/24SLS, jumper JP1
• 8/16SLSipx, jumper JU1
• 4/8/20S Office, 4S+8Fx Office, 4S+8Fx Office, 4S+16F Office,
8S+8Fx Office, 8S+16Fx Office, jumper JU1
• SA cards programmed to “S” position via IpProgrammer
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Sets the ringing duration of the first ring in a three-ring cycle. See Figure 9-3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SLT Card Database STDB
Sets silent period between ON_1 and ON_2. See Figure 9-3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Same as ON_1 but for the second (of three) ringing periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-22
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Same as OFF1, but for the silent period between ON_2 and ON_3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Message Waiting Lamp & Ring determines the internal/external ring cadence and
Message Waiting lamp flash rate when a station card is installed for SLT stations,
equipped with message lamps, in hotel rooms.
These parameters only apply to the following cards with their related jumper set to
the “SH” position, or when SA cards are configured to “SH” mode:
• 4/8/16SH/S(-LL), jumper JMP4
• 8/16/24SLS, jumper JP1
• 8/16SLSipx, jumper JU1
• 4/8/20S Office, 4S+8Fx Office, 4S+16Fx Office, 8S+8Fx Office,
8S+16Fx Office, jumper JU
• SA cards programmed to “SH” mode via IpProgrammer
0 670 1800 670 2520 1600 4050 20Hz USA & Mexico
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-23
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Minimum Onhook determines the minimum onhook recognition time for single
line telephones (SLT).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-24
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Determines the max “Make” (current restoral) recognition time for pulse/rotary
dialing on SLTs (500 type).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-25
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
This parameter is relevant only for FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter is relevant only for FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 systems,
when FIXED_RING [18] is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter is relevant only for FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 systems,
when FIXED_RING [18] is set to Yes.
.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[21]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the cards. Regardless of entry,
routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any
SLT Card Database STDB
update made. This parameter is accessible only through the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-26
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Keyset Timers are used to set the timing parameters for all the following keysets,
system wide:
• FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 120, 120D, 120L
• FlexSet 281S, 121S, 280S, 120S
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
• CPA
• Wireless handsets (FlexAir/CoralAIR)
• GKT
• DKT
• DST
• VM keyset ports
• EKT
• VDK
9-27
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Defines the duration of the Advice of Charge display which appears after a call has
ended and before the display goes into the idle state.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-28
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Keyset Ring Cadence is used to determine the three pairs of ON/OFF ring/silent
periods for each of the 8 ring cadences (0 - 7) defined for all the following keysets,
system wide:
• FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 120, 120D, 120L
• FlexSet 281S, 121S, 280S, 120S
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• GKT
• DKT, DST
• EKT, VDK
Ring cadence, ring level (volume) and ring type (pitch) are selected at individual
stations according to user requirements. The user selects the different cadences by
the keyset ring adjustment feature code at his/her keyset. The default cadence is 4,
the default level is 8 (from 0 to 15), and the default type (pitch) is 0 (from 0 to 7).
Each station can select only one cadence, type, and level at any given time.
Cadence time entries apply to internal (station to station) calls. Incoming calls from
a trunk ring at twice the cadence rate (half each time entry). Voice page, reminder,
and wakeup calls ring at three times the cadence rate (one third each time entry).
The ring type and cadence level for T207M, T208M, T207M/NP,
T208M/BL, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, P-Series, T322, T328,
SeaBeam, and all third-party SIP terminals, Wireless handsets
(CoralAIR/FlexAir) are local handset features, not controlled by the PI.
Pair Cadence #
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON_1 600 1,000 1,000 500 500 500 500 500
9-29
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Keysets equipped with a headset should adjust the Ring Type feature at
their keyset station to 7, MAX (default access code #136, then enter 2 for
Ring Type and press UP Volume button until RING TYPE MAX appears).
See also CORD_DISCONNECT_ACTIVATION_BUTTON [97]
and CORD_DISCONNECT_AS_WIRELESS_HEADSET [98] on page 9-76).
This helps eliminate the short annoying burst inherent in the other Ring Types when
disconnecting a call while another call is queued at the same station.
9-30
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Keyset Definition allows programming all system keysets and Wireless stations.
Programming is identical for all the following sets.
• FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 120, 120D, 120L
• FlexSet 281S, 121S, 280S, 120S
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450)
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
• T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL
• T322, T328
• FlexIP SoftPhone (FLIPS)
• SeaBeam softphone
• Third-party SIP terminals
• CPA
• Wireless handsets (FlexAir/CoralAIR)
• GKT
• DKT
• DST
• VM keyset ports
• SeaMail (voice and MWI) SIP ports
• LxCMC (voice and MWI) SIP ports
• EKT
• VDK
• FKT
• AA
9-31
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
1: First keyset
0: All other keysets
1: First keyset
0: All other keysets
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-32
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
9-33
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
RECEIVE_SPKR_ Yes/No
STATUS [13]
For SIP phones, this feature is for display only and will appear as N (No).
When set to Yes, this parameter enables the station user to receive a message on the
display as well as an alert tone indicating that the second party (called or calling
party) is in Speaker Mode (activated for handsfree or group conversation).
This feature is only relevant when the second party is a keyset (T207M, T208M,
T207M/NP, T208M/BL, FlexSet, FlexSet-IP, and DKT) station user.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-34
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
IP_FAX_ENABLED Yes/No
[15]
This parameter is relevant only for IP endpoints.
Defines whether the MG module should try and detect Fax tones from this IP
station.
Set this parameter to Yes if this Keyset is able to send or receive fax calls.
General
The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can
mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt
voice calls.
The Coral main software can be configured to indicate, in each call setup, if there
is a chance of Fax/Modem signals by checking if all the call participants have
Fax/Modem abilities. This feature is only relevant for calls using IP components
that ultimately reach a Media Gateway module, such as IP Network trunks, or when
one of the parties is an IP station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l v91536*/
IP_MODEM_ENABLED Yes/No
[16]
This parameter is relevant only for IP endpoints.
Defines whether the MG module should try and detect modem tones from this
station.
Set this parameter to Yes if this Keyset is able to send or receive modem calls.
General
The Media Gateway Module is sensitive to certain sounds or tones that can
mistakenly be acknowledged as Facsimile or Modem tones and thereby disrupt
9-35
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
AUTO_UNATT_TRANS Yes/No
[18]
This parameter applies only to Attendant Stations (when ATT [17]=Yes).
Allows unanswered calls to an attendant station to be automatically transferred to
another destination, after a system wide defined time-out period.
When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS [18] is set to Yes, the attendant console will enter the
unattended mode automatically, but only after the system defined time-out period
AND:
• The attendant’s calls are then transferred to an Alternate Attendant Destination
(attendant feature code: #146).
• If no alternate attendant destination is defined, then all calls to this attendant
station receive the UNATTENDED message.
• The attendant’s calls automatically return to the attendant station the next time
the attendant offhooks or presses any other station key/button.
When AUTO_UNATT_TRANS [18] is set to No, the attendant console continues
ringing unless it is manually answered.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
AUTO_RELEASED_ Yes/No
ALL [19]
ACD&UCD only
Defines whether or not the system automatically releases (i.e. invokes ACD&UCD
Release/Resume, feature code #1975) an agent that does not answer a call within
a predetermined time interval (defined by TIME_TO_NEXT_MEM (page 10-12) in the
HUNT branch).
Once the agent is released, no calls are transferred to the agent, thereby improving
the ACD/UCD group response time.
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
The released agent is automatically resumed by the system as soon as the agent
activates any key at the station.
Set this parameter to Yes to allow the system to automatically release agents when
they are not answering.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-36
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
MULTI_APPEARANCE Yes/No
[22] Yes: First keyset
No: All other keysets
Multi Appearance defines whether a station can receive several calls on a single
line while the station is active (busy).
When this parameter is set to Yes, the busy called station receives a call-waiting
tone and sees the calling party number on the keyset display. The calling station
party hears a ringback tone (see ORIGINATOR_CALL_WAITING_TONE [2] on page
6-50 to define which ringback tone is heard) and waits for the call to be answered.
When set to No, the busy called party does not receive any indication and the
calling party hears a busy tone.
For LS/GS trunks:
Incoming calls always appear as Multi Appearance regardless of this parameter
definition.
Always set this parameter to No when:
• The keyset is an ACD member, see MEM # (A/R/CR) (page 10-17).
Always set this parameter to Yes when:
• When an APDL terminal is connected.
• For CKT # 18 of the iCMC cards when initialized as a 24SFT card (the Pilot #
is the internal APA port for iCMC card).
For SIP entities (P-Series, T200S series, T300 series, SeaBeam and
all third-party SIP terminals):
SIP entities must be defined with Late Media Negotiation. SIP entity that is defined
with an Early Media Negotiation cannot be defined as a Multi-Appearance station.
9-37
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
FlexSet-IP 280S Version 3.26 or higher, when this parameter is set to Yes,
receives a muted-ring tone ONLY via the handset. The tone is not sounded
via the loudspeaker in handsfree mode, but the user sees the calling party
number on the keyset display.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
• This parameter is relevant only when M.A MUTED_RING [23] above is set
to Yes.
• For FlexAir/CoralAIR wireless handsets, P-Series, T207S, T208S,
T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam and third-party SIP
phones, this feature is controlled by the phone.
This parameter determines the ring type for the first Multi Appearance’s Waiting
Call. The muted ring tone at the station can be sounded continuously or in one
burst. When set to Yes (one burst), the duration is defined by a system-wide
parameter, MUTE_RING [4] (page 9-28).
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-38
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-39
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
VOICE_MAIL Yes/No
(DTMF receive) [28]
This feature does not apply to:
FlexAir/CoralAIR wireless handsets, FlexSet-IP 280S,
T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP,
T208S/BL, P-Series, T322, T328, SeaBeam.
The user calling this Voicemail station must program a pre programmed keyset
button with the station number followed by the DTMF digits to be sent. The Coral
system waits for the Voicemail to send an answer signal to the calling station and
then the calling station continues to send the DTMF digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-40
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
ANSWER_ None/Answer/Disconnect/Both
DISCONNECT_
Defines whether the station will hear the answer / disconnect sequence. See
SIGNAL [30]
DISCONNECT_SEQ [20] and ANSWER_SEQ [21] under SFE,7 [0,0,4,1,7] on page
6-43.
None DTMF signals will not be transmitted either when the keyset
station answers or disconnects
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SECOND_CALL_ Yes/No
DISPLAY [31]
Relevant only for keysets defined with Multi-Appearance.
Controls the second line display for the keyset.
When the keyset is engaged in a conversation that involves both display lines, such
as Name Retention or Call Forward, this parameter defines whether or not the
information on an incoming call can be displayed on the second line, instead of the
current call information, i.e. the caller name or the forwarded destination.
Notes:
• This parameter does not apply to P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450),
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and all
third-party SIP terminals.
• For DKT2320Z and FlexSet 280D-Z (and
FlexSet 280S/281S/120S/121S when defined for zip tone), this parameter
must be set to Headset_Only.
• SPKR_ON/OFF [43] below must be set to Yes to enable this feature.
9-41
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
When set to Headset_Only, this parameter enables all calls to be conducted via the
headset and disables the keyset microphone and loudspeaker when pressing the
programmed feature button or by dialing the feature code (default: #1302).
The audio path can only be transferred when the telephone is in an idle state,
regardless of the handset state.(User Modifiable: default feature code #1302)
The FlexSet-IP 280S and T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL users may
activate this feature from any telephony state, not only idle by either dialing its
feature code or using a pre programmed button.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BLOCK_REORDER_ Yes/No
TONE(VM) [33]
Set this parameter to Yes to disable the reorder tone sent to this Keyset when it did
not yet onhook after a 2-way call disconnect.
•
Define this parameter to No when VOICE_MAIL (DTMF receive) [28] on page 9-40
is defined “Yes” for ports serving as Voicemail stations, in order to enable using the
Voicemail application to record announcements.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
• For FlexAir/CoralAIR wireless handsets, this feature is controlled at the
handset.
• For T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL phones, this feature is
controlled at the station and it’s web portal.
• This feature is not displayed for FlexSet-IP 280S, T207M, T208M,
T207M/NP, T208M/BL, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, P-Seies
(such as: P-335, P-450), T322, T328, SeaBeam, and all third-party SIP
terminals.
9-42
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-43
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Auto Answer to Voice Page determines whether or not voice page to station is
automatically answered.
Y: enables two-way conversation
N: disables the keyset microphone (effecting one-way communication) until
manually answered. (User modifiable: default feature code #133)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This feature is not available for P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T207S,
T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and all third-party
SIP terminals.
Determines whether or not the call duration is displayed on the keyset during an
external call. (User Modifiable: default feature code #129)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-44
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
OFF=0 [41]
Notes:
• This parameter is irrelevant for P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450),
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and all
third-party SIP terminals.
• Keysets defined as Attendant (ATT [17] above) should define this
parameter to 1 (Auto Transfer).
• Auto Hold, Auto Transfer, and Auto Join are mutually exclusive; only one
can be used.
When a station user is engaged in a regular call (2-way), this parameter may be
used to define what to do with the ongoing call when trying to handle incoming or
outgoing call.
Table 9-2: Auto_Join / Auto_Hold / Auto_Transfer / Off
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-45
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
AUTO_DTMF_IN_ Yes/No
3WAY_&_CONF [42]
This parameter is relevant for FlexSet 121S/281S, FlexSet-IP 280S,
T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL phones.
Determines whether or not the Touch-Tone Dialing (DTMF) from a phone engaged
in a 3-way conference or multiparty calls, can be activated without the need of
pressing the OCC key (Other Common Carrier, #127).
When set to Y (Yes), the keyset is capable of transmitting DTMF signals during a
3-way, conference, and multiparty call, enabling it to send commands to Voicemail
and other applications without using a soft key or a pre-programmed OCC button.
When set to N (No), DTMF signals will be transmitted from the keyset only after
pressing an OCC button.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-46
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
PROTOCOL Only one of the following three parameters may be defined as Yes.
TYPES: • 3RD_PARTY_EVENTS [45]
• PCC [46]
• ACD_PC [47]
3RD_PARTY_EVENTS Yes/No
[45]
When this parameter is set to Yes, the next two parameters PCC [46] and
ACD_PC [47]) are not displayed.
Set this parameter to Yes to define this Keyset with iAPA or FlexSet with APA,
PEX/APA, (or APDL) as the communicator between the CSTS application (such
as the Coral Navigator) and the Coral.
For the Coral Navigator, set this parameter to Yes for the 24th port (APDL) on the
IPC2 card.
This parameter should only be set to Yes for the following type station devices:
• FlexSet that includes an APA or PEX/APA unit with Version 3.15 or higher
• APDL unit
• Keyset with iAPA
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
• This setting is irrelevant for FlexAir/CoralAIR wireless handsets,
P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL,
T322, T328, SeaBeam and all third-party SIP terminals. Therefore, it
9-47
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
applications. If defining this parameter differently for another keyset defined on the
same card, an error message appears:
Conflict with previous definition of KEYSET wxyz.
PCC [46] and ACD_PC [47] are mutually exclusive for the same keyset. Therefore,
when PCC [46] is set PCC or CSTS_PCC, then ACD_PC [47] (below) is
automatically set to No and vice versa.
Notes:
• The PCC must be version 10.080 or later.
• A PCC connected to APA cannot be used as a Multi_PCC station but
rather as a singular PCC station only.
• To employ a PCC station via APA (not iAPA), the APA setup is needed
(see APA, PEX/APA and APDL RS-232 Setup on page 9-120).
• The keyset (FlexSet, DKT, GKT,...) must be connected to one of the first
8 card ports (CKT # 0 - 7).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
9-48
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Notes:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-49
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
iAPA The following two parameters are used to establish the logical connection between
the CTI application computer and its associated Coral Keyset.
• APPLICATION_IP_SOCKET(#/R) [48]
• UGW_CARD_LOCATION (Shelf,Slot) [49]
iAPA (Figure 9-5) is applicable for CTI application computers communicate with
the Coral system, via the organization’s network rather than via the APA devices.
It may be defined for these keyset units:
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
• DKT 1000 series
• DKT 2000 series
• FlexSet 120, 120D, 120L, 120S, 121S
• FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 280S, 281S
The following parameters must also be defined for iAPA:
• Authorization for APA on page 3-15
• RTP PORT BASE [2], KEEP ALIVE INTERVAL [3], iAPA_TCP_PORT [4] on page
29-69
UGW_CARD_ Any (Shelf,Slot) of PUGW card. Shelf and Slot numbers are entered
LOCATION (Shelf,Slot) between parenthesis, separated by a comma.
[49]
This parameter is displayed only if the previous parameter APPLICATION_
IP_SOCKET(#/R) [48] is set.
Defines the physical location of the PUGW card (Version 10.60 or higher) from
which the CTI application computer relays data to and from the application.
This parameter is used by the CTI application computer to communicate with the
PUGW card.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-50
PI Reference Manual
9-51
Station Controls
Figure 9-5.
iAPA Architecture
Incoming Calls
TAPIdriver
FlexCT Contact Launcher
Application using FlexCT Contact Launcher
Serial Port RS-232 to
TCP/IP Redirector
Line
LAN
FlexSet 121S
Coral IPx Any wired
PUGW CTI application
keyset computer
LAN
PC
FlexSet-IP 280S
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
LAN
LAN
T200M series PC
LAN LAN
FlexSet-IP 280S PC
LAN LAN
9-52
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
9-53
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
• GKT
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-54
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
COMBINED_AUDIO Yes/No
[54]
Notes:
• This feature is denied when a station is defined as SPKR_ON/OFF
[43] (page 9-46).
• This feature is applicable for FlexSet 120/121/280/281series, T207M,
T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, FlexSet 80, EKT, GKT, and DKTs.
The speaker key on the keyset can be programmed for Combined Audio to activate
the group listening feature. This feature allows keyset users on a call using the
handset to press the speaker key and have the other party's voice broadcast over the
speaker. The keyset user continues to converse on the handset.
This feature allows simultaneous use of the speaker and the handset. The speaker
can be activated by pressing the speaker key while conversing. Conversation is
carried on as usual through the handset, while the conversation is also broadcast
through the speaker. Pressing the speaker key while in group listening reverts the
keyset back to private conversation. (Also known as Group Listening and Call
Monitoring.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-55
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
5 NA Not Used
6 72 T207M, T207M/NP (128 x 32 pixels)
FlexSet 120S, 121S (3 rows x 24 characters) when
bottom line is controlled by Coral, i.e. SOFT_KEYS_
MENU (page 4-29) in Sizes Tab is defined as Selectable
7 120 T208M, T208M/BL (128 x 64 pixels)
FlexSet 280S, 281S (3 rows x 40 characters) when
bottom line is controlled by Coral, i.e. SOFT_KEYS_
MENU (page 4-29) in Sizes Tab is defined as Selectable
9-56
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-57
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
When this parameter is set to Yes, the Coral sends only the External ring type to
this wireless station.
Set this parameter to Yes for wireless handsets that do not support more
than one ring type (such as the Siemens Micro 4000L), otherwise, the
handsets will not ring.
When this parameter is set to No, the Coral system can send either an internal or
external ring to the station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
[58]
This parameter is only relevant for Keysets with a display size of 16 or 24
characters per row. See DISPLAY_SIZE [55] on page 9-56.
When F is chosen, the ANI is displayed on the first line of the keyset in shortened
form because important characters from the first line display cannot be overridden.
Choose S (Second Line) to enable the display of the entire ANI on the second line.
This is done when there is not enough space on the first line to display both the ANI
and the name.
When S is chosen, the next two parameters 2ND_LINE_PREFERENCE_FOR_
DSP32/48/72 [59] and 2ND_LINE_DISPLAY_ORDER [60] are also relevant.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
9-58
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-59
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
This parameter is not available for P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450),
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and all
third-party SIP terminals.
Displays the number of programmable keys.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
KSI TYPE [63] 1 (Rotary and DTMF), 0 (KSI not installed) or (Rotary, pulse dial only)
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
EKT To SLT Interface. Identifies the parallel SLT as having rotary (pulse dial) or
DTMF dialing. To use a DTMF telephone, an 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2, or 8DRCM card
must be installed in the system (See the relevant Coral Installation Manual).
Selecting 1 permits DTMF and pulse dialing on the same line, called MIXED SLT.
This parameter is relevant only when KSI is installed, see KSI [62] above. When the
KSI is not connected, set KSI TYPE to 0.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-60
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
SEND_CALLER_ID Yes/No
[65]
This parameter defines whether the calling station’s telephone number is displayed
on the called station’s keyset display panel.
Enter Yes to send the caller ID information for this station.
Enter No to restrict the caller’s ID on external calls. To further restrict the ID on
internal and internal network calls, set CLIR on Internal Calls [7] (page 6-20) in
Station Options (SFE, 2) to Yes.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the user can override this setting (i.e., not send
Caller ID info) on a per-call basis (default feature code #1444) for external calls
and for internal calls only when CLIR on Internal Calls [7] is also set to Yes.
Regardless of this parameter setting, when CLIR on Internal Calls [7] is set
to No, the Caller ID may be restricted only on external calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-61
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Notes:
• This number is used for information for E911 emergency centers.
• This number is only used when USE SECOND ALI [19] (page 15-16) in
Dial Services is set to Yes (when set to No, this Second Alternate Line
ID is ignored.)
This parameter defines a second alternate Line ID number for a caller’s line to be
displayed at the terminating end. It should be used to provide a phone number that
is recognized by the emergency center in order to physically locate the calling
station user.
AFTER applying the Auto Set Relocate feature (see page 5-22), enter the
Second ALI number originally assigned to the user’s new location before
the profiles were swapped.
The ID number is defined in the ISDN/ALI Table (see Alternate Line ID beginning
on page 26-9). This parameter, however, defines the index number within the
Table.
When this parameter is not defined for the station, the system definition for the
DEFAULT_SECOND_ALI [18] (page 6-12) is used instead.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Defines whether or not the keyset display shows the call cost at the end of the call.
The call cost may be detailed in either the number of metering pulses or the cost in
dollars (or any other currency defined in your system) when and only if CHARGE_
TYPE [10] (page 6-10) in SFE is set to Meter and METERING_UNIT_
CHARGE (page 8-31) in Trunk Group is not defined as N.
9-62
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
ALERTING_ Yes/No
MAKECALL [69]
Defines whether to alert the calling station user that the CoraLINK MAKE_CALL
feature is being employed.
When the Coral system has been instructed to connect two ports (stations), this
feature determines whether the called station rings as follows:
Entering Y causes only the calling station to ring. Only after the calling keyset is
answered does the call go through causing the called station to ring.
Set this parameter to Yes for SIP stations (P-Seies (such as: P-335,
P-450), T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and
all third-party SIP terminals) serviced by CoraLINK applications (via CLA
or MAP cards). (SLTs are automatically defined for Alerting Makecall as
Yes.)
Entering N causes both stations to ring simultaneously. When the calling station
answers the call, then it hears a ring back tone until the called station answers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-63
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Permanent/Temporary P/T
_AUTO SET
RELOCATE [72]
Notes:
• When TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [8] on page 6-21 is defined to
NO in the System Features - Station Options branch (SFE, 2), then this
parameter is automatically defined as Permanent and cannot be
changed to Temporary.
• When TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [8] on page 6-21 is defined to
YES, then this parameter can be defined as Permanent or Temporary.
Define this parameter as:
• Permanent so that the station relocation holds until reverse relocation is
performed.
• Temporary to automatically reverse the relocation at midnight (only when
TEMPORARY_AUTO SET RELOCATE [8] on page 6-21 is set to Yes).
This parameter should be set identically for both source and destination stations. It
allows swapping station profiles between similar sets, either temporarily or
permanently.
See Auto Set Relocate (Portability) List per Device Type on page 18-11.
(User Modifiable: No default feature dial number is automatically assigned for this
feature. The system manager must define a default feature dial number
corresponding to the feature index number (220).)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ring differently (same as Voice Page ring). The called station hears the different
ring and realizes this is a high priority call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MUSIC_ON_ 0..3
HOLD/TRANSFER [74] IPx 500 and CDRS 200E: 0 (MP-1), 1 (MP-2)
Defines which music source is sounded on the held line (i.e., the second party)
when the station places a call on hold or transfers the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-64
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
COLLECT_CALL_ Yes/No
REJECT_TONE [75]
On an incoming call, defines whether to send a special tone to the Central Office
(PTT) attendant indicating that the CORAL called party may not accept a collect
call. Set this parameter to Yes to send the collect call reject tone (defined in Tone
Plan, see page 6-97) to the Central Office (PTT) attendant. The attendant, upon
hearing this tone, should deny the request for a collect call connection and
disconnect the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ENHANCED_DIAL_ Yes/No
MODE [76]
This parameter is not relevant for P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T207S,
T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam, and all third-party
SIP terminals.
Enables this station user to dial numbers from the keypad and then continue the
dialing procedure by pressing any pre-programmed DSS key.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
REPORT_3RD_ Yes/No
PARTY_EVENTS [77]
Set this parameter to Yes for keyset stations that are managed by the CSTS
application. When this parameter is set to Yes, the stations data is sent to the CSTS
Server via the Coral.
For Coral Navigator:
• Set this parameter to Yes for all Coral Navigator Client ports:
• In the relevant COS for the station ports, set SILENT_MON_DENY [14] (page 7-8)
to No
9-65
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
EKT/VDK only: The following two parameters: PEM_EXIST [78] and PEM_INSTALLED [79] apply
only to EKTs and/or VDKs.
1: First EKT/VDK
0 All other EKTs/VDKs
Determines the database memory that is allocated for the PEM by defining the
amount of PEM keys that can be used (including no PEM at all). Five different
PEM configurations are available. When allocating the number of PEM keys, the
amount must be equal to or greater than the PEM_EXIST [78] definition, otherwise
the following message appears and the PEM installation is denied:
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
CONFIGURATION ERR
When PEM_EXIST [78] = 0, entering 0 for PEM_INSTALLED [79] clears memory
space for other users.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-66
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
FlexSet/ DKT/ The following two parameters: ACTIVE DPEM ID'S [80] and INSTALLED DPEMS [81]
GKT only: apply only to FlexSet 280/281/80, DKT, or GKT.
1: First keyset
0: All other keysets
Determines the database memory that is allocated for the DPEM or (FlexSet 40B)
by defining the amount of DPEM/FlexSet 40B keys that can be used. When
allocating the number of DPEM/FlexSet 40B keys, the amount must be equal to or
greater than ACTIVE DPEM ID'S [80] defined above, otherwise the following error
9-67
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
T200 and T300 The following two parameters: ACTIVE TEM ID’S [82] and TEM INSTALLED [83]
series only: apply only to:T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP,
T208S/BL, P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T322, T328.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TEM INSTALLED [83] 0 (No), 1 (One TEM: 44 Keys and one X338: 38 Keys)
1: First keyset
0: All other keysets
Determines the database memory that is allocated for the Terminal Expansion
Module by defining the amount of expansion modules that can be used. When
allocating the number of expansion module keys, the amount must be equal to or
greater than ACTIVE TEM ID’S [82], above, otherwise, the following error message
appears and the expansion module installation is denied:
CONFIGURATION ERR
When ACTIVE TEM ID’S [82] = None, entering 0 as this parameter value clears
memory space for other users and all programmed buttons will be deleted (for
T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL phones).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-68
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
TURRET Console Any valid system Keyset station number, N (None), R (Remove)
extended DPEM [84]
This parameter defines a secondary (partner) keyset to be attached an existing
keyset station, thus creating a turret console. The two keysets are physically
connected. A suffix is added to each keyset dial number of a turret console:
P defines the primary keyset and S defines the secondary keyset.
This feature is normally used to augment a keyset with the maximum of 3 DPEMs
to create a turret console with an additional keyset and one, two or three DPEMs,
allowing a maximum of 288 programmable buttons for the console.
Attempting to define a secondary keyset that has already been defined as a
secondary keyset results in the following error message:
Conflict with Primary
Only Flexsets/keysets may be connected as turret consoles. Attempting to connect
SLTs or other types of telephones result in the following error message:
Illegal Port Type
Primary
1
2
1 2 3 3
1 2 3 1
1 2 3 2
1 2 3 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-69
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
KEEP_RTP_AFTER_ Yes/No
3WAY [85]
This parameter is relevant when a keyset port participates in a 3-way call where at
least one of the parties is a NET-IP trunk. When Y (Yes) is selected, RTP is
maintained after one of the parties exits the 3-way call. When N (No) is selected
for all of the ports engaged in a 3-way call, RTP is discontinued after one of the
parties exits the 3-way call, and is then re-established for the remaining two parties.
Figure 9-6 NET- IP trunk NET- IP trunk
A A
3WAY 2WAY
B C C
Any port Any port Any port
Only when the parameter for all three ports that participate in a 3-way
call is defined as No, will RTP be discontinued (regardless of the branch
under which it is defined).
See KEEP_RTP_AFTER_3WAY [25] on page 8-17 for a trunk port
and KEEP_RTP_AFTER_3WAY [43] on page 9-18 for an SLT port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
9-70
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
DKT: The following parameter is only relevant when this keyset station is a DKT.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-71
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
SOFTKEY: The followingparameters are displayed only when SOFTKEY [52] on page 9-54 is
Display Features set to Yes:
Defines whether or not the idle display of the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP,
T208M/BL, FlexSet-IP 280S, FlexSet 280S, 281S, 120S, 121S, 80S, 80P and GKT
shows the telephony features relevant to a zone page group, allowing activation via
the Soft Keys.
Set the this parameter to Yes if the station user is a member of a Zone page group.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-72
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
9-73
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
SOFTKEY:
IDLE_SET [94] 0..15
Select Description
Not_Relevant Indicates that this phone is not equipped with a third line
display or that the FlexSet phone is installed with software
version lower than 3.5x.
MCP Indicates that the phone’s third line display is controlled by
the Coral Main Software (i.e. one of 16 sets may be chosen
for the bottom line display)
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
9-74
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-75
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
FLEXSET:
CORD_DISCONNECT_ 0..143/R
ACTIVATION_BUTTON
[97]
This parameter is only relevant for:
• FlexSets 280S, 281S, 120S, 121S
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
Designates the programmable button index number that is automatically toggled
(turned on or off) each time the headset cord is disconnected or connected.
The corresponding button should be programmed to perform the required feature,
for example: DND, Login/Logout, Attended/Unattended, Call Forward, etc.
See Figures 9-8, 9-10 and 9-12 for button number locations.
Note: If AUDIO_PATH [32] (page 9-41) is set to Normal, the keyset must be in the
On-Hook mode for this feature to be activated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CORD_DISCONNECT_ Yes/No
AS_WIRELESS_
HEADSET [98]
This parameter is only relevant when wireless headset is installed for:
• FlexSets 280S, 281S, 120S, 121S
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
When set to Y (Yes), a call can be answered and disconnected by pressing the
built-in activation button on the wireless headset.
When set to N (No), calls can only be answered and disconnected by pressing the
Keyset Definition KEY [or EKT or 0,2,1,2,0]
9-76
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Keyset Button Programming is used to adapt the keysets to the user’s personal and
professional needs.
Table 9-3 on page 9-79 shows some typical functions that can be programmed into
a keyset button.
Table 9-4 on page 9-81 lists all available keysets and their figures.
Features can then be activated or deactivated at the press of a “programmed button”
thus immediately activating the feature. There are certain features that require
using programmed buttons because they require feature destinations, such as
Divert Call and Help-Requesting.
Key (or Button) programming defines the operation of each keyset button. When
the Class of Service permits, keys may be programmed individually by the user at
each station.
KEYSET BUTTON Identifies the feature number or port dial number or sequence of feature/port dial
CONTENT # numbers.
The button numbers in the range above will now present themselves each on a new
line. The button number is followed by the feature/port dial numbers.
Update the requested button’s number accordingly. Remove a button entry by
entering R while the cursor/pointer is on the appropriate button line.
9-77
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
9-78
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
DSS (Direct Permits making or transferring a call to There are two ways to program a key for
Station Selection) an extension or boss/hunt group by DSS so that the LED Indicator remains unlit:
o Program a speaker button which is
without Busy Lamp using a defined key without lighting the
immediately followed by the station number
busy lamp. (e.g. enter #1201234 to reach station 1234).
This feature is typically used in hotel o Enter the library code 7000.
situations for telephones in the guest In the OUT TK? field in Public Library or
rooms. Large Library (see Chapter 11), enter the
When this feature is used, the station or hunt or boss group dial number
programmed button lamps (hotel desk, for the programmed button.
EXAMPLE:
barber shop, restaurant, etc.) on the
LIB: 7000
telephone in the guest room do not light NAME: Barber
when their line is engaged. Therefore, TOLL_OVERRIDE: Y
for example, when the restaurant line is TNNT_GROUP: 0 (Enter same COS
busy, the direct line (programmed as COS programmed for the
button) to the restaurant on the guest’s guest telephone.)
telephone (in his/her room) does not DIAL NUM: 1 (This field is irrelevant
in this case, enter any #.)
light.
OUT TK: 1234 (Enter the Dial
Number for the Barber.)
Network Number Permits programming a key to dial any This procedure is performed
(without busy lamp) Network extension number without exactly as it is done within a
having the LED indicator light every singular Coral system.
time the extension is busy.
Feature Key Permits activating or canceling a Follow the directions above and
without feature or series of features without add the SPKR code #120 after
confirmation tone or hearing a confirmation tone or seeing a library code 7000.
display display. The SPKR code #120 must be
programmed after each successive
feature sequence.
9-79
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
LINE (Boss Group) Programs a Line key in Boss Group for To program a key:
identical displays and signals. Enter LINE code #126 followed by
a Line Number (00 to 05) and then
Not applicable for SLT, Magneto, enter the Boss Group number.
9-80
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Table 9-4: Keyset Default Button Programming and Serial Number locations
DKT23xx (First keyset, Attendant, all EU) Default Button on page 9-93
Programming
9-81
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
9-82
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Figure 9-7.
FlexSet 120, 120D
&120L
Button (Key) FlexSet 120, 120D, 120L
Number Locations
7
F4
6
F3 5
F2 4
3
F1
2
1
0
Figure 9-8.
FlexSet 120S &
121S
Button (Key)
Number Locations FlexSet 120S, 121S
F2 2
1
F1
0
9-83
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Figure 9-9.
FlexSet 280, 280D
& 280D-Z
Button (Key)
Number Locations FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z
23 15 7
F4
22 14 6
F3 21 13 5
F2 20 12 4
19 11 3
F1
18 10 2
17 9 1
16 8 0
Figure 9-10.
FlexSet 280S &
281S
Button (Key)
Number Locations FlexSet 280S, 281S
Keyset Button - Programming PROG [0,2,1,2,2]
21 15 7
F4
20 14 6
F3 19 13 5
F2 18 12 4
17 11 3
F1
16 10 2
9 1
8 0
9-84
PI Reference Manual
40B units
for FlexSet 280,
Number Locations
Figure 9-11.
optional FlexSet
280D & 280D-Z with
Button (Key)
FlexSet 280D
63 53 43 33 103 93 83 73 143 133 123 113
9-85
Station Controls
9-86
Station Controls
40B units
Number Locations
Figure 9-12.
optional FlexSet
280S/281S with
for FlexSet
Button (Key)
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
PI Reference Manual
PI Reference Manual
T208M/BL with an
Number Locations
Figure 9-13.
T207M/NP,
for T207M, T208M,
Button (Key)
TEM TEM
T207M, T208M
34 56
23 45
33 55
22 44
32 54
21 43
31 53
20 42
30 52
19 41
12 29 51
18 40
MSG XFER 28 50
03 07 11
17 39
27 49
CONF REDIAL
16 38
02 06 10
26 48
DIR HOLD 15 37
01 05 09 25 47
14 36
HEADSET MUTE SPKR 24 46
00 04 08 35
13
9-87
Station Controls
NOTE: The nine fixed key contents cannot be changed by the end user (i.e.
feature code is followed by an N).
Although the technician can change the fixed key contents on a per phone
basis, the keys revert back to the default programming when the telephone
is reset. Therefore, technicians should not attempt to change these keys.
Table 9-5: T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL Default and Key Serial No.
03 MSG. 07 XFER 11
Keyset Button - Programming PROG [0,2,1,2,2]
(#175N) (#122N)
02 CONF 06 REDIAL 10
(#122N) (#143N)
01 DIRectory 05 HOLD 09
(#1994N) (#171N)
9-88
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Figure 9-14.
First EKT/VDK 23 15 7
(Attendant)– CO.
Default Button (Key)
MSG. NIGHT LINE-8
Programming
#5 #185 7107
CC0 and all
European systems 22 14 6
UNATT. CALL CO.
ATTND. PARK LINE-7
#145 79 7106
21 13 5
DIRECT CO.
CAMP-ON PICKUP LINE-6
#176 77 7105
20 12 4
VOICE ALL CO.
PAGE PAGE LINE-5
#3 7300 7104
19 11 3
MIC. BRK CO.
MUTE IN LINE-4
#1320 #124 7103
9-89
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Figure 9-15.
First EKT/VDK 23 15 7
(Attendant)- UNATT.
Default Button (Key) ATTND. NIGHT-1 NIGHT-2
Programming
CC1,CC2 systems
#145 #185 #184
22 14 6
HNDSET/
SPKR ALARM
#1323 #1997
21 13 5
VOICE AUTO
PAGE REDIAL SERIES
#3 #178 #195
20 12 4
CALL NAME/
PARK OCC NUM.
79 #127 #128
19 11 3
BRK
CAMP-ON IN MSG.
EXCL. MIC.
LOOP DEST. MUTE
#121N #1322 #1320
17 9 1
EXCL. FORCE
LOOP SOURCE RLS.
#121N #1321 #123
16 8 0
LOOP HOLD SPKR
9-90
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Figure 9-16.
Standard EKT/VDK 23 15 7
- Default Button CO
(Key) Programming LINE-8 MSG
CCO 7107 #5
22 14 6
CO
LINE-7 DND
7106 #145
21 13 5
CO FWD
LINE-6 BSY/BA
7105 #147
20 12 4
CO MIC.
LINE-5 MUTE.
7104 #1320
19 11 3
CO
LINE-4 CAMP-ON
7103 #176N
18 10 2
CO XFER/
Note: LINE-3 CONF.
In all other systems,
only the following 7102 #122N
7100 #4N
9-91
Keyset Button - Programming PROG [0,2,1,2,2]
9-92
Station Controls
optional PEMs
Number Locations
Figure 9-17.
Programming
Button (Key)
DKT23XX Default
Figure 9-18.
1st Attendant - Eu 1st Attendant (CC0 - USA) Standard DKT (EU and ROW)
VOICE CO.
LOOP BRK-IN NIGHT-2 LOOP PAGE-Q3 ALARM
PAGE LINE 5
9-93
Station Controls
Figure 9-19.
DKT23XX Default
Button (Key)
Programming-
CC1 Attendant
VOICE CO.
LOOP BRK-IN PAGE LINE 3
EXCL CO.
HOLD CAMP-ON
DEST. LINE 5
SPKR
9-94
PI Reference Manual
Programming
DKT23xx/21xx/1110
Figure 9-20.
Button (Key)
& DST - Default
Standard DKTs:
CO.
MSG.
LINE 7 CO.
DND
LINE 1
CO.
DND
LINE 6
MSG. CAMP-ON
CO.
CAMP-ON
LINE 5
CO.
SPKR PAGE-Q SPKR DND PAGE-Q SPKR PAGE-Q
LINE 2
9-95
Station Controls
Figure 9-21.
Button (Key) Serial
Number locations
for DKT1110/DST
7 5
6 4
F4 3
F3 2
F2 1
F1 0
Keyset Button - Programming PROG [0,2,1,2,2]
4 FIXED
SYSTEM KEYS
9-96
PI Reference Manual
optional DPEMs
Number locations
Figure 9-22.
F2 5 1 39 29 19 9 79 69 59 49 119 109 99 89
F1 4 0 38 28 18 8 78 68 58
4 FIXED
SYSTEM KEYS
9-97
Station Controls
9-98
Station Controls
Figure 9-23.
optional DPEMs
Number locations
for DKT23XX and
Button (Key) Serial
4 FIXED
SYSTEM KEYS
PI Reference Manual
PI Reference Manual
Figure 9-24.
optional DPEMs
Number locations
(GKT43xx) and
for FlexSet 80
Button (Key) Serial
4 FIXED
SYSTEM KEYS
9-99
Station Controls
Figure 9-25.
Button (key)
Number locations
for CoralAIR
Wireless Handsets
CoralAIR
wireless handset
1 2 3
Keyset Button - Programming PROG [0,2,1,2,2]
4 5 6
Programmable Keys:
Only Buttons 0-7 are Coral programmable.
Button # 7 is reserved for Voicemail and is not station
programmable.
9-100
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
FlexAIR
/C
buttons Ê to Ñ
correspond to button
ALT R
index #: 0 to 7,
1 2 3
respectively, when ABC DEF
programming from
the PI database. 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
7 8 9
8 9WXYZ
9-101
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Figure 9-27.
Button (Key) Serial
Number locations for
Turret Console
PARTNER
FlexSet 40B units
1 2 3
3
1 2 3
2
Partner 3rd
1 2 3
1
1 2 3
3
1 2 3
1
Keyset Button - Programming PROG [0,2,1,2,2]
Note:
When the Primary FlexSet has only one, two or no 40B units
attached, the Partner FlexSet 40B button numbers continue
from the last button number for the Primary FlexSet.
9-102
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Default for:
System Button
This table defines the feature or port dial number, or sequence of feature/port dial
numbers and additional digits stored for the button.
Table 9-3 on page 9-79 shows some typical types of functions that can be
programmed into a key/button.
9-103
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
This branch enable the bottom line display control via the Coral main software,
when SOFT_KEYS_MENU (page 4-29) in Sizes Tab is set to Selectable, for the
following keysets:
• FlexSet 120S, 280S (installed with software versions 3.50 or higher)
• FlexSet 121S, 281S
For FlexSet 120S/280S installed with software version 3.50 or higher and
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
the Coral Main Software Version is 15.5 or higher, the third line display
may be controlled by either of the following two options:
• The FlexSet software — the third line display is fixed and cannot be
changed.
• The Coral Main Software — the features displayed on the third line may
be presented in a different order and/or some features may not be
bottom line display may be controlled only by the Coral Main Software.
SOFT_KEYS_MENU (page 4-29) in SIZ TAB must be set to Selectable
otherwise no bottom line display is shown.
This branch is used to enable the technician to define up to 15 Soft Key sets, as well
as, allow the technician to assign a particular set to a soft key station or a range of
stations. Each set includes a list of features in the order entered by the technician.
The first set, Set# 0 includes the feature defaults (names and order of display)
originally programmed into the phone. This set is embedded in the Coral Main
Keyset Soft Keys Idle Set SKEY [0,2,1,2,4]
Notes:
• Once the Sets are defined in this branch, the technician may assign the
Set to a station via SOFTKEY: IDLE_SET [94] (page 9-74) in Keyset
Definition branch (KEY).
• The SOFTKEY: 3RD_LINE_CONTROL [95] (page 9-74) KEY parameter can
be used to view which entity controls the bottom line display.
9-104
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Option Description
1 - DISPLAY Displays the bottom line options for the phones per
requested Set. Sets 0 to 15 are available.
SOFTKEY IDLE SET Range: Any of the options 01 to 39 in any order between parenthesis
OPTIONS Table 9-7 lists the feature options by name, number and contents;
Default: Set 0 - predefined by phone’s software version (contains features
01 to 39 in same order)
Default: Sets 1..15 (empty sets)
This parameter allows the technician to create a list of features that is to be
displayed on the bottom line for the idle FlexSet 120S/280S (versions 3.50 or
The following list includes the feature option numbers and their corresponding
9-105
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
names that are displayed when Italian is selected with the Multilingual Displays
feature (#1328). Table 9-6 displays the SKEY feature options when English is
the selected language and the corresponding Italian SKEY feature options.
01-Msg 02-RegCmt 03-_Dir 04-_Dev 05-Music 06-DND
07-FlexiC 08-Reselz 09-ParchS 10-Atts 11-Promem
12-Pickup 13-Richmt 14-Parc
15-Annunc 16-WhspPg 17-SltMon 18-AcctCd 19-IdCtrl
20-Svegl 21-aSveg 22-CnfIns 23-ChmtGr 24-AcdUcd
25-Bloc 26-_Exec 27-COS-Sw 28-Setup
29-Trace 30-aTrace 31-StCame 32-aStCam 33-GB:Dev
34-aDev 35-Costo
36-St.Set 37-Ln.Set 38-Sistem 39-ELA 40- 41-42-
replace (...) / add after N (a,N,...) / remove (r,...) /
end <CR>:
Table 9-6: SKEY Feature Options (when Italian is the Displayed Language)
FlexSet T207M,
120S, T208M,
280S, T207M/NP,
121S, T208M/BL
281S
9-106
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
FlexSet T207M,
120S, T208M,
280S, T207M/NP,
121S, T208M/BL
281S
9-107
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
FlexSet T207M,
120S, T208M,
280S, T207M/NP,
121S, T208M/BL
281S
• Group Release
(#1447)
• Add-On (#1449)
9-108
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
FlexSet T207M,
120S, T208M,
280S, T207M/NP,
121S, T208M/BL
281S
9-109
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
FlexSet T207M,
120S, T208M,
280S, T207M/NP,
121S, T208M/BL
281S
• Terminating Only
9-110
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
FlexSet T207M,
120S, T208M,
280S, T207M/NP,
121S, T208M/BL
281S
Create or edit the feature list by entering the feature option numbers within
parenthesis as follows:
To Create a New List or Replace an Old List:
Enter: (feature number1, feature number 2, ...)
To Insert Features:
Enter (a, N, feature number1, feature number 2, ...)
9-111
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
04 Fwd Fwd Call Forward Includes the sub menu for all the
different types of Call Forward
options (not including Attendant and
Boss Group).
• See User guide for complete list.
9-112
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
9-113
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
9-114
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
28 Setup fSet Phone Setup features Includes all the phone setup features:
• Ring
• Auto Answer
• VP-AA
• VP-Rcv
• Elapsed Time
• Headset Only
• Idle Display
• Language
• Passcode
• Program Key
• Preference
• Private Library
• Secure
• DND-WP
• Privacy
• Ex Hold
• Move St (Auto Set Relocate)
30 aTrace aTrc Attendant Malicious Call Includes Attendant Call Trace sub
Trace menu:
• On/Off (#1742)
• Print (#1743)
33 BG:Fwd bFwd Boss Group: Call Forward Includes the sub Menu for Boss
Group Call Forward Options
• See the User guide
34 aFwd aFwd Attendant Call Forward Includes the sub Menu for Attendant
Call Forward Options
• See the User guide
9-115
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
35 Charge Chrg Call Charge Print Includes Call Charge sub menu:
• Report (#1972)
• Reset (#1978)
• Nite1/Nite2
• Drop on No Dial
• Hot Trunk Immediate
• Hot Trunk Delay
• Incoming Only
• Outgoing Only
• Reserved By Attendant
9-116
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-117
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Preference Programming allows defining each of the following Keysets with its
preference destinations (up to 12):
• FlexSet 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 120, 120D, 120L
• FlexSet 281S, 121S, 280S, 120S
• FlexSet-IP 280S
• T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL
• GKT
• DKT
• DST
• EKT
• VDK
If an outside line is selected as first priority, a Loop or Line key should also be
programmed in order to use features and permit internal dialing. Failure to do so
blocks feature access.
Enter the keyset dial number for which you would like to choose the preference:
For example: For a FlexSet dial no. 400, the preferences can be set as such:
>400
PREF # 0 - 7100
PREF # 1 - 7101
PREF # 2 - #121
PREF # 3 - 7102
PREF # 4 - 7103
PREF # 5 - 7104
PREF # 6 - 7105
PREF # 7 - 7106
PREF # 8 - 7107
PREF # 9 - 7108
PREF # 10 - 7109
PREF # 11 - 7110
9-118
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
When ELA lines are selected, the maximum number of priority destinations
is reduced. Each ELA line requires three PREF # entries. Therefore, the
maximum number of priority destinations available is proportionately
reduced by the number of ELA lines programmed below. Up to four ELA
line numbers can be entered.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PREF# (n) Any system trunk number, trunk group number, Routing Access number, Dial
service number, phone loop, loop originating only, ELA line number or boss
group line number.
None (no preferences are defined as the default)
9-119
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
9-120
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Notes:
• Do not install CAP and CCM on the same APA.
• A PCC connected to APA cannot be used as a Multi_PCC station but
rather as a singular PCC station only.
N_BITS 7, 8
STOP_BITS 1, 2
Determines the number of stop bits used.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-121
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
Transfers the updated APA/RS-232 database immediately to all FlexSet/Keyset
peripheral cards (8/16/24SFT, 8/16SFTipx, 8/16/24SFT Office, 4S8F Office,
8S8F Office, 4S16F Office, 8S16F Office, 8/16SFTsl, 8F8Ssl, 8/16/24SDT,
8/16SKD and 8SVD) for all APA, PEX/APA and APDL units. Regardless of entry,
routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards, including any
update which has been made. This parameter is used only in the Update Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
APA, PEX/APA and APDL RS-232 Setup CDB,8
9-122
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Coral systems equipped with SKW peripheral cards provide for wireless station
ports enabling service for portable handsets (wireless telephones) that can be used
within the system facilities. A unique Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is
programmed into each handset during the manufacturing process. This ESN must
then be registered into the Coral PI database in order to identify the particular
handset with the specific Coral system and enable wireless activity.
Option Description
9-123
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
0-INDEX_
ACCESS
FROM/TO INDEX# 0 to Maximum defined in Sizes, see WIRELESS in Chapter 4
All
Enter the range of wireless station index numbers FROM the lowest index number.
TO the highest index number. Use the NPL,0,5,40 route to identify the index
numbers associated with the wireless units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DIAL#
Displays the dial number (up to 8 digits) for the portable handset associated with
the index number above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-124
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
1-DIAL
NUMBERS_
ACCESS
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid system WIRELESS dial number (see Route: NPL, 0,5,40), All
Enter the range of wireless station dial numbers. FROM the lowest dial number TO
the highest dial number. Use the NPL,0,5,40 route to identify the wireless dial
numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INDEX#
0..1536
Displays the index number for the portable handset associated with the dial number
above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-125
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
FROM 0..2
TO 0..2
CARD_DB #
Enter the required range of card database tables FROM the lowest card number TO
the highest card number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INTERNAL RING The following two parameters ON and OFF, control the ring cadence for internal
CADENCES: (station-to-magneto station) calls.
EXTERNAL The following six parameters set the ring cadences for incoming trunk calls.
RING
CADENCES:
CC1: 1000
Sets the duration of the first ring in a three-ring cycle. See figure below.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Sets the silent period between the ON_1 and ON_2 intervals. See figure below.
Figure 9-28.
Internal Ring ON
Cadence
Ringing Silence
OFF
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-126
PI Reference Manual Station Controls
Same as ON_1, but for the second (of three) ringing periods.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Same as OFF1, but for the silent period between ON_2 and ON_3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[10]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the station cards. Regardless of
entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the cards,
including any update made. This parameter is used only in the Update mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
9-127
Station Controls PI Reference Manual
Magneto 8SM Card Database CDB,5
9-128
10 Groups
This chapter describes the various feature groups used in the system. The various
groups and page numbers are listed below:
Hunt Group .................................................................................................10-2
Boss Group ...............................................................................................10-18
Pickup Group............................................................................................10-23
Zoned Voice Page Group..........................................................................10-24
Bell/UNA Group.......................................................................................10-25
Group Calls...............................................................................................10-26
ELA Group ...............................................................................................10-38
Generally, after typing the From and To range of group numbers, updating
or viewing groups can be carried out either on all groups defined by
From/To or on specific group members.
10-1
Groups PI Reference Manual
! For Coral systems including PC_ACD and CCM systems, define all the
ACD parameters in the PC_ACD or CCM database. All changes and
additions to dialing numbers for accessing ACD groups in the General
NPL, require immediate changes as well in the PC_ACD/CCM database
(and then reset the server computer). Otherwise, accessing the ACD
groups results in error messages.
Hunt Group HUNT [0,5,0]
10-2
PI Reference Manual Groups
FROM/TO HUNT# Any valid system hunt group dial number; All
Enter the required range of hunt group dial numbers, FROM the lowest dial number
TO the highest dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum of 5 printable ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) of the Hunt group, which
appears on a member’s keyset equipped with a display when a call is directed to the
group. When BLANK is entered, a group name does not appear on the keyset
display and the Hunt group dial number is displayed.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-3
Groups PI Reference Manual
IVR_ACD Yes/No
(ACD only)
When a caller is waiting for his call to be answered by an ACD group, set this
parameter to Yes to have the call simultaneously camp-on to the ACD group and
also be answered by an IVR (which administers a related application).
The caller continues waiting to be answered by the ACD group while he/she is
connected to the IVR and does not lose his/her “place in line”. When the ACD
group is free to answer the call (i.e. an agent is freed) the IVR is disconnected and
the call goes through to the agent immediately.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
VM_GROUP Yes/No
(ACD only)
This parameter does not appear if IVR_ACD (ACD only), above, is set to
Yes.
Defines all members of this group as SLT or Keyset ports defined for Voicemail
systems.
When updating this parameter:
1. Check that the MEM # (A/R/CR) group is empty.
Hunt Group HUNT [0,5,0]
10-4
PI Reference Manual Groups
LOAD ID Yes/No
(ACD only)
Determines whether an ACD member is required to enter an ID number. When an
ID number is not required the port dial number is used for identifying the ACD
agent.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CAP_ Yes/No
REINTRODUCTION_
Defines whether or not a CAP application is prompted with a PRESENT message
OF_QUEUED_CALL
when a call waiting (multi-appearance) for an available agent is removed from the
waiting queue and starts ringing at the available agent’s station.
A message to CAP is always sent when the multi-appearance call enters the ACD
waiting queue.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
Hunt Group HUNT [0,5,0]
• The DND feature is activated or cancelled on the member station
• Statistical Search types are recommended for low traffic ACD groups.
• In order to select a statistical search type, ACD_STATISTICAL_SEARCH
must be set to “Y” (see page 4-26). Attempting to define SEARCH TYPE
in a non-initialized system generates an error message.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-5
Groups PI Reference Manual
OVERFLOW Any valid system dial number of a station, boss group, hunt group,
public library, Routing Access, Dial Service, trunk or
trunk group (for dictation equipment, etc.) or
R (Remove current number for None)
Enter the dial number to which all unanswered or non serviceable calls are routed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
EXTENDED Yes/No
OVERFLOW
• This parameter appears only when GROUP TYPE (page 10-3) is set to
(ACD only) ACD.
• The INACTIVE GROUP SETTINGS, UNAVAILABLE GROUP SETTINGS and
the RING-NO ANSWER CALLS SETTINGS are available only when this
parameter is set to Yes.
ACD evenly distributes incoming calls, stacks the calls in a waiting queue if no one
is available, and sends overflow calls to an alternate destination.This set of
extended Overflow parameters provides enhanced ACD routing capabilities, such
as conditional routing to multiple destinations and an option to either queue a call
to the ACD group or immediately divert the call to a predefined destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
expires. When the timer for camping onto the group (TIME_TO_
OVERFLOW (page 10-12)) expires, the calls are rerouted to the
OVERFLOW (page 10-6) destination.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-6
PI Reference Manual Groups
UNAVAILABLE Unavailable Group - all the active agents in the group became unavailable by
GROUP activating one or more of the following features at their stations: Don’t Disturb,
SETTINGS Call Forward ALL, Release All.
10-7
Groups PI Reference Manual
RING-NO Ring No Answer (RNA) calls are defined as ACD calls ringing at the location of
ANSWER an active and available agent but not answered within a predefined time.
CALLS
SETTINGS
! NOTE: All agents are set to Auto-Release when RNA Q CALLS is set to
Y. This will override any Auto-Release setting for the agent's station.
Caution should be used so as to prevent agent confusion when they do
not answer ACD calls ringing their set.
The call remains in the queue to the ACD group until answered or until the queuing
time is over (and the call is rerouted to the overflow destination).
If an ACD group is defined as ONE STEP GROUP, then any RNA calls immediately
overflow to the RNA destination for queued calls, even if this parameter is defined
Hunt Group HUNT [0,5,0]
as Yes. The RNA destination in this case is the most recent destination that was
recorded in the PI database before this parameter was defined as Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-8
PI Reference Manual Groups
MUSIC_SOURCE 0..3
IPx 500 and CDRS 200E: 0 (Music 1), 1 (Music 2)
Determines the music-on-hold source from multiple music sources. This music is
heard by callers that queue on the group for the duration of the TIME_TO_2ND_ANN
timer, between the 1st & 2nd announcements. The range is limited by # OF MUSIC
SOURCES (1-4) (page 4-45).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
RETAIN_HUNT_ Yes/No
MUSIC_SOURCE
Defines whether the Music Source that is sounded when a call entering the Hunt
group is answered, accompanies the call throughout the system (i.e. until
disconnect or transfer to another Hunt Group or Wait Que where this feature is also
set to Y).
When this parameter is set to Yes, the call retains the same Music Source (for the
duration of the call within the system) even when the call is transferred to another
agent or placed on Hold.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-9
Groups PI Reference Manual
10-10
PI Reference Manual Groups
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CHECK_#_OF_Q_ Yes/No
CALLS_FOR_BUSY_
ON_DIVERT
From versions 15.85.11 and higher, this parameter name replaces
DIVERT_IGNORES_#_OF_Q_CALLS_FOR_BUSY.
No other changes have been made.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-11
Groups PI Reference Manual
Notes:
• During this time period, a caller may hear a First and/or Second
Announcer, when defined as a MUSIC_SOURCE.
• Define this time period as greater than TIME_TO_NEXT_
MEM (page 10-12).
Determines the time period that a call remains in queue before going to the
overflow or the Incomplete Call Destination (if no overflow is identified).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter does not appear if IVR_ACD (ACD only), above, is set to
Yes.
Determines the time period between the end of the first announcement and the
beginning of the second announcement. This timer also determines the periodic
cycle within the second announcer phase.
During this time, one of the following facilities can be defined through MUSIC_
SOURCE (page 10-9): music, reorder tone, busy tone or no sound at all, which is
heard by the caller. The second announcement and defined interval sounds are
repeated periodically until the hunt recall timer has expired.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
To have the system automatically release an agent who’s station has not been
answering, set AUTO_RELEASED_ALL [19] (page 9-9) (SLT Definition branch)
or AUTO_RELEASED_ALL [19] (page 9-36) (Keyset Definition branch) to Yes.
Hunt Group HUNT [0,5,0]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-12
PI Reference Manual Groups
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TIME_TO_IVR 1..20..6553
When a caller is routed to an ACD Hunt group defined with an IVR connection, the
caller is immediately routed to the IVR. After this initial connection, the caller
continues camping on the ACD group.
This parameter defines the time interval for continually re-offering a connection to
the IVR while the caller is camped-on to an ACD group waiting to be answered
(see IVR_ACD (ACD only), above). If the caller chooses to re-connect to the IVR,
s/he remains queued on the ACD group.
To disconnect from the IVR, set this parameter with a value equal to or
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CALL_WAITING_ Yes/No
TONE Y: CC1
Defines whether a caller will be prompted with a call-wait tone if all active group
members are busy. The definition is valid for the specific group only and not
system wide.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-13
Groups PI Reference Manual
RECORDED The Coral system includes three different types of message transmission:
MESSAGES: • Mandatory Announcer
• First Announcer
• Second Announcer
The announcer is a device with a prerecorded message. This device can be
connected either to a SLT port, SeaMail SIP port, DVMS port, iVMFipx keyset
port, IPC/uCMC or IPC/SFC keyset port.
• In order to install an ANNOUNCER device in an SLT port, the SLT definition
must be defined as ANNOUNCER [23]=YES, (see page 9-10).
• In order to use a DVMS port, DVMS MSG must be programmed (see page 23-2).
iVMFipx as Announcer:
When using iVMFipx keyset ports as announcers (Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E
systems), update the following parameters in the Keyset Definition branch:
• VOICE_MAIL (DTMF receive) [28] (page 9-40) = Yes (automatically updated)
• ANNOUNCER [34] (page 9-42) = Yes
• PCC [46] (page 9-47) = No (automatically updated)
Hunt Group branch (HUNT):
• GROUP TYPE (page 10-3) = ACD
• VM_GROUP (ACD only) (page 10-4) = Yes
IPC/SFC as Announcer:
When using IPC/SFC keyset ports (Simplicity) as announcers, the following
parameters must be updated per keyset port:
Keyset Definition branch (KEY):
• VOICE_MAIL (DTMF receive) [28] (page 9-40) = Yes (automatically updated)
• ANNOUNCER [34] (page 9-42) = Yes
• PCC [46] (page 9-47) = CSTS (automatically updated)
Hunt Group branch (HUNT):
• GROUP TYPE (page 10-3) = ACD
Hunt Group HUNT [0,5,0]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-14
PI Reference Manual Groups
ENTER 1ST Keyset port # (SeaMail, iVMFipx, IPC/uCMC or IPC/SFC port) defined as
ANNOUNCER ANNOUNCER,
SLT port # defined as ANNOUNCER,
DVMS port # defined with special message,
R (Remove current number for None)
This parameter does not appear if IVR_ACD (ACD only), above, is set to
Yes.
Identifies the announcer dial number to incoming calls whenever all of the
ACD/UCD members are busy. When first announcer is heard, the system
automatically camps the call onto the group and then one of the following facilities,
as defined through MUSIC_SOURCE (page 10-9): music, busy tone or no sound at
all, is heard.
When the first announcer is defined as NONE the incoming caller will hear the
TONE TYPE (page 4-45) that is defined for the Music Source: Music, Busy or
Ringback tone or Silence.
1ST ANNOUNCER appears in Display Mode only if an entry has been made
(i.e. a port number was defined for this parameter).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-15
Groups PI Reference Manual
ENTER 2ND Keyset port # (SeaMail, iVMFipx, IPC/uCMC or IPC/SFC port) defined as
ANNOUNCER ANNOUNCER,
SLT port # defined as ANNOUNCER,
DVMS port # defined with special message,
R (Remove current number for None)
This parameter does not appear if IVR_ACD (ACD only), above, is set to
Yes.
Identifies the announcer dial number for calls waiting to be answered by a group
member, for more than the defined time period. The second announcer is heard if
the call is camped on the group for at least the time period defined for the start of
second announcer (see TIME_TO_2ND_ANN on page 10-12).
• Keyset Definition:
ANNOUNCER
[34] (page 9-42).
DVMS NOT DEF IN A DVMS port number Define the required DVMS
(PDB) was entered, but the port for a specific message
PORT was not defined using DVMS MSG
for a special MSG. [0] (page 23-2).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-16
PI Reference Manual Groups
Notes:
• Any valid number can be used for member number, such as: system
station, central Bell/UNA or Modem dial numbers (a public library
number and/or a Boss group number can only be members of UCD
groups).
• Remove (R) is denied when a member is active (not idle). If an attempt
is made to remove an active station the error message
PORT-IS-ACTIVE is displayed.
• An SLT station defined as ANNOUNCER cannot be a member of a hunt
group.
• If an attempt is made to define a non valid (illegal) system number the
error message: ILL PORT TYPE appears.
• A station can only be defined once for a particular group. If an attempt
is made to define a station number that is already a member of the
current hunt group the error message: ALREADY DEFINED appears.
• IPC/SFC: If the live record feature is to be used, the last port on this
card should not be defined as a Hunt Group member.
• Never define ACD members with Multi-appearnce option.
For an SLT see MULTI_APPEARANCE [24] (page 9-11)=No.
For a keyset see MULTI_APPEARANCE [22] (page 9-37)=No.
Application Note:
Using the Public Library as a UCD Group member allows the option of providing
10-17
Groups PI Reference Manual
Boss groups are a versatile and unique feature of the Coral Communication system.
Boss groups may be used to direct a call to several stations simultaneously. Calls
directed to a Boss group ring at all members assigned to ring within the group, then
may be directed to members which are assigned to ring after a delay (ring delay
after time-out).
Additionally, Boss Groups offer key system emulation features. Member stations
of a Boss group may share a Boss line key which functions very much like a
common line among keysets. Trunks reserved to a Boss group act on member
stations in a manner similar to the common lines of a key telephone system; this
includes group-wide HOLD, incoming call, and busy indications; and automatic
conference (break-in); as well as exclusive use by member stations.
The XDA application allows for a common line appearance of external
destinations at the Boss Group members’ stations when the external destination is
defined as a reserved Public Library number see RSRVD_TO_BOSS_
GROUP (page 11-3) in the Private Library branch (LIB, 0).
A station may be a member of several Boss groups.
Notes:
• Busy indication lamps are not available on SLT, Magneto,
CoralAir/FlexAir wireless telephones and most SIP telephones.
• SIP entities defined with an Early Media Negotiation cannot be defined
as members in a Boss Group (the phones will not ring), see Media
Negotiation [6] (page 29-46).
Boss Group Class of Service
The Boss Group COS is defined by the first Boss Group member’s COS. This is
relevant for Call Forwarding Boss Groups.
Boss Group BOSS [0,5,2]
10-18
PI Reference Manual Groups
FROM/TO BOSS# Any valid system boss group dial number; All
Enter the required range of boss group dial numbers. FROM the lowest dial
number, TO the highest dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum of 5 printable ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) of the Boss group, which
appears on a member’s keyset equipped with a display when a call is directed to the
group. When BLANK is entered, a group name does not appear on the keyset
display and the Boss group dial number is displayed. See General Rules for Entering
Names (page 2-10).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-19
Groups PI Reference Manual
MEMBER_FWD_ Yes/No
BUSY_OVERRIDE?
Determines whether an activated Forward Busy feature of one of the members in
the group can be ignored for calls directed to the boss group, thus giving priority to
the group calls over private calls.
Busy members receive notification of the incoming call on the second line of their
display.
The Call Forward Busy feature for private calls is not affected.
Boss Group BOSS [0,5,2]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CALL_WAITING_ Yes/No
TONE CC1: Y
Defines whether a caller hears (and sends) a call waiting tone to a boss group. The
definition is valid only when there is an available boss group line. If all lines in the
boss group are busy, then the caller will hear a busy tone and not the call waiting
tone.
The definition is valid for the specific boss group only and not system wide.
This call waiting tone duration is defined as a second ringback tone (see Second
Ringback (2nd R.back) in Table 6-12).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-20
PI Reference Manual Groups
Identifies the Boss group members by member station dial numbers. Enter the
station’s dial number followed by ring control either Y (ring assigned) or N (no ring
assigned) or D (delayed ring assigned), for example 201Y, 202N. If Y or N or D is
not entered following the dial number, ring assigned (Y) becomes the default.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
APP RING CONTROL Y (Immediate Ring), N (No Ring Assigned), D (Delayed Ring)
(Y/N/D)
N (No ring assigned) cannot be defined for SLT and WST stations.
Defines station ringing for group members. Do not enter spaces or tabs between the
station dial number and the ring control definition.
Notes:
1) If APP RING CONTROL is set to Y or D, and the last ringing station is
defined as multi-appearance, then the ring time is determined by the
MULT_APR_RING timer (Station Timers); otherwise, RING DELAY
determines the ring duration.
2) An active member's station cannot be removed. If an attempt is made to
remove an active station the message: PORT-IS-ACTIVE is
displayed. A member can only be removed when the station is idle.
3) Any station defined as ANNOUNCER cannot be a member of a boss
group.
10-21
Groups PI Reference Manual
higher.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Boss Group BOSS [0,5,2]
10-22
PI Reference Manual Groups
FROM/TO PICKUP# 0 to maximum defined in Sizes, see PICKUP (page 4-14); All
Enter the required range of Pickup group index numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Notes:
• Only a station can be a member of a pickup group. If an attempt is
made to define a non valid station number the error message appears:
NOT A ST #.
A station can be a member of only a single group. If an attempt is made to define a
station number that is already a member of a group this error message appears:
ALREADY DEFINED IN GRP #?
10-23
Groups PI Reference Manual
Zoned Voice Page Group allows programmers to define Keyset Zoned Voice Page
groups. Entering Keyset station dial numbers into a Zoned Voice Page group allows
a caller to establish a one-way call to the speaker of all idle members of the group.
Each Zoned Voice Page group is assigned a unique dial number. Any keyset or
FlexSet station may be a member of several Zoned Voice Page groups.
For Coral IPx Office systems: when the Zoned Voice Page Group includes
IP keysets (FlexSet-IP 280S, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL), the
group must be defined as Group Calls on page 10-26, otherwise it will not
function.
FROM/TO ZONE# Any valid system zone group dial number; All
Enter the required range of Zone group dial numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Defines the tenant group number (see Tenant Class of Service on page 7-44)
required for accessing or paging a defined group of Keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MEM # Any valid system Keyset (FlexSets, CPAs, FlexSet-IP 280S, T200M series,
(A/R/CR) GKT, DKT, EKT included) station dial number;
Zoned Voice Page Group VPZ [0,5,4]
Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200: All keysets are members of the first
Zone Group.
A: Add new number at current location;
R: Remove number;
CR: Skip number.
Identifies the Zoned Voice Page group members by member station dial number.
Only Keysets may be a member of a Zoned Voice Page group. Enter the dial
number of the group member’s station.
10-24
PI Reference Manual Groups
The Bell/UNA group is used to establish Universal Night Answer (UNA) Bell
groups. Bell groups allow members to answer calls directed to the Bell port. A
UNA/Bell Relay dial number and a station dial number may be a member of only
one Bell group.
An incoming call may be automatically directed to a central bell. When the bell
rings anyone within that group may dial the feature code to pickup the call.
FROM/TO BELL/UNA# All or 0 to maximum defined in Sizes, see BELL/UNA (page 4-14)
Enter the required range of Bell group index numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Maximum number of members allowed per group is 254 (and not 255
because the BELL number is also a member).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-25
Groups PI Reference Manual
A Group Call can be defined as a preset conference call where all the participants
have been pre-defined as members in this branch. Thus, the conference initiator
rings all the members by dialing the Group Call number.
In Coral IPx Office systems, the Group Call can also be used to create a
Zone Page by Group Call when the group includes IP keysets
(FlexSet-IP 280S, T200M series).
Set the following parameters as defined below:
BREAK_IN/OUT_TONE on page 10-31
JOIN MEMBERS IN MUTE on page 10-32
AUTO_ANSWER (KEYSET) on page 10-33
AUTO_ANSWER (OPERATOR) on page 10-33
AUTO_DISCONNECT BY on page 10-33
LOCK ACTIVE GROUP CALL on page 10-34
NEXT GROUP on page 10-36
MEM # (A/R/CR) on page 10-37.
Group Call A Group Call is initiated when an authorized user, usually the Group Operator,
Definitions dials the assigned Group Call dial number, thus causing all the registered members
(defined in MEM # (A/R/CR)) to ring.
To initiate a temporary Group Call conference, the Group Call initiator must
1. Dial the temporary Group Call feature number (default #1449)
2. Dial the Group Call dial number.
3. Dial the required members, one after the other.
Group Calls CALL [0,5,7]
10-26
PI Reference Manual Groups
Group Call participants may also be admitted in mute mode (if JOIN MEMBERS IN
MUTE is defined). Participants must request permission to speak from the GROUP
OPERATOR defined for that Group Call.
The Group Call can be locked against new participants (non registered members)
by defining LOCK ACTIVE GROUP CALL to Yes in this branch.
Group Call - Different COS definitions allow the authorized user to:
COS Definitions • Establish a temporary Group Call containing no predefined members. The
members are added by the call initiator while initiating the call (default feature
code: #1449)
• Release a group call participant (default feature code: #1446)
• Terminate the group call (default feature code: #1447)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Group Call Size Group Calls are based on the availability of conference circuits. Therefore, the
maximum number of Group Calls and the Group Call size is limited by the number
of conference cards and how the card is defined in the database.
CNF card (defined as CONF in Each card allows two group calls.
Card List menu) Each group with a maximum of 15
participants (14 members plus the group call
initiator) per call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-27
Groups PI Reference Manual
10-28
PI Reference Manual Groups
Example
To create a large Group Call with 18 registered members, one operator, and an
option to add 4 non-registered members, define the following parameters:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-29
Groups PI Reference Manual
NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum of 5 printable ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) of the Group Call. This
name appears on the member’s keyset display when:
• calling the Group
• being called by the Group
• being transferred to a Group Call.
When BLANK is entered, a group name does not appear on the keyset display and
the Group Call dial number is displayed.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-30
PI Reference Manual Groups
CONF # All or any valid system conference dial# as defined in CONF [30] on page 5-43
Allows defining whether the Group Call is activated over a specific conference port
or over any idle (free) system conference port (All). A specific conference port
number is selected by entering the conference port dial number associated with a
particular port. Each CNF card has two conference ports. The 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2,
and 8DRCM card have one conference port. Each URC2 unit has up six conference
ports.
When All is selected, any of the idle conference ports can be used when Group Call
is activated. In this case the system selects any free conference port, as required.
When CONF # is defined as ALL and the number of group calls is greater
than the number of available conference ports, then, in order to use the
group call, at least one conference port should be reserved and not
assigned to any group.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Allows defining the tenant group number required for accessing the Group Call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
STOP_RING_AFTER_ Yes/No
1ST_ANSWER
When a Group Call is activated, all stations (members) defined for that particular
group ring. Members join the conference call by answering the phone or pressing
the lit GRP CALL # programmed key. Stations that go unanswered continue
ringing, without disturbing the conference, until the defined time-out period GRP_
CALL_RING [21] (page 6-5) expires.
To cancel the ringing at the other members’ phones after the call was answered by
any one group member (before the ringing time-out), enter Y for this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BREAK_IN/OUT_ Yes/No
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-31
Groups PI Reference Manual
JOIN_AFTER_STOP_ Yes/No
RING
Enter Y to enable a Group Call member (i.e. registered member station defined in
the PI Group Call Member database) to join an ongoing conference call although
the phone has stopped ringing, because the call was answered and/or the ringing
time-out period expired.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ADD_ON Yes/No
Enter Y to define this Group Call as temporary.
Do not define members for this Group Call dial number when this
parameter is set to Yes.
A temporary Group Call should contain no predefined members. The Group Call
initiator adds members from his/her station. After the Group Call is terminated, all
the members are dropped and the same Group Call can be used again with other
members.
The temporary Group Call initiator requires COS authorization, see ADD_ON_
CONFERENCE [55] (page 7-18), default feature code #1449.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter must be set to Y when the group is to be used for Zone
Page.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-32
PI Reference Manual Groups
AUTO_ANSWER Yes/No
(KEYSET)
When set to Yes, Group Call keyset members, including the group call operator
(FlexSet, FlexSet-IP, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, CPA, GKT, DKT,
EKT) that do not answer until the AUTO_ANS_V_PAGE [1] timer expires,
automatically join the conference.
(The timer is defined in Keyset Timers on page 9-27).
This parameter must be set to Y when the group is to be used for Zone
Page.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
AUTO_ANSWER Yes/No
(OPERATOR)
When set to Yes, a Group Call operator that does not answer before the AUTO_ANS_
V_PAGE [1] timer expires, automatically joins the conference (regardless of the
AUTO_ANSWER (KEYSETS) definition.
(The timer is defined in Keyset Timers on page 9-27).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
AUTO_DISCONNECT Operator/Initiator/None
BY
Defines which party Operator or Initiator can force release all participants upon
hanging-up. When set to Operator or Initiator, all conference participants
(whether members of the main group or chained groups) will be released from the
conference when the Group Call Operator or Initiator (as defined) disconnects.
This parameter must be set to Initiator when the group is to be used for
Zone Page.
DISCONNECT_ Yes/No
FLEXSETS_
The group call can be configured to disconnect all keysets within the group call
IMMEDIATELY
immediately, without producing a tone. This parameter defines whether or not a
tone is heard on all keysets after the group call is finished. When N (No) is selected
the tone to idle is heard. When Y (Yes) is selected, all keysets in the group
disconnect immediately without producing a tone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-33
Groups PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
button. The library contains the number of a party to be included and the
specific trunk to be used. New group members are added and removed from
the group by pressing the programmable button of each member. The
programmable button LED flashes until the group call is answered by the
group member and remains continuously on until the group member is
removed from the group by the operator or removes himself from the group by
hanging up. Any party can add himself to the group by pressing the
programmable button of the group call operator.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-34
PI Reference Manual Groups
DISPATCH_SUB_ No/Yes
GROUP
When defined as y (yes), the group operator has eight group calls and
programmable buttons for each group. Each one of the group calls is comprised of
two chained group calls and defined with three members (defined in the end of the
chain). The user can press each of the programmable buttons and talk with the
group. While in the group call, when the user presses the programmable buttons,
the phones defined in that group will start ringing and be added to the existing
group when answered.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
GROUP OPERATOR Any valid system Keyset (with display) Station number;
None: (--) (R-Remove for None: --)
10-35
Groups PI Reference Manual
NEXT GROUP Any valid system Group Call Dial number, R (Remove for --)
Enter R for the last group call in the chain or when the group is not chained.
10-36
PI Reference Manual Groups
MEM # Any valid system SLT, Keyset, FlexSet, FlexSet-IP, P-Series, T200M series,
(A/R/CR) T200S series, third-party SIP Terminal, FlexAir/CoralAIR wireless handset,
Magneto, Public Library number, or, Private Library number of Group Call
Initiator1
When the group is to be used for Zone Page in IPx Office systems:
Any valid system Keyset member as permitted for Zoned Voice Page Group
members (see Zoned Voice Page Group on page 10-24).
A: Add new number at current location;
R: Remove number;
CR: Skip number.
Enter the member dial number. The Group Call members can be identified either
by station number or by Public Speed Call number.
10-37
Groups PI Reference Manual
Regular - An incoming call to the ELA group (i.e., to the ELA main station
dial number) rings and/or lights a programmed line key at the members’
stations so that any ELA group member can answer the call by lifting the
handset or pressing the flashing programmed line key. The call appears as a lit
line at the other members’ stations. The other keyset members may break-in to
the call or pickup a held ELA call by using their programmed line keys.
This branch allow you to create or remove an ELA group as well as to configure
the group parameters.
To create an ELA group:
A station number becomes an ELA group number only when members are defined
for the station. Therefore, an ELA group is created only after defining at least one
member station number in MEM # (A/R/CR) (page 10-40) for the requested From/To
ELA# (page 10-39).
To remove an ELA group:
Removing all members from an ELA group (ELA#) deletes the ELA group. The
station reverts to a regular station with no support for ELA lines.
10-38
PI Reference Manual Groups
Notes:
• Members cannot be removed when any of the ELA group members are
active.
• In addition to defining the ELA group members in this branch, make
sure that you define the main ELA station, as well as all ELA members,
each as Multi-Appearance in their station definition branch.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
#LINES 1..2..32
Defines the maximum number of ELA Line keys that can be programmed for this
ELA group.
This parameter, therefore, determines the number of incoming calls to the group
that can be in-progress simultaneously. When this number of calls is in-progress,
the group is busy towards additional calls directed to the group.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-39
Groups PI Reference Manual
MODE Regular/Personal/Department
Determines whether the ELA group is either a Regular or a Personal or a
Department type.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
For Regular and Department ELA Groups the APP Ring Control (Y/N/D)
is set during system configuration, as follows:
ELA Group ELA
For Personal ELA Group this item is automatically set by the system, as
• D for active member and delayed ring
follows:
• Y for the active member
• N for non-active members
The member can program one or more ELA Line keys at his/her station.
When programming a line key from the station set, the member must also define a
ring control type.
10-40
PI Reference Manual Groups
Although a member can be defined with a ring state of Y via this parameter, it can
initialize with a ring state of N depending on how the last line key was programmed
at the station. In this manner, all the line keys at one station will have the same ring
control type.
Therefore, the member’s ring type for the station may be updated via this parameter
or directly from the member’s station set.
APP Ring Control States (for Regular and Department ELA Groups):
Y. Rings immediately when the group is called.
D. Rings only after the Ring Delay period expires.
N. Does not ring when the group is called.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10-41
Groups PI Reference Manual
ELA Group ELA
10-42
11 Libraries
The Libraries Branch contains the Public, Private and Serial Libraries. This chapter
gives the necessary instructions for programming all libraries.
The Library type and its related page number is listed below:
11-1
Libraries PI Reference Manual
Tip: Use a library name to send text messages to other station users or
legal destination. See Application Note below.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME: FULL (16) Maximum of 16 printable ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) of the Public Library
entry. The name appears on keysets equipped with a display when the entry is
Public Library LIB,0 [0,6,0]
accessed. When BLANK is defined, an entry name does not appear on the keyset
display and the library entry dial number is displayed.
This library name is also displayed on the destination screen as well as in the
Shared Directory. Full Names defined as Blank are not copied to the Shared
Directory.
Tip: Use a library name to send text messages to other station users or
legal destination. See Application Note.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-2
PI Reference Manual Libraries
TOLL_OVERRIDE Yes/No
Determines if access to the library entry overrides Toll Barrier restrictions applying
to the calling station Class of Service. Setting this parameter to No invokes Toll
Barrier restrictions.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME_RETENTION_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE
Set this parameter to Yes in order to override SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_RETENTION
[23] and ACD/LIB_NAME_RETENTION [24] (page 6-26) (defined in SFE,2). This
enables the user to change the Called Party Name on the station display of
forwarded stations. The user changes the Called Party Name by first defining and
then dialing a new Public Library # destination from his/her keyset.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PROTECTED? Yes/No
Set this feature to Yes in order to deny the user the ability to change the content of
the Public Library from his/her station.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Defines the tenant group number required for accessing this Public Library entry.
This option can be used to block certain users from dialing this external number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-3
Libraries PI Reference Manual
Notes:
• Define a FULL Name for Public Libraries reserved to a Boss Group
(i.e. when this parameter is defined).
• Define the External Destination number in this Public Library DIAL
NUM field.
• If the External Destination does not possess ANI representation, then an
additional Public Library must be defined with the external destination
number defined in its DIAL NUM field and the Boss Group # defined
in its OUT TK field but without a FULL Name definition and without a
RSRVD_TO_BOSS_GROUP definition.
Refer to the New Developments Summary, Coral MSW Version 15 for a detailed
explanation on programming XDA.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
PRIORITY_ Yes/No
PREEMPTION_CALL?
When set to Yes, this parameter prioritizes calls made via this Public Library.
Public Libraries used for emergency calls can be enabled to allow the emergency
call to immediately connect to the emergency station by disconnecting (or breaking
into, see PREEMPTION TYPE [9] on page 6-21) a previously established
non-emergency call by defining the appropriate public libraries with this parameter
set to Yes.
NOTE! Previously established emergency calls are not disconnected. The new
emergency call camps on the busy trunk and waits until the trunk is freed.
The definitions for the different Public Libraries leading to the emergency
destination in a Coral Network or in the Public Network are described below. An
example is provided for clarification.
11-4
PI Reference Manual Libraries
Node A Node D
Node B
For Coral Networks: The emergency destination may be located in any one of the
network nodes or in the Public Network. If the emergency destination is located in
the Public Network, then the Emergency Destination Public Library must be
located in the gateway node leading to the Public Network.
For this example, we assume the emergency destination is in Node C or the Public
Network.
Table 11-1:
Public Library Definitions per Node for Call Path: D to B to A to Emergency Destination
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-5
Libraries PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Public Library LIB,0 [0,6,0]
11-6
PI Reference Manual Libraries
DIAL NUM 1 to Maximum digits (including the codes listed below) defined in SFE (see
MAX_DGTS_ON_TK [5] (page 6-8)). It is possible to send ANI and DNIS
numbers. See APPEND_TO_DIAL_NUMBER_AS_SUFFIX.
Enter the required external dial digits.
DO NOT enter the Trunk Group, Routing Access or Dial Service number
(for example 81, 82, etc.); enter all other numbers. The Trunk Group,
Routing Access or Dial Service number is entered in the OUT TK?
parameter defined below.
Code Instruction
E5 Enables display
Enter the feature code E71 and then the dial number.
internal party, depending on system-wide settings).
Enter the feature code E72 and then the dial number.
E72 Enables displaying Caller ID number
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-7
Libraries PI Reference Manual
OUT TK? (N/TK_NO/GRP/LIB) Any valid trunk, trunk group, dial service, Routing
Access, Wait-Que, Network number, or another Public Library dial number,
or None (N) or for special purposes: Station/Boss Group/Hunt Group;
Note: Another Large Public Library is not allowed
Enter the dial number of the outside line access code, Public Library or station if a
specific facility (group) is selected, otherwise enter N. If N is entered a station
attempting to dial this library number must also add the outside line access code.
Application Note
To use a Public Library Number as a Text Message:
1. Define SYSTEM_WIDE_NAME_RETENTION [23] (page 6-26) to Yes.
2. Create a Public Library with the following entries:
• Enter the desired message in the NAME field. The field may contain a
message like “WIFE_ON_LINE_2”.
• Set NAME_RETENTION_OVERRIDE to Yes.
• Enter any code for DIAL NUM.
• Set OUT_TK to No.
3. To send the message: dial the library number or press a pre-programmed
Public Library LIB,0 [0,6,0]
11-8
PI Reference Manual Libraries
11-9
Libraries PI Reference Manual
ENTER DIAL NUM 1 to Maximum digits (including the codes listed below) defined in SFE (see
MAX_DGTS_ON_TK [5] (page 6-8))
Enter the required external dial digits.
DO NOT enter the Trunk Group, Routing Access or Dial Number (for
example 81, 82, etc.); enter all other numbers. The Trunk Group, Routing
Access or Dial Number is entered in SPECIFIC TK? (defined below).
When using the Private Library various dialing instruction codes can also be
utilized. The following table lists these codes:
Code Instruction
E1 Outpulsing wait period during which user is able to dial any number of digits
E5 Enables display
Enter the feature code E71 and then the dial number.
system-wide settings).
Enter the feature code E72 and then the dial number.
E72 Enables displaying Caller ID number
Private Library LIB,1 [0,6,1]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SPECIFIC TK? (N/TK_NO/GRP/LIB) Any valid trunk, trunk group, dial service, Routing
Access, another Public or Private Library dial number, or None (N), Station
numbers or Network numbers for special purposes
11-10
PI Reference Manual Libraries
this library number must also add the outside line access code. Stations equipped
with a display receive the display message:
ENTER TK/GROUP#.
A Public Library dial number may be entered to gain dial access to a common
carrier, or route over a private network, before the current library number is dialed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-11
Libraries PI Reference Manual
The Serial Library is used when the addition of a prefix digit or number is required
in the Public Library Numbering Plan. Serial libraries are useful when, for
example, several Coral systems are linked into a private network or in order to
reserve dial numbers for use as extensions or other features in the system
Numbering Plan.
The Serial Library number which the user dials from the telephone is composed of
a prefix and a suffix. The prefix is essentially a serial library access code. It must
be defined in the NPL and may be from 1 to 8 digits long. The suffix is the specific
library number entry and is 4 digits long (0000 - 4095). Thus, the serial library
access number may be up to 12 digits long.
Use of the prefix enables use of the suffix number by itself to be used as an
extension (or other Coral number or feature).
For example, dialing 6-1234 reaches library 1234, while dialing 1234 reaches
telephone extension 1234. The number 6 must be defined as the library prefix as
shown in the example below.
Note that the prefix is used to inform the system that the number following it (the
suffix) is a library number and not another Coral feature. The use of a different
prefix is immaterial as far as the system is concerned; 6-WXYZ and 7-WXYZ (for
example) reach the same library number, i.e., WXYZ, if both 6 and 7 are defined
as Serial Library numbers.
The Serial and Public Libraries use the same Coral memory resources. The only
difference between the two is only the way in which the particular library numbers
are accessed. The total number of Public and Serial libraries together is 4096.
Notes:
• The Public Library size must be increased to the total required amount
Serial Library LIB,2 [0,6,2]
11-12
PI Reference Manual Libraries
11-13
Libraries PI Reference Manual
38- WAIT_QUE
39- NETWORK
40- WIRELESS
41- IP_Keyset
42- IP_SLT
43- IP_LGS
44- IP_KEY_VPG
Choose Type
* : 9,
ENTER INDEX# - 161
Default: 0..999
Enter the required range of Serial Library Index numbers FROM the lowest index,
TO the highest Index.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME:
SHORT(5) Maximum of 5 printable ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) of the Serial Library
entry which appears on keysets equipped with a display when the entry is accessed.
When BLANK is defined, an entry name does not appear on the keyset display and
the serial library entry dial number is displayed. See General Rules for Entering
Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-14
PI Reference Manual Libraries
TOLL_OVERRIDE Yes/No
Determines if access to the library entry overrides Toll Barrier restrictions applying
to the calling station Class of Service. Setting this parameter to No invokes Toll
Barrier restrictions.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Determines the access capabilities of various tenant groups into the Serial Library.
Tenant groups with access levels that include Tenant Group access will be able to
use the library entry.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-15
Libraries PI Reference Manual
DIAL NUM 1 to Maximum digits (including the codes listed below) defined in SFE
System Features, see MAX_DGTS_ON_TK [5] (page 6-8)
Enter the required external dial digits.
DO NOT enter the trunk group dial number, Routing Access or Dial
Service (for example 81, 82, etc.); enter all other numbers. The trunk
group dial number, Routing Access or Dial Service is entered in SPECIFIC_
TK? (defined below).
When using the Serial Library, various dialing instruction codes can also be
utilized. The following table lists these codes.:
Code Instruction
E5 Enables display
Enter the feature code E71 and then the dial number.
internal party, depending on system-wide settings).
Serial Library LIB,2 [0,6,2]
Enter the feature code E72 and then the dial number.
E72 Enables displaying Caller ID number
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
11-16
PI Reference Manual Libraries
SPECIFIC TK? N/TK_NO/GRP/LIB (Any valid trunk, trunk group, dial service, Routing
Access, Wait-Due, another Public Library dial number, or None (N),
Station/Boss Group/Hunt Group or Network number for special purposes
11-17
Libraries PI Reference Manual
Feature Code for the Large Pub Library Prefix. The number(s) assigned by index #
“199”. (Will be called Prefix for explanation).
Thus, in order to use the Large Public Library, the user has to dial the Prefix (1 to
8 digits), followed by the required Suffix Large Pub Lib Dial# (1 to 8 digits).
However, the user must have a correct Access Tenant Group in its COS.
For example, use the general Feature code “index #199” to tell the system that the
number 6161 is a Large Pub Library prefix. From this point on, dialing 6161
accesses the Large Pub Library database. The user continues and dials up to 8 more
digits (the suffix).
For example: dialing 6161-10001234 accesses Large Pub Library number
10001234. The Large Pub Library number 10001234 is itself assigned to a selected
number (out of the 65,000 available) in the Large Pub Library numbering plan.
The Large Pub Lib can be programmed into a keyset key for fast key dialing.
11-18
PI Reference Manual Libraries
Limitations The Large Pub Lib cannot be defined as a system feature destination (such as Call
Forward, DIL, etc.....)
The Large Pub Libraries can be programmed or updated via CoralVIEW Designer
(CVD) only.
Procedure For Defining Large Public Library
1. Make sure that PUBLIC, LARGE_PUB, LARGE_NPL, LARGE_PUB_DIGITS are
defined according to your system size requirements (see Sizes Def.-Chapter
4). The Large Pub Library uses significant amount of Coral resources. It is,
therefore, recommended to define the LARGE_PUB size to be close to your
actual requirements plus a reasonable amount of “spare”. It should not
otherwise be set to the maximum allowed.
2. Make sure that the dial # to be used as the Large Public Library Prefix, is
assigned to the general Feature code index# 199 in NPL,0 (see page 5-38).
The extra prefix must be defined in the system Numbering Plan as a
FEATURE, Index number 199. The prefix number may be composed of 1
to 8 digits.
Use the following steps (in a system after first initialization):
a) Go to the General NPL (Route: NPL,0).
b) Remove all existing dial# starting with the required PREFIX number.
c) Add the new PREFIX dial#, by entering the following data listed in ( ):
FROM NEW DIAL# (Enter the required PREFIX number)
TO NEW DIAL# (Enter [CR])
NUMBERS ALREADY DEF? (Enter N)
Choose type *: (Enter 9)
ENTER INDEX#- (Enter 199)
3. Wait for the prompt message NUMBERS ADDED
11-19
Libraries PI Reference Manual
The Large Lib Numbering Plan is used to determine and establish the system-wide
pattern scheme for the second part (Suffix) of the Large library dial#.
Dialing digits via the keypad or programmed buttons on the keypad is the user's
method of instructing the Coral system to access a library and dial out. The dial#
includes two parts, the PREFIX and a secondary numbering plan (the SUFFIX) for
each entry.
The Prefix defines access to all Large Library entries in the system. A Suffix is
assigned to each entry. These numbers must be ADDED to the system after first
initialization. The system programmer has a reference tool to refer a Suffix dial
number to a specific entry. That reference tool is an internal index number in the
system which refers to dial numbers.
The Large Public Library Numbering Plan is used to assign system suffix dial
numbers to the index numbers in the flexible numbering scheme.
INDEX #: An index number is a software identification number which identifies a speed dial
library number. Each entry is identified by a specific index number regardless of
the suffix dial number assigned to it by the Numbering Plan. The first entry is
identified by index 0.
In general, the number of large public libraries established in the System Sizes
determines the quantity of index numbers allocated. The first 1,000 large public
speed dial library numbers for instance, require index numbers 0 through 999
(inclusive), the second 1,000 would require index numbers 1000 through 1999
Large Public Library Numbering Plan LIB,3,0 [0,6,3,0]
(inclusive).
DIAL #: The suffix dial number is used (after dialing the Prefix) to access the related large
public library entry. The suffix dial number range is determined by the
programmer. FROM and TO DIAL # numbers must have the same number of digits
(for example, 000-999, 0000-9999, ..., 00000000-99999999)
1 to 8 digits for the suffix may be used, however, using less than 4 digits
severely restricts the flexibility of the Numbering Plan.
Once this route is selected the following option menu is available.
Option Description
11-20
PI Reference Manual Libraries
0 - UPDATE FROM OLD DIAL#: Enter the first existing suffix dial number of the range that requires
updating.
TO OLD DIAL#: Enter the last existing suffix dial number that requires updating. If
only a single number is required, enter the same number as FROM
OLD DIAL#.
FROM NEW DIAL#: Enter the first new suffix dial number in the range that was defined
under the old dial number. (Once the first number is entered, the rest
of the defined range is automatically calculated.)
1 - DISPLAY FROM DIAL#: Displays the first suffix dial number defined in the display range.
TO DIAL#: Displays the last suffix dial number defined in the display range.
INDEX#: Displays the index number of first library entry in the range.
2 - ADD FROM NEW DIAL#: Enter the first new suffix dial number of the range that is to be
added.
TO NEW DIAL#: Enter the last new suffix dial number to be added. If only a single
number is required, enter the same number as FROM NEW DIAL#.
FROM INDEX#: Enter the index of the first new suffix dial number
3 - REMOVE FROM OLD DIAL#: Enter the first existing suffix dial number of the range that requires
removal.
TO OLD DIAL#: Enter the last existing suffix dial number that requires removal. If
only a single number is required, enter [CR]. After the number is
typed and [CR] pressed, if the number was successfully removed the
following message appears:
LARGE_PUBLIC NPL NUMBERS REMOVED.
The requested suffix dial numbers are immediately removed from the
numbering plan.
11-21
Libraries PI Reference Manual
TOLL_OVERRIDE Yes/No
Determines if access to the library entry overrides Toll Barrier restrictions applying
to the calling station Class of Service. Setting this parameter to No invokes Toll
Barrier restrictions.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Determines the access capabilities of various tenant groups into the Large Public
Library. Tenant groups with access levels that include Tenant Group access will be
able to use the library entry.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Large Public Library Contents LIB,3,1 [0,6,3,1]
11-22
PI Reference Manual Libraries
DIAL_NUM 1 to Maximum digits (including the codes listed below) defined in SIZizes
Def., see LARGE_PUB_DIGITS (page 4-13)
Enter the required external dial digits.
Do not enter the trunk group dial number, Routing Access or Dial Service
(for example 81, 82, etc.); enter all other numbers. The trunk group,
Routing Access or Dial Service number is entered in the OUT_TK
parameter defined below.
When using the Large Pub Library, various dialing instruction codes can also be
utilized. The following table lists these codes.
Code Instruction
E5 Enables display
Enter the feature code E71 and then the dial number.
internal party, depending on system-wide settings).
Enter the feature code E72 and then the dial number.
E72 Enables displaying Caller ID number
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OUT_TK Any valid trunk, trunk group, dial service, Routing Access, Wait-Que, another
Public Library dial number, or None (N), Station/Boss_Group/Hunt_Group
number for special purposes;
Note: Another Large Library is not allowed.
Enter the dial number of the outside line access code, Public Library or station if a
specific facility (group) is selected, otherwise enter N. If N is entered a station
11-23
Libraries PI Reference Manual
attempting to dial this Large Public Library number must also add the outside line
access code. Stations equipped with a display receive the display message:
“ENTER TK/GROUP#”.
A Public Library dial number may be entered to access a common carrier, or
private network, before the current library is dialed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Large Public Library Contents LIB,3,1 [0,6,3,1]
11-24
PI Reference Manual Libraries
The Directory feature provides keyset users a searchable directory listing. Both
Shared and Personal records are combined and organized alphabetically, for easy
retrieval. A search result can be dialed at the touch of a key.
Shared Directory is composed of the following internal and external numbers:
• Public Speed Call Library
• Hunt Group
• Boss Group
• All stations defined in the system
Personal Directory is a self-built database of external telephone numbers. It is
accessible only from the station keyset at which it was entered.
Details for the Directory are found on the following pages.
Directory - Systems (Shared) Directory Entries .............................. 11-26
̀Directory - Personal Directory............................................................11-29
11-25
Libraries PI Reference Manual
0-NAME Access
Enter Name Initial Any alphanumeric string of characters (max:16)
Characters
Define the range of shared directory entry names to be accessed in this parameter.
The names must already be defined as FULL Names in Port List.
Enter any one letter or combination of letters to display all names beginning with
the same letter(s) as well as all names that follow in alphabetical order after the
requested string of letters.
For Example:
Entering SM returns all names beginning with SM as well as any names in the
alphabet after SM such as SMith, SMithsonian, Sonny, Tufts, Umbridge, etc., until
the end of the directory.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Directory - Systems (Shared) Directory Entries LIB,4,0
1-NUMBER Ac-
cess
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid system dial number
Enter the range of dial numbers for the requested directory entries to be accessed.
11-26
PI Reference Manual Libraries
The following screen is shown when the technician requests to Display - All the
entries (i.e., not in Update mode):
0-Update
NAME Max of 16 ASCII characters as defined in Port List (Display Only)
Displays the FULL (long) name defined in Port List, for this shared directory entry.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TYPE Public Library, Hunt Groups, Boss Groups, and System Ports (i.e. SLT,
Keysets, etc.) (Display Only)
Displays the system port type: SLT, Keyset, Public Library, Hunt Group and Boss
Group, for this shared directory entry.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DISPLAY_ENTRY_IN_ Yes/No
DIRECTORY
Define the shared directory entry as unlisted (hidden) or listed.
Enter Yes to have the directory entry displayed for all keyset users.
11-27
Libraries PI Reference Manual
Enter No to unlist the directory entry and hide if from all searching and browsing
keyset users.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Directory - Systems (Shared) Directory Entries LIB,4,0
11-28
PI Reference Manual Libraries
The Personal Directory menu allows adding or updating the Personal Directory
entries for a specific keyset. Update, Display and Add options are available for the
requested keyset, by entering 0, 1, or 2 after selecting the station dial number.
Option Description
0 - UPDATE This option allows updating the directory entries for the
selected station.
1 - DISPLAY Displays all the listed entries for the selected station. The
entries are displayed from the first entry name that matches
the characters entered in Enter Name Initial Characters.
2 - ADD Adds a new entry to the personal Directory for the requested
station.
11-29
Libraries PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Directory - Personal Directory LIB,4,1 [0,6,4,1]
11-30
12 Night Service
12-1
Night Service PI Reference Manual
Night Service defines the various type of timer services that are performed during
and after regular working hours including weekends and holidays. The night
service mode is used in conjunction with Night Service Definition in order to
specify all night-time telecommunication services. The system is grouped into
three service periods, each of which contains one of the three time blocks or types,
called Day, Night1 and Night2. The times at which each block becomes effective
is defined by under TIME for each of the three service and holiday groups. TYPE
allows defining one of the three time blocks for each service period (i.e. either Day,
Night1 or Night2).
1st SERV:
TIME - 00:00..08:00..23:59
First Service Period sets the START time for the first of three time periods. The
hour entered in TIME signals both the END time for leaving the 3rd Service time
period, as well as the START time for the 1st Service time period. See Programming
and Entering Time Units (page 2-6) for defining time units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Night Service - Timers NIGHT,0 [0,0,4,0,0]
2nd SERV:
TIME - 00:00..17:00..23:59
Second Service Period sets the second of three time periods. The hour entered in
TIME signals both the END time for leaving the 1st Service Time period, as well as
the START time for the 2nd Service Time period. See Programming and Entering
Time Units (page 2-6) for defining time units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
12-2
PI Reference Manual Night Service
3rd SERV:
TIME - 00:00..22:00..23:59
Third Service Period sets the third of three time periods. The hour entered in TIME
signals both the END time for leaving the 2nd Service Time period, as well as the
START time for the 3rd Service Time period. See Programming and Entering Time
Units (page 2-6) for defining time units.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CURRENT_TYPE 0, 1, 2 or NONE
Determines the current Service Mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
12-3
Night Service PI Reference Manual
UPDATE? Yes, No
When set to Yes, all permissible changes are entered.
When set to No, only ON_TIME is executed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Night Service - Timers NIGHT,0 [0,0,4,0,0]
12-4
PI Reference Manual Night Service
Night Service Definition is used to set the primary and secondary Class of Service
for each service mode (defined by Night Service - Timers on page 12-2). In addition,
Night Service - Definition allows defining the destination for incomplete calls and
intercepted calls for the defined Time Service Mode (Day, Night 1 or Night2).
FROM/ 0..2
TO 0..2
TYPE
Enter the required service modes: 0 (Day); 1 (Night1); 2 (Night2) FROM the
lowest number, TO the highest number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INCOMPLETE_ Any valid system station, Hunt group, Boss group, Public Library, Bell/UNA,
CALLS_DEST Modem, DVMS MSG/Port, Group Call dial number or None
First Keyset (Attendant)
Sets the destination for unanswered calls for each service mode (set in the Night
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INTERCEPT_CALLS_ Any valid system station, Hunt group, Boss group, Public Library, Bell/UNA,
DEST(INATION) Modem, DVMS MSG/Port, Group Call dial number or None
None
Sets the destination for intercept routed calls for each service mode. Intercept
relevant - Toll bar, COS fail, Dial fail and/or undefined. This feature must be
activated inSystem Features - Intercept/Incomplete (page 6-33) branch (SFE, 3).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
12-5
Night Service PI Reference Manual
Sunday 1 Thursday 5
Monday 2 Friday 6
Tuesday 3 Saturday 7
Wednesday 4 No Weekend N
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
12-6
PI Reference Manual Night Service
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FROM_MONTH 1..12
Sets the month in which the holiday occurs. Enter the digit representing the month.
January 1 July 7
February 2 August 8
March 3 September 9
April 4 October 10
May 5 November 11
June 6 December 12
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
12-7
Night Service PI Reference Manual
FROM_WEEK 1..5
Defines the week of the month from which the holiday begins.
This parameter is not used when the Holiday Timers - MODE is set to M/D.
Enter the number (1 to 5) representing the week of the month in which the holiday
occurs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FROM_W_DAY 1..7
Defines the day of the week (1 to 7) on which the holiday occurs.
Sunday 1 Thursday 5
Monday 2 Friday 6
Tuesday 3 Saturday 7
Wednesday 4
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FROM_M_DAY 1..31
Defines on which day of the month (1-31) the holiday begins.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TO_MONTH 1..12
Default: Same as FROM_MONTH value (above)
Enter the month in which the holiday ends - if this is different from the month in
which it begins. Enter the digits according to the table listed in FROM_MONTH.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TO_WEEK 1..5
Holiday Timers NIGHT,3
This parameter is not used when the Holiday Timers - MODE is set to M/D.
Enter the number (1 to 5) representing the week of the month in which the holiday
ends (if this is different from the week it begins).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
12-8
PI Reference Manual Night Service
TO_W_DAY 1..7
Default: Same as FROM_W_DAY (above)
Defines the day of the week on which the holiday ends. You need to define this
parameter only if it differs from the day on which the holiday begins.
Enter the day of the week (1-7) on which the holiday ends (if this is different from
the day it begins).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TO_M_DAY 1..31
Default: Same as FROM_M_DAY (above)
Defines the day of the month (1-31) on which the holiday ends.You need to define
this parameter only if it differs from the day on which the holiday begins.
Enter the day of the month (1-31) on which the holiday ends (if this is different
from the day it begins).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
12-9
Night Service PI Reference Manual
12-10
13 Toll Barriers
Toll Barriers contains the programming instructions for defining Toll Barriers
elements.
Toll Barrier .................................................................................................13-2
13-1
Toll Barriers PI Reference Manual
After First Initialization, Toll Barriers are not present by default in the
system. All numbers are classified as PASS. However, once ADD is
selected in the Toll Barrier option, the Toll Barrier database can be
utilized and updated.
Toll Barriers can be displayed, added or removed. Choose one of the following
options to proceed.
The following option menu is available for this Route:.
Option Description
1 - DISPLAY Displays the current Toll Barrier list of elements. When the
list is empty, the message NO ELEMENTS! appears.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
for example: 3,5,6. If no specific pattern is selected and [CR] is entered, all patterns
are defined.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
13-2
PI Reference Manual Toll Barriers
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TYPE 0 (Block) Blocks the call if digits match the barrier (From/To Dial #)
1 (Pass) Passes the call if digits match the barrier (From/To Dial#)
2 (Absorb) Disregards the digits if the digits match barrier (From/To Dial #)
Defines one of three toll barrier types, once the Trunk Group or Routing Access has
been selected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
13-3
Toll Barriers PI Reference Manual
13-4
14 SMDR
This chapter describes the programming for Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) parameters and Coral Internal Traffic.
Station Message Detail Recording provides on-line storage and printing of station
call information.
The Coral system offers flexibility in on-line report control, with which data is
reported, and the report’s output format.
The Coral SMDR creates a record for each trunk call. System programming defines
whether the system reports incoming calls, outgoing calls or both.
The SMDR also creates a record of internal calls between stations in the same
manner as external calls. System calls, such as Reminder, Wakeup or Camp On, are
not supported.
SMDR data can be transmitted to an external device (such as a printer) via RS-232
serial port interface or via an IP port connectivity using the MAP application as
described below:
• "In Coral systems that include the MAP application, the SMDR data can be
transmitted via an IP port using the MAP application. For hardware
requirements, refer to the relevant Control Card Installation Manual or the
Coral IPx Office Installation Manual.
• "The SMDR data is transmitted through a predetermined RS-232 port on the
peripheral RMI, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, 8DRCF, or MSBipx card. For interface
PIN functions and other hardware requirements, refer to the relevant Coral
Installation Manual.
Format Parameters define which SMDR parameters should be listed in the actual
report.
For further details, refer to the SMDR Specifications Manual.
SMDR Control............................................................................................14-2
Report Control ..........................................................................................14-10
Format Params.......................................................................................... 14-11
Auto On-Line............................................................................................14-13
Charge Table .............................................................................................14-16
14-1
SMDR PI Reference Manual
SMDR Control is used to set the SMDR report display, storage, and call data
requirements to generate a record. Field numbers appear in square brackets ([ ]).
DISPLAY_START_ Yes/No
SMDR Control SMDR,0 [3,2,0]
CALL [3]
Used only for outgoing calls, in addition to the report generated at the end
of the call, with the final elapsed time.
.Determines whether to generate an SMDR report as soon as an outgoing call is
started indicating only that an outgoing call has been established.
This report is used for call cost limit applications. External applications allotting a
call “budget” per user ID forewarn the user of the approaching time limit. The
application can also prevent the user from overusing the budget.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-2
PI Reference Manual SMDR
SAU Requirement
This parameter is irrelevant when SMDR_DEST [14] (below) is set to “99”
(configured for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM).
In that case the SMDR backup memory is automatically provided by the
MAP even when the BACKUP [4] feature is set to NO.
When the SMDR interfaces with the MAP application, the Coral SMDR
backup memory is not utilized and the maximum number of records used
by the SMDR_BACKUP (page 4-16) parameter can be defined as 0.
Therefore the Coral system memory allocated for this feature can be
released for other resources.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-3
SMDR PI Reference Manual
ON_LINE_SERIAL_ Yes/No
NO. [5]
Determines whether a serial number is shown at the beginning of each record.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The Network number appears in the SMDR of all the related PINXs of the
• E indicates an External calling number.
DISPLAY_INTERNAL_ Yes/No
NETWORK_CALL [8]
Defines whether internal network calls should be displayed on the SMDR report.
Internal network calls include calls where the calling party and the called party
originate from the same Coral network, but not necessarily from the same Coral
system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-4
PI Reference Manual SMDR
DISPLAY_INTERNAL_ Yes/No
CALL [9]
Defines whether internal calls should be displayed on the SMDR report.
DISPLAY_ABANDON_ Yes/No
CALL [10]
(Coral version 15.85.30
This parameter is only relevant when DISPLAY_IN [1], above, is set to Yes.
or higher) Determines whether or not SMDR records are generated for abandoned incoming
calls, including.
• Any incoming call from a station or a trunk (including QSIG and IP-Net) that
was not answered by a Coral subscriber, such that a call was never established.
• An incoming call from a trunk that was automatically re-routed to another PBX
in the network (regardless of whether or not it was answered by the dialed
party).
See 9-IN in Table 14-1 on page 14-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter is only relevant when DISPLAY_IN [1], above, is set to Yes.
Define this parameter to Yes to display the DNIS number of the incoming call
which is listed under DIAL# in the SMDR Report.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OUTBOUND_ Yes/No
NUMBER_AS_SENT_
ON_TRUNK [12]
This parameter is only relevant when DISPLAY_OUT [2], above, is set to
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-5
SMDR PI Reference Manual
SMDR/CHARGE_ Any single printable keyboard character with the exception of “@”.
CURRENCY_UNIT [13] Any lower case letter entered will be displayed as a capital letter.
(Coral version 15.85.30 For space/blank, enter underscore: “_”
or higher) Default: “$”
Defines the character used to represent the unit of currency to be displayed on
SMDR and CHARGE records, along with the outgoing calls price.
Caution!
Do not define this parameter as “@” (commercial “at” sign).
This symbol is not recognized by the system and could corrupt
information in the SMDR reports.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SMDR_DEST [14] 1..24 for RS-232 Serial or Modem port (see Table 17-2 on page 17-11)
99 for IP port via MAP
Determines the output terminal destination to which generated SMDR records are
sent for on-line reports.
The MAP is not available in Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems.
Enter “99” for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM software, if available and
active in your system (see CNCM (page 27-5) in the MAP branch (ROOT,3,10)).
The system returns the last IP port number not yet used.
SMDR Control SMDR,0 [3,2,0]
14-6
PI Reference Manual SMDR
CHARGE_DEST [15] 1..24 for RS-232 Serial or Modem port (see Table 17-1 on page 17-11),
99 for IP port via MAP
Identifies the terminal port to which selected SMDR charge printouts are sent,
when requested by attendant (using feature codes #1972, #1978).
The MAP is not available in Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems.
Enter “99” for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM software, if available and
active in your system (see CNCM (page 27-5) in the MAP branch (ROOT,3,10)).
The system returns the last port number not yet used.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
RESET_CHARGE_ Yes/No
TABLE? [16]
Appears in UPDATE mode, only.
Clears cost calculation and pulse metering charges (see Charge Table beginning on
page 14-16). When set to Yes, this parameter resets the charges for all stations in
the system. Resetting the Charge Table can also be performed by the Attendant
Console, by using the Reset with Printout feature code #1978, (see the Attendant
Console Guide for details).
Upon resetting, this parameter is automatically returned to No..
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
RESET_SERIAL_No.? Yes/No
SINGLE_LINE_ Yes/No
OUTPUT [19]
This parameter creates SMDR reports without Carriage Returns (CR) or Line
Feeds. Therefore, the report continues to print on the same line when this parameter
is set to Yes. This parameter is generally used for external systems using
computerized forms and replaces the definitions in Terminal Setup beginning on
page 17-11.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-7
SMDR PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-8
PI Reference Manual SMDR
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-9
SMDR PI Reference Manual
SMDR Report Control allows defining the SMDR Report parameters according to
installation needs. The following SMDR Report options are available:
• Format Parameters
• Auto On-Line
Each SMDR Report Control option can be reached through the numeric node
number or mnemonic method. The following table presents the access options for
Report Control.
14-10
PI Reference Manual SMDR
Note, three data fields may be included on the SMDR report which are not
controlled in this branch but rather in the SMDR SMDR Control branch
(SMDR, 0). When these parameters (ON_LINE_SERIAL_NO. [5], ON_LINE
8_DIGIT_NPL [6], ON_LINE EXTENDED_SMDR_INFORMATION [7]) are set to
Yes, they appear on the report regardless of the parameters chosen in this
branch (see the Notes below).
4 TK-G Identifies the trunk group on which the call was made (see
5 TK# Identifies the trunk number used for the call (see note •).
7 ST# Identifies the station originating the call (see note •).
14-11
SMDR PI Reference Manual
12 EXE PRIV. Marks a call made using the Executive Privilege feature.
Notes:
• When 8-ACCT. is selected and #ACCT_DGTS [7] on page 6-9, is between
5 & 16 digits, and 10-DIAL# is selected, the dial number is printed on
its own line (second line).
• When VFAC. [9] (SFE) is activated, the code is printed according to how
SMDR is defined in the VFAC branch (see page 24-8).
• When selected, TK-G, TK# and ST# are printed (each at a max of 4
digits) when an 8 digit numbering plan is required.
• When ON_LINE 8_DIGIT_NPL [6] on page 14-4 is set to Yes, then TK-G,
TK# and ST# are printed on separate lines, each eight digits long, even
if not selected here.
• When ON_LINE EXTENDED_SMDR_INFORMATION [7] on page 14-4 is set
Format Params SMDR,1,0 [3,2,1,0]
to Yes, then the C-T (Incoming Call Type), CPN (Calling Party Number)
and AOC fields are automatically printed.
14-12
PI Reference Manual SMDR
This option is relevant only when DISPLAY_OUT [2] (page 14-2) is set to No.
The following parameters define the time periods at which SMDR Auto On-Line
reports for outgoing calls are generated.
HOURS Yes/No
Defines whether the SMDR auto on-line reports should be generated only between
the hours specified between the following FROM TIME and TO TIME prompts when
set to Yes.
When No is selected, SMDR auto on-line reports are not printed on an hourly basis.
The system displays the WEEKEND (Y/N) prompt next.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
When HOURS is set to Yes, the following two options are available:
TO TIME 00:00..07:00..23:59
Enter the end time for the auto on-line reports. Time is entered in 24 hour format.
For an explanation of programming and entering the time units,
14-13
SMDR PI Reference Manual
WEEKEND Yes/No
Determines whether auto on-line reports are to be generated on the weekend.
If WEEKEND = N (No), the next prompt is HOLIDAY (Y/N).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
When WEEKEND is set to Yes, the following four options are available:
TO DAY 1 (Sunday),2,3,4,5,6,7
Enter the number of the day (1 through 7) the weekend ends;
Sunday = 1, Saturday = 7.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TO TIME 00:00..07:45..23:59
Enter the time, in 24 hour format on which the weekend ends. (For an explanation
of programming and entering the time units, see Programming and Entering Time
Units on page 2-6).
Auto On-Line SMDR,1,1 [3,2,1,1]
14-14
PI Reference Manual SMDR
HOLIDAY Yes/No
Determines whether auto on-line reports are to be generated on holidays.
When HOLIDAY = Y, the prompts appear to set the holiday date and time limiters.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
When HOLIDAY is set to Yes, the following six options are available:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TO MONTH 1..4..12
Enter the month (1 through 12) in which the holiday ends.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TO DAY 1..23..31
TO TIME 00:00..09:30..23:59
Enter the time the holiday ends, in 24 hour format. (For an explanation of
programming and entering the time units, see Programming and Entering Time Units
on page 2-6).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-15
SMDR PI Reference Manual
The SMDR Call Charge Table is used to display or reset the charges or charge
individual stations. Calculating cost is programmed in Cost Calculation (see
Chapter 15).
To reset the charges for all stations, use RESET_CHARGE_TABLE? [16] (page 14-7).
Both Call Charge Printout and Call Reset With Printout can also be performed
through the Attendant Console by using the appropriate feature codes (default
codes): #1972 for Printout and #1978 for Reset With Printout.
Charges per station are automatically calculated after an outgoing call is
completed. Should a charge overflow situation develop, the printout and reset
occur automatically. Overflow is currently defined at 65,000 records.
This message is displayed when the system accepts the TO STATION # entry.
*** CHARGE REPORT END ***
This message indicates that the report has finished printing.
Reports are printed at the terminal defined in CHARGE_DEST [15] on page 14-7.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
14-16
15 Routing & Cost Calculation
15-1
15-2
Diagram
Figure 15-1
Routing Block
Routing & Cost Calculation
ROUTING ROUTING NUMBERING CURRENT TIME ROUTE ELEMENTS DIAL SERVICES TRUNK GROUP
ACCESS PLAN
Ins 1
0) Day (4850,4851) available 4850 TK- GRPS TO CO
........... nn trunks
ELEMENT # Eve ( " " ) 4851 9 Digits outpulsed
80 xxx-xxxx Night ( " " ) on trunk,
4851 TK- GRP nn
........... 9 modified
1) Day (4850,4851)
according
81 xxx-xxxx Eve ( " " ) to filter
Night ( " " )
82 xxx-xxxx
DIALED XXX...
CHECKED AND
ROUTED ON
ELEMENT #
PI Reference Manual
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
Routing System Parameters apply to all Routing Access’ and are used to:
• Inform the user that Routing is being used.
• Indicate when the selected route is shown in a call record and on a keyset
display.
• Determine when system-wide offhook queuing is allowed;
when allowed, sets the offhook queuing duration.
A station user, by dialing a Route Access code before dialing the destination
number causes the system to automatically route a call over the most economical
route.
To prohibit direct trunk access, and force station users to use Routing
Access, program the station/trunk Class of Service (see Class of Service -
Chapter 7) to access ROUTING_ACC only.
15-3
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
ROUTING
DISPLAYED ON:
SMDR [3] Y (Show name), N (Show trunk group)
Determines whether the Dial Service name or trunk group name appears in the
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) record.
15-4
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
FROM/TO ROUTING_ Any valid system Routing Access dial number defined in General Numbering
ACCESS DIAL# Plan, see ROUTING_ACC [37] (page 5-44);
All
Enter the range of required Routing Access numbers FROM the lowest Routing
Access number TO the highest Routing Access number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-5
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
sent to the network that informs the network in which mode the Coral is sending
the digits.
I: Coral to Public Network
P: Coral to Private Network (PABX)
U: The Public Network determines the incoming digit mode
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Routing Access General Definitions LCR,1
15-6
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
OUTGOING ANI The following three Outgoing Calls Automatic Number Identification options
apply only during outgoing calls and define the ANI options.
• PREFIX
• SITE LDN
• SITE LDN ALL CALLS
15-7
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
ISDN only
Defines the information sent by the Coral to the Network, defining the type of
destination external number called.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ISDN only
Defines the format of the ANI (Automatic Number Identification also known as
CPN, Calling Party Number) that the Coral sends to the Network, on outgoing
calls.:
Table 15-1: Range and Defaults for Called and Calling Type Numbers
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-8
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
Routing Class of Service links the Route priorities to Station Classes of Service.
Routing Class of Service also determines when the caller hears a “Warning Tone
For Expensive Groups”. In addition, Class of Service can also define when a station
is able to queue to a selected trunk group and determines the queue period.
NAME (16) [1] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the COS name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters). Use the COS name to
indicate what it restricts, for example, “MANAGERS Only”, or “NO_INTL_
CALLS”.
A name defined as BLANK displays only the COS number. Use “_” (underscore)
for space. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
WARNING_TONE_ Yes/No
FOR_EXPENSIVE_
Determines whether a warning tone for an expensive route is heard by a caller
SERVICES
routed to a Routing Service that has Expensive tone activated.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-9
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Q_OFFHK Yes/No
Allows an offhook station to automatically camp-on and access the system-wide
Routing Queue feature (Routing System Parameters), when QUEUEING
[0] (page 15-3) is defined as Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Q_ONHK Yes/No
Allows a station to camp-on a busy ROUTING and then on-hook while waiting
for a free trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-10
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
For routed calls, Dial Services provide filtering, line parameters, routing and
expensive tone functions. For ISDN calls (Incoming or Outgoing, Routing or
non-Routing) the Dial Service associates a network service with a call.
When an incoming call is directed via the NET-IP from another Coral system, it is
routed to the Dial Service. The Dial Service associates an IP address with each
number dialed.
FROM/TO SERVICE Any valid system Dial Service number (defined in General NPL, DIAL_SERV
DIAL# [36] on page 5-44);
All
Enter the range of required Dial Services numbers. FROM indicates the lowest dial
service number required. TO indicates the highest dial service number required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ROUTING ACCESS [2] Any valid Routing Access dial number (see ROUTING_ACC [37] (page 5-44)
First Routing Access in Numbering Plan
The Routing Access number is related to the specific Dial Service. The maximum
number of Routing Access Dial Services is 4 (see page 4-21).
This destination is relevant for non-ISDN calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-11
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Service is faulty (see Look Ahead Routing Triggers beginning on page 15-32 for
LAR definitions) and does not block a trunk or Dial Service.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-12
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
EXTENDED Yes/No
INTERNAL DIAL_
SERVICE [8]
When this parameter is set to Yes, ROUTING DEST NUM [9], below, is
irrelevant.
Allows the system to reroute internal calls routed externally.
Procedure:
The user-dialed external number is retained within the system and rerouted (by
modifying the outgoing number) using the DIAL_FILTER [10] and (DIAL IN/CALLER
OUT) OFFSET [3] filters in this branch.
The call is then dialed through the ROUTING_ACC code or Trunk Group or Dial
Service number associated with the current Routing Access.
ROUTING DEST NUM Any station number (Keyset, SLT or WST), ACD/UCD group, Boss Group,
[9] Group Call or Trunk Group number
First Dial Service: First trunk group in Numbering Plan
All other Dial Services: (--)
When EXTENDED INTERNAL DIAL_SERVICE [8], above, is set to Yes, this
15-13
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Notes:
to the default filter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-14
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
COS [14] 0..to maximum defined in SIZ (see COS (page 4-16))
15-15
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Set this parameter to Yes for the Dial Service that routes calls to the local
Emergency center.
When an alternate ANI is provided for the caller (e.g., for the PSTN for emergency
calls, see SEC_ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [29] on page 9-13 for SLTs and SEC_
ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [67] on page 9-62 for Keysets), this parameter decides
whether the Alternate Line ID should be sent to the called network instead of the
primary ALI.
Set this parameter to Yes for the Dial Service that routes calls to the local
Emergency (E911) Center.
This prevents calls routed via the Dial Service from sending the primary ALI to the
called network. The Second ALI containing information intended for the
Emergency center is sent instead.
In cases where it is impossible to form the outgoing ANI (e.g. an originating caller
that does not have a number in the NPL, then the DEFAULT_SECOND_ALI [18] on
page 6-12 is used, when defined. The ISDN type of number (when applicable) is
set to Unknown. If there is no definition for the Default Second ALI then the
Dial Services LCR,3 [ROOT,4,0,3]
15-16
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
15-17
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
NET_IP: The following options are applicable for IP_NET and are irrelevant when this Dial
Service is used for SIP trunk.
IP_ADDRESS [21] Range: Any valid IP Socket address or R (Remove for Blank)
See the IT Manager for legal IP Address
Default: 255.255.255.255:_ _ _ _
Enter the UGW Global IP Signalling Socket address for the remote destination
UGW used with this Dial Service.
This is used to connect IP devices between Network nodes because the Sentinel
does not support IP NET trunks.
This Dial Service is also used for defining Unregistered SIP trunks, see SIP Trunk
beginning on page 29-52.
The IP_ADDRESS [21] is irrelevant when SIP_TRUNK [23] is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SIGNALING_LOCAL_ Yes/No
IP_ADDRESS [22]
This parameter is only relevant when this Dial Service’s Zone is defined to
use Global IP addresses (i.e. IP_ADDR (page 29-85) in IP_Zone (IP,6)
branch is set to Global).
Set this parameter to Yes in order to create a Looped IP NET circuit, when IP_
ADDR (page 29-85) in IP ZONE, (IP,6) for the Zone used by this Dial Service is set
to Global.
In this manner, the IP NET circuit uses the Local IP Address for its Signalling
transmission, even though the Zone is defined to use Global Address for the call’s
parties.
The SIGNALING_LOCAL_IP_ADDRESS [22] is irrelevant when SIP_TRUNK [23] is set
to Yes.
Dial Services LCR,3 [ROOT,4,0,3]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-18
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
SIP_GENERAL: The following options are relevant for all SIP trunk calls. These parameters are
displayed only when SIP_TRUNK is defined as Y (Yes).
When using a DNS, the IP address of the DNS server must be defined (see
PRIMARY_DNS_ADDRESS(#/R) [21] on page 29-77).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Default:5060
Defines the port of the ITSP (Internet Telephony Service Provider). This parameter
is relevant when the DNS does not supply the port.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The REFER message does not work with SIP trunks. For SIP trunks,
re-INVITE must be defined.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SUPPORT_SESSION_ Yes/No
PROGRESS_183 [28]
Coral supports Session Progress 183 and therefore, can be configured to relay the
media from a remote phone that responds to an INVITE request of a SIP phone.
The caller from the SIP phone will hear the media of the remote station instead of
the standard SIP ringback tone.
15-19
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
The media of the remote device are packetized according to the Session
Description Protocol (SDP). Session progress response 183 relays the SDP data
from the remote device to the SIP phone. When the SUPPORT_SESSION_
PROGRESS_(183) parameter is set to Y (Yes) for the Coral SIP device, the session
progress response of the remote device will be relayed to the Coral SIP device. The
SDP information including the tone of the remote device will be heard instead of
the ringback tone generated by the Coral SIP device.
This feature will work only if the remote device is configured to transmit
information in EARLY MEDIA (i.e. before the SIP session begins).
When set to Y (Yes) for a Coral SIP trunk, Coral relays the session progress
response from a remote device to that trunk. If the Coral SIP device does not
support the session progress response, set this parameter to N (No). If this
parameter is defined differently under DIAL SERVICES and SIP TRUNK, the
definition under DIAL SERVICES overrides the definition under SIP TRUNK for
that trunk.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DIVERSION_ No/Sip/Tel
HEADER_URI_TYPE
Coral supports diversion headers URI (Uniform Resource Identifier).
[30] When a call is forwarded to a SIP terminal or trunk, a diversion header can be sent.
This means that if party A calls party B and is forwarded to the SIP Voicemail of
Dial Services LCR,3 [ROOT,4,0,3]
15-20
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
SIP_OUTGOING: The following options are relevant for outgoing calls only.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-21
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
When using a DNS, the IP address of the DNS server must be defined (see
PRIMARY_DNS_ADDRESS(#/R) [21] on page 29-77).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
OUTBOUND_PROXY_ 0...5060...65535
PORT [37]
Defines the port of the server that connects to the proxy.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Note: In some cases, at night service time, Unregistered SIP trunks are put
in sleep mode by the ITSP, so that incoming calls cannot enter the system.
To overcome this situation, define the REGISTRATION parameter as Yes,
and reduce the BACK_OFF_TIMER [15] on page 29-74 to 1 minute. The Coral
will send messages to the ITSP every 1 minute. These messages will
constantly sent, which will cause the ITSP and the Unregistered SIP trunks
to never be put into sleep mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Defines the IP address of the registrar server. This parameter is relevant only if the
address is different from the PROXY_NAME/ADDRESS [24] on page 15-19.
When using a DNS, the IP address of the DNS server must be defined (see
PRIMARY_DNS_ADDRESS(#/R) [21] on page 29-77).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
REGISTRAR_PORT 0...5060...65535
[40]
Defines the port of the registrar server. This parameter is relevant only if the
registrar port is different from the proxy port. This parameter is relevant only when
working with IP addresses.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-22
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
15-23
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
SIP_INCOMING: The following options are relevant for incoming calls only.
DESTINATION_ To/Uri
NUMBER [49]
Configures the Coral system to recognize incoming SIP trunk numbers from the
(Coral V. 15.85.37 or Internet Telephone Service Provider (ITSP) according to its “URI” format (default)
higher) or according to its “To” format. This parameter is relevant:
• When the PROXY_NAME/ADDRESS [24] parameter (SEE PAGE 15-19) is
defined by a name, or
• For incoming calls from IP addresses that are different from that defined by the
PROXY_NAME/ADDRESS [24] parameter.
Dial Services LCR,3 [ROOT,4,0,3]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
AUTHENTICATION Yes/No
[50]
This parameter defines whether authentication is required by incoming SIP trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-24
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
Route Elements define the priorities for each of the three time periods
(day/evening/night). These time divisions generally correspond to the long
distance carrier’s rate periods, which usually start at 8AM, 5PM and 11PM.
SELECT ELEMENT #
0..49
Enter the required Route element number to be removed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-25
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
NIGHT:FROM
End of EVENing
If NIGHT:FROM and NIGHT EVENing
period or
EVEN:FROM are not End of DAY if
defined, then DAY is EVENing:FROM not
defined for an entire 24 defined
hours.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Service last. Normally, the Dial Service which routes calls directly over local
trunks is entered last. A Dial Service may be entered more than once to fill out the
priority list so that the number of levels in the list satisfies Route COS
requirements. Enter Dial Services within parentheses, separated by commas, e.g.
(4850,4851,4855). The number of Dial Services available is determined by SIZES
upon system configuration. The Dial service number value is determined by the
General NPL.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-26
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-27
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
The Routing Numbering Plan is used to list dialed number patterns and their
appropriate routing. Each range of number patterns is listed from least specific to
most specific, with the appropriate Route Element to process the number pattern,
and the total number of digits to be received before routing begins. Numbers not
defined in the Routing Numbering Plan follow the defaults defined by the Routing
System Parameters beginning on page 15-3.
SELECT ROUTING_ Any valid system Routing Access dial number (defined in General
ACCESS DIAL # Numbering Plan [37], see Chapter 5)
Enter the Routing Access dial number, no default is available.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Enter the highest number (one or more digits up to a maximum of 32) to set the
range for numbers for the Routing function to check. The TO dial number entry
must be greater than, or equal to the FROM dial number entry.
If FROM above is defined with N, P or X, this parameter does not appear.
EXAMPLES
FROM 1-301 TO 1-401:
15-28
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
ELEMENT 0..49
As defined in default route (“-”)
TYPE_OF_NUM :
ISDN only
Table 15-2: Range and Defaults for Called and Calling Type Numbers
15-29
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Overlapping When assigning ranges to different elements, any number entered in the range may
Note be a maximum of 32 digits. Therefore, when two ranges of differing length are
entered and both incorporate identical first digits, overlapping may occur.
To avoid overlapping, always enter ranges in the most general terms possible (i.e.
using the N, P, and X terms). The N, P and X digit terms are all inclusive until a
specific digit range is encountered. If this is not possible, then the larger range must
be broken up to exclude the specific digit range.
Example 1:
Assigning the ranges:
100 Ô 119 to Element 3 and
1134 to Element 7
causes overlapping at the 1134 number since 113 and 1134 (as well as any other
number beginning with 113) are routed similarly.
To avoid overlapping:
Define the 100 Ô 119 range as 1PX.
Example 2:
Assigning the ranges:
100 Ô 189 to Element 3 and
1234 to Element 7
causes overlapping at the 1234 number since 123 and 1234 (as well as any other
number beginning with 123) are routed similarly and therefore cause an ambiguity
with regard to which routing element should be selected.
Routing Numbering Plan LCR,5 [ROOT,4,0,5]
To avoid overlapping:
Define the 100Ô 189 range as two ranges (the digit terms do not apply in
this case):
100 Ô 122 to Element 3 and
124 Ô 189 to Element 3 and
1234 to Element 7.
15-30
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
SOURCE Any valid system Routing Access Dial Number (defined in General
Routing_Access DIAL Numbering Plan, see NPL, 0,5,37)
#
The Routing Access number chosen/accessed by the user.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DESTINATION Any valid system Routing Access Dial Number other than the one entered
Routing_Access DIAL above for SOURCE
#
The Routing Access number to which the dialed number is routed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-31
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
The Look Ahead Routing (LAR) mechanism helps prevent telephone network
failures by rerouting calls. Network failures causes are identified in this branch and
the faulty component (trunk or dial service) is temporarily blocked. The call
continues to be rerouted until it can be completed. The call rerouting is transparent
to the network user.
LAR handles only asynchronous network failures (i.e., a call attempt failure after
a trunk is seized but before the call is answered by the terminating end) for Public,
Private, IP or analog networks.
When the LAR mechanism blocks a trunk or Dial Service because of an
asynchronous failure, an alarm message that contains the failure “cause” is
automatically displayed on the PI screen and an alarm message is stored in the
Diagnostics Alarms branch (see 23- LAR ALARMS on page 22-9).
The technician can use the LAR attendant feature (default feature dial number:
#1979) to manually block or unblock the Trunk or Dial Service blocked by the
LAR mechanism. This feature enables the technician to test faulty trunks or Dial
Services and then return them to service.
A list of failure causes and their meaning is presented here:
7 call delivered in established 8 prefix 0 dialed but not 9 prefix 1 dialed but not
channel allowed allowed
10 prefix 1 dialed but not 11 more digits received than 16 normal clearing
required allowed
38 network out of order 39 transit delay range can't be 40 throughput range can't
achieved be achieved
15-32
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
51 reverse charging not allowed 52* outgoing calls barred 53 outgoing calls barred
within CUG
54* incoming calls barred 55 incoming calls barred within 56 call waiting not
CUG (Closed User Group) subscribed
86 call having required identity 87 called user not member 88 incompatible destination
cleared CUG (Closed User Group) or CODEC Match Failure
99 bad information element 100 invalid element contents 101 wrong message for state
112 type of protocol not available 113 ISUP (ISDN User Part) not 127 interworking unspecified
available
181 Fail on E911 calls 182 Fail in Wait for Ready State 183 Fail in Dial
(fail to receive
acknowledgment for trunk
seizure)
184 Glare Fail (collision of two 250 setup_on_line_down 252 setup on existing call id
simultaneous calls in reverse
directions)
15-33
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
The causes should be sorted into one of the parameters listed in this branch as
needed. Each cause can be associated with either the DIAL SERVICE [2] or TRUNK
[3] parameter in this branch, but not to both. Adding a cause to the Trunk or Dial
Service parameter automatically removes it from the previous parameter. However,
a cause number can simultaneously reside in either the Trunk or Dial Service
parameter as well as in the Block Override [4] parameter so that the LAR
mechanism can avoid a faulty route, yet not block it completely.
General Recommendations when sorting Cause numbers in parameter fields:
• Any cause that is Route related or related to a specific channel should be placed
in the DIAL SERVICE [2] parameter list.
• Any cause that is related to trunks should be placed in the TRUNK [3] parameter
list.
• Causes that are related to the end user or end device should not be placed in
any parameter list.
• If the cause text is unclear or ambiguous it should not be placed in any
parameter list.
• Whenever there is a doubt regarding the behavior of one of the causes put in
the Trunk or Dial Service list, it is recommended to also put the particular cause
number in the Block Override [4] parameter list in order to avoid undesired
blocking.
NAME (16) [1] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
15-34
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
DIAL SERVICE [2] Any ISDN/QSIG cause number (see Table 15-3) or
None (enter R to remove numbers)
15-35
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l ]
15-36
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
Block Override [4] Any ISDN/QSIG cause number (see Table 15-3) or
None (enter R to remove numbers)
15-37
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Cost Calculation Elements are used for call billing purposes based on the Routing
services and the time that the call is initiated. There are some Cost Calculation
Elements, one of which is assigned to each entry in the Cost Calculation
Numbering Plan (see Cost Calculation Numbering Plan, in this chapter). Within
each Cost Calculation Element, a distinct set of costs: Day initial and additional,
Evening initial and additional and Night initial and additional price; can be
assigned for each of the Dial Services (defined in Routing - Dial Services, in this
chapter) which can be used to operate the call.
FROM/TO DIAL_ Any valid system Dial Service number (defined in General Numbering Plan,
SERVICE# DIAL_SERV [36] (page 5-44))
All
Enter the required Routing DIAL_SERVICE numbers FROM the lowest number
TO the highest number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DAY:
Cost Calculation Elements COST,0 [ROOT,4,1,0]
FROM 00:00..23:59
This is start time for the DAY calling period (e.g., 8 AM). This option is also the
ending time for the NIGHT calling period. The time is denoted in a 24-hour format.
For an explanation of programming and entering the time units, see Programming
and Entering Time Units on page 2-6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-38
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
EVEN:
FROM 00:00..23:59
This is the start time for the EVENING calling period (for example, 5PM). It also
serves as the DAY calling period end time. The time is denoted in a 24 hour format.
For an explanation of programming and entering the time units, see Programming
and Entering Time Units on page 2-6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NIGHT:
FROM 00:00..23:59
This is the start time for the NIGHT calling period (for example, 11PM). It also
serves as the EVENING end time. The time is denoted in a 24 hour format. For an
explanation of programming and entering the time units, see Programming and
15-39
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Cost Calculation Numbering Plan assigns number pattern entries to one of 50 Cost
Calculation Elements (see Cost Calculation Elements, in this chapter). Numbers not
defined in the Cost Calculation Numbering Plan are charged according to the
Default Cost defined in the Cost Calculation Parameters, in this chapter. Number
pattern entries for Cost Calculation must always be entered from most specific to
least specific.
may be entered.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
COST# 0..49
Enter the Cost Element number (see Cost Calculation Elements beginning on page
15-38) required to calculate charges for calls matching the number pattern defined
above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
15-40
PI Reference Manual Routing & Cost Calculation
Cost Calculation defines the initial Cost Calculation charge period and the default
cost of calls that do not match an entry in the Cost Calculation Numbering Plan, in
this chapter.
Elapsed time for cost calculation purposes is determined by the SMDR_FREE_
CHARGE parameter as defined in SMDR Control, Chapter 14.
15-41
Routing & Cost Calculation PI Reference Manual
Cost Calculation Parameters COST,2 [ROOT,4,1,2]
15-42
16 Room Status/
User Canned Messages
This chapter contains programming instructions for operating the Room Status and
User Canned Messages features, and instructions for displaying the Room Status
port status.
The Room Status features are mainly applicable for Hotel and Motel use and allow
assigning various operational states to room telephones. The status definition
(name) can be assigned as required. Room status may be set and viewed either
through the PI system’s service terminal or through the attendant station
(depending on its Class Of Service). Room Status allows naming, selecting and
using the status of rooms assigned to each definable Room Status.
The Room Status branch presents five options and routes, as follows:
Because User Canned messages is based on the Room Status feature, the Room
Status Name remains the canned text message. These names/messages are assigned
system-wide. Therefore, the Room Status feature and the Canned Messages feature
are mutually exclusive, and cannot be activated simultaneously in the same Coral
system. See the Feature Authorization branch (FEAT,1,HOTEL/MOTEL (page 3-20)
and CANNED MESSAGE (page 3-25)) to determine which feature is available in your
system.
While the Room Status feature enables activating up to 16 different Room Status
messages/names concurrently, the User Canned Messages feature enables
activating only one message per station at any time.
The Canned Messages feature enables defining text messages of up to 16
alphanumeric characters in the Coral, as opposed to Room Status messages that are
limited to only 10 characters. The station user can choose to display any one of
these 16 pre-programmed system canned text messages, on the internal calling
party’s keyset, until the call is answered.
Although more than one Canned message can be “turned-on” for any
single station, the canned message with the lowest index number is shown
to the internal caller.
16-1
Room Status/ User Canned Messages PI Reference Manual
16-2
PI Reference Manual Room Status/ User Canned Messages
Names ç 0,3,0
Names is used to define the text of each Room Status (or Canned Messages)
selection, from Status 0 to Status 15 (16 names or text messages). Rules for
entering names are as follows:
Names 0,3,0
texts for reference.
16-3
Room Status/ User Canned Messages PI Reference Manual
Table 16-1: Room Status / Canned Message - Names and Access Codes
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Names 0,3,0
16-4
PI Reference Manual Room Status/ User Canned Messages
STATUS/MESSAGE # - 0..15
Select the Room Status # (or the canned message) to be viewed. Room Status and
Canned messages are mutually exclusive and cannot be used concurrently.
The name for this option # is given in Names (page 16-3).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
16-5
Room Status/ User Canned Messages PI Reference Manual
Status_Display/Message ç 0,3,2
16-6
PI Reference Manual Room Status/ User Canned Messages
16-7
Room Status/ User Canned Messages PI Reference Manual
Room Status Terminal is used to determine which RS-232 data port (on RMI,
8DRCM-2, 8DRCM or 8DRCF card) is defined as a Room Status Terminal. Once
defined, only the Room Status/User Canned Messages feature is displayed through
this port and other PI system functions are not possible.
The defined port can be returned to a regular PI system port only when defined
from another terminal or KB0.
16-8
17 Service Terminals
17-1
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-2
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
17-3
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
STIMUL Yes/No
Set this parameter to No, from anywhere within the PI system by entering
[CTRL] - V.
STIMULUS displays or hides control messages between the
MCP-IPx2/MEX-IP2/MCP-ATS and the HDC/4GC/16GC/32GC and peripheral
cards. This option is a master control for the following four EXTENDED PROTOCOL
options and the Message Select options beginning on page 17-6.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
EXTENDED The following 4 fields are relevant only when STIMUL above is set to Yes.
PROTOCOL
SIMPLE_FORM Yes/No
Displays or hides the logical message. A logical message can be one of three types:
a single HDLC message, HDLC message with additional messages, or a number of
HDLC messages used in order to give the technician clearer information.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
EXTENDED_FORM Yes/No
Displays or hides the HDLC control messages. The extended form is known as the
physical layer.
Message Control MSG,2,0 [0,8,2,0]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TWN_FORM Yes/No
Displays or hides the TELENETWORK message.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Q931_TAIL_FORM Yes/No
Displays or hides the tail of the Q931 protocol. An ISDN message is composed of
the TWN_FORM and the original part of the Q931 message as the tail end. This
parameter determines how the tail part of the ISDN message is displayed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ALARMS Yes/No
Displays (Yes) or hides (N) alarm information provided by the system's on-line
diagnostic procedures.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-4
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
DEBUG Yes/No
Displays the current internal hardware diagnostics test status, that is, the number of
tests in-progress and the hardware being tested (shelf, slot, circuit).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DI.COR Yes/No
Corrective Diagnostics displays or hides corrective diagnostic messages as they
occur.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
EXCEPT Yes/No
Exceptions displays or hides exception diagnostic messages as they occur. These
messages indicate an unusual but temporary situation and do not designate any
system malfunction.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Coral ASCII information for alarms and diagnostics cannot be sent via the
same KBn. Therefore, no alarm messages will be printed to the terminal
when this parameter is set to Yes, even if ALARMS, in this branch, is set to
Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-5
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
Code Description
Examples:
The system has 8 slots installed.
Enter (0, 2,3,4) to add all slots except 2, 3, and 4
The list now includes slots: (0, 1, 5, 6, 7)
To add slot 3, enter (a 3)
The list now includes slots: (0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7)
Message Select MSG,2,1 [0,8,2,1]
17-6
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
The group control card (SVC, 32GC) for STIMULUS MESSAGES must be
defined as Slot 0.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TIME Yes/No
Allows printing the time and date of control messages. Time is printed according
to the format defined in SFE, DATE_MODE (Eu/USA) [16] on page 6-24.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-7
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
STIMU 0(KB0),
1..24 for Serial RS-232 or Modem port (see Table 17-2 on page 17-11),
99 for IP port via MAP
Enter “99” for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM software, if available and
active in your system (see CNCM (page 27-5) in MAP branch).
The system returns the last IP port number not yet used.
The MAP is not available in Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DIAG 0(KB0),
1..24 for Serial RS-232 or Modem port (see Table 17-2 on page 17-11),
99 for IP port via MAP
Enter “99” for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM software, if available and
active in your system (see CNCM (page 27-5) in MAP branch).
The system returns the last IP port number not yet used.
The MAP is not available in Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-8
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
TRAFFIC_TERM# None,
1..24 for Serial or Modem port (see Table 17-2 on page 17-11)
99 for IP port via MAP
Determines the output terminal destination for the Traffic report.
Enter “99” for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM software, if available and
active in your system (see CNCM (page 27-5) in MAP branch).
The system returns the last IP port number not yet used.
17-9
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
Enter “99” for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM software, if available and
active in your system (see CNCM (page 27-5) in MAP branch).
The system returns the last IP port number not yet used.
The MAP is not available in Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Call Trace ROOT,3,6
17-10
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
Terminal Setup is used to define the RS-232 data interface ports, as well as the
Modem used for remote maintenance and MAP (via TELNET). In addition, KB0
can be setup directly from the Attendant Console (see KB0 Setup Through Attendant
Console - Feature on page 17-29 for terminal setup procedure from the Attendant
Console).
The Terminal Setup for different systems is shown below.
Table 17-1: KB0 Terminal # 0
*
Coral System Type Terminal #
0 (KB0) 1 2 3 4
(Figure 17-1)
IPx Office (Figure 17-2) l Front panel — — —
l MCP-IPx2 l l l ‡
IPx 500 and CDRS 200E (Figure 17-3)
LIU (TELNET)
17-11
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
0 1 2 3 4
1 5 6 7 8
2 9 10 11 12
3 13 14 15 16
4 17 18 19 20
5 21 22 23 24
6 25 26 27 28
Terminal # for the MAP (CNCM) PI application is dependant on the sizes capacity
of U-RMI/U-MR/RMI/MR Office, 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, RMI and ASU
cards (and MSBipx in the Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E). The terminal numbers#
for the MAP is calculated as:
4 times the number defined in 8DRCF/8DRCM/RMI/ ASU parameter +1, +2, +3, +4.
[(4 X 8DRCF/8DRCM/RMI/ ASU) +1, +2, +3, +4] = see Table 17-3
The MAP card is not available in Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000
systems.
Terminal Setup TERM,0 [0,8,0,0]
1. MAP is not applicable for IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems
17-12
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
Option
Option Switches
Switches
Set DIP Switch# 1
KB0 to the Right for
KB0
KB0 Connections
Reset
Reset
RESET
IMC-4/8
FMsl IMC-8 /16
Release
Button
IMC-4/8
Release Button IMC-8/16
KB0
RS-232 E
KB0 Connections
KB0
SAU SAU
Reset
Indicator
Lights
HS
MCP-IPx2 MEX-IP2 MCP-ATS
Coral IPx 500 Coral IPx 800, 3000 Coral IPx 4000
FlexiCom 200 FlexiCom 300, 400V, 400, 5000 FlexiCom 6000
CDRS 200, 200E
SYS.
MEMORY DISK RESET
1 3 5 7
17-13
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
Figure 17-2.
Coral IPx Office IPx 800X Expansion Cage
Terminal # 4th 5th
8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
8DRCM, 8DRCM,
8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
17 = PORT 1 21 = PORT 1
18 = PORT 2 22 = PORT 2
19 = PORT 3 23 = PORT 3
20 = MODEM 24 = MODEM
5 = PORT 1
6 = PORT 2
7 = PORT 3
8 = MODEM
SYS.
MEMORY DISK RESET
1 3 5 7
0 = KB0
4 = MODEM (U-RMI Office or RMI Office)
Terminal Setup TERM,0 [0,8,0,0]
17-14
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
Figure 17-3.
Coral IPx 500 and IPx 800X Expansion Cage
CDRS 200E 4th 5th
8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
Terminal # 8DRCM,
8DRCM,
8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
17 = PORT 1 21 = PORT 1
18 = PORT 2 22 = PORT 2
19 = PORT 3 23 = PORT 3
20 = MODEM 24 = MODEM
5 = PORT 1
6 = PORT 2
7 = PORT 3
8 = MODEM
M
C
P
-
IP
x
Coral IPx 500M Main Unit
4 = Built-in Modem
(only on MSBipx
issue ??? And lower)
Auxiliary
Connector
1 = KB1 0 = KB0
2 = KB2
3 = KB3 MCP-IPx2
17-15
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
Figure 17-4.
Coral
IPx 800 (with HDC 4th 5th
controller) 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
Terminal # 8DRCM, 8DRCM,
8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
13 = PORT 1 17 = PORT 1
14 = PORT 2 18 = PORT 2
15 = PORT 3 19 = PORT 3
16 = MODEM 20 = MODEM
6th
8DRCM-2,
8DRCM,
8DRCF,
or RMI
21 = PORT 1
22 = PORT 2
23 = PORT 3
24 = MODEM
MEX-IP
1st
8DRCM-2,
8DRCM, Coral
8DRCF, IPx 800M
or RMI Main Cage
SAU
1 = PORT 1 MEX-IP2
INT
RST
2 = PORT 2
0 = KB0
RS-232E
3 = PORT 3
Terminal Setup TERM,0 [0,8,0,0]
4 = MODEM
IPx 800
system
3 cages
in rack
17-16
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
Figure 17-5.
Coral
IPx 3000 (with 4GC 4th 5th
controller) 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
Terminal # 8DRCM, 8DRCM,
8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
13 = PORT 1 17 = PORT 1
14 = PORT 2 18 = PORT 2
15 = PORT 3 19 = PORT 3
16 = MODEM 20 = MODEM
6th
8DRCM-2,
8DRCM,
8DRCF,
or RMI
21 = PORT 1
22 = PORT 2
23 = PORT 3
24 = MODEM
MEX-IP
1st
8DRCM-2,
8DRCM, Coral IPx 3000M
8DRCF, Main Cage
or RMI
MEX-IP2 SAU
1 = PORT 1 INT
RST
2 = PORT 2
0 = KB0
RS-232E
3 = PORT 3
4 = MODEM
IPx 3000
system
8 cages
in racks
17-17
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
Figure 17-6.
Coral
IPx 4000 4th 5th
Terminal # 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
8DRCM, 8DRCM,
8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
13 = PORT 1 17 = PORT 1
14 = PORT 2 18 = PORT 2
15 = PORT 3 19 = PORT 3
16 = MODEM 20 = MODEM
1st
8DRCM-2, 6th
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2,
8DRCF, 8DRCM,
or RMI 8DRCF,
or RMI
1 = PORT 1
2 = PORT 2 21 = PORT 1
22 = PORT 2
3 = PORT 3 23 = PORT 3
4 = MODEM 24 = MODEM
0 = KB0
MCP-ATS RESET
ALRM SPKR
HDD PWR
CPV5350
Terminal Setup TERM,0 [0,8,0,0]
FlexiCom 4000
Cabinet
17-18
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
Figure 17-7.
Coral FlexiCom 400 B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(with HDC
controller)
MEX-IP2
Terminal #
1st 2nd
8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
8DRCM, 8DRCM,
8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
1 = PORT 1 5 = PORT 1
2 = PORT 2 6 = PORT 2
3 = PORT 3 7 = PORT 3
4 = MODEM 8 = MODEM
0 = KB0
RS-232E
17-19
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
Figure 17-8.
Coral
FlexiCom 5000 4th 5th
(with 4GC controller) 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
Terminal # 8DRCM, 8DRCM,
8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
13 = PORT 1 17 = PORT 1
14 = PORT 2 18 = PORT 2
15 = PORT 3 19 = PORT 3
16 = MODEM 20 = MODEM
1st
8DRCM-2, 6th
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2,
8DRCF, 8DRCM,
or RMI 8DRCF,
or RMI
1 = PORT 1
2 = PORT 2 21 = PORT 1
22 = PORT 2
3 = PORT 3 23 = PORT 3
4 = MODEM 24 = MODEM
MEX-IP2
FlexiCom 5000
SAU Control Shelf
INT
RST
MEX-IP2
Terminal Setup TERM,0 [0,8,0,0]
0 = KB0
RS-232E
17-20
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
Figure 17-9.
Coral
FlexiCom 6000 4th 5th
(with 32GC 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM-2,
controller) 8DRCM, 8DRCM,
Terminal # 8DRCF, 8DRCF,
or RMI or RMI
13 = PORT 1 17 = PORT 1
14 = PORT 2 18 = PORT 2
15 = PORT 3 19 = PORT 3
16 = MODEM 20 = MODEM
1st
8DRCM-2, 6th
8DRCM, 8DRCM-2,
8DRCF, 8DRCM,
or RMI 8DRCF,
or RMI
1 = PORT 1
2 = PORT 2 21 = PORT 1
22 = PORT 2
3 = PORT 3 23 = PORT 3
4 = MODEM 24 = MODEM
0 = KB0
ALRM SPKR
HDD PWR
CPV5350
17-21
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-22
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
17-23
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
ENHANCED_ Yes/No
DISPLAY_FORMAT
This parameter is relevant for KB0 only, when the terminal type (above) is VT100
KB0 only
or a PC with VT emulator and determines whether KB0 has an enhanced display
(Yes), or resembles the terminals connected to the
8DRCF/8DRCM-2/8DRCM/RMI (No).
When set to Y, the top line on the screen displays the title bar with the following
information:
• Date and time: dd/mm/yy hh:mm
(when defined in the following parameter)
System type:
G. HDC (FlexiCom 400, IPx 500, 800, and CDRS 200E),
4GC (FlexiCom 5000, IPx 3000),
iGC (IPx Office),
32GC (FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000)
M. Master (Coral FlexiCom 5000, IPx 3000)
S. Slave (Coral FlexiCom 5000, IPx 3000)
Standby (Coral FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000)
A. Active (Coral FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000)
Faulty. Inactive faulty system- performs activities such as diagnostics, alarm
activation for service calls and communication with the Active system for fault
reporting and verifying the proper operation of the active system.
In this mode, the system still performs tests and might automatically return to
proper operation when normal results are observed.
(Coral FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000)
Maintenance. Inactive system in Maintenance mode-performs diagnostics, alarm
activation for service calls and communication with the Active system for fault
Terminal Setup TERM,0 [0,8,0,0]
17-24
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
TIME_AND_DATE_ Yes/No
DISPLAY_AT_TITLE_
This parameter is prompted only when a previous parameter is set to Yes. It
BAR
determines whether or not the time and date are displayed in the top line (title bar).
KB0 only
• Recommendation: Set this parameter to No, if the terminal is used for
logging information.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
AUTO_LOGOUT Yes/No
AUTO_LOGOUT cancels (after the time-out period) the current process and places
the PI into the Enter Password menu upon inactive terminal (operates as if
[CTRL]-P were entered at the keyboard), see [CTRL] P on page 1-15.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-25
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
5 1,200 4 4 4 4 4
6 600 4 4 4 4 4
7 300 4 4 4 4 4
8 19,200 4 4 4 4 N/A
* Setting the BAUD_RATE to AUTO enables the Coral to automatically synchronize the
baud rate between the PI Terminal Device and the RS-232 Interface. Once the PI Terminal
Device is working, press ENTER continuously until the Coral successfully synchronizes
with the RS-232 Interface.
NOTE: If the card (RMI, 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, MCP-ATS) is
reinitialized or removed and replaced, BAUD_RATE automatically reverts to its default
definition of 1 (9600 bps). The technician must redefine the KBx settings to 0 (AUTO).
17-26
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
0 BO N/A
4 CO N/A
6 - 11 ---- N/A
* The MODEM is not available on 8DRCM-2 cards.
.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
N_BITS 7/8
Determines the number of data bits used by the PI to identify an ASCII character.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-27
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
17-28
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
Setting KB0 Through KB0 terminal setup can also be performed at the Attendant Console. This
Attendant Console procedure should only be carried out by a qualified technician. All changes take
effect immediately.
1. Dial KB0 Setup Feature Code #1996. The following message appears on
the keyset display:
BAUD RATE ####
2. Scroll between options by pressing the VOL UP button or NEXT softkey.
3. The following table presents the options and ranges available when setting
up KB0 through the Attendant Console.
4. Enter the required change for each option or scroll to the next option.
5. When finished, press the SPKR key or hang up.
6. The KB0 terminal is setup as required.
17-29
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
Terminal Reset is used to reset one of the RS-232 terminal ports. Reset cancels the
current process and places the PI into the previously used menu (operates as if
[CTRL]C were entered at the terminal).
The # sign is replaced by the terminal number at which the current process
is being aborted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Terminal Reset TERM,1 [0,8,0,1]
17-30
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
The # sign is replaced by the terminal number at which the current process
is being aborted and then the current session ends.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-31
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
SLOT 1..8: Coral IPx 500M and CDRS 200Emain cages (Shelf #: 0)
1..10: Coral IPx 500X and CDRX 200E expansion cages (Shelf #: 1, 2)
Define the slot in which the iVMFipx card is located.
The iVMFipx card provides 8 Voicemail ports and may be installed in any
peripheral I/O slot of the Coral IPx 500 and CDRS/CDRX 200E.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CONNECTION? Yes/No
The PI terminal must be connected via a Coral modem (i.e., via KB4, or
KB8 of an 8DRCF and NOT directly via the RS-232 KB0) to enable
remote connection to the Voicemail Interface.
iVMF Remote Maintenance ROOT,3,8
17-32
PI Reference Manual Service Terminals
: *
3. Press ESC>ESC to complete the connection process.
The Voicemail Main Administration screen is displayed on the PI terminal
enabling access to its password controlled programming menus. Refer to the
iVMFipx Integrated Voicemail with Flash Technology Installation and
Maintenance Manual for details.
To Return to the Coral PI Menus:
Press CTRL-C four times from anywhere within the Voicemail menus to re-access
the Coral and return to the Program Interface Root Menu.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
17-33
Service Terminals PI Reference Manual
iVMF Remote Maintenance ROOT,3,8
17-34
18 Features
This chapter contains the programming instructions for port features that can be
activated from either the PI terminal, CVD terminal or from the Attendant Console.
These features can be activated on either stations or trunks. This chapter does not
display the Authorization Parameters listed in Chapter 3.
Trunk Features allow to define the operation of system trunks for special use, such
as for incoming or outgoing calls only or for designating a trunk as reserved for a
particular group or specific station.
Station Features allow to define stations for specific feature activation. Some of
these features operate permanently, or until redefined, such as Call Forward All.
Some features can also be operated directly from a user station or attendant station,
when defined by COS.
Feature Control ...........................................................................................18-2
18-1
Features PI Reference Manual
The following station, group or trunk features can be either updated (0-UPDATE)
or displayed (1-DISPLAY) as required.
The dial numbers needed for update or display are then entered (range of dial
numbers is defined Table 18-1 under Operates On) after which the following menu
appears:
CHOOSE FEATURE:
18-2
PI Reference Manual Features
Display the various features by typing in the relevant feature number and pressing
[ENTER]. To display all activated features, type ALL or press [CR].
Legend for Table 18-1:
Modified By Description
AM Attendant Modifiable
UM User Modifiable
Operates On Description
S Operates on Stations
T Operates on Trunks
18-3
Features PI Reference Manual
2 - CF ALL AM/UM/BM Allows re-routing a call to another destination. Station, Boss/Hunt Group, S/B/H
Call Forward All When activated, all calls are re-routed. Private/Public Libraries,
Bell/UNA, DVMS MSG/Port,
Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
3 - CF BUSY AM/UM/BM Allows re-routing a call to another destination Station, Boss/Hunt Group, S/B
Call Forward Busy when the user's station is busy or when the Private/Public Libraries,
Boss Group's lines are all occupied. Bell/UNA, DVMS MSG/Port,
Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
4 - DONT DISTURB AM/UM Inhibits incoming call signaling (ringing is A/R S/B
Do Not Disturb turned off). Station can make calls. A caller to
this station hears a reorder tone. Only a caller
with DND Override can call the station.
5 - HOT ST IMM AM Causes a station that offhooks to immediately Trunk number, station, Keyset S
Hot Station Immediate route to a predefined destination. As opposed Voice Page, Trunk Group,
to Hot Station Delay, where the programmed Boss/Hunt Group,
destination is dialed only after a defined Public/Private Libraries,
time-out period. Bell/UNA, Page Public
Address, Zone Group Page,
DVMS MSG/Port, Group Call,
Dial Service, Routing Access,
Net #
7 - HOT ST DELAY AM When activated, a station rings another Trunk number, station, Keyset S
Hot Station Delay station, or automatically connects to a paging Voice Page, Trunk Group,
device or automatically dials out when the Boss/Hunt Group,
Feature Control FEAT,0 [0,4,0]
18-4
PI Reference Manual Features
10 - ORIGIN ONLY AM Blocks all incoming calls. This station can only A/R S
Station Originating originate calls. A caller to this station hears a
Only reorder tone.
13 - CF NO ANS AM/UM/BM Allows re-routing a call to another destination. Station, Boss/Hunt Group, S/B
Call Forward No When activated, calls are re-routed only when Private/Public Libraries,
Answer the station is not answered, after a defined Bell/UNA, DVMS MSG/Port,
time-out period. Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
16 - HOT TK DELAY AM The outgoing trunk connects after an outgoing A/R T***
Hot Trunk Delayed time-out delay, if no dialing has taken place.
20 - TK RSRVD AM Allows reserving a trunk or trunk group for a Station, Boss Group T
Trunk Reserved to specific station or Boss Group. When
Specific Station specifically allocated only those stations or
groups can dial out along the trunk.
21- NIGHT-1 AM Same as 8-DIR IN LINE, but for NIGHT-1 Station, Boss/Hunt Group, T
Night1 Destination service period. Public Library, Bell/UNA, RMI
modem, DVMS MSG/Port,
Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
22 - NIGHT-2 AM Same as 8-DIR IN LINE, but for NIGHT-2 Station, Boss/Hunt Group,
Night2 Destination service period. Public Library, Bell/UNA, RMI
mode, DVMS MSG/Port,
Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
18-5
Features PI Reference Manual
25 - O/G ONLY TK AM Blocks a trunk towards all incoming calls. Only A/R T
Out-Going Only Trunk outgoing calls can exist along such a trunk.
27 - TIMED FWD AM/UM/BM Allows re-routing a call to another destination Station, Boss/Hunt Group, S/B/H
Timed Call Forward according to the time period defined in Private/Public Libraries,
TIMED_ FORWARD INT/EXT on page Bell/UNA, DVMS MSG/Port,
6-38. This feature is the same as Call Forward Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
All, except that it operates at specifically
designated hours.
31 - CF_EXT_BUSY AM/UM/BM Allows re-routing external calls to another Station, Boss/Hunt Group, S/B
Call Forward Busy- destination when the user's station is busy or Private/Public Libraries,
External when the Boss Group's lines are all occupied. Bell/UNA, DVMS MSG/Port,
Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
32 - CF_NO_ANS_ AM/UM/BM Allows re-routing external calls to another Station, Boss/Hunt Group, S/B
EXT destination. When activated, calls are Private/Public Libraries,
Call Forward No re-routed only when the station is not Bell/UNA, DVMS MSG/Port,
Answer - External answered, after a defined time-out period. Group Call, Wait Que, Net #
18-6
PI Reference Manual Features
18-7
Features PI Reference Manual
IP User When this feature is used to avoid Undefined Private Library containing the
Coral IP Stations, assign a CF_Undefined IP station number and
Private Library number to this IP station to Routing Access to the
search for the same IP station number in the different network nodes.
different Coral systems where the IP station’s NOTE!
call agent (primary or secondary) may reside. The same IP station number
For IP terminals, program a non-IP must already be defined in
destination, like Voicemail, as the forwarding each Coral system of a Coral
destination. If the IP link goes down or the Network.
bandwidth limit is exceeded a call routed to
the IP terminal will get rerouted to the CF_
UNDEF destination instead of being
disconnected.
40-LOAD_ID UM This feature enables the system to identify the ID number (4 digits) S
ACD group agent when the agent joins the
system for the first time during a session.
Once the agent’s ID number is registered in
the system for the first time, he/she can join
as many ACD groups as required. As long as
he/she is logged into at least one ACD group,
his/her ID number will remain in the system.
However, once he/she has logged out of the
last group, his/her ID number will be erased
from the system. Entering an ACD group
18-8
PI Reference Manual Features
Notes:
ACD groups.
43-WRAP_UP_TIME UM This feature allows you to provide an idle ACD group number, A/R S/H
ACD/UCD group member with a time-out
period between consecutive group calls. The
time-out period is determined for each group
on a system-wide basis (WRAP-UP TIME on
page 10-10). This feature allows an agent to
18-9
Features PI Reference Manual
Notes:
other groups.
18-10
PI Reference Manual Features
Table 18-2: Auto Set Relocate (Portability) List per Device Type
l = Swappable Device Types
FlexSet-IP 280S
FlexSet 120L
EKT, VDK
DKT 2xxx
DKT 1xxx
Magneto
DST
EKT, VDK l l l l l l l l
DKT 2xxx l l l l l l l l
DKT 1xxx l l l l l l l l
DST l l
FlexSet 120L l l
FlexSet-IP 280S l l l
Magneto l l
The Auto Set Relocate feature is not applicable for the following stations:
FlexAir Wireless handsets (T-304, T-402, T-404, T-408), CoralAIR Wireless handsets, Coral SIP
terminals (P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328,
SeaBeam softphone), third-party SIP terminals, SLT-IP stations (behind Coral Teleport/FXS, SIP
gateway, MGCP gateway).
CAUTION!
Larger keyset units swapped with smaller units of the same type lose their extra button/key functions.
18-11
Features PI Reference Manual
WARNING!
Swapped phones lose their physical location definition towards the E911 center.
To ensure that the E911 center location definition remains intact, manually swap the Second ALI
phone profiles in SLT or Keyset Definition (see SEC_ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [29] (page 9-13) or SEC_
ALTERNATE_LINE_ID [67] (page 9-62)) after the users swap phone profiles.
Also ensure that USE SECOND ALI [19] (page 15-16) is set to Yes in Dial Services.
Feature Control FEAT,0 [0,4,0]
18-12
19 Voice Transmission Controls
This chapter contains information about the setup levels for controlling voice
transmission across ports and cards. In addition, special network balancing features
for trunks and other types of ports is presented.
19-1
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
General Port Gains 0,1,3 Determines the basic setup levels for ports and
paths in the system, during voice connections.
Feature Control 0,1,4 Determines the basic setup levels for ports
when not connected to other ports.
The transmission levels entered through the PI do not necessarily indicate the
actual transmission levels from port to port. The levels entered through the PI
represent only the adjustments made as the analog audio signal is converted to a
digital Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) signal, and the conversion from PCM back
to an analog audio signal. Therefore, the true transmission levels are the sum of the
gain produced in the PCM conversion and the effect of the port circuitry on the
analog signal.
Entries made through the PI are referred to as Software Gain, while the effect of
the port circuitry is referred to as Hardware Gain. The combination of these two
gain factors determines the port-to-port or (end-to-end) transmission level of the
system.
19-2
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
0 SLT POTs (Single Line Telephones) • Full size: 8/24SA, 8/16/24SLS, or 4/8/16SH card
• IPx 500 and CDRS/CDRX 200E: 8/16/24SAipx or 8/16SLSipx
card
• IPx Office: 4/8/16/24SA Office, 4/8/20S Office, 4SA+8Fx Office,
4SA+16Fx Office, 8SA+8Fx Office or 8SA+16Fx Office card
•
4 LS/GS Loop Start (LS) or • Full size: 4T-C, 8T-C, 4T-CID, 8T-CID, 4/8TPF, 4TMR-PF card
Ground Start (GS) analog trunks • IPx 500 and CDRS/CDRX 200E: 4/8T-Cipx, 4/8T-CIDipx,
4TMR-PFipx, 4TMR-PF-Gipx
• IPx Office: 4T Office, 8T Office, 4T-CID Office, 8T-CID Office
•
5 E&M E&M analog trunk cards 4TEM, 4TEMsl, 4TEMipx, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP/S
6 DID DID analog trunk cards 8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z, 4BID, 8BID, 4GID, 8GID
8 DGTL Digital E1/T1 trunk cards T1, T1sl, T1ipx, 30T, 30Tsl, 30Tipx, 30T/E, 30T/M, 30T/x, 30Tsl,
30Tipx, 30T Office (30T or 30TM jumper selection),
UDT Office(T1), 2DT(T1/30T/30TM), 2DTipx(T1/30T/30TM),
11 MUSIC MUSIC SOURCE • Full size: 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, RMI, ASU card
• IPx 500M and CDRS 200E: Embedded on motherboard
• IPx Office: U-MR Office, MR Office, RMI Office or U-RMI Office
19-3
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
12 CONF Conference card ports • Full size: 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, CNF (defined as CONF)
• IPx 500M: 8DRCF on MSBipx issue 0100X1000 and lower
15 PRI PRI trunks PRI-23, PRI-30, PRI-23sl, PRI-30sl, UDTipx (PRI-23), PRI-30ipx,
PRI-30 Office, UDT Office (PRI-23), 2DT(PRI-23/30),
2DTipx(PRI-23/30), 2DT Office (PRI-23/30)
16 DKT/DST FlexSet, DKT, DST and GKT 8/16SKD, 8SVD, 8/16/24SDT, 8/16/24SFT,
keysets 8/16/24SFT Office, 4S8F Office, 8S8F Office, 4S16F Office,
8S16F Office,
8/16SFTipx, 8/16SFTsl, 8F8Ssl
17 TBR BRI trunks 4TBR, 8TBR, 8TBRP, 4TBRsl, 8TBRsl, 8TBRPsl, 4TBRipx,
8TBRipx, 8TBRPipx, 4TBR Office
19 iDSP iDSP card This parameter is irrelevant for Caller ID ports provided by:
• CDRS 200E
• IPx 500M: URC2 on MSBipx issue 0200X1000 and higher
• IPx Office: U-MR Office, MR Office, RMI Office or U-RMI Office
ALS70, BID, GID, and 30T/E cards are used only in European systems.
FROM 0..20
Gains Tables ROOT,0,1,3
TO 0..20
SOURCE
Enter the required source port type range (originating side of transmission path);
FROM the start range TO the end range.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
FROM 0..20
TO 0..20
DEST
Enter the required destination port type range (terminating side of transmission
path) FROM the start range TO the end range.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
After entering this information, the current Gain Table default values are displayed
for the various system paths.
1) Every path can be controlled either by Source or by Destination.
For example: The SLT--> LS/GS_TRK path, which represents the
19-4
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
keyset to trunk levels, can also be programmed for its inverse path of
LS/GS_TRK --> SLT.
2) Receive (RX) and Transmit (TX) gains refer to Source.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The full range is used by cards equipped with SICOFI components. Other
cards with C1 automatically cut the gain to a range of +6dB to -6dB.
For example: When an SLT is connected to a Loop Start/Ground Start trunk, the
gain equation would be:
1. Total gain from SLT to LS/GS_TRK:
• TRX[SOURCE = SLT-->DEST = LS/GS_TRK] + RCV[SOURCE =
LS/GS_TRK-->DEST = SLT]
2. Total gain from LS/GS_TRK to SLT:
• RCV[SOURCE = SLT-->DEST = LS/GS_TRK] + TRX[SOURCE =
LS/GS_TRK-->DEST = SLT]
Figure 19-1
Originating and
SOURCE DESTINATION
Terminating Sides- TRX TM
RCV
PORT CORAL PORT
Sketch
PCM
19-5
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
19-6
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
“--” indicates that connections cannot be made between the relevant type of ports.
The port gain definition remains as defined in Feature Control.
19-7
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
“--” indicates that connections cannot be made between the relevant type of ports.
The port gain definition remains as defined in Feature Control.
19-8
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
“--” indicates that connections cannot be made between the relevant type of ports.
The port gain definition remains as defined in Feature Control.
19-9
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
“--” indicates that connections cannot be made between the relevant type of ports.
The port gain definition remains as defined in Feature Control.
19-10
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
“--” indicates that connections cannot be made between the relevant type of ports.
The port gain definition remains as defined in Feature Control.
19-11
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
“--” indicates that connections cannot be made between the relevant type of ports.
The port gain definition remains as defined in Feature Control.
19-12
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
Source To Destination Source Receive Source Transmit
xmit/rcv card Gain Gain
rcv_gain xmit_gain
MUSIC ––> ANY PORT TYPE +0 +0
ANY PORT ––> MODEM POOL —— ——
These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
“--” indicates that connections cannot be made between the relevant type of ports.
The port gain definition remains as defined in Feature Control.
19-13
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
19-14
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
*These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
19-15
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
*These column titles do not appear on the PI terminal screen but are given as an aid to
understanding this table.
Gains Tables ROOT,0,1,3
19-16
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
4-LS/GS_TRK • Full size: 4T-C, 8T-C, 4T-CID, 8T-CID, 4/8TPF, 4TMR-PF card
• IPx 500 and CDRS/CDRX 200E: 4/8T-Cipx, 4/8T-CIDipx, 4TMR-PFipx,
4TMR-PF-Gipx
• IPx Office: 4T Office, 8T Office, 4T-CID Office, 8T-CID Office
•
19-17
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
10-DTD Dial tone Detector and call progress tone analyzer ports:
8DTD,
8DRCM-2,
8DRCM,
8DRCF,
Coral IPx 500M (8DRCF on MSBipx issue 0100X1000 and before).
• The DTD ports provided by:
CDRS 200E,
Coral IPx 500 (URC2 on MSBipx issue 0200X1000 and later)
and Coral IPx Office (U-RMI Office and U-MR Office cards)
may be adjusted in the URC Card Database branch (CDB,11,2) and not in the
Feature Control. See DTD GAIN on page 4-40.
At the asterisk (*), enter the number of the required port type and press [CR] to
display the following programmable options:
The following fields are additional attributes available for cards with C1 only:
19-18
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
19-19
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
19-20
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
Rcv.Gain Tx.Gain
Eu1 - Belgium
0 - SLT +3
4 - LS/GS_TRK -2.5
15 - GID_TRK +0
Eu2 - Germany
0 - SLT +0 -3
1 - MAGNETO -3.5
4 - LS/GS_TRK +0
5 - E&M_TRK -4 +3
6 - GID_TRK +0
Eu3 - Spain
0 - SLT +0 -3
1 - MAGNETO -3.5
4 - LS/GS_TRK -1 -1
5 - E&M_TRK -4 +3
7 - ALS70_TRK -1 -1
14 - BID_TRK -1 -1
15 - GID_TRK -1 -1
19-21
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
In the Gain Comp. element table, the default for all ports is 0.
After this route is selected the following options appear:
GAIN_COMP# 0..31
Enter the new gain compensation element number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Personal Port Gain, Compensation: Ports ROOT,0,2,3,0
19-22
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
FROM 0..31
TO 0..31
GAIN_COMP#
Enter the range of elements by entering the first and last element required for
programming.
A notice appears stating that gain compensation values are denoted in decibels.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The full range is used by cards equipped with SICOFI components. Other
cards with C1 automatically cut the gain to a range of +6dB to -6dB.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
19-23
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
SEND_TO_PORT? Yes/No
Enables sending new values while conversing in order to check in real time
whether the new values are acceptable. If Y is not entered, the new values are added
when a new call is attempted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Balancing Network ROOT,0,2,2
19-24
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
Notes (1-5):
1) Normally, these values are used according to length of the
communication lines, as shown on the right side of the table.
2) All values refer to 24 gauge wire (0.5mm), for other wire gauges use
the next value.
3) Four wire 4TEM (4W) E&M trunks require Balancing Network code 0.
4) Digital cards (2SD,8SD, 4IAA, 8SVD, 8/16SKK, 2/4SKW, 8/16/24SFT,
8/16/24SFT Office, 4S8F Office, 8S8F Office, 4S16F Office,
8S16F Office, 8/16SFTipx, 8/16SFTsl, 8F8Ssl, PRI-23, PRI-30,
PRI-23ipx, PRI-30ipx, PRI-23sl, PRI-30sl, PRI-30 Office,
UDT(PRI-23), 4TBR, 8TBR, 8TBRP, 4TBRipx, 8TBRipx, 8TBRPipx,
4TBRsl, 8TBRsl, 8TBRPsl, 4TBR Office, T1, T1ipx, T1ipx, UDT(T1),
30T, 30Tipx, 30Tsl, 30T/E, 30T/M, 30T/x, 30T Office (30T or 30TM
jumper selection,
19-25
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
Value
Card
1 2 3/4 5/6 7 Ø*
USA (CC0), ISRAEL & ROW (CC1), Mexico (CC2), Netherlands (Eu0)
4,8,16SH/S 0 - 0.4 km 0.4 - 1.2 km 1.2 - 2.8 km >2.8 km >2.8 km 0.5
8SM/S, 8SMipx 0.4 - 1.2 km 0 - 0.4 km 1.2 - 2.8 km 2.8 - 4 km >4 km 0.5
4,8T/S Loaded Line 0 - 0.4 km 0.8 - 1.6 km 1.6 - 3.6 km >3.6 km 0.5
ALS70 Loaded Line 0 - 0.4 km 0.8 - 1.6 km 1.6 - 3.6 km >3.6 km 0.5
Belgium (Eu1)
4,8,16SH/S 0 - 0.4 km + 0 km 0.4 - 1.2 km 1.2 - 2.4 km >2.4 km 0.5
600
4TEM/S 1.5 km, 0.6mm 0 km 1.5km, 3.5 km, 3.5 km, 0.5
0.4mm 0.6mm 0.4mm
8SM/S, 8SMipx 1.5 km, 0.6mm 0 km 1.5km, 3.5 km, 3.5 km, 0.5
0.4mm 0.6mm 0.4mm
4,8SK/S 0 km +600
† 0 - 0.4 km 0.4 - 1.6 km 1.6 - 4 km 1.6 - 4 km 0.5
8SM/S, 8SMipx 1.5 km, 0.6mm 0 km 1.5km, 3.5 km, 3.5 km,
0.4mm 0.6mm 0.4mm
4GID, 8DID/S 1.5 km, 0.6mm 0 km 1.5km, 3.5 km, 3.5 km,
0.4mm 0.6mm 0.4mm
19-26
PI Reference Manual Voice Transmission Controls
Card* VALUE
0 1 2 3/4 5/6 7 Ø
USA (CC0)
* see below Disable 0-0.4 km 0.4-1.2 km 1.2 -2.8 km >2.8 km >2.8 km 0.5
Balance
Network‡
Belgium (Eu1)
* see below Disable 0-0.4 km 0-0.4 km 0.4-1.2 km 1.2 -2.8 km >2.8 km 0.5
Balance
‡
Network
* see below Disable 0-0.4 km 0.4-1.2 km 1.2 -2.8 km >2.8km >2.8 km 0.4
Balance
‡
Network
* see below Disable 0-0.4 km 0.4-1.2 km 1.2 -2.8 km >2.8 km >2.8 km 0.5
Balance
‡
Network
19-27
Voice Transmission Controls PI Reference Manual
Balancing Network ROOT,0,2,2
19-28
20 Wakeup
This chapter describes the programming options available for the Wakeup feature.
See also, System Features - Hotel beginning on page 6-41.
20-1
Wakeup PI Reference Manual
When Wakeup Control is selected, the following report switches can be utilized
whether or not an actual report is printed out. Samples of various wakeup reports
are shown further on in this chapter.
Sample on-line reports are shown on page 20-4 and on page 20-5.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DISPLAY:
20-2
PI Reference Manual Wakeup
DEST [4] 1..24 for Serial or Modem port (see Table 17-2 on page 17-11)
99 for IP port via MAP
Determines the output terminal destination for the wakeup report.
The Announcer destination ANN_DEST [0] is defined in SFE - Hotel (see page
6-41).
Enter “99” for IP port connectivity via MAP-CNCM software, if available and
active in your system (see CNCM (page 27-5) in MAP branch).
The system returns the last IP port number not yet used.
The MAP is not available in Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems.
.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
20-3
Wakeup PI Reference Manual
Wakeup reports are used to select stations that are required for display or printing
on demand. The following material is not presented as a programming option, but
is provided for tutorial and system maintenance purposes only.
When the Wakeup Report is selected the option is available for selecting a range of
stations:
WAKE-UP REPORT
DATE 12/31/02
Wakeup Report WAKEUP,1 [3,3,1]
On-Line Reports
Several different types of on-line reports are available: New/Canceled, Fail,
Success. The type of report depends upon how DISPLAY is defined in Wakeup
Control (see page 20-2). When a wakeup request is unfulfilled, the report includes
the reason for the failure, for example: busy, no answer, lock-out, undefined. A
sample on-line report is presented below:
20-4
PI Reference Manual Wakeup
The reports shown in this chapter are not actual printouts, but are replicas
of the types of reports available and are presented in the interest of clarity.
20-5
PI Reference Manual
Wakeup
20-6
Wakeup Report WAKEUP,1 [3,3,1]
21 Special System Options-
Database Control
& Duplication Systems
This chapter describes the software devices that are used to control the type of
information that is stored on the system memory.
Additionally, this chapter also explains the operation of the Coral duplication
system.
Database Control ........................................................................................21-2
First Initialization .......................................................................................21-3
Backup ........................................................................................................21-4
Database Control: Disk (FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000) ................................21-5
Database Control: FLASH (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx
500,800,3000, CDRS 200E).....................................................................21-12
Duplication (FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 dual control).......................21-19
HSB (FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000/R redundant control) .................21-24
21-1
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
The basic options in Database Control for controlling backup and restore
operations on flash memories of the FMsl, CFD and IMC8/16 and are presented
below. First Initialization and Backup are discussed in greater detail on the
following pages.
0 - First Initialization Returns the database and Size Tables to default. 21-3
1- Last Power Fail Displays the time and date of last system power
Database Control ROOT,0,10
21-2
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
21-3
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
I
Backup ç ROOT,0,10,2
During normal operation, the system configuration database is saved to a file on the
Flash memory permanent storage. A saved database file may be loaded (restored)
at any time.
The system database is located on a protected RAM and is saved on the flash
memory of the control card. The two database files DB0.DEF and DB1.DEF are
saved on a flash memory. DB0.DEF is used for the daily backup performed
automatically at a preset time (usually every day), while DB1.DEF is used for
manual backups performed by the technician.
The options in Database Control for controlling backup and restore operations for
Coral FlexiCom systems are presented below. They are discussed in on the
following pages.
CDRS 200E
21-4
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
C
Database Control: Disk (FlexiCom 6000, IPx 4000) ç ROOT,0,10,2,0
The following table presents the options in Database Control for controlling Coral
FlexiCom 6000 or Coral IPx 4000 operations. A more detailed explanation is given
on the following pages.
In the Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral IPx 4000 system, the database is located on
21-5
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
EXECUTE Yes/No
Enter Y to execute the Save Database command.
In a Hot Standby system, messages for both system sides appear on the Active
side. The Standby side also displays an appropriate message:
• Messages on Active side: DBS stored to DB1.DEF.
• Message on Standby side: DBS stored to DB1.DEF.
Executing a Save Command may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.
Therefore, changes to the system configuration (such as changing the system to
Night Service, setting a Call Forward or Do Not Disturb instruction at a station, or
even turning on or off the Background Music at a Keyset) cannot be completed
Save Database (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000)
during the save operation, until the database save process is completed.
Attempting to activate such features are refused and invoke the following message
at the keyset display: DBS TEMPORARILY LOCKED!!!
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-6
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
FILE # 0, 1
Enter the source file code number.
0 (DB0.DEF) is the file from the last automatic Backup. 1 (DB1.DEF) is the file
from the last manual Save Database command performed by the technician.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
EXECUTE Yes/No
Enter Y to execute the load database command.
Warning!:
During the loading process, the Coral system is off-line. Calls in progress are
interrupted and new call processing temporarily ceases, for a few seconds
to a few minutes depending on the size of the system. During this process,
the Coral system is non-operational. After the database is successfully
loaded into the database memory, the system executes a Partial Initialization
21-7
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
0 - DATABASE The Database option allows copying a database file. When this option is selected,
a database SRC FILE # can be copied over a database DST FILE #.
1 - SELECT FILE The Select File option allows copying any file on the Flash memory card to another
file of the same type by using the entire name and extension of the file.
Enter the code (for database) or full name with extension (for select file) of the
destination file.
Codes:
0: DB0.DEF 1: DB1.DEF
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-8
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
EXECUTE Yes/No
Enter Y to execute Copy Files.
Copying files to a CFD generally takes a few seconds. When the copy is completed,
a confirmation message: DB0.DEF copied to DB1.DEF appears on the
active system side or on both sides of a Coral FlexiCom 6000/R or Coral IPx
4000/R redundant system:
WARNING!
Executing the copy command replaces the destination data with the source
data, thereby destroying the information currently in the destination file.
Make sure that the actual copying is performed over the required file.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-9
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
EXECUTE Yes/No
Enter Y to display the directory.
The directory display lists each file on the CFD (flash memory). The FILE_NAME
field identifies each file. The VERSION field indicates the age relative to other
files with the same data. For instance, in the example listed below, DB0.DEF is
version 2, so it is the most current database file. The LAST_DATE and LAST_
TIME fields indicate the last data (in US format: mm/dd/yy) and time the file was
written on the CFD. The FILE_STATUS field is only relevant for database files,
and indicates whether or not the file was written successfully.
Show Directory is possible on both sides of a duplication system.
disk directory
FILE_NAME VERSION LAST_DATE LAST_TIME FILE_STATUS
1: DB0.DEF 2 mm/dd/yy 1: 30: 4 OK
2: DB1.DEF 1 mm/dd/yy 14:00:10 OK
3: DUMP 8224 0/ 0/ 0 0: 0: 0 INVALID
4: PATCH 8224 0/ 0/ 0 0: 0: 0 INVALID
Show Dir (FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000) ROOT,0,10,2,0,4
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-10
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
21-11
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
Database Control: FLASH (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) ç 0,10,2,2
The following pages present the options in Database Control for controlling Coral
400 (with HDC controller), 5000; Coral IPx Office, CDRS 200E, and Coral IPx
500, 800 and 3000 operations. A more detailed explanation is given on the
following pages.
Notes:
• IPx Office; IPx 500, 800, 3000; FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000; CDRS 200E:
The IMC8 has a total storage capacity of 8MB; 4MB are used for the software version
leaving 4MB for Database Control. However, the maximum recommended storage
capacity for the IMC8 is 3.8MB.
• FlexiCom 200; CDRS 200 systems: The FMsl has sufficient capacity to store two
copies of the system database for most systems. However, some larger systems
(database larger than 384K) may have a system configuration that is so large and
Database Control: FLASH (IPx Office, FlexiCom
complex, that only a single copy of the database can be stored. If the database is larger
than 384K, then only (DB0.DEF) is used and the Automatic daily backup cannot be
used (this prevents overwriting the only FMsl copy of the database).
2- SHOW FILE INFO Displays all files currently stored on the 21-15
IMC8/IMC16 card.
4- ERASE Erases the database files from the flash memory 21-17
on the IMC8/IMC16.
21-12
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
FLASH: Save (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) ç ROOT,0,10,2,2,0
This option copies the current system database to the flash memory of the
IMC8/IMC16/IMC4(FMsl) card.
EXECUTE Yes/No
Enter Y to execute the Save Database command.
Saving the database to the Flash memory generally takes several minutes. While
the database is being saved, it is important to note that changes to the system
configuration are prohibited, such as changing the system to Night Service, setting
a Call Forward or Do Not Disturb instruction at a station, or even turning on or off
the Background Music at a Keyset, until the database save process is completed.
An attempt to change such a feature results in the following keyset message
display: DBS TEMPORARILY LOCKED!!!
21-13
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
FLASH: LOAD DBS (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400, 5000, IPx 500, 800, 3000, CDRS 200E) ç ROOT,0,10,2,2,1
FILE # 0,1
Enter the source file code number.
0: DB0.DEF is the file from the last automatic Backup.
1: DB1.DEF is the file from the last manual Save Database command performed
by the technician.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
EXECUTE Yes/No
After entering Y the system notifies you that it is Restoring and after a few
seconds gives one of the following messages:
Message Explanation
FLASH: LOAD DBS (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400, 5000, IPx 500,
WARNING!:
Loading the database takes a few minutes. During this process, the Coral
system is non-operational.
Calls in progress are interrupted and new call processing temporarily
ceases. After the database is successfully loaded into the database memory,
the system executes a Partial Initialization and begins processing calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-14
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
FLASH: SHOW FILE INFO (IPx Office, FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E)ROOT,0,10,2,2,2
This option displays the list of all files currently stored on the IMC8/IMC16 or
IMC4(FMsl) card.
Reading the directory from the Flash memory generally takes only a few seconds,
provided no other priority tasks are required of the Main Processor.
EXECUTE Yes/No
Enter Y to display the current list.
The display lists each file stored in the card. The FILE_NAME field identifies each
file. The VERSION field indicates the age relative to other files with the same data.
For instance, in the example listed below, DB0.DEF is version 2, so it is the most
current database file. The LAST_DATE and LAST_TIME fields indicate the last
date (in US format: mm/dd/yy) and time the file was written to the card. The FILE_
STATUS field is valid only for database files, and indicates whether or not the file
was written successfully.
disk directory
FILE_NAME VERSION LAST_DATE LAST_TIME FILE_STATUS
1: DB0.DEF 2 mm/dd/yy 1: 30: 4 OK
2: DB1.DEF 1 mm/dd/yy 14:00:10 OK
3: DUMP 8224 0/ 0/ 0 0: 0: 0 INVALID
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-15
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
FLASH: AUTO BACKUP (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) ç ROOT,0,10,2,2,3
The system database can be automatically saved to the IMC8/IMC16 card at a
preset time each day. During automatic daily backup, the database is saved to the
DB0.DEF file.
21-16
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
FLASH: ERASE (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) ç ROOT,0,10,2,2,4
This function enables the technician to erase either one or both of the backup
database files stored on the ICM8 card. Upon entering this option, the following
message appears:
CAUTION: Flash dbs backup will be lost!!!
PROCEED WITH ERASE (0/1/A/N)?
0 erases the DB0.DEF database.
1 erases the DB1.DEF database.
A erases both DB0.DEF and DB1.DEF.
N cancels the operation.
Upon entering 0, 1, or A, the system displays:
Erasing...
After a few seconds one of the following messages appear:
21-17
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
FLASH: INIT DUMP (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400,5000, IPx 500,800,3000, CDRS 200E) ç ROOT,0,10,2,2,5
QUALAFIED PERSONNEL ONLY!
This parameter should only be used by experienced technicians to erase the dump
file used for diagnostics. Activating this branch results in the following message:
Dump file will be erased!!!
PROCEED(Y/N)?
Enter Y to dump the file and N to retract.
If no dump was made, the following message is received upon activation:
No dump in system!
FLASH: INIT DUMP (IPx Office, FlexiCom 400,5000, IPx
21-18
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
Duplication (FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 dual control) ç DUPLICATION [ROOT,0,11]
Duplication is operative only for Coral FlexiCom 5000 and Coral IPx 3000 systems
with dual control. In the fully duplicated configuration two 4GC cards are
interconnected through a special data link called “Super-Link” (see Figure 21-1 on
page 21-20). This link enables the two MEX-IP2 cards to communicate and operate
in a “load-sharing” mode.
The duplication configuration has three major conditions from the Master side,
plus the reverse (tag states) from the Slave side.
* “Master” refers to the logical (acting) master side. While the Physical Master is the system
control side jumpered as a master by default (usually the left side).
Note:
The Coral FlexiCom 6000/R and Coral IPx 4000/R also offer a completely
redundant system (Hot Standby), with duplicate control sides and is
described at the end of this chapter, see HSB (FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx
4000/R redundant control) beginning on page 21-24.
21-19
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MASTER Yes/No
Yes indicates that the side addressed is acting as the Master side.
Selecting No on the Master side causes the system to go from U to U' or from U' to
U, depending upon which state the system is in at the time the change is made. This
option must be Yes while displaying through the Master KB0, or any other RMI,
8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, 8DRCF or other modem port.
Figure 21-1. IPx 3000 IPx 3000M IPx 3000M
Master Slave with Physical Slave Physical Master
Super Link- M M
Duplication (FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 dual control)
J41 J41
U’ Configuration S S
Sketch
MEX-IP2 MEX-IP2
Duplication Cable
H219
4GC 4GC
MEX-IP2 MEX-IP2
Flat Cable
"Super-Link"
via MPG cards
4GC 4GC
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-20
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
If the second MEX-IP2 is active it will also be removed from the active
system.
Determines whether or not the 4GC card on the opposite control section is active.
Changing from No to Yes results in joining the second 4GC card to the active
system. Changing from Yes to No results in removing the second 4GC and
MEX-IP2 card from the active system. The system may itself change from Yes to
No when the Slave side is malfunctioning. This option must be Yes while making
a change though the Slave KB0.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-21
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
EXCEPTION:
Disabling the second MEX-IP2 will NOT cause System Initialization
i.e. switching from a U to an L type system or from a U’ to an L’ system.
Duplication (FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000 dual control)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-22
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
Flat Cable The system does not identify • Check that a flat-cable is present.
Failure the presence of the • Check that the flat-cable is properly
“Super-Link” flat cable.
connected.
• Check that the flat-cable is not bent
or kinked.
Second 4GC The system was loaded under • The second 4GC is not present or
Failure an I/I'-type configuration there is no communication
between the two 4GC systems.
• The SPV automatically initialized
the system as I'/I configured.
Second MCP The system was loaded under • The second MEX-IP2 is not
Failure an L/L’-type configuration. present or is faulty.
• The SPV automatically initialized
21-23
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
HSB (FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000/R redundant control) ç HSB or [ROOT,0,11]
SAU Requirement
The Hot Standby (HSB) Coral FlexiCom 6000/R and Coral IPx 4000/R system is
a dual control system. One control is Active while the second remains in Standby
mode. If the first system fails for any reason, the second, Standby system, becomes
Active.
There is no interruption of calls with this redundant system.
Both the Active and Standby controls are connected to the peripheral shelves while
only one connection is active (supplying all signals,e.g.: PCM, HDLC, Clock, and
Sync). This mechanism is driven by dual 32GC cards with mirrored memory
connected to an ATS-BUS providing communication between the two MCP-ATS
cards.
As a dual control system, if the Active control fails, it is automatically rendered
FAULTY (or Inactive) and the Standby system takes over operation of all calls. The
faulty system continues automatic diagnostics and will automatically recover if
possible.
Inactive Control System
A control system becomes Inactive when the Active or Standby system either fails
or is manually transferred to the Maintenance mode. In Maintenance mode, the
system continues diagnostics tests, alarm activation for service calls, and reports
faults to the Active system.
An Active Control system is automatically transferred to Fault mode when
diagnostics determines the control system to be faulty (see Diagnostic Alarms
HSB (FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000/R redundant control)
beginning on page 22-5). In this mode, the system continues performing tests and
might automatically return to proper operation when normal results are observed.
The control system in Inactive Mode does not participate in the system operations
and is not in Standby mode if the Active system fails.
Notes on PI Changes:
• Any PI Update can be made from the Active side.
• All HSB parameters on the Standby side can be viewed but not updated.
• All HSB parameters except STATUS (page 21-27) can be updated on the
Maintenance or Faulty side.
See HSB Configurations Table on the next page.
21-24
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
HSB Configurations
The HSB parameters are presented below. Note that most parameters are for
display purposes only and are marked Read-Only. The others may be updated as
needed.
21-25
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-26
PI Reference Manual Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems
STATUS 0: Active
1: Standby
3: Maintenance
Choose the control status of this side of the system.
If Standby (1) or Maintenance (3) is chosen, the other side must be in Active mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
21-27
Special System Options- Database Control & Duplication Systems PI Reference Manual
HSB (FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000/R redundant control)
21-28
22 Diagnostics
This chapter describes the programming requirements for the system diagnostic
tests.
Diagnostic Tests..........................................................................................22-2
Diagnostic Alarms ......................................................................................22-5
22-1
Diagnostics PI Reference Manual
1-KEYSET LPB All EKT and VDK Keyset micro controllers are systematically
Diagnostic Tests ROOT,1,0
(EKT, and VDK instructed to repeat a test message to the MCP, thus checking
the HDLC communication link.
Loop-Back)
2-DI B.I.T Checks the diagnostic test procedure database for corruptions.
(Diagnostic
Built-In-Test)
22-2
PI Reference Manual Diagnostics
7- Not Used
10- ALL DTMFs Establishes a link between the DTMF generator circuitry on the
HDC/4GC/32GC/MSBsl/MSBipx card and each DTMF receiver
(DTR) circuit. Once the link is setup, the test then verifies if
tones sent by the 4GC/MSBsl/MSBipx are correctly identified by
the DTMF receiver.
11- ALL DTDs Establishes a link between the tone generator circuitry on the
(All Dial Tone HDC/4GC/32GC/MSBsl/MSBipx card and each dial tone detector
card (DTD) circuit. Once the link is setup, the test then verifies if
Detectors)
tones sent by the 4GC/MSBsl/MSBipx are correctly identified by
the DTD.
12- LINKS Checks each unoccupied link by verifying that the tone patterns
sent by the HDC/4GC/MSBsl/MSBipx card on each unoccupied
PCM time-slot is correctly received.
Also checks for the 32GC card, but only for the transmit side.
13- MEMORY Confirms the checksum value to each Read Only Memory
(ROM) device.
This information can be particularly useful whenever the
diagnostic procedures discover errors. When such an error is
discovered, an error prompt appears on the PI terminal screen
and gives the location of the faulty chip.
14- ALL PORTs Establishes a link between the test tone generator circuitry on
the HDC/4GC/MSBsl/MSBipx card and each port. Instructs the
port to enter loopback mode and verify that a tone pattern sent
to the port is successfully and correctly returned.
19- TONE RFS Downloads a copy of the tone Table database to the
(Tone Refresh) HDC/4GC/32GC/MSBsl/MSBipx service card.
22-3
Diagnostics PI Reference Manual
20- DVMS CHK Instructs the 4VS, 4VSN card to send a test tone to the
(DVMS Check) HDC/4GC/MSBsl/MSBipx card.
21- ALL MFCs Establishes a link between the tone generator circuit on the
(16 MFR Detectors) HDC/4GC/32GC/MSBsl/MSBipx and each multi frequency
receiver. Once the link is setup the test then verifies if tones sent
from the HDC/4GC/32GC/MSBsl/MSBipx are correctly identified
by the MFR.
24- DKT SUBUNIT All keyset subunits (FlexSet, DKT, DST, DPEM, APA, APDL) are
systematically instructed to repeat a test message to the
MEX-IP2/MCP-IPx2, thus checking the HDLC communication
link and IOM bus.
25- ALL iDSPs Establishes a link between the test tone generator circuitry on
the 4GC/HDC/32GC card and each resource on the iDSP card.
Instructs the iDSP card to enter loopback mode and verify that a
tone pattern sent to the iDSP card is successfully returned.
Diagnostic Tests ROOT,1,0
22-4
PI Reference Manual Diagnostics
0- ACTIVE
ALARMS
3-CARD [card type] SHELF # SLOT # 40/Shelf #/Slot# Card Error Minor
error type: NO HDLC RESPONSE
error type: INTERNAL
DIAGNOSTIC [type]
error type: RINGER PROBLEM
4-CARD [card type] SHELF# SLOT# CKT# 41/Shelf #/Slot#/CKT# Specific Port Minor
SUBUNIT DIAL NUM#
error type: PORT LOOPBACK
error type: COMMUNICATION
TEST
error type: INTERNAL
DIAGNOSTIC [type]
type:{0-RAM, 2-PROM CS, 4 - Incompatible
Subunit}
22-5
Diagnostics PI Reference Manual
NOTE:
6-PCM HW HIGHWAY# FAILURE DATE/TIME 31/Highway # PCM Highway Major
7-PCM TIME HIGHWAY# TIME SLOT# T/R (4GC) 32/Highway#/TS# 4GC/HDC Card Minor
SLOT T=Transmit/R=Receive PCM wiring
Faulty Peripheral Card
NOTE:
LINKS (32GC)
T=Transmit
These alarms are only applicable for systems connected via Serial RS-232 connectors.
PORT BUFFER IS FULL
They are irrelevant for IPx Office and other Coral systems connected via the MAP card.
22-6
PI Reference Manual Diagnostics
NOTE:
10-HSB Other MCP and XGC Failure 90/5 MCP and XGC Minor
12- [card type] SHELF# SLOT# 81/Shelf #, Slot # Faulty Signal Major
DIGITAL [card type] SHELF# SLOT#
TRUNK CHANNEL #
CARD error type: NO SIGNAL
error type: RAI
error type: AIS
error type: CRC
error type: CLOCK FAULT
NOTE:
Side Memory Alarm
Lock Device Alarm Display
Only
IPx 4000 and ATS Disk Alarm
FlexiCom 6000
CNTL Alarm
Batteries Alarm
22-7
Diagnostics PI Reference Manual
15- LOW BATTERY ON MCPsl 11/Battery Location # DBX Card Battery Minor
CONTROLS LOW BATTERY ON J1,J2,J3 Minor
Minor
UP/DOWN
17-DKT [card type] SHELF# SLOT# CKT# 42/Shelf #/Slot #/Ckt # FlexSet, DKT, DST, Minor
SUBUNIT DKT SUBUNIT: [type] DIAL NUM# DPEM, APA
22- E911 GC Incompatible E911 4GC (No DKT message is Non-Compatible E911 N/A
COMPATIBILI Incompatible E911 4GC(other displayed) (4GC) Control Card
TY
4GC)
22-8
PI Reference Manual Diagnostics
24-NODE NODE ID MISSING [date] [time] 00A1 This alarm is activated Minor
ID# when there is no node
ID# defined for the
current node and the
system tries to
activate the Path
Replacement feature
(or a remote node
invites Path
Replacement from the
current node).
27-CLEAR-
ALARMS
22-9
Diagnostics PI Reference Manual
* If lock device (SAU) is faulty for two weeks, the following message is displayed:
“SYSTEM IS DOWN DUE TO: FAULTY LOCK_DEVICE CALL TECHNICIAN”.
and the system shuts down. If the system is powered up again without correcting the lock device problem, the system will shut down
again in 15 minutes.
22-10
23 Special Port Facilities
This chapter describes the special port facilities that are available for tenant
members.
DVMS Port .................................................................................................23-2
Conference ..................................................................................................23-4
Public Address/Page ...................................................................................23-7
Modem ........................................................................................................23-9
Bell/UNA ..................................................................................................23-10
Page_Q/Music...........................................................................................23-11
23-1
Special Port Facilities PI Reference Manual
Four DVMS ports are located on each 4VS or 4VSN card. This option allows
defining one or all of the four DVMS ports to announce a particular message
programmed into the card.
FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid system DVMS port dial number (defined in
General Numbering Plan, DVMS_PORTS [32] (page 5-44);
All
Enter the range of required DVMS Port dial numbers FROM the lowest dial
number required TO the highest dial number required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
same message.
In this parameter, use the 2-digit DVMS MSG index number instead of the four
digit dial number defined by DVMS_MSG [31] (page 5-43) in the General Numbering
Plan.
Each DVMS card has four ports. A port defined as N enables users to access any
one of the messages stored on the card by dialing its 4-digit DVMS_MSG number.
On the other hand, a port defined with a specific index number enables the user to
hear only the message related to that index number.
Manufacturer’s Recommendation:
At least one port should be defined as N so that more than four different
messages may be accessed by the users.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
23-2
PI Reference Manual Special Port Facilities
Feature Authorization (page 3-5) is required in order not to toll the call
(i.e. To set WITH_ANSWER to No).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
23-3
Special Port Facilities PI Reference Manual
by the Coral IPx Office (U-RMI Office / U-MR Office) and IPx 500.
(max: *) The max number, modifiable via the PI, see URC-Current
Configuration - Meet Me on page 4-38.
Conference PDB,3 [0,2,1,3]
23-4
PI Reference Manual Special Port Facilities
FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid system Conference dial number (defined in General Numbering
Plan, CONF [30] (page 5-43));
All
Enter the range of required Conference dial numbers FROM the lowest Conference
number TO the highest Conference number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BREAK_IN/OUT_ Yes/No
TONE [0]
This option defines whether or not to inform parties engaged in a conference call
when an additional user joins (break-in) or leaves (break-out) the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CIRCUIT_RESERVED Yes/No
[2]
Set this parameter to Yes to reserve this conference dial number for regular
conferences so that it cannot be used for the Continuous Conference feature.
Setting this parameter to Yes ensures that when a maximum number of Continuous
Conferences are created, thereby exhausting many conference circuits, this
Conference circuit is still reserved for regular conferences.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
23-5
Special Port Facilities PI Reference Manual
LINKED TO CONF Any valid URC Conference dial# on the SAME card
DIAL# [4] Default: R (Remove for None)
• Requires URC Software Versions 1.29 or higher.
• URC units available on:
• Coral IPx Office (U-RMI Office, U-MR Office cards)
• Coral IPx 500M (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0200X1000 and above)
• CDRS 200E.
This parameter enables linking Conference circuits on the URC unit only, in order
to create a larger conference. A single URC Conference may contain a maximum
of 84 conference participants.
23-6
PI Reference Manual Special Port Facilities
Public Address provides the interface for external paging and public address
systems. The audio output of the public address may be used to directly drive
amplified speakers. However, the number of speakers that can be driven varies
according to manufacturer. For more details on external paging devices see the
relevant Coral Installation Manual.
Paging or Public Address, is accomplished through using relay RLY1 located on
the following cards that support one paging interface each:
• The CDRS 200E main cage
• The Coral IPx 500M main cage
• RMI Office, MR Office, U-RMI Office and U-MR Office card
• 8DRCF card
• ASU and RMI cards
CKT7 on the RMI/ASU or
CKT 23 on the 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, 8DRCF, U-RMI/U-MR/RMI/MR Office,
CDRS 200E and IPx 500.
The 8DRCF, 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, RMI and ASU card can be installed in the
following Coral systems:
• Coral IPx 500 with 800X expansion cage
• Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000, 6000
• Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000
• Coral IPx Office with IPx 800X expansion cage
The RMI Office, MR Office, U-RMI Office or U-MR Office cards can be installed
in the:
Office, U-MR Office or RMI/ASU cards is used the second music interface
is not available.
FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid system Page dial number (defined in General Numbering Plan,
PAGE [12] (page 5-40));
All
Enter the range of required Page dial numbers FROM the lowest Page number
required TO the highest Page number required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
23-7
Special Port Facilities PI Reference Manual
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Defines the tenant group number required for accessing the Page for public address
systems. This option can be used to block certain users from connecting to the
current Page.
Tenant restrictions are defined through COS.
Each RMI/ASU card includes only one port for PAGING called MP-2.
This port may be used for either PAGING or 2nd MUSIC SOURCE.
When # OF MUSIC SOURCES (1-4) (page 4-45) is employed, the PAGE
feature is blocked. In order to have both features available simultaneously,
an 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, 8DRCF or additional RMI/ASU card must be
installed.
Each Coral IPx 500, CDRS 200E or 8DRCM-2, 8DRCM, 8DRCF card
includes one port for Paging and two ports for Music Sources.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Public Address/Page PDB,5 [0,2,1,5]
23-8
PI Reference Manual Special Port Facilities
A modem port is located on the following cards and systems. Each card can be
equipped with a single, auto-answer data modem for accessing the PI from a
remote. This option is normally utilized for programming and maintenance
purposes. The modem can be assigned a dial number for user access. Assigning
tenant numbers to the modem allows or denies tenant access to the modem.
• The Coral IPx 500M main cage (MSBipx Hardware Issue-0220X1003 or
lower) – V.90 ITU-T up to 56Kbps
• 8DRCF card – V.90 ITU-T up to 56Kbps
• U-RMI Office or RMI Office card – V.90 ITU-T up to 56Kbps
• 8DRCM and RMI/ASU cards - 300/1200 bps
CKT3 on the RMI/ASU or
CKT 26 on the 8DRCM/8DRCF, U-RMI/RMI Office, and IPx 500.
The modem is not available on the following cards and systems:
• 8DRCM-2 card
• Coral IPx 500M (with MSBipx Hardware Issue-0230X1003 or higher)
• CDRS 200E
The 8DRCF, 8DRCM and RMI/ASU cards can be installed in the following
systems:
• Coral IPx 500 with 800X expansion cage
• Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000, 6000
• Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000
• Coral IPx Office with IPx 800X expansion cage
The U-RMI Office or U-MR Office cards can be installed in the:
• Coral IPx Office unit (single card only)
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Defines the tenant group number required for accessing the Modem. This option
can be used to block certain users from connecting to the modem. Tenant
restrictions are defined through COS.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
23-9
Special Port Facilities PI Reference Manual
FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid system Bell dial number(defined in General Numbering Plan, BELL
Bell/UNA PDB,7 [0,2,1,7]
TNNT_GRP 0..63
Defines the tenant group number required for accessing the Bell number on various
special features. This option can be used to block certain users from connecting to
the current Bell.
Tenant restrictions are defined through COS.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
23-10
PI Reference Manual Special Port Facilities
Page_Q/Music ç ROOT,0,7
The Page_Q feature enables a station user to place a call in a special hold queue.
The call can then be answered at another station by dialing the specific queue
number.
Each queue number can be assigned a different music source that the holding party
hears. The call may be picked-up by any station member. Additionally, the user
who queued the calling party may page another station user to answer the call.
FROM/TO DIAL # Any valid system Page_Q dial number (defined in General Numbering Plan,
PAGE [12] (page 5-40));
All
Enter the range of required Page_Q dial numbers FROM the lowest Page_Q
number required TO the highest Page_Q number required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Page_Q/Music ROOT,0,7
23-11
Special Port Facilities PI Reference Manual
23-12
24 VFAC
24-1
VFAC PI Reference Manual
Verified Account Code (VAC) checks the code dialed, when required, by a user.
The Verified Forced Account Code (VFAC) supplements the regular Forced
Account Code (FAC) feature. Both the Forced Account code and the Verified
Forced Account Code require an account code when attempting to make an outside
call. VFAC, however, verifies the accuracy of the account code against the internal
database. If the account code is correct, the caller is allowed to continue dialing the
external number. If the account code is incorrect, a reorder tone is sounded and the
keyset displays the following message: Passcode Fail. Three fail attempts are
allowed by the system. The third failure generates an intercept call with a message
specifying the COS number. Dialing the correct account code number assigns the
caller a matching COS designation for the duration of the call.
Account codes can be between 4 and 16 digits (defined system-wide). When the
system is first initialized, a special random “Init Type Number” is generated. These
account numbers can then be assigned by the PI system programmer to individual
telephones. An additional security measure is provided by making the VFAC
branch of the PI password protected. Account codes are related through their index
numbers. Only authorized system programmers can delete or open account codes.
VFAC is typically used in semi-public places such as: dormitories, hospitals or
professional law firms; VFAC can also be used to keep track of client telephone
billing in places such as professional consulting firms. Additionally, “public
telephones” whose COS designation accepts any code, can be defined in the
database. When a legal VFAC code is entered, the caller can then place calls
through the phone. Multiple VFACs can be assigned to individual telephones. This
prevents a person who has secured another person’s code from using the code from
a different phone.
Verified Forced Account Code VFAC [3,4]
24-2
PI Reference Manual VFAC
Generating The total number of Account Codes used depends on how #ACCT_DGTS
VFAC Codes [7] (page 6-9) in the SFE branch is defined. This definition is related to the actual
number of digits that are available for each account code and the parameters as
defined in SIZ - ACCOUNTS. See Chapter 6 -System Features - Outgoing Trunks for
the table of Account Digits and Maximum Number of Codes.
Account codes are automatically generated by the internal secret function. There
are 32 sets of codes for each #ACCT_DGTS [7] (4-16) for a total of 416 different
code set possibilities. This total is established as follows: 32 x (16-3) = 416 (that
is: 32 fixed sets of codes, times the possible number of code strings [a minimum of
4, maximum of 16, {16-3}] equals a total of 416 possible strings). Each code set
contains a fixed number of possibilities, depending on the length of the code string
that is selected (between 4 and 16 digits). This code set is defined system-wide.
Select the code set through INIT TYPE. However, every code set has its own
unique codes, which are constant (cannot be individually changed) and are related
to the index number. A user’s code cannot be changed, only reassigned within the
limits of the currently defined code set.
There are 704 possible strings (32x22=704). This is for a large number of codes -
up to 65,000.
Each Coral system can have only a single code set. Once the number of digits in a
code has been determined, the entire system operates according to the same code
structure.
24-3
VFAC PI Reference Manual
ENTER ACCOUNT The defined password must be typed before entering the VFAC branch. If the
PASSWORD... password is incorrect then the following message appears:
***ILL PASSWORD***
Unless the proper password is entered the VFAC options cannot be reached. Once
the password is accepted the following menu appears:
0 - INIT CODES
1 - CODES
2 - SMDR
3 - PASSWORD
24-4
PI Reference Manual VFAC
0 - INIT CODES This option allows you to select one of the thirty-two sets of account codes in place
of the codes that are defined by the VFAC randomly generated code table. The Init
Type can be any number between 0 and 31 thus allowing for one of the thirty-two
account code sets. However, this set of numbers can be changed either by letting
the system randomly select a new set of numbers or by manually changing a
specific INIT TYPE. The code digits are computer generated, therefore, personal
code numbers may not be defined.
The following procedures describe the ways in which the ACCOUNT CODES can
be changed. The various options automatically appear in order once the request has
been fulfilled. However, the system allows backing out of certain options at various
points during the programming procedure.
24-5
VFAC PI Reference Manual
ENTER_NEW_INIT._ 0..31
TYPE CURRENT INIT TYPE (listed above)
This parameter appears only when ANY_SPECIFIC INIT TYPE above, is set to Y.
Enter any number between 0 and 31. This parameter should be changed with
caution, since all existing Account Codes will be replaced as soon as the new INIT
TYPE is accepted.
Note: The Codes (i.e. the digits) are computer generated. The user cannot
define a personal code number.
Once the new INIT TYPE number is entered, the following warning message
appears:
Warning: All existing Account Codes will be changed.
ARE YOU SURE? (Y/[N]) -
Enter Y to change the Account Codes.
Enter N to retract.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
24-6
PI Reference Manual VFAC
1 - CODES The attributes associated with each code are defined as follows:. The codes can be:
• Cancelled for further use
• Assigned to all system stations
• Assigned to a specific station
• Assigned with a COS number
Selecting CODES from the VFAC main menu allows changing and modifying the
use of the Account Code numbers. Change and Update by either choosing a system
Index number (choose 0) or Code (choose 1) method:
0-Index: through a range of index numbers (each code is associated with an Index
number)
1-Code: for a specific code number
Once the specific manner for making the change is decided, the following modes
of operation are available:
Option Description
The procedure for changing the codes is described below. You can update account
code information by either entering a VFAC code number or VFAC index number
and thereby update the related information (ASSIGN TO and COS parameters).
24-7
VFAC PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
matching COS for the duration of a single call only. Account Code operates in a
manner similar to Executive Privilege, in that:
• Certain features available at one station can also be utilized at another station.
• Some stations may be denied Account Codes.
• COS must be assigned to stations that use Account Code, thus, Account Code
can act as a passcode to the station operations.
• COS remains in effect for a single call only. After the one call is placed, the
station returns to its original Class Of Service.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
24-8
PI Reference Manual VFAC
2 - SMDR Use this tab to define the account code on the SMDR report.
See 0 - INIT CODES beginning on page 24-5 for definitions of the Index
and Code number.
Choose None so that the account code is not included in the SMDR report.
For the Account Code to appear in the SMDR report, ACCT. must be defined in
the SMDR Format ON_LINE PARMS (page 14-11).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
3 - PASSWORD A special account password is required in order to access the Verified Forced
Account Code node (see ENTER ACCOUNT PASSWORD... on page 24-4). This
password can be changed when required. The changing procedure is described
below.
**Password DENIED**
Password verification was faulty. The previous PI node is displayed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
24-9
VFAC PI Reference Manual
24-10
25 Time/Date Set and Adjust
This chapter describes the way in which the system time and date is set, as well as
adjustments that can be made when the system is installed or as required.
Time Set......................................................................................................25-2
Time Adjust ................................................................................................25-5
25-1
Time/Date Set and Adjust PI Reference Manual
Time Set allows setting the current system time and date. Changing these values
resets the displays on the Keysets and SMDR reports. The time and date are
displayed according to the format defined in Chapter 6 - System Features- Station
Options, DATE_MODE (Eu/USA) [16] (page 6-24). (Attendant Modifiable)
Press [CTRL-T] to display the time and date at any point on the PI system.
The Coral real time clock is powered by its own internal battery, retaining
the correct time even after a power failure. Relevant systems: MEX-IP2,
MCP-IPx2, MCP-ATS and IPx Office.
MONTH 1..12
Defines the current month. The month is entered by the actual number of the month
in one or two digits; January = 1, December = 12.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DAY 1..31
Defines the current day of the month. The day of the month is entered in one or two
digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
25-2
PI Reference Manual Time/Date Set and Adjust
DELTA_TIME_FROM_ +/- HH:MM (HH = 00..12, MM = 00, 15, 30, 45) or R (Remove for None);
GMT None
Defines the time zone of the Coral system by defining a time offset (in hours and
minutes) from GMT time.
• Time must be entered as +/- Hours:Minutes, i.e, with a colon, and minute
definition (00 for no minutes).
• Minute values are entered in increments of 15 minute (00, 15, 30, 45).
! Define this parameter as 0:00 only when this Coral system is physically
located at London GMT time. Otherwise, the time zone offsets defined
for the IP endpoints are meaningless.
25-3
Time/Date Set and Adjust PI Reference Manual
UPDATE? Yes/No
Executes all permissible changes when set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
25-4
PI Reference Manual Time/Date Set and Adjust
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
25-5
Time/Date Set and Adjust PI Reference Manual
25-6
26 ISDN
This chapter is used to program the system-wide ISDN parameters that connect the
Coral with the Network. The following options are available:
System Features - ISDN.............................................................................26-2
BCCOS Templates......................................................................................26-3
BCCOS Control..........................................................................................26-5
NSF .............................................................................................................26-6
Call by Call.................................................................................................26-8
Alternate Line ID........................................................................................26-9
ISDN Card Signaling................................................................................ 26-11
ISDN Card Signaling: Signaling Channel........................................ 26-12
ISDN Card Signaling: Card location................................................ 26-13
The System Features parameters establish the system default ISDN parameters for
all ISDN trunks that do not belong to any trunk group.
BCCOS (Bearer Capability Class of Service) establishes the communications
characteristics of incoming and outgoing ISDN trunks.
NSF (Network Specific Facility) parameters define services (e.g. INWATS,
ACCUNET, MEGACOM) provided by various carriers. (Applicable only in North
America.)
The Call By Call parameter is not used in this Coral version of the PI.
The Alternate Line ID parameter allows an ANI (Automatic Number
Identification) to be sent to the Network.
The PRI (Primary Rate Interface) and BRI (aka TBR: Trunk Basic Rate Interface)
card signaling parameters identify individual D-Channel characteristics.
26-1
ISDN PI Reference Manual
The following parameters are applied as default to all ISDN trunks which do not
belong to any trunk group. You must enter a value for Routing Access # before
continuing to update the other related parameters in this branch.
For further details, see Trunk Group Definition beginning on page 8-18.
ROUTING ACCESS # Any valid system Routing Access dial number (see ROUTING_ACC [37] on
[0] page 5-44, NPL,0,5,37)
or None
80
Defines the Routing Access Number to be applied for each outgoing trunk that is
not a member of any trunk group. Such a trunk is treated with the features defined
for the Routing Access selected here (see Chapter 15).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-2
PI Reference Manual ISDN
TEMPLATES Defines the values that are sent/received to/from the network to indicate the
requested BCCOS. There are 32 templates available. The first two templates are
pre-programmed and cannot be modified. The remaining 30 templates are
pre-programmed but can be modified.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The possible values are defined in CCITT protocol Q-931 and are compatible with
ISDN standards. Commonly used BCs are defined as the default values. Additional
combinations are supplied by the Network carrier.
26-3
ISDN PI Reference Manual
DEFAULT
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
BCCOS Templates ROOT,5,0,0
26-4
PI Reference Manual ISDN
CONTROL Selects the template or various templates to be included in each BCCOS. One of
the templates should be matched by the Bearer Capability values sent by the
network. The first number in the list is the Bearer Capability request sent by the
Coral to the network on outgoing calls.
Modify and define Templates in BCCOS Templates beginning on page 26-3. This
branch only defines which templates are used for the selected BCCOS number.
BCCOS # TEMPLATES
0 (0,1)
1 (1,0)
2 (3,0,1,2)
3 (3,2)
4 to 63 ()
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-5
ISDN PI Reference Manual
NSF ç ROOT,5,1
Network Specific Facility (NSF) defines the services provided by various carriers
(e.g. INWATS, ACCUNET, MEGACOM). The NSF is required to implement Dial
Services (see Dial Services beginning on page 15-11).
FROM/TO NSF 0 to the maximum defined in SIZ, see NETWORK_FACILITIES (page 4-20);
All
Enter the range of required NSF numbers FROM the lowest NSF number required
TO the highest NSF number required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-6
PI Reference Manual ISDN
0 INWATS (1H,4H)
1 WATS_MAXBAND (1H,5H)
2 ACCUNET (1H,6H)
3 LONG_DIST. (1H,7H)
4 MEGACOM_800 (1H,2H)
5 MEGACOM (1H,3H)
6 INTERNAT.800 (1H,8H)
7 MULTIQUEST (1H,10H)
8 OPERATOR (0H,5H)
9 DEF.IEC_OPER (0H,6H)
10 to 255 BLANK ()
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NSF ROOT,5,1
26-7
ISDN PI Reference Manual
26-8
PI Reference Manual ISDN
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-9
ISDN PI Reference Manual
TYPE_OF_NUMBER I (International),
N (National),
S (Subscriber),
U (Unknown, The digit format is decided by the CO)
This parameter is sent by the Coral to the public network on outgoing calls. It
indicates the format of the dialed number to the public network.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NPID Private:
TYPE_OF_NUMBER U (Unknown)
R1 (Regional-1)
L (Local)
Alternate Line ID ROOT,5,3
P (PISN)
R2 (Regional-2)
Defines the information sent by the Coral to the private Network, defining the
format of the dialed number for the private Network.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-10
PI Reference Manual ISDN
1 0 PRI-23
1 0 PRI-30
4 0-3 4TBR
8 0-7 8TBR
* The enabling of the second trunk circuit (DSL#1) on the 2DT card requires authorization,
see 2DT WITH 2 CKTS on page 3-18.
When entering this mode, the PI prompts the user to enter “0” for access by
signaling channel or “1” for access by physical card location.
In both Physical Card Location and Signaling Channel, direct access is possible by
entering either the option name or the field number enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
Details for the ISDN Card Signaling are found on the following pages:
26-11
ISDN PI Reference Manual
26-12
PI Reference Manual ISDN
26-13
ISDN PI Reference Manual
MAIN_
CHANNEL:
SHELF [2] (Display Only)
Displays the physical shelf location of the card.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-14
PI Reference Manual ISDN
! WARNING:
Upon update, the BRI or PRI card is restarted and all calls are lost!
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-15
ISDN PI Reference Manual
LOCAL_RINGBACK Yes/No
[11] PRI only
This option appears only when N (Network) is defined for PROTOCOL SIDE
and PROTOCOL ID is not defined as QSIG.
Defines the source of ringback tone sent to the caller making a call over a PRI
trunk.
When set to Yes, the local Coral system sends the ringback tone to the calling party.
Otherwise, when set to No, the “far” PABX sends the ringback tone.
This parameter should be set to Yes when the “far” PABX does not support the
same ringback tone as wanted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SENDING_COMPLETE Yes/No
for Outgoing Calls (No:CC0)
[13]
Not relevant for CC0 systems (North America).
Defines whether or not a “sending complete” information element should be added
to the Called Party number, indicating that the entire number was transmitted.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SENDING_COMPLETE Yes/No
for Enblock Incoming
calls [14]
Not relevant for CC0 systems (North America).
Enter Y if all incoming Network calls are known to be enblock calls. Enter N if
overlap as well as enblock Network calls are expected.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-16
PI Reference Manual ISDN
CONNECT_WHEN_ Yes/No
DEST_IS_NOT_ISDN
[16]
Overlap Only, for Italian Market
This parameter is used in situations when an overlap call is sent to a system
(e.g., Interactive Voice Response - IVR) that sends back an ISDN progress
message: Dest_is_not_ISDN.
When set to Yes, this parameter enables the Coral to switch to a connect state and
start sending DTMF tones to the terminating device or terminating non-ISDN
switch after receiving the Dest_is_not_ISDN message.
Set this parameter to Yes in order to send DTMF tones before connect (after
incoming digits have been received) when a PRI Progress message dest_is_
not_ISDN is received from the far side (CO or PBX).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DTMF_WHEN_CALL_ Yes/No
PROC (OVERLAP
ONLY) [17]
Overlap Only, for Italian Market
MLPP can only be activated over BRI, PRI (AT&T protocol only) or UGW
trunks.
Defines this D_Channel as one that supports MLPP when set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-17
ISDN PI Reference Manual
TBCT_FEATURE_ Yes/No
ENABLED [19]
TBCT requires the following ISDN Card Signalling (DTDB, 4) settings:
• PROTOCOL_ID [6] (page 26-15) is set to AT&T
• PROTOCOL_SIDE [8] (PRI[9]) (page 26-15) is set to User
Define this PRI channel as TBCT feature enabled (Yes).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TBCT_SERVICE_ 0..255
PROVIDER_GROUP
Define the SERVICE PROVIDER GROUP number for this PRI channel.
[20]
The TBCT feature can only be activated among PRI channels sharing the same
TBCT Service Provider Group number.
TBCT transfers are allowed only between callers of the same TBCT groups.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Set this parameter to Yes in order to block the IN_BAND Progress indicator from
being sent to the CO when it is not compatible with the CO’s call progress.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-18
PI Reference Manual ISDN
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SYNC_CHANNEL Yes/No
[27] BRI only
Enter Yes only when PERMANENT_ACTIVE_CHANNEL [28] BRI only below
is set to Yes.
This parameter is relevant when the BRI card is selected as the PRM or SEC clock
reference source (see T1, PRI, TBR, 30T/x, 2DT Synchronization beginning on
page 8-98). In such a case, one of the 4 or 8 channels (4TBR or 8TBR) is
automatically selected by the system for synchronization source.
PERMANENT_ Yes/No
ACTIVE_CHANNEL
This parameter is determined according to an agreement or a request of the CO at
[28]
the far side.
BRI only
N: The line is silent and inactive (data does not flow through the line and it can not
operate as a synchronization clock source) when no conversation is taking place.
Y: The line is permanently active even if there is no conversation taking place.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-19
ISDN PI Reference Manual
EXTERNAL_LINE_IS_ Yes/No
PHYSICALLY_
Identifies the BRI port as active and connected to a physical line (Y). When the port
CONNECTED [33]
is not connected to a line, enter N to enable a reset option for the BRI line. When
ISDN Card Signaling: Card location DTDB,4,1
BRI only N is defined, the BRI line is disabled and the channel LED is lit.
26-20
PI Reference Manual ISDN
QSIG The following five parameters appear only if PROTOCOL_ID [6] above is set to
Definitions: QSIG. The following requirements must be met when defining these parameters:
• PRI/BRI card version 6.0 or higher is required between all nodes.
• The next five parameters must be defined identically in all the network nodes.
• Network PABXs with Coral software versions lower than 10 (and PRI/BRI
card versions lower than 6.0) do not support CISC (Call Independent
Signalling Connection). Therefore, Network Camp-On, Follow-Me and Divert
features cannot work between the nodes or via a node with a PRI/BRI card
version lower than 6.0.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-21
ISDN PI Reference Manual
TRANSIT_COUNTER_ ECMA/ISO
CODING [37]
A Transit PBX sends the call information in code form. This parameter defines
which QSIG code form is implemented. Enter ISO when an international standard
is needed. Enter ECMA for older European standards. ECMA standards have been
altered to conform to ISO standards and is thereby used in most cases.
The technician should match the QSIG code form to the code form used in the
system that the Coral is connected to.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! WARNING:
Upon update, the BRI or PRI card is restarted and all calls are lost!
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-22
PI Reference Manual ISDN
SPID 1 [43]
fSPID 2 [45]
SPID 3 [47]
SPID 4 [49]
SPID 5 [51]
SPID 6 [53]
26-23
ISDN PI Reference Manual
DN1 [44]
DN2 [46]
DN3 [48]
DN4 [50]
DN5 [52]
DN6 [54]
SEND_TO_CARD? Yes/No
[58]
Transfers the updated card database immediately to the PRI or BRI card.
Regardless of entry, routine diagnostics periodically resend the card database to the
cards, including all the updates made. This parameter is used only in the Update
mode.
! SEND_TO_CARD causes:
ISDN Card Signaling: Card location DTDB,4,1
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
26-24
27 MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
This chapter describes the Management Application Platform (MAP) and the
various CoraLINK database options as relates to the MAP, CLA or CLA-ATS card
on the following pages:
MAP............................................................................................................27-2
CoraLINK ...................................................................................................27-8
CoraLINK: CLA_STATUS ...................................................................... 27-11
CoraLINK: CLA_SIZES ..........................................................................27-15
CoraLINK: WAIT_QUE...........................................................................27-16
27-1
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
MAP ç ROOT,3,10
The Management Applications Platform (MAP) serves as a hardware/software
platform for application management and IP connectivity. It allows managing the
different external software applications that interact with the Coral, as well as some
of its internal card software, via a single platform. It, thereby, serves as a hardware
platform for application management as well as IP connectivity. The allotted
managed software differs based on the Coral system.
FlexiCom 400, 5000; IPx 500, 800, 3000; and CDRS 200E systems:
For these Coral systems, the MAP software is stored on a daughter board on
the Coral Main Control Processor cards (MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP and
MCP-IPx) called the MAP. This is an optional system card that may be
purchased separately from the Coral system.
Only one (single card) of the following: MAP card or CLA cards may be
MAP ROOT,3,10
installed on:
MEX-IP2 card for Coral FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller), 5000 and
IPx 800, 3000.
Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000 systems with Duplicated Common
MCP-IPx2 card for Coral IPx 500; and CDRS 200E
Control require duplicated MAP cards. The CLA and MAP card can be
mixed in a Duplicated Common Control system.
27-2
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
IPx 500, 800, 3000 IP: General branch, see MAP: (page 29-78)
FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller), 5000 parameters.
CDRS 200E • The CLA adopts its IP address from
the MAP address as well.
The following table describes which software applications are managed by the
MAP software per different Coral system.
CNCM
(Coral software
version
15.5 or higher)
CoraLINK (CLA)
UGW
MAP ROOT,3,10
For more information about the MAP, refer to the following manuals:
• Chapter 6 in the “Coral Control Cards (for FlexiCom 200, 300, 400, 5000;
IPx 500, 800, 3000; and CDRS 200E systems) Installation Manual”
27-3
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
MAP branch:
The MAP serves as a software platform for application management and IP
connectivity.
This branch is used to view the Management Application Platform (MAP) and
CNCM software status, as well as allows the technician to reset the MAP software.
If the MAP software is reset, all applications running from this platform
are also reset.
The MAP supports software applications as defined in Table 1 on page 27-3.
The MAP serves as a software platform for the CNCM, CLA and CUGW. These
items share the same IP addresses.
When a MAP card is not installed (or an old CLA or FCLA card is
installed), than the following two parametrs (MAP Card and CNCM) will
show Inactive.
IP connectivity for the following PI port definitions is available when the CNCM
value is Active:
27-4
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
The Default TCP Port numbers can be changed in the MAP application
software.:
CHARGE_DEST SMDR Control 11002 Identifies the terminal port to which selected SMDR charge
printouts are sent, when requested by attendant (using feature
[15] (page 14-7) (Route: SMDR,0) codes #1972, #1978).
CALL TRACE Call Trace 11003 Determines the output terminal destination for printing the
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) reports. Station/Attendant reports
TERMINAL (page 1 Terminal (Route: are sent by dialing the appropriate print code (#1741- Station
7-10) Root,3,6) reports, #1743-Attendant reports). An example of a typical
Call Trace Report is shown on page 17-10.
CFM NA 11005 CFM IP Port - used to link between CFM and Coral.
CFM (Coral Fault Manager) redundancy is enabled by
MAP ROOT,3,10
allowing alarm messages to be sent to two different TCP/IP IP
socket destinations.
TRAFFIC_ CVT Terminal Dest 11006 Traffic IP Port - determines the output terminal destination for
the Traffic report. CoralVIEW Traffic (CVT) Terminal
TERM# (page 17-9)
27-5
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
FROM/TO TERM Terminal Setup 11010 Determines the Program Interface (PI) terminal number.
# (page 17-22) (Route: TERM,0) Coral Database Binary Backup and ASCII are NOT supported
via MAP card.
PI, Room Status (Canned Messages) and CVD IP
MAP ROOT,3,10
CFM KA IP 11012 Used for keep alive between CFM and Coral.
Port
The MAP card does not support Initialization messages, GP messages and
other online Alarm messages, when used to communicate with the PI
(Program Interface) over IP.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
27-6
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
MAP ROOT,3,10
27-7
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
CoraLINK ç ROOT,7
The CoraLINK is a computer link to the Coral system used to connect and manage
a Coral system from the CoraLINK computer.
CoraLINK is implemented by installing an Adapter Card MAP, CLA, or
CLA-ATS. The CoraLINK Adapter is used for COMPOSIT and FlexCT CTI
(Computer Telephone Interface) applications.
In the Coral IPx systems the CoraLINK is implemented by software embedded
on the MCB Office card.
The CoraLINK Adapter appears in various configurations:
• MAP
• CoraLINK in IPx Office via embedded MAP
• CLA 386 (10Base-2 via Coax) [this type has been discontinued]
• CLA 486 (10Base-T via RJ-45) [this type has been discontinued]
• CLA 686 (100Base-T via RJ-45) with a Compact Flash memory card [this type
has been discontinued]
• CLA-ATS (10/100Base-T via RJ-45) with a Compact Flash memory card
The CLA/CLA-ATS card incorporates the application processor and Ethernet
10/100Base-T interface circuitry for the CoraLINK computer-telephony
integration (CTI) link. CoraLINK uses TCP/IP protocol, complies with the ECMA
179 and 180 standards. CoraLINK also supports the Novell TSAPI protocol, the
Intel Dialogic CT-connect, and IBM’s Callpath.
The CLA is installed in “piggy-back” fashion as a baby card on the MEX-IP2,
MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP, MCP-IPx, MCP-IPsl.
The CLA-ATS card is used in Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral IPx 4000 systems.
Dual Systems: In Coral FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000 redundancy control systems,
two identical CLA-ATS cards are provided, one for each of the control system sets.
Each CLA-ATS card is capable of providing full CTI link functions operating as
CoraLINK ROOT,7
Although the Coral FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000 are Hot Standby
systems, the twin CLA-ATS cards operate in a Standby/Duplicated mode,
not offering a Hot Standby option. Therefore, during a common control
swap, the CTI application restarts (thereby possibly disconnecting active
calls and functions).
Also, during the control swap, if a CLA-ATS card fails, the CTI application
fails and does not invoke a control changeover.
Coral FlexiCom 6000/R and IPx 4000 systems equipped with CLA-ATS require a
4XMM or 8XMM card installed on the 32GC cards.
27-8
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
FlexiCom 200, 300, 400, 5000; IPx 500, 800, 3000; and CDRS 200E systems:
For these Coral systems, the CoraLINK software is stored on a daughter board
on the Coral Main Control Processor cards (MEX-IP2 and MCP-IPx2) called
the CLA. This is an optional system card that may be purchased separately
from the Coral system.
Only one (single card) of the following: MAP card or CLA cards may be
installed on:
MEX-IP2 card for Coral FlexiCom 300,400,5000 and IPx 800, 3000.
MCP-IPx2 card for Coral FlexiCom 200, IPx 500, CDRS 200 and
Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000 systems with Duplicated Common
CDRS 200E
Control require duplicated CoraLINK platforms. The CLA and MAP card
can be mixed in a Duplicated Common Control system.
CoraLINK ROOT,7
communication applications.
The Coral system with CoraLINK can use caller number identification to tailor
greeting and instruction announcements played by the Coral system to each caller.
The computer can then establish connections for, or release the caller as determined
from the caller’s dialed responses.
The CoraLINK can operate in any computer environment including the Novell
NetWare LAN with Novell’s NetWare Telephony Services.
For more information about the CLA, CLA-ATS and CoraLINK, refer to the
following manuals:
27-9
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
CLA-ATS: Chapter 8 in the “Coral FlexiCom 6000 and IPx 4000 Installation
Manual”
Minimum requirements for defining CoraLINK:
1. Define a maximum for WAIT_QUE and CALL_SERVICES in SIZ (see page
4-18).
2. Define dial numbers in the General NPL and choose type 38-WAIT_QUE.
This chapter describes the various CoraLINK database options as relates to the
CLA or CLA-ATS card and to the IPx Office on the following pages:
CoraLINK: CLA_STATUS ...................................................................... 27-11
CoraLINK: CLA_SIZES ..........................................................................27-15
CoraLINK: WAIT_QUE...........................................................................27-16
CoraLINK ROOT,7
27-10
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
Yes Not Allowed in The CLA card is installed The system must
Standby on the Standby side, but return to proper Hot
cannot function in this Standby functioning
mode. Only the CLA on before the CLA on the
the Active side is non Active side can
functioning. function properly.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
27-11
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
RAM FAILURE The RAM in the CLA Replace the CLA card.
is faulty.
NO
AUTHORIZATION authorization to (see page 3-21) 40-CoraLINK
activate the CLA
software, but the card
is installed.
27-12
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
The IP address is not relevant for IPx Office systems because the MAP address
(and the CLA address) for IPx Office systems is the CUGW address. The MAP
software status information can be viewed in the CNCM (page 27-5) branch
(Root, 3, 10).
Beware that updating the CLA IP addresses in Coral IPx Office systems based on
MAP software causes an update to the CUGW IP addresses. The following
warning is issued:
This is a CLA Application on IPx Office system.
Update IP parameters via UGW branch.
Defines the IP address for this Coral in the network. The address can be acquired
only from the network administrator.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! All computers on a physical network should use the same subnet mask
and network ID, otherwise, addressing and routing problems can occur.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
LAST_CLA_INIT [6]
Military or US time and date, see DATE_MODE (Eu/USA) [16] (page 6-24)
Default: ------
Displays the hour and date of the last CLA Initialization process.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
27-13
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
UPDATE? Yes/No
*WARNING: UPDATE WILL CAUSE A CARD INIT!*
UPDATE (Y/N)?
CoraLINK: CLA_STATUS ROOT,7,0
27-14
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
! The sizes listed in this database are established by program default and
can be changed.
Changes may affect other sizes or operational relationships within the
system.
MONITORED 0..2000;
DEVICES 0..1000..2000: FlexiCom 200
Defines the maximum number of devices that can simultaneously be monitored by
the CoraLINK application.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
27-15
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
FROM/TO WAIT_QUE Any valid system Wait_Que dial number as defined in the General
# Numbering Plan, WAIT_QUE [38] (page 5-45);
All
Enter the range of required WAIT_QUE dial numbers. FROM the lowest dial number
TO the highest dial number required.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME:
SHORT [0] 1..5 printable ASCII characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Defines the WAIT_QUE short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) which
appears on keysets equipped with a display. A WAIT_QUE name defined as BLANK
does not appear on the keyset display; the dial number is shown instead. See
General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
does not appear on the keyset display; the dial number is shown instead. See
General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
27-16
PI Reference Manual MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™
RETAIN_WAIT_Q_ Yes/No
MUSIC_SOURCE [7]
This parameter is only relevant when MUSIC/TONE [5] above, is set to
Music.
Defines whether the Music Source that is sounded when a call entering the Wait
27-17
MAP, CLA and CoraLINK™ PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
WITHOUT_ALERT_ Yes/No
ON_ISDN [11]
ISDN Trunks only
Defines whether or not the Coral sends an Alert signal to the PSTN for incoming
calls. The Alert signal indicates a change in the call status (from incoming to
ringing).
This parameter is relevant only if WITH_ANSWER [10] (page 27-18) above is set to
No. (When set to Yes, the Coral sends both Alert and Answer signaling to the
PSTN.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
27-18
28 ISDNet™
This chapter is used to manage Coral Private Networks and includes the following
branches:
System Features - Network ........................................................................28-3
Node NPL .................................................................................................28-10
Node Content............................................................................................28-12
Special Numbering Plan Functions ..........................................................28-15
Coral Networks are composed of one or more Coral Systems, where each system
is described as a Network Node.
Node Numbering PLan (NPL) includes a node numbering plan unique to the
network nodes and is not part of the system General Numbering Plan.
Node Content defines all the node specifics, including Network routing and
filter information that relate to the local node in each network.
28-1
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
28-2
PI Reference Manual ISDNet™
Network defines parameters for systems defined with networks. These parameters
must be defined identically at each node.
The following terms are used to define Coral QSIG Networks:
PINX: Private Integrated Services Network Exchange
PISN: Private Integrated Services Network
Cooperating PINX: the end PINX that establishes the new path
Requesting PINX: the end PINX that requests Path Replacement from the
cooperating PINX
Transferring PINX: the PINX that initiates Call Transfer
INITIATE_TRANSFER_ Yes/No
BY_REROUTING [1]
Defines, system-wide, whether or not the Coral attempts to reroute calls in a
network.
When set to Yes, the Coral attempts to reroute the call, during call setup, using the
fewest trunks possible.
Normally, if a user from Node A calls a user from Node B and the call is transferred
to Node C, all trunks involved in establishing the communication remain busy until
the call is disconnected.
If the Coral is defined to reroute the call by setting this parameter to Yes, then all
the trunks used for the call connection are dropped and a new direct connection is
made between the user in Node A and the user in Node C. This facility helps avoid
congestion and maximizes the efficiency of the network and halves the rental costs.
28-3
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
Other types of transferred connections between nodes, also try to reconnect the end
users in the shortest, most direct available path when this parameter is set to Yes.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ALLOW_TRANSFER_ Yes/No
BY_REROUTING_TO_
Defines, system-wide, whether network calls to Voicemail applications are allowed
VM [2]
to be rerouted (i.e. when transferred, to reroute and drop extra adjoining trunk
lines).
Set this parameter to No, if DTMF digits must be sent to the connected Voicemail
application. DTMF digits are lost when rerouting.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ALLOW_TRANSFER_ Yes/No
BY_REROUTING_VIA_
The re-route feature works as follows: Station A, connected locally, calls station B,
NET_IP [3]
which is connected to a remote PBX. Station B transfers the call to station C, which
is connected to the same Coral system as station A. The re-route feature establishes
a direct link between A and C, cancelling the need for the remote link to B. This
option is transparent to the user and all the IP channels used for the call connection
are dropped and a new direct connection is made between Station A and station C.
Y (Yes) N (No)
B
B
Remote node
Remote node
System Features - Network SFE,11 [0,0,4,1,11]
QSIG QSIG
IP WAN over IP IP WAN
over IP
Local node
Local node
A
C A C
28-4
PI Reference Manual ISDNet™
This parameter defines whether the Path Replacement (PR) feature can be
activated between Coral PINXs. Path Replacement is a standard QSIG feature
which allows replacing the path of an established Network call with a more
efficient or economical path when the previous path was set up using the Network
28-5
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
The PR is activated only after the DELAY_BEFORE_PR [6] (page 6-2) time out
period defined in Feature Timers has expired.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NETWORKING_WIDE_ Yes/No;
VFAC [10] CC0 (USA): Yes/No
This parameter enables the account code to be displayed on the SMDR record of
the gateway node while using VFAC when a caller is connected to the gateway via
more than one node.
When this parameter is set to Yes from the caller’s node, the account code is
recorded and displayed on the gateway node.
When this parameter is set to No from the caller’s node, the account code is
recorded and displayed on the caller’s node.
Scenario: The network consists of nodes X and Y. Node X is the caller’s node, and
Y is the gateway node that routes all external calls.
1. A caller from node X places an external call, cleared with an account code
while using VFAC.
System Features - Network SFE,11 [0,0,4,1,11]
When this parameter is set to Yes, the account code is displayed when the
SMDR is connected to node X and node Y.
When this parameter is set to No, the account code is displayed only when the
SMDR is connected to node X.
28-6
PI Reference Manual ISDNet™
Y X
PSTN
NETWORKING_WIDE_ VFAC = No
Y X
PSTN
Account Code
displayed
SMDR Device
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
28-7
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
TBCT_TO_B_ Yes/No
CHANNEL_
Set this parameter to Yes in order to enable the TBCT (Two PRI B-channel
TRANSFER_
Transfer) for this Coral system.
ALLOWED [13]
The TBCT feature saves PRI resources. It enables the system to automatically
connect two different PRI calls via the PSTN and drop the PRI trunks. The two PRI
calls must be in answer state and are NOT involved in any of the following
features: IRSS, FlexiCall, Silent monitor, Call duration limit, Series or Conference.
User A
TBCT = No Coral system
PRI 1
Two Coral PRI channels Busy
are in used to transfer a PSTN
call from the Coral to an PRI 2
external station. Busy
User B
Connection via
the CORAL
User A
Coral system
TBCT = Yes PRI 1
Idle
Coral PRI channels are
PSTN
freed for more calls. (with TBCT)
PRI 2
Transferred call Idle
User B
progresses as before.
Connection via
the PSTN
station using another PRI channel engages two Coral PRI channels towards
the PSTN.
The TBCT allows the call to continue being conducted via the PSTN while
dropping both Coral PRI channels after the transfer, thereby limiting the
maximum number of channels used per PRI transfer by the Coral.
Billing for the two original calls continues in the same manner as if the
transfer had not occurred. The system allows the field service engineer to
reserve a specified number of SMDR records for call billing.
The TBCT scenario is possible only when the following PRI signaling
parameters for both PRI channels (DTDB,4 branch) are set as follows:
• PROTOCOL_ID [6] (page 26-15) is set to AT&T
• PROTOCOL_SIDE [8] (PRI[9]) (page 26-15) is set to User
• TBCT_FEATURE_ENABLED [19] (page 26-18) is set to Yes
• TBCT_SERVICE_PROVIDER_GROUP [20] (page 26-18) is set as required
28-8
PI Reference Manual ISDNet™
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ENABLE_TBCT_ Yes/No
WITHOUT_SMDR [14]
Set this parameter to Yes in order to enable the TBCT feature when no SMDR
records are available (i.e., TBCT_SMDR (page 4-16) in SIZES is set to 0, or all the
SMDR records are currently in use).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
28-9
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
The Coral Network consists of one or more Coral systems. Each Coral system is
defined as a Network Node with a related node number, node name and routing
information.
Node NPL is a numbering plan unique to the Network Nodes. It is operated
similarly to the General Numbering Plan but deals with manipulating the Network
Nodes and NOT their dial numbers. The dial numbers are manipulated as usual in
the General Numbering Plan.
The Network node number is limited to eight digits and is not displayed on the
keyset.
The following option menu is available for the Node numbering plan:
removed.
28-10
PI Reference Manual ISDNet™
0 - Update
FROM/TO OLD All defined Network Nodes
NODE#
Enter the range of existing node numbers to be updated FROM the lowest node
number TO the highest node number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1 - Display
FROM/TO NODE # All defined Network Nodes
Enter the range of node numbers to be displayed FROM the lowest node number.
TO the highest node number.
The range of node numbers are displayed against their related index numbers.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
2 - Add
FROM/TO NEW Any number (max: 8 digits)
NODE#
Enter the range of node numbers to be added FROM the lowest node number TO
the highest node number.
Before adding new Nodes, ensure that NET_NODES (page 4-20) is defined.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
3 - Remove
FROM/TO NODE # All Network Nodes
Enter the range of node numbers to be removed FROM the lowest node number TO
the highest node number.
Before removing a node, all the dial numbers and other information in the
numbering plan relating to the node must first be erased.
A warning message appears confirming the delete operation.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
28-11
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
Node Content defines all information relating to each network node including
routing information as well as filter information relating to the local node.
Network Dial Numbers are defined in each node with a reference to the related
node. When manipulating Network dial numbers at a node, that node is considered
the local node in relation to the other nodes. For routing calls to other nodes within
the Network, the node must define a routing mechanism consisting of Routing
Accesses, Route Elements, Dial Services, etc.
Dialing within the network can consist of a uniform or a non-uniform dialing plan
method.
A Uniform Dialing Plan provides a unique numbering plan throughout the
Network. Thus, accessing extensions within a node is exactly the same as accessing
extensions within the Network (i.e. at other nodes). The network numbers are
defined in the numbering plan of each node and no filtering is performed on the
calling or called number. Network dial numbers in this plan are usually 4 or 5
digits.
When a Non-Uniform Dialing Plan is employed, accessing extensions within the
Network is different than accessing extensions within the local node. Within the
node, the extension is usually a shortened version of the full dial number. The dial
number is usually changed by filtering: adding, removing or changing the dial
number digits. Network dial numbers in a Non-UDP plan are usually 7 digits.
28-12
PI Reference Manual ISDNet™
ROUTING_ACCESS # Any valid Routing Access dial number (see ROUTING_ACC [37] (page 5-44));
First Routing Access in Numbering Plan
ROUT_ELEMENT # 0.. the number of ROUT ELEMENTS as defined in Sizes, (see Chapter 4)
All
If the node is defined as a Local network node, the following filter parameters
appear:
Filter parameters are used only for systems with non-UDP dialing systems.
28-13
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
This filter produces a dial number of up to eight digits which is directed to a local
destination (e.g. station, hunt group, boss group, public library, etc.).
NODE ID# Range: Any available Coral NPL number; R (Remove for None)
Default: None (----)
Define a single and unique Node ID number for this Node. The Node ID# is used
to implement the PATH REPLACEMENT [7] (page 28-5) feature. If it is not defined,
Path Replacement cannot be implemented, an alarm is issued, and the following
Node Content NODE,1 [ROOT,8,0,1]
message is displayed:
Warning: Advanced Features might misbehave!
A FEATURE index number (219) is automatically assigned in the NPL for this
NODE ID#, but it cannot be manipulated by the NPL. It can only be removed and
then reassigned a unused NPL dial number.
In the NPL for the other Network Corals, this NODE ID# should be defined as a
NETWORK [39] (page 5-45) dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
28-14
PI Reference Manual ISDNet™
This branch serves as an additional tool for accessing network information from the
system General Numbering Plan thus enhancing the user interface.
Password Level 2 is needed in order to perform changes.
0-DISPLAY The user can display node dial numbers by entering a range of network nodes. Each
(BY NODE) node is then listed against its related dial numbers.
1-MOVE Users, within the NPL at their Node, can move network dial numbers from one
NETWORK# network node to another node by using this option. The dial numbers, however,
BETWEEN remain exactly the same.
NODES
For Example: The dial numbers 530-4647 through 530-4649 are to be moved from
node XYZ to node 701.
TO DIAL # 5304649
28-15
ISDNet™ PI Reference Manual
2-REMOVE This option removes node numbers from the General Numbering Plan.
NODE
NUMBERS Removing the node numbers removes all the dial numbers associated with
the node.
28-16
29 IP — Voice Over IP
This chapter is used to manage the Coral VoIP (Voice calls over Internet Protocol)
details and includes the following branches:
UGW (Universal Gate Way) ......................................................................29-7
UGW: Default Configuration.............................................................. 29-9
UGW: Current Configuration ........................................................... 29-13
IP Ports .....................................................................................................29-27
IP_Keyset .......................................................................................... 29-28
IP_SLT............................................................................................... 29-36
IP_LGS.............................................................................................. 29-38
IP_Net................................................................................................ 29-40
29-1
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
See the Coral Voice over IP Installation Manual for a description of the IP
system installation procedure as well as IP Keyset installation and initialization
instructions.
The Coral VoIP Advanced Communications Server provides an integrated IP
network while still maintaining use of the existing telecommunications network.
IP technology is incorporated by using standard Coral stations (keysets, SLTs and
Wireless) along with the latest IP station sets, such as the FlexSet-IP 280S, T207M,
T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, P-Seies
(such as: P-335, P-450), T322, T328, FlexIP SoftPhone (FLIPS), SeaBeam
softphone,
or off-the-shelf third-party SIP units.
VoIP Glossary:
Bridge Device- A device interconnecting local area networks at the OSI Data Link
Layer, filtering and forwarding frames according to media access control (MAC)
addresses. (1) A device that connects two LANs. The LAN being connected can be
alike or dissimilar. (2) A network device that selectively determines the appropriate
segment to which it should send the signal. (3) The bridge performs two main
functions: Forwarding & Filtering.
Broadband - Wideband technology capable of supporting voice, video and data,
possibly using multiple channels.
DTE - Data Terminal Equipment, includes: monitor, computer, printer, server, etc.
DCE - Data Communication Equipment, includes: router, bridge, etc.
Enterprise Network - An information infrastructure, often combining private and
public facilities, to cover all of the locations operated by a single company or
corporate enterprise with a single communications fabric.
Ethernet - A local area network that connects devices like computers, printers and
terminals. Ethernet operates over twisted-pair or coaxial cable at speeds of 10 or
100 Mbps.
H.323 - A set of International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standards that
define a framework for the transmission of real-time voice communications by
means of IP-based packet-switched networks. Created in response to customers
who needed to use their existing IP networks to support voice communications, the
H.323 standards define a gateway and a gatekeeper.
Gateway - Gateways are points of entrance and exit from a communications
network. Viewed as a physical entity, a gateway is that node that translates between
two otherwise incompatible networks or network segments. Gateways perform
code and protocol conversion to facilitate traffic between data highways of
differing architecture. Gateway is a device that performs an application layer
conversion of information from one protocol stack to another. An older term
referring to a routing device.
29-2
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
For example: A Coral system requiring a connection to the Internet (TCP/IP). The
PCM information is first sent to the PUGW card (and old discontinued cards: UGW
and UGW-E) which converts the information to TCP/IP.
Internet Address - Also known as an IP address. This is a 32-bit
hardware-independent address assigned to hosts using the TCP/IP protocol suite.
IP (Internet Protocol) - A networking protocol for providing a connection less
service to the higher transport protocol. It is responsible for discovering and
maintaining topology information and for routing packets across homogeneous
networks. Combined with TCP, it is commonly known as the TCP/IP platform.
IP Address - An address that uniquely identifies each host on a network or
Internet. A unique IP address is required for each host and network component that
communicates using TCP/IP. Each IP address includes a Network ID and a Host
ID. Network ID - identifies the systems that are located on the same physical
network bounded by IP routers. Host ID - identifies the host within the network.
Example: 131.107.3.24
Addressing Guidelines:
• Network ID cannot be 127. - 127 is reserved for loopback functions.
• Network ID and host ID cannot be 255 (all bits set to 1). 255 is a broadcast
address.
• Network ID and host ID cannot be 0 (all bits set to 0). 0 means “this network
only”.
• Host ID must be unique to the network.
IP Socket: An IP Socket is comprised of an IP address followed by a colon and an
IP Port number. A port is a 16-bit data value.
IP Telephony - The transmission of voice over an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
Also called Voice over IP (VoIP), IP telephony allows users to make phone calls
over the Internet, intranets, or private LANs and WANs that use the TCP/IP
protocol.
LAN (Local Area Network) - A network that interconnects devices over a
geographically small area, typically in one building or part of a building. The most
popular LAN type is Ethernet, a 10 Mbps standard that works with 10BaseT,
10Base2, or 10Base5 cables.
MAC (Media Access Control) - A protocol that defines the way workstations gain
access to transmission media, most widely used in reference to LANs. For IEEE
LANs, the MAC layer is the lower sub-layer of the data link layer protocol.
Primary functions: (1) Controls access to shared media. (2) Handles the network
topologies. (3) MAC address (Physical Address).
The MAC address is a 6 byte address coded on every: network adapter card (NIC),
FlexSet-IP 280S, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, etc.
29-3
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
MGCP - Protocol used to transfer media packets across the LAN or WAN. The
FlexSet-IP 280S, T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL are MGCP based
terminals.
Network - (1) A communication network is a collection of communication
channels. (2) An interconnected group of nodes. (3) A series of points, nodes, or
stations connected by communications channels; the collection of equipment
through which connections are made between data stations
Network Layer - A layer in the OSI reference model. The network layer provides
address resolution and routing protocols. Address resolution enables the network
layer to determine a unique network address for a node. Routing protocols allow
data to flow between networks and reach their proper destination. Examples of
network layer protocols are Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Datagram
Delivery Protocol (DDP), Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Interior
Gateway Protocol (IGP), Internet Protocol (IP), Internetwork Packet Exchange
(IPX) and Packet Layer Protocol (PLP).
NMS (Network Management System) - The system that controls network
configuration, fault and performance management, and diagnostic analysis
Node - A point of interconnection to a network
Peer-to-Peer Connections - A direct connection between two IP hosts (e.g.,
FlexSet-IP 280S to FlexSet-IP 280S) over the LAN, involving no intervention from
the Media Gateway Module.
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) - Provides a standard means of encapsulating data
packets sent over a single-channel WAN link. It is the standard WAN encapsulation
protocol for the inter-operability of bridges and routers over synchronous or
asynchronous circuits
RJ-45 Connector (Registered Jack-45) - A telephone connector that
accommodates up to eight wires. RJ-45 plugs and sockets are used in Ethernet and
Token Ring devices.
Router Device - An interconnection device that connects individual LANs. Unlike
bridges, which logically connect at OSI layer 2, routers provide logical paths at OSI
layer 3. Like bridges, remote sites can be connected using routers over dedicated
or switched lines to create WANs. Routers are responsible for tracking which
networks, or segments exist and how they can be reached. T router determines the
optimal path along which network traffic should be forwarded.
Routing - The process of selecting the most efficient circuit path for a message.
The process of finding a path for each packet, to a destination host.
Switch Device- A device interconnecting local area networks at the OSI Data Link
Layer. (1) A connectivity device that can perform bridging functions faster than a
bridge. (2) Increases usable bandwidth. (3) Overcomes traffic saturation problems.
SIP - Session Initiation Protocol - Signaling protocol for initiating, managing and
terminating voice and video sessions across packet networks. The P-Seies (such as:
29-4
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
P-335, P-450), T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, T322, T328, SeaBeam are
SIP based terminals.
SIP Trunk - The SIP trunk allows customers to be connected directly to their ITSP
through pure IP connection. QoS is maintained (comply with the Service Level
Agreement) on one hand, and cost can be reduced on the other hand.
Subnet Mask - A method for determining the network ID in the IP address. A 32
bit value that is used to distinguish the network ID from the host ID. All bits that
correspond to the Network ID are set to 1(255). All bits that correspond to the Host
ID are set to 0.
Example:
• IP address: 131.107.16.200
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
• Network ID: 131.107.y.z
• Host ID: w.x.16.200
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) - A protocol
platform, known also as the Internet protocol suite, that combines both TCP and IP.
Widely used applications, such as Telnet, FTP and SMTP, interface to TCP/IP.
T.38 - The Coral provides the ability to handle Real-Time-Fax over IP using the
T.38 ITU standard in conjunction with a negotiation process through the Session
Description Protocol. This allows for reducing the required bandwidth, as well as
overcoming network impairments such as Packet-loss and Latency. The Coral
supports full Unified Messaging in conjunction with the SeaMail application to
provide Fax-to-email. G3 fax machines send the commands in compliance with the
T.30 standard to the Coral IPx Office system, which converts or encapsulates the
T.30 messages into T.38 data stream over UDPTL or RTP. These messages are sent
to the SeaMail (for Fax-to-email UM implementation) or to another IP
PBX/third-party gateway that converts it back to TDM-based signals and
terminates the fax on a T.30 device. Real Time Fax over IP utilizing the T.38 can
be sent over SIP Trunk to ITSP or to another IP-PBX of the customer's branch.
TFTP Server (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) - Protocol used when transferring
files over the Internet. This protocol is used to download FlexSet-IP 280S software
versions to the telephone from the internet.
URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) - URI is a compact string of characters used
to identify or name a resource on the Internet. The main purpose of this
identification is to enable interaction with representations of the resource over a
network, typically the World Wide Web, using specific protocols. URIs are defined
in schemes defining a specific syntax and associated protocols.
VoIP (Voice over IP) - Set of facilities for managing the delivery of voice
information using the Internet Protocol (IP). Voice information is sent in digital
form in discrete packets over the Internet instead of in analog form over the public
switched telephone network (PSTN). A major advantage of VoIP is that it avoids
the tolls charged by ordinary telephone service.
29-5
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
VPN (Virtual Private Network) - A restricted network that uses public wires to
connect nodes. A VPN provides a way to encapsulate, or “tunnel”, private data
cheaply, reliably, and securely through a public network, usually the Internet.
WAN (Wide Area Network) - A network that typically spans nationwide
distances and usually utilizes public telephone networks.
Coral VoIP Cards and Units:
MG: Media Gateway card that supports a number of media channels. T.38 Fax
relay is supported by this card. The MG module is a daughter board on the UGW
and UGW-E cards.
MRC: Media Resources Card that provides Media Channels and system resources
(DTR and MFR). The MRC is a daughter board on the PUGW and PUGWipx cards
and on the IPx Office system.
UGW (and UGW-E): Coral Universal Gateway Card used to provide for MGCP
VoIP endpoints in the Coral.
PUGW: Coral Universal Gateway card used to provide for SIP VoIP endpoints as
well as MGCP endpoints in the Coral.
CUGW: Coral Universal Gateway application used to provide for SIP VoIP
endpoints as well as MGCP endpoints in the Coral IPx Office.
Sentinel: Coral Units that provides for remote IP endpoints which enables
endpoint NAT traversal. The IP endpoints are regarded as internal endpoints
(i.e. Coral Stations).
Zone Isolation - Voice firewall capabilities can be created by defining separate
VoIP zones, such as Internet zone and Corporate LAN zone.
29-6
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
The PUGW, UGW-E, UGW, PUGWipx, UGW-Eipx, and UGWipx card can be
installed in any Coral peripheral slot or shared service slot. Since it requires no
input or output cables (i.e. no MDF connections), the manufacturer recommends
installing it in a service slot. RJ-45 connectors enable LAN/Ethernet connections
The PI allows configuring the “UGW” card parameters whether a card is currently
physically installed or not yet installed:
• To define UGW parameters before physically installing a UGW card, enter the
UGW: Default Configuration (page 29-9) branch [UGWC, 0]. The parameter
definitions in this branch will apply to all UGW cards installed in the future.
• After a UGW card is physically installed or defined in Hardware Configuration -
Card List on page 6-76, its parameter definitions must be changed in order to
customize the individual card. These changes are made in the UGW: Current
Configuration (page 29-13)branch [UGWC, 1].
29-7
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
• The PUGW / PUGWipx provides full support and services offered on the
enterprise network for up to 240 Media Channels and IP ports in any physical
location. The Coral system can accept as many PUGW cards as required (up to
60) and provides full support and services for up to 1950 IP ports in a single
system, including:
• IP stations, such as P-Series, T200 series, T300 series, FlexSet-IP 280S,
FlexIP SoftPhone, SeaBeam softphone software, Third-party SIP phones
• Coral SIP and NET_IP trunks
• External telephony gateways for analog SLTs and Loop-Start/Ground-Start
trunks
The maximum number (1950) of IP ports does not include Media Channels and
is also subject to change depending on the combination of peripheral cards
installed. The available number of IP ports and Media Channels in a Coral
system is subject to SAU authorization.
UGW (Universal Gate Way) UGWC or IP,0 [9,0]
29-8
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-9
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
SIGNALLING:
SUBNET_MASK (#/R) Range: Any valid IP address or R (Remove for Blank)
[0] See the IT Manager for legal IP Address
Default: 255.255.255.255
Defines the default Subnet Mask address for all UGW cards in this Coral system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MEDIA:
SUBNET_MASK(#/R) Range: Any valid IP address or R (Remove for Blank)
[2] See the IT Manager for legal IP Address
Default: 255.255.255.255
Defines the default Subnet Mask address for all media modules in this Coral
system.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-10
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
MEDIA_CHANNELS 0..30..24011
[4] see IP_MEDIA_CHANNELS (page 4-28) for maximum size
Defines the default number of the media channels provided for MG modules.
Media channels are needed when one of the calling parties is not an IP host or for
IP calls between different IP zones. Media channels are needed to convert
PCM calls to IP packets. Therefore, all Coral call features based on PCM (such as
IP to IP Zone paging, 3-way conferences and Silent Monitoring) also require the
use of the media channels.
IP Calls with a non-matching CODECs are also routed using the Media channel.
Only when none of the Media Gateway Compression definitions (see MG_
COMPRESSION_CAPABILITY on page 29-20) match the compressions defined for
the IP stations, then the call cannot be completed.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1. The maximum number of endpoints (i.e. total of all entries under CAPACITY) cannot exceed
240.
29-11
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
MRC Resource The following parameters are available only for PUGW/PUGWipx cards and
DB: IPx Office systems and define the MRC resource values.
Set this parameter to one (1) for conferences requiring the Strongest Win
mode.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-12
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-13
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Enter the required range of slot numbers; FROM the lowest slot number TO the
highest slot number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-14
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SIGNALLING: The following note is displayed only for IPx Office systems, indicating that the
UGW address in this parameter may also be used to define the CLA and MAP IP
When no Router/NAT server is used, the Global and Local sockets are
identical.
Enter a valid IP Socket (IP Address and IP Port number).
• The Signalling IP port must be 2427 or 2727.
29-15
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
! Alternatively,
If the IP address is not entered correctly, the IP stations will not be able
to locate the Coral (UGW).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
When no Router/NAT server is used, the Global and Local sockets are
identical.
UGW: Current Configuration UGWC,1 or IP,0,1 [9,0,1]
Defines the static global IP Socket (IP Address and IP Port) for the UGW card
signalling. The global address is used for remote IP endpoints or nodes.
The Socket address is composed of an IP Address and a Signalling IP port number.
To enter the same address as LOCAL_IP_ADDRESS (#/R) above:
• When this parameter is empty (i.e. not previously defined),
after pressing ENTER for the above parameter (LOCAL_IP_ADDRESS),
this parameter is automatically defined with the Local IP Address from above.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-16
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-17
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
QoS: Defines whether QoS protocols are used in the IP Layer and Ethernet Layer for this
UGW card signalling.
! Caution!
Set this parameter to Yes, only when the UGW signalling is routed by
Ethernet switches programmed to use this protocol.
Otherwise, no voice will be heard during calls using this Card.
The 802.1Q/p protocol values are defined system wide in QoS: 802.1Q/p
Value: (page 29-73) in the IP General branch.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
MEDIA:
MAC FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF or R (Remove for Blank)
For MG modules:
UGW: Current Configuration UGWC,1 or IP,0,1 [9,0,1]
Enter the unique MAC (Media Access Control) number for the MG module fitted
on this UGW/UGW-E card. The MAC number can be found on a sticker on the MG
module.
For MRC modules:
This parameter is irrelevant for the MRC modules.
Any value can be entered in this parameter or the parameter may be left blank. The
entered value is saved in the PI regardless of the true MAC address.
In order to view the true MAC address for any MRC, browse to its PUGW address
via any Internet Browser. The MRC MAC address can also be found on the inside
of the Coral IPx Office motherboard.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-18
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
QoS: Defines whether QoS protocols are used in the IP Layer and Ethernet Layer for this
media module.
29-19
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Security Type:
DES Yes/No (Display Only)
Displays whether this media module uses DES encryption for secured IP calls.
Pure IP calls between IP keysets encrypt the voice data in each packet using the
highest encryption supported by both IP keysets, as long as SECURED CALLS
[104] (page 7-31) is defined as Yes in the COS branch for at least one of the keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-20
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
PHYSICAL The following parameters are displayed only when a physical (UGW) card is
CAPACITY installed (i.e. not in 0/0 systems). The Physical Capacity displays the actual
maximum values for this card.
END POINT TYPES (Display Only of relevant types: Keyset, SLT, LGS, NET, SIP, Media)
Displays a list of the IP endpoint types supported by this UGW card.
• t least one of the endpoints types in one of the system’s UGWs must be defined as
NET (page 29-25) to use IP Network dial numbers.
• A Trunk Group with IP_NET members must have the same IP Zone number defined for the
trunk, as in the UGWs.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-21
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
REQUIRED This subsection defines the required capacity of Media Channels and of IP
CAPACITY terminals (keysets, SLTs, LGSs, SIPs or NETs). These capacities are limited by the
card’s physical capacity TOTAL END POINTS (page 29-21). When initializing the UGW
card, a **Configuration Error** is listed in Hardware Configuration - Card List and
no card update is performed, if any of the following situations occur:
• The REQUIRED CAPACITY: MEDIA_CHANNELS (page 29-22) exceeds its
Physical Capacity.
• The total number of endpoint types (IP Keysets, IP SLTS, IP LGS, IP NETs
and/or SIPs) defined in the Required Capacity subsection exceeds the number
of endpoint types supported by the card’s Physical Capacity.
• One of the endpoint types is not supported by this UGW, but its Required
Capacity exceeds 0.
• No media module is physically installed on the UGW, but the REQUIRED
CAPACITY: MEDIA_CHANNELS (page 29-22) exceeds 0.
Attempting to update an active UGW with more IP endpoints or media channels
than the card can physically support immediately results in the
UGW SIZE EXCEEDED error message disabling the technician from updating the
card in excess of its physical capacities and avoiding a configuration error.
The following parameters are also limited by their Sizes defined in Sizes Definition
and Sizes Tab. Attempting to enter a value greater than what is defined in Sizes,
immediately results in the SIZES EXCEEDED, TRY AGAIN message for that
parameter. Additionally, all these parameters must be authorized (and quantified)
in Feature Authorization (see Feature Authorization beginning on page 3-5).
The default for this parameter is set in MEDIA_CHANNELS [4] (page 29-11) in
the UGW: Default Configuration branch
Enter the maximum number of media channels that this media module can support
based on the media module type.
29-22
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Defining a number larger than the defined value in the SIZ branch results in the
following error message:
Size Exceeded, try again.
Either increase the number in the Sizes Tab [Sysgen, 2] or decrease the required
number of media channels in this parameter.
Value
MEDIA_CHANNELS 64 32 0
KEYSET 60 60 92
LGS 10 10 10
NET 60 60 60
SIP 36 68 68
Total IP Terminals 176 208 240
Total Endpoints 240 240 240
29-23
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
1 64 64 64 0
2 64 32 32 32
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Either increase the number in SIZ or decrease the required number of IP Keysets
in this parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-24
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
When UGW IP_NET ports are defined, increase the number of ISDN_
TRANSIT_ SETUPS (page 4-26) in the Sizes Tab branch.
In IP_Net systems, all UGW cards must be upgraded to the latest software
29-25
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
SIP 0..combined maximum defined for SIP_TERMINAL (page 4-8) and SIP_
TRUNK (page 4-11), in SIZ)
The default for this parameter is set in SIP [9] (page 29-11) from the UGW
Default Configuration branch
Enter the maximum number of SIP entities that this UGW (PUGW, PUGWipx
cards and Coral IPx Office systems) is required to support. Both SIP Terminals as
well as SIP Trunks are supported by this parameter.
Defining a number larger than the defined value in the SIZ branch results in the
following error message:
Size Exceeded, try again.
Either increase the number in SIZ or decrease the required number in this
parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! WARNING:
Updating any parameter in this branch causes the UGW card to reset:
• All calls using media channels are dropped.
• All IP_NET (also known as NET_IP) calls are dropped.
• One or more of the IP endpoints (IP Keyset, IP SLT, IP LGS or
IP Net) may re-initialize on another UGW card with the same
zone.
UGW: Current Configuration UGWC,1 or IP,0,1 [9,0,1]
Enter N to ignore all changes and return the card to previously assigned values.
After updating the card, check the card in Hardware Configuration - Card List
to ensure that it has initialized properly and reports ACTIVE. Otherwise,
revert to the technical suggestions in Table 6-6 on page 6-83.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-26
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
This branch is used to identify the various Coral IP ports (FlexSet-IP 280S, T207M,
T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL, T207S, T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL, P-Seies
(such as: P-335, P-450), T322, T328, IP SLTs, IP LGS, SIP Terminals and Trunks).
A range of dial numbers for each type of IP station port must first be defined in the
NPL. The available NPL types for IP stations are IP_KEYSET [41], IP_SLT [42], IP_
LGS [43], SIP_TERMINAL [46], SIP_TRUNK [47] (see page 5-46). The IP Zone
Number and MAC numbers are defined in the respective IP Port branches for these
stations.
IP_Keyset .......................................................................................... 29-28
IP_SLT............................................................................................... 29-36
IP_LGS.............................................................................................. 29-38
IP_Net................................................................................................ 29-40
29-27
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
This branch defines and displays information pertaining to all the IP Keyset
stations in the Coral that are defined as IP_KEYSET [41] (page 5-46) in the NPL.
These may include IP Keysets such as the T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL,
FlexSet-IP 280S, FlexIP SoftPhone (FLIPS), SeaBeam softphone or a Sentinel
unit. The requested range of IP Keysets may be displayed or updated as needed.
The Music feature cannot be defined for idle FlexSet-IP 280S units.
In order to identify IP Stations in the Coral, the unique MAC associated with the
IP Keyset/Sentinel unit must be entered in this branch, per station (i.e. for each IP
Keyset). A Sentinel box including two units must be registered as two separate
units in the PI with two unique MAC addresses.
29-28
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Choose
Access:
Index or Dial
0-Index Access Access the IP Keyset port definitions by entering their NPL Index numbers
IP Port: Keyset parameters will now be listed by their index number for
each index number requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1-Dial Number Access the IP Keyset port definitions by entering their NPL dial numbers.
Access
IP Port: Keyset parameters will now be listed by their dial numbers for
each dial number requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-29
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Parameters NOTE! The remaining parameters in this branch are presented regardless of
which method (index or dial numbers) was requested to access the IP Port
Keyset branch.
TYPE Models
FLEXSET IP FlexSet-IP 280S (5 soft keys)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
REQUIRED_ZONE [3] 0..Max defined in SIZ for ZONE (page 4-19)/--/R (R: Remove for None --)
Define the required IP Zone for this IP Keyset station.
To enable the UGW to automatically and dynamically allocate an IP Zone to the
station, define this parameter as None: “--” (use R to remove assigned Zone). When
the station automatically initializes from the UGW, the first IP Zone number in the
ZONE_LIST (page 29-15) is allocated to the station.
29-30
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-31
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Status Description
Message
Wrong Zone This IP Keyset is trying to register via a call agent that does
not support its REQUIRED_ZONE definition.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-32
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
QoS:
DiffServ [9] Yes/No
Defines whether this Keyset uses the defined DiffServ protocol for the IP layer.
This protocol is used to improve the Quality of Service given by the Routers.
The DiffServ protocol values are defined, system wide, in QoS: DiffServ
Value: (page 29-71) in the IP General branch.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
! Set this parameter to Yes, only when the Keyset signalling is routed by
Ethernet switches programmed to use this protocol.
Otherwise, voice will not be heard on this keyset.
The 802.1Q/p protocol values are defined, system wide, in QoS: 802.1Q/p
Value: (page 29-73) in the IP General branch.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Security Type:
DES [11] Yes/No (Display Only)
Displays whether this IP Keyset uses DES encryption for secured IP calls.
Pure IP calls between IP keysets encrypt the voice data in each packet using the
highest encryption supported by both IP keysets, when SECURED CALLS
[104] (page 7-31) is defined as Yes in the COS branch for at least one of the keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-33
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
PHONE_TIME_ZONE_ Yes/No
OVERRIDE_BY_
Enter Yes to enable the system to override the time zone definition set on the IP
SYSTEM [15]
Keyset with the time zone defined in the DELTA_TIME_FROM_GMT [16] parameter.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-34
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
DELTA_TIME_FROM_ +/- HH:MM (HH = 00..12, MM = 00, 15, 30, 45) or R (Remove for None);
GMT [16] None
Defines the time zone of the IP station by defining a time offset (in hours and
minutes) from GMT time.
• Time must be entered as +/- Hours:Minutes, i.e, with a colon, and minute
definition (00 for no minutes).
• Minute values are entered in increments of 15 minute (00, 15, 30, 45).
This parameter is relevant only if PHONE_TIME_ZONE_OVERRIDE_BY_SYSTEM
[15] is set to Yes. Otherwise when it is set to No, the time displayed in this
parameter is for display only and cannot be changed.
Special Case 1:
If the PHONE_TIME_ZONE_OVERRIDE_BY_SYSTEM [15] parameter is set to N, and
no value was entered for this parameter, this indicates that this IP station’s phone
never sent a request for a time zone offset. Therefore, the technician may manually
enter a time zone offset for the phone from this parameter.
In the future, if the phone sends a request for a time zone offset, this parameter will
automatically be updated with the phone’s request.
Special Case 2:
If the PHONE_TIME_ZONE_OVERRIDE_BY_SYSTEM [15] parameter is set to Y, but
no value has been entered for this parameter (i.e. R for Remove or blank), the IP
station phone is granted the time zone offset defined in the Time Set DELTA_TIME_
FROM_GMT on page 25-3.
Table 29-5: Time zone examples (Attention for day light or summer time!!!)
Example:
If a IP station is located in New York, it is in a time zone that is 5 hours west of
GMT time, defined as “-5” (time difference in hours compared to GMT). If it is
05:00 o'clock in New York it is 10:00 o'clock in GMT “at the same moment”.
Define this parameter as -5:00, after defining the PHONE_TIME_ZONE_OVERRIDE_
BY_SYSTEM [15] parameter to N.
Keyset features such as the Idle Display Clock, Wake-up, Reminder, and Call Log
features are automatically adjusted to follow the localized time definitions.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-35
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
This branch is used to display all the information pertaining to all the Coral IP SLT
stations. The IP SLT stations are interfaced with the UGW cards by Coral
Teleport/FXS units. The units and their relevant names and numbers and other
details are only displayed in this branch. Assign the Teleport names, units and entry
numbers to these ports in IP: Telephony Gateway (Coral Teleport) beginning on
page 29-62.
• The requested range of IP SLT stations may be displayed or updated as needed.
• IP SLT stations must already be allocated in the NPL to activate this branch.
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid system IP_SLT [42] (page 5-46) NPL dial number, All
Enter the required range of IP SLT dial numbers FROM the lowest dial number, TO
the highest dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Displays whether the unit is connected to the Coral via a Sentinel unit.
Since the Sentinel unit may contain a global IP address, IP SLTs located in remote
zones may initialize via a Sentinel unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-36
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
EXTERNAL_ The following parameters are for display only. They can be updated in the IP:
GATEWAY Telephony Gateway (Coral Teleport) (page 29-62) branch for the required IP SLT dial
number.
29-37
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
This branch is used to display all the information pertaining to all the Coral IP LGS
trunk stations. These trunks are interfaced with the UGW cards by Coral
Teleport/FXO units. The units and their relevant names and numbers are only
displayed in this branch. Assign the Teleport names, units and entry numbers to the
IP trunk stations in IP: Telephony Gateway (Coral Teleport) beginning on page
29-62.
• The requested range of IP LGS stations may be displayed or updated as needed.
• IP LGS stations must already be allocated in the NPL to activate this branch.
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid system IP_LGS [43] (page 5-47) NPL dial number, All
Enter the required range of IP LGS dial numbers FROM the lowest dial number,
TO the highest dial number.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Displays whether the unit is connected to the Coral via a Sentinel unit.
Since the Sentinel unit may contain a global IP address, IP LGSs located in remote
zones may initialize via a Sentinel unit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-38
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
EXTERNAL_ The following parameters are for display only. They can be updated in the IP:
GATEWAY Telephony Gateway (Coral Teleport) (page 29-62) branch for the required IP LGS
dial number.
29-39
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
This branch is used only to view the IP Network port details: the supporting UGW
IP address, its defined IP Zone and the dial number status.
In IP_NET systems (also known as NET_IP systems), all UGW cards must
be upgraded to the latest software version, otherwise there might be
compatibility problems in the IP_Net network. See UGW Software Upgrade:
Activate on page 29-94.
.
FROM/TO DIAL# Any valid system IP_NET [45] (page 5-48) NPL dial number, All
Enter the requested IP Net trunk dial numbers from the lowest to the highest.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
--- This dial number has not been defined in any Trunk
Group Definition.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-40
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
SIP Ports
General
The Coral System (Main Software Version 15 or higher) is capable of processing
SIP requests and communication such that it may integrate standard off-the-shelf
third-party SIP phones and trunks. The PUGW, PUGWipx cards and Coral IPx
Office systems are used to support SIP protocol in the Coral.
The SIP phones are intelligent IP phones that include telephony features within the
phone and can communicate via the public internet (RTP and SIP signalling are
established) without the use of a Coral. However, when certain features are
required or when a telephony numbering plan is required, the Coral can act as a SIP
Proxy server to dispense these intelligences and “run the show”.
SIP Terminal ..................................................................................... 29-43
SIP Trunk .......................................................................................... 29-52
29-41
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
are used by the Coral and assigned Coral dialing plan numbers in the IP Ports
SIP Terminal beginning on page 29-43 (IP, 1, 4) or SIP Trunk beginning on page
29-52 (IP, 1, 5) branch.
Here are some examples of SIP addresses:
sip: 5989@www.example.com
sip: 5930@192.10.10.1
29-42
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
SIP Terminals/phones; P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T200S series (T207S,
T208S, T207S/NP, T208S/BL), T300 series (T322, T328), SeaBeam, SeaMail
voice and MWI ports, LxCMC voice and MWI ports, and all third-party SIP
phones; are intelligent endpoints which include support for telephony features
located within the phone itself. Since the Coral also offers telephony features,
feature control can sometimes be jeopardized. Certain Coral features are supported
by SIP while others are currently not supported by the SIP endpoints. See the
relevant terminal User’s Guide for a complete list, see also the New Developments
Summary, Version 15 for a complete list.
The SIP terminal features are defined in the Coral in the Keyset definition branch,
see Keyset Definition beginning on page 9-31.
This branch is used to Register the SIP terminal phone in the Coral system,
i.e. define its required IP Zone, Password, MAC and IP Addresses as well as other
pertinent IP information.
The SIP Terminal port parameters may be updated either by accessing their:
Index numbers (Route: IP,1,0,0), see 0-Index Access below, or their
Dial numbers (Route: IP,1,0,1), see 1-Dial Number Access below.
Each SIP Terminal is assigned a unique NPL index number and dial number in the
General Numbering Plan as SIP_TERMINAL [46] (page 5-48) types. Once the range
of requested ports is entered, the parameters are displayed after the dial number and
index number of each port.
29-43
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Choose
Access:
Index or Dial
0-Index Access Access the SIP Terminal definitions by entering their NPL Index numbers
SIP Terminal parameters will now be listed by their index number for each
index number requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DIAL_NUMBER [0] Any valid SIP Terminal dial number (Display Only)
Displays the dial number associated with this index number.The next parameter
displayed is CURRENT_ZONE [1] (page 29-45).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1-Dial Number Access the SIP Terminal definitions by entering their NPL dial numbers.
Access
SIP Terminal parameters will now be listed by their dial numbers for each
dial number requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INDEX [0]
Displays the index number associated with the displayed dial number.
The next parameter displayed is CURRENT_ZONE [1] (page 29-45).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-44
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Parameters NOTE!
The remaining parameters in this branch are presented regardless of which
method (index or dial numbers) was requested to access the SIP Terminal
branch.
REQUIRED_ZONE [2] 0..Max defined in SIZ for ZONE (page 4-19)/--/R (R: Remove for None --)
Define the required IP Zone for this SIP Terminal.
For Dynamic Zone Allocation, i.e., to have the system automatically assign a Zone
for this entity, define this parameter as None: “--” (use R to remove assigned Zone).
The SIP terminal initializes on one of the PUGWs in the Coral and is assigned the
first zone listed in the PUGW’s Zone_List (see UGW: Current Configuration
beginning on page 29-13).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
AUTHENTICATION_ Yes/No
REQUIRED [4]
Defines whether or not there is support of SIP terminal without Authentication.
(Coral version 16.01
• Yes - authorization is required
or higher)
• No - the system does not ask for authentication and phone is registered
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
If the password for the SIP endpoint is manually changed in the SIP
phone, it is not automatically updated in this parameter. The password
definition must be changed here as well. Otherwise, the SIP endpoint is
inoperable.
When no password is defined here, the system uses the password defined in the IP
General branch: AUTHENTICATION PASSWORD [14] (page 29-74).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-45
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
2.Early Media Negotiation: INVITE (SDP list of Codecs sent from Coral), OK (SDP se-
lected), ACK (empty)
3.Delayed Media Negotiation: INVITE (empty, no list of Codecs sent), OK (SDP list sent
from SIP entity), ACK (SDP selected)
29-46
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
SUPPORT_SESSION_ Yes/No
PROGRESS_183 [9]
Coral supports Session Progress 183 and therefore, can be configured to relay the
media from a remote phone that responds to an INVITE request of a SIP phone.
The caller from the SIP phone will hear the media of the remote station instead of
the standard SIP ringback tone.
The media of the remote device are packetized according to the Session
Description Protocol (SDP). Session progress response 183 relays the SDP data
from the remote device to the SIP phone. When the SUPPORT_SESSION_
PROGRESS_(183) parameter is set to Y (Yes) for the Coral SIP device, the session
progress response of the remote device will be relayed to the Coral SIP device. The
SDP information including the tone of the remote device will be heard instead of
the ringback tone generated by the Coral SIP device.
This feature will work only if the remote device is configured to transmit
information in EARLY MEDIA (i.e. before the SIP session begins).
When set to Y (Yes) for a Coral SIP terminal, Coral relays the session progress
response from a remote device to that terminal. If the Coral SIP terminal does not
support the session progress response, set this parameter to N (No).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
XFER_ON_RING_ Yes/No
WITHOUT_REPLACES
The Coral database can be configured to remove the REPLACES header field from
[10] the INVITE request of calls transferred to SIP endpoints that do not support this
29-47
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
NOTIFY_OF_XFER_ Yes/No
ALLOWED_AFTER_
Definse whether the SIP terminal supports notifications after BYE.
BYE [11]
(Coral version 16.01.16 When a SIP terminal ‘A’ transfers a call (i.e. transferring ‘B’ to ‘C’,
or higher) single step transfer, transfer on ring or after answer) it expects
notifications on the status of the call ‘B-C’. The Coral disconnects the call
‘A-B’ using BYE message and then it sends NOTIFY messages using the
dialog of that call.
• Yes - (Default) The Coral will disconnect the transferrer SIP terminal (‘A’) and
then send notifications of the status of the new call between the remaining
parties (‘B-C’).
• No - The Coral will immediately send a NOTIFY message with value 200=OK
on the existing call and then the Coral will disconnect the transferrer SIP
terminal (‘A’) using BYE.
The 200 OK is sent even if the transferred call was not answered yet.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DIVERSION_ No/Sip/Tel
HEADER_URI_TYPE
Coral supports diversion headers URI (Uniform Resource Identifier).
[12] When a call is forwarded to a SIP terminal, a diversion header can be sent. This
means that if party A calls party B and is forwarded to the SIP Voicemail of party
B, party A reaches the Voicemail of party B.
This parameter defines whether or not diversion headers are sent to SIP terminals.
When Sip or Tel is defined, diversion headers are sent to SIP terminals. When No
is selected, diversion headers are not sent to SIP terminals.
When Sip/Tel is selected, the diversion is sent according to the following formats:
• <sip:xxx.xx.xx.xx>
• <tel:xxx.xx.xx.xx>
SIP Terminal IP,1,4 [9,1,4]
This parameter influences the total number defined in Sizes Tab definitions NO_OF_
SIP_SUBSCRIPTIONS parameter on page 4-31.
Applicable for P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T207S, T208S, T207S/NP,
T208S/BL, T322, T328 phones and any third-party SIP terminal with
SIP-Subscribe option.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-48
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
BLF_REPORTS_ 0..3
TABLE [14]
Defines the conversion index used to convert the LED indications defined by Coral
(Coral version 16.01 into the same indications displayed by specific SIP terminal equipment.
or higher)
For terminal equipment other than the P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450), T322,
T328, contact the manufacturer.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SUPPORT_RING_ Yes/No..
TYPE [15]
Defines whether or not to send Ring Type to SIP terminal in Invite message.
(Coral version 16.01
or higher) The message format is: Alert-Info: <URL>;info= info text
Where info text is Internal or External or VoicePage.
• Yes - Coral will send Alert-Info (ring type, such as: Internal, External or
VoicePage).
• No - No Alert-Info is supported
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ADD_VM_IND_TO_ Yes/No
MSG_LAMP [16]
(Coral version 16.01
This parameter is relevant for third-party SIP terminals (such as Polycom
phones) that require special treatment for simple MWI (Message Waiting
or higher)
Indicator) on/off instructions.In order to turn on/off the MWI lamp for
simple message waitng, these phones require that the Coral send a
Voicemail indication as well.
Defines whether or not to include Voicemail Indication (VM_IND) message to SIP
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-49
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
PolycomSoundPointIP-SPIP_560-UA/3.3.1.0769_000a6b0202e2 P-560
PolycomSoundPointIP-SPIP_670-UA/3.3.1.0769_000a6b0202e2 P-670
* Where 00:15:65:12:07:33 and 00:15:65:11:d0:19 are MAC addresses of the phones
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-50
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Wrong_Zone This SIP terminal is trying to register via a call agent that
does not support its REQUIRED_ZONE [2] (page 29-45)
definition.
___ This dial number has not been defined in any SIP Terminal
Definition.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-51
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Registered Dedicated trunks per SIP entity. These trunks remain in idle
state after they initialized and are registered. A keep alive
signal continues to be sent from the trunk at pre-defined
intervals ensuring the trunk’s idle state.
Examples of registered SIP Trunks may include External
Gateways, FXO Teleport units MP-10x and MP-11x (x=4/8).
This is the most secure type of Coral SIP trunk. However, it
requires dedicated trunk resources which may not always be
in use. Therefore, when a large number of trunks must be
defined, it may be preferable to simply list the trunks within
the Coral via a Dial Service, and use Unregistered SIP
Trunks.
Guest Any SIP trunks that are not dedicated or listed within the
Coral.
The Guest trunks can be used only for incoming calls.
Examples of Guest SIP Trunks may include soft phones and
unregistered SIP terminals.
29-52
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Registered Yes
Unregistered No
Guest No
4. Define the SIP trunks in a Trunk Group via the Trunk Group Definition
branch. The Trunk Group must hold the following settings:
• IP_ZONE (page 8-19): use the same definition as defined for REQUIRED_
ZONE [2] (page 29-56) in this SIP_Trunk branch.
• QSIG (page 8-19): must be set to Yes
• DIALING METHOD (page 8-25): must be set to Enblock
• add only SIP trunks as the trunk group members.
Registered • Define the endpoint (i.e. FXO teleport unit) with the IP
Port 5060.
• The trunk should be in Idle state (1H) after successful
registration to Coral.
29-53
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
:This branch is used to register as well as to define and/or view the Coral SIP
trunks.
Only trunks that are to be dedicated SIP trunks (i.e. Registered) require a password
definition (if the password is not defined in this branch, a default is assigned from
the IP-General branch).
Virtual-Unregistered or Guest SIP trunks must also be defined in this branch, but
with the INCOMING_REGISTRATION [11] (page 29-60) parameter set to No.
• No IP Address is displayed for the Virtual-Unregistered or Guest SIP trunks.
The SIP Trunk port parameters may be updated either by accessing their index
numbers (Route: IP,1,0,0), see 0-Index Access below, or their dial numbers (Route:
IP,1,0,1), see 1-Dial Number Access below. Each SIP Trunk is assigned a unique
NPL index number and dial number in the General Numbering Plan as a SIP_
TRUNK [47] (page 5-49) NPL type. Once the range of requested ports is entered, the
parameters are displayed after the dial number and index number of each port.
SIP Trunk IP,1,5 [9,1,5]
29-54
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Choose
Access:
Index or Dial
0-Index Access Access the SIP trunk definitions by entering their NPL Index numbers
SIP Trunk parameters will now be listed by their index number for each
index number requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DIAL_NUMBER [0] Any valid SIP trunk dial number (Display Only)
Displays the dial number associated with this index number.
The next parameter displayed is CURRENT_ZONE [1] (page 29-56).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
1-Dial Number Access the SIP trunk definitions by entering their NPL dial numbers.
Access
SIP Trunk parameters will now be listed by their dial numbers for each
dial number requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
INDEX [0] Any valid NPL SIP trunk index number (Display Only)
29-55
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Parameters NOTE!
The remaining parameters in this branch are presented regardless of which
method (index or dial numbers) was requested to access the SIP trunk branch.
REQUIRED_ZONE [2] 0..Max defined in SIZ for ZONE (page 4-19)/--/R (R: Remove for None --)
Define the required IP Zone for this SIP trunk.
For Dynamic Zone Allocation, i.e., to have the system automatically assign a Zone
for this entity, define this parameter as None: “--” (use R to remove assigned Zone).
The SIP trunk initializes on one of the PUGWs in the Coral and is assigned the first
zone listed in the PUGW’s Zone_List (see UGW:Current Configuration branch).
Define the required IP Zone for this SIP Terminal.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-56
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
4.Early Media Negotiation: INVITE (SDP list of Codecs sent from Coral), OK (SDP se-
lected), ACK (empty)
5.Delayed Media Negotiation: INVITE (empty, no list of Codecs sent), OK (SDP list sent
from SIP entity), ACK (SDP selected)
29-57
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
SUPPORT_SESSION_ Yes/No
PROGRESS_183 [8]
Coral supports Session Progress 183 and therefore, can be configured to relay the
media from a remote phone that responds to an INVITE request of a SIP phone.
The caller from the SIP phone will hear the media of the remote station instead of
the standard SIP ringback tone.
The media of the remote device are packetized according to the Session
Description Protocol (SDP). Session progress response 183 relays the SDP data
from the remote device to the SIP phone. When the SUPPORT_SESSION_
PROGRESS_(183) parameter is set to Y (Yes) for the Coral SIP device, the session
progress response of the remote device will be relayed to the Coral SIP device. The
SDP information including the tone of the remote device will be heard instead of
the ringback tone generated by the Coral SIP device.
This feature will work only if the remote device is configured to transmit
information in EARLY MEDIA (i.e. before the SIP session begins).
When set to Y (Yes) for a Coral SIP trunk, Coral relays the session progress
response from a remote device to that trunk. If the Coral SIP trunk does not support
the session progress response, set this parameter to N (No). If this parameter is
defined differently under DIAL SERVICES and SIP TRUNK, the definition under
DIAL SERVICES overrides the definition under SIP TRUNK for that trunk.
SIP Trunk IP,1,5 [9,1,5]
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
XFER_ON_RING_ Yes/No
WITHOUT_REPLACES
The Coral database can be configured to remove the REPLACES header field from
[9] the INVITE request of calls transferred to SIP endpoints that do not support this
header. This means that Coral can support call transfers to SIP endpoints that do
not recognize the REPLACES header.
Set to Y (Yes), to support transfer on ring to SIP trunk between two Coral systems.
When set to Y (Yes), the REPLACES header is removed from the INVITE request
before it is transferred to a SIP trunk that does not support the REPLACES header.
This parameter is applied to the trunk receiving the INVITE request.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-58
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
DIVERSION_ No/Sip/Tel
HEADER_URI_TYPE
Coral supports diversion headers URI (Uniform Resource Identifier).
[10] When a call is forwarded to a SIP trunk, a diversion header can be sent. This means
that if party A calls party B and is forwarded to the SIP Voicemail of party B, party
A reaches the Voicemail of party B.
This parameter defines whether or not diversion headers are sent to SIP trunks.
When Sip or Tel is defined, diversion headers are sent to SIP trunks. When No is
selected, diversion headers are not sent to SIP trunks.
When Sip/Tel is selected, the diversion is sent according to the following formats:
• <sip:xxx.xx.xx.xx>
• <tel:xxx.xx.xx.xx>
This convention is selected according to requirements of the local technology.
The definition for a given trunk under Dial Services: DIVERSION_HEADER_URI_
TYPE [30] on page 15-20 overrides the definition under SIP TRUNK.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-59
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
INCOMING_ Yes/No
REGISTRATION [11]
This INCOMING_REGISTRATION [11] parameter is relevant for incoming calls only.
Enter Yes to define this SIP trunk as a dedicated SIP trunk in the Coral, i.e. when
defining Registered (page 29-52) SIP trunks.
Updating this branch registers the trunk opposite its endpoint. After the trunk is
registered, it remains in idle.
Enter No to list this trunk with the Coral and use it only on a per-need basis, for
Unregistered (page 29-52) and Guest (page 29-52) SIP trunks.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
reported in the Registration request. Therefore, if the trunk is not registered, then
this information does not display.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-60
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Brief_KA_Time The Keep Alive timer defined for this SIP trunk is shorter
than the one defined in the IP:General (IP,3) branch. This
SIP trunk KA timer must be extended to any number
greater than the Coral’s KA in order for the SIP trunk to
register.
Wrong_Zone This SIP trunk is trying to register via a call agent that does
not support its REQUIRED_ZONE definition.
UNAUTHORIZED The Authorization limit for SIP trunks has been exceeded.
If the SIP entity was mistakenly given a non SIP entity NPL dial number,
the given dial number will not be shown in this branch.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-61
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
This branch is used to configure and display the Coral Teleport FXO and FXS VoIP
gateway units used to interface SLTs and LGS trunks via the UGW card with the
IP network.
These stand-alone, analog, VoIP Gateway subsystems provide superior voice
technology enabling Single Line Telephones (SLT) and loop start analog trunks to
connect to the Coral system via the UGW card through the IP world. The Coral
Teleport is available in Foreign eXchange Office (FXO) and Foreign eXchange
Station (FXS) versions each with a different number of ports.
The FXS units interface SLTs, while the FXO units interface LGSs with the UGW
card creating an extensive VoIP Coral PABX.
NAME (16) [0] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Define a descriptive name for the external gateway (up to 16 alphanumeric
characters) for this Entry.
A name defined as BLANK displays only the Entry number. Use “_” (underscore)
for space. See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-62
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
The previous MAC and IP address, and port details (SLT info and LGS info) are
deleted when TYPE is changed.
Enter Yes to continue or No to retract.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
When the TYPE [1] parameter is set to None, it is defined as “--” and the
following parameters in this branch are not displayed.
29-63
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
priority for registration than the Secondary Coral via its UGW. In the
Asymmetric mode, once the gateway is registered to the Primary UGW, its
Coral sends reset messages to the gateway after UGW initialization. (The
gateway might be registered to the secondary UGW in another Coral system.)
If the gateway does not respond, the gateway registers to the secondary UGW.
The primary UGW continues sending reset messages to the gateway for up to
24 hours every few minutes. If the gateway responds to these reset messages,
the gateway reregisters back to the primary UGW. Therefore, the gateway
assigns the primary UGW a higher priority for registration.
• No (Symmetric mode) (Default) both Coral systems are assigned the same
priority for registration. In the Symmetric mode, once the gateway is registered
to a Coral, it sends keep-alive messages to this Coral via its UGW. The gateway
switches UGW cards only once the UGW on the Coral to which it has
registered does not respond. Therefore, the gateway assigns both UGW cards
defined as Activate RSIP = Yes. This Coral via its UGW card is the
Primary CA
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-64
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-65
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
DELTA_TIME_FROM_ +/- HH:MM (HH = 00..12, MM = 00, 15, 30, 45) or R (Remove for None);
GMT [10] None
Defines the time zone of the FXO/FXS IP endpoint by defining a time offset (in
hours and minutes) from GMT time.
• Time must be entered as +/- Hours:Minutes, i.e, with a colon, and minute
definition (00 for no minutes).
Minute values are entered in increments of 15 minute (00, 15, 30, 45).
The FXO/FXS IP endpoint cannot define its own time offset or cannot send
•
Table 29-9: Time zone examples (Attention for day light or summer time!!!)
Example:
If a FXO/FXS IP endpoint is located in Los Angeles, it is in a time zone that is 8
hours west of GMT time, defined as “-8” (time difference in hours compared to
IP: Telephony Gateway (Coral Teleport) IP,2 [9,2]
GMT). If it is 02:00 o'clock in Los Angeles it is 10:00 o'clock in GMT “at the same
moment”. Define this parameter as -8:00.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-66
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
SLT_INFO This information is available only for the FXS defined entries (TYPE= 0, 2, 4, 6).
by Entry#: Only the unit Names may be updated in this sub section.
NAME: Short (5) [12] Any ASCII characters: max, 5 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Define the short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) for this Teleport circuit
dial number. This name is also used in Port List. When no name is defined, the word
BLANK appears as the dial number name.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME: Long (16) [13] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Define the full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) for this Teleport circuit
dial number. This name is also used in Port List. When no name is defined, the word
BLANK appears as the dial number name.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
LGS_INFO This information is available only for the FXO defined entries (TYPE= 3, 5). Only
by Entry#: the unit Names may be updated in this sub section.
NAME: Short (5) [15] Any ASCII characters: max, 5 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Define the short name (up to 5 alphanumeric characters) for this Teleport circuit
dial number. This name is also used in Port List. When no name is defined, the word
BLANK appears as the dial number name.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
NAME: Long (16) [16] Any ASCII characters: max, 16 characters; R (Remove for BLANK)
Define the full name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) for this Teleport circuit
dial number. This name is also used in Port List. When no name is defined, the word
BLANK appears as the dial number name.
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-67
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
The following parameters, when defined, are applied for all IP calls and stations
within the Coral system.
IP KEYSET Yes/No
AUTOMATIC
Enter Yes to instruct the system to automatically register the MAC (Media Access
REGISTRATION [1]
Control) numbers for the IP keysets when initializing IP stations.
When IP stations are initialized, the Coral first checks to see whether the keyset is
already registered by matching the broadcast MAC number to the MAC numbers
already registered in the database. If the MAC number is not found, the Coral
automatically registers the MAC number in the database against the first available
IP Station index number. The MAC number/s are registered, even if the IP Address
is already in use (i.e. IP Contention message is received) or insufficient Sizes are
allocated for the keyset/s (i.e., no UGW resources are allocated).
When To Use This Parameter:
This parameter is normally used when first installing a system. When this
parameter is set to Yes, the MAC numbers are automatically registered, however
the dial numbers are randomly assigned to the connected keysets. When installing
a small amount of IP stations, the technician may prefer to use the IP-Stations
branch (see IP_Keyset beginning on page 29-28), to manually assign the MAC
number as well as the station dial number.
To Control the Dial Number Assignment:
The Coral assigns the dial numbers to the IP keysets based on the first available
index number. Define a range of IP keyset index numbers with the required dial
numbers in the Coral Numbering Plan (see IP_KEYSET [41] on page 5-46).
After setting this parameter to Yes:
• Manually connect the IP Keysets to the LAN connection (Internet wall socket).
IP: General IP,3 [ROOT,9,3]
The first keyset connected to the LAN, initializes that keyset with its own
MAC number and the Coral dial number of the first available IP_KEYSET
index number.
• Connect the next keyset to the same LAN connection to define it with the next
available index number and associated dial number and so on.
• The keysets may now be moved to any new destination with a LAN
connection, while retaining their Coral dial number and MAC registration.
Alternatively, connect the IP Keysets in any order and then rearrange the dial
numbers in the Numbering Plan.
! The technician must reset this parameter to No after the keysets are
initialized to prevent unauthorized users from using the system.
This parameter is automatically reset to No at midnight, every evening.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-68
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Defines the Real Time Protocol (RTP) port base, system-wide, for all IP voice calls.
This parameter is also relevant for the iAPA feature and must be defined in
order for the iAPA port to be recognized by the CTI application computer
as an IP socket.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
This parameter is also relevant the iAPA feature and must be shorter than
the inactivity interval defined for the CTI computer application.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-69
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
0: 2427,
1: 2727
Defines the Call Agent (CA) Signalling IP port, system-wide.
All Coral IP Keysets must have the same Call Agent signalling port
definition as defined in this parameter.
See the relevant keyset Installation Manual for defining CAs in IP Keysets.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IP: General IP,3 [ROOT,9,3]
29-70
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
QoS: DiffServ Define the Quality of Service for the IP Layer analyzed by Routers, for both
Value: signaling and media parameters. These parameters define the Quality of Service
system wide.
SIGNALING: Signaling information in the Voice over IP PABX is less critical than the voice
(media) information and the parameter default values reflect this situation.
However, should signaling information be equally important at any given time,
these parameters may be easily changed to reflect such situations.
0: Best Effort
1: AF1 (Assured Forwarding1)
2: AF2
3: AF3
4: AF4
5: EF (Expedited Forwarding)
Define the urgency for sending this signaling packet. 0 (Best Effort) is the least
prioritized option. 5 (EF) is the most prioritized option.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
0: None
1: Low
2: Medium
3: High
Define the importance of this signaling packet information for occasions when the
Router is overloaded and may need to drop packets.
Dropping Priority:
29-71
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
0: Best Effort
1: AF1 (Assured Forwarding1)
2: AF2
3: AF3
4: AF4
5: EF (Expedited Forwarding)
Define the urgency for sending this media packet. 0 (Best Effort) is the least
prioritized option. 5 (EF) is the most prioritized option.
This parameter is defined with the highest priority because it relates to the sending
of voice (media) information (packets), and is used to improve call quality.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
0: None
1: Low
2: Medium
3: High
Define the importance of this media packet information for occasions when the
Router is overloaded and may need to drop packets.
Dropping Priority:
IP: General IP,3 [ROOT,9,3]
0 (None) indicates that the packet may be dropped first during congestion.
3 (High) indicates that the packet is very important and should be dropped last.
This parameter is defined with the highest priority in order to improve the voice
quality of the call.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-72
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
QoS: 802.1Q/p Defines the Quality of Service for the Ethernet Layer used for the Ethernet
Value: Switches that are compatible with the 802.1Q/p protocol.
T207M, T208M, T207M/NP, T208M/BL phones ignore the values set here and
derive TOS values from the DIFFSERV Values as follows:
Diffserv = 0 TOS = 0
Diffserv = 1 TOS = 1
Diffserv = 2 TOS = 3
Diffserv = 3 TOS = 4
Diffserv = 4 TOS = 5
Diffserv = 5 TOS = 6
Restart the phone after changing this parameter, otherwise the phone will
not follow the new DiffServ values defined here.
Define the layer 2 priority for sending the signaling packets. 0 is least prioritized.
5 is highest priority.
Generally, signaling information is less critical than voice information.
Define the layer 2 priority for sending the voice (media) packets. 0 is least
prioritized. 5 is highest priority.
Generally, voice information is most critical, reflected by the parameter default
values.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-73
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
SIP:
DISPLAY NICKNAME Yes/No
INSTEAD D.N. [12]
NOT USED
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Defines the maximum system waiting time for the next Registration event (Keep
alive) on outgoing SIP trunks.
If Keep alive is not recognized, after this time-out period, the following actions
take place:
• The ISP rejects the SIP trunk
• The Coral system releases the SIP trunk to idle state
• STATUS [42] parameter for outgoing SIP trunk (on page 15-23) of the relevant
Dial Service reflects the new status. The status will be changed from Active,
according to the response from the ISP, or will be Blank when no response is
received from the ISP.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-74
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-75
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
! WARNING:
It is recommended to manually update the UGW cards. Otherwise, the
cards are automatically reset when the system detects that UGW
database values have changed, in which case all calls are dropped
without warning.
! WARNING:
IP: General IP,3 [ROOT,9,3]
Upon changing this parameter, you must manually reset all system
UGW cards. To reset a UGW card enter UPDATE?=YES (see page 29-26)
under UGW: Current Configuration (page 29-13) branch [UGWC, 1].
It is recommended to manually update the UGW cards (as described in
the warning). Otherwise, the cards are automatically reset when the
system detects that UGW database values have changed, in which case
all calls are dropped without warning.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-76
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
! WARNING:
Upon changing this parameter, you must manually reset all system
UGW cards. To reset a UGW card enter UPDATE?=YES (see page 29-26)
under UGW: Current Configuration (page 29-13) branch [UGWC, 1].
It is recommended to manually update the UGW cards (as described in
the warning). Otherwise, the cards are automatically reset when the
system detects that UGW database values have changed, in which case
all calls are dropped without warning.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Defines the IP address of the secondary DNS (Domain Name Server). The
DNS associates the current IP address of the SIP service provider domain
name with SIP trunks.
! WARNING:
Upon changing this parameter, you must manually reset all system
29-77
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
MAP: The following parameters are displayed only when a MAP card is installed in
the system.
The MAP software status information can be viewed in the MAP Card branch
on page 27-4 (Root, 3, 10).
Notes:
1) For Coral IPx Office the following parameters are not relevant because
the MAP address (and the CLA address) is the UGW address, as
described in UGW: Current Configuration, SIGNALLING: on page 29-15.
2) MAP is not available for Coral IPx 4000 and FlexiCom 6000 systems.
3) For Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000 systems that have dual cages
and cabinets for duplicated common control, two (2) MAP cards must
be used, one in each control section.Both MAP cards must be
configured with the same IP address so that when the system switches
to the secondary control section the applications will continue to work.
! WARNING:
Updating the MAP IP Address causes the card to initialize, thereby
interrupting the connection to all the applications hosted by the MAP,
which might cause the applications to initialize as well. The CLA is also
reset
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-78
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-79
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
This branch is used to define one unique IP (MGCP) Signalling Channel for the IP
Network ports (IP_NET) supported on the UGW card. The signalling channel
defined in this branch is used by all the UGW cards installed in this Coral system.
In IP_Net systems, all UGW cards must be upgraded to the latest software
version, otherwise there might be compatibility problems in the IP_Net
network. See UGW Software Upgrade: Activate on page 29-94.
When UGW IP_NET ports are defined, increase the number of ISDN_
TRANSIT_ SETUPS (page 4-26) in the Sizes Tab branch.
QSIG
IP: NET IP,5 [9,5]
Definitions
SUPPORT CALL Yes/No
INDEPENDENT
Set this parameter to Y in order to support CISC calls (D-channel signalling with
SIGNALLING
no B-channel (voice)) thus enabling using QSIG Network features between nodes
CONNECTION [3] such as Camp-On and Follow-Me. Once a connection is made between the two
parties, signalling continues between both sides as required by the application.
Set to N if any one of the network nodes does not support CISC.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-80
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
TRANSIT_COUNTER_ ECMA/ISO
CODING [6]
A Transit PBX sends the call information in code form. This parameter defines
which QSIG code form is implemented. Enter ISO when an international standard
is needed. Enter ECMA for older European standards. ECMA standards have been
altered to conform to ISO standards and is thereby used in most cases.
The technician should match the QSIG code form to the code form used in the
system that the Coral is connected to.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-81
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
0 G.711 10 ms 100 96
1 G.711 20 ms 50 80
2 G.711 40 ms 25 72
3 G.723 30 ms 33.3 17
4 G.729 10 ms 100 40
5 G.729 20 ms 50 24
6 G.729 30 ms 33.3 19
7 G.729 40 ms 25 16
9 G.723 60 ms 16.6 12
10 G.729 20 ms + vad 50 24
IP: ZONE IP,6
11 G.711 80 ms 12.5 68
12 G.723 90 ms 11.1 10
This branch is used to ensure that a specific channel bandwidth is not exceeded and
thus avoid degradation of voice quality to all existing calls. It also blocks all
following calls until at least one current call disconnects.
When the maximum bandwidth is exceeded, new calls fail and a bandwidth
overload indication, B.W. Overload, is displayed on keysets as well as in the
IP Zone Display table. A reorder tone is also heard.
The IP Net destination receives cause 88H LAR trigger.
29-82
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Examples:
Situation
Financial districts and other high traffic districts may require defining the
first 5 lines in one IP Zone and the next 5 lines in another IP Zone (with
the same Bandwidth Limit) to create a completely non-blocking system.
29-83
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
5810 to 5819 2 64
0-UPDATE
NAME (16) Maximum 16 ASCII characters, R (Remove for BLANK)
Default: BLANK
Define a name for this IP Zone (up to 16 alphanumeric characters).
See General Rules for Entering Names on page 2-10.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
the limit.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-84
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
INTER_ZONE_ IP/PCM
SELECTION
Define the “traffic” direction for this IP Zone.
Usually, IP calls made within the same zone are conducted as pure IP calls (IP).
When there is a need to force the RTP stream via the system’s PCM, choose PCM
for this option.
Setting this parameter to PCM aids in the “automatic” zone definition for Coral IP
phones as follows:
In previous Coral Versions, the IP phone travelling in and outside of the LAN was
required to change its Call Agent definition depending on where it was physically
located, in order to change between the IP Zones.
In Coral Version 15, the IP phone user can remain defined in a unique IP zone
defined for IP phones that change physical locations frequently (mostly soft-phone
users). The unique zone is defined to use PCM, thereby forcing all the calls via the
media module and the UGW. In this manner, whether the IP phone is external or
internal to the LAN, it uses the same Call Agent.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
CALC_BW_ON_ Yes/No
PURE_IP_CALLS
When set to N (No), the bandwidth of pure IP calls are not included in the
calculation of the bandwidth of a given zone. When set to Y (Yes), the bandwidth
of pure IP calls is included in the calculation of the bandwidth of a given zone.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IP_ADDR Global/Local
Define which UGW IP Address the RTP stream should be sent to when using this
Zone, Global or Local.
Choose Global for Zones serving mostly external calls via the WAN.
Choose Local for Zones serving internal Coral IP endpoints within the LAN.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-85
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Ensure that only SIP trunks are listed as members for this trunk group and
that the Trunk Group Definition is defined as QSIG (on page 8-19).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IPNET_IN_BAND_ Yes/No .
TONE
Defines system-wide, on which channel the system tones (e.g., Ringback tone) are
(V. 16.01 or higher) sent by the Coral over IPNET.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IP: ZONE IP,6
29-86
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
1-DISPLAY
From/To Zone# 0..7
Default: All Zones
Enter the IP Zones to be displayed from the lowest to the highest Zone.
An example of the PI screen displayed is shown in Table 29-11.
0 CO-North 48 96 128
1 CO-South 24 24 64
3 BLANK 0 0 --
4 BLANK 0 0 --
5 BLANK 0 0 --
6 BLANK 0 0 --
7 BLANK 0 0 --
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-87
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
29-88
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
! Caution:
This branch and its parameters are intended for Sentinel Pro units only.
Do not define these parameters for any other Sentinel type (Sentinel
Terminal, Sentinel-I, Sentinel-II) as this may impact system operation.
FROM/TO INDEX # Any Valid Sentinel Index Number (IP Keyset NPL types)
Enter the range of Sentinel units index number(s) from the lowest to the highest.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The following parameters are valid only for the 0-Update, 1-Display, and
2-Add options.
29-89
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
This parameter defines whether this Sentinel is connected to the Coral via another
Sentinel unit (Yes) or not (No).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IP: SENTINEL Pro IP,8
29-90
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
ZONE 0..max defined in Sizes for ZONE (page 4-19) or R (for Remove)
Define an IP Zone for this Sentinel unit. This parameter must be defined in order
to accommodate IP devices that are to “automatically” initialize via this Sentinel
unit and thereby inherit the Sentinel’s IP Zone (as opposed to the UGW’s IP Zone
in previous Coral versions.)
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Not Compat This Sentinel Version is not compatible with the Coral
Software version. The compatible Sentinel Pro Version is
5 or higher.
Wrong Zone This Sentinel is registered via a call agent that does not
support its ZONE definition.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-91
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
The following parameters are valid only for the 3-Remove option.
29-92
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-93
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
In IP_Net systems, all UGW cards must be upgraded to the latest software
version, otherwise there might be compatibility problems in the IP_Net
network.
29-94
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
MONTH 1..12
Default: Current month
Define the month for the software upgrade. The month is entered by the actual
number of the month in one or two digits; January = 1, December = 12.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DAY 1..31
Default: Current day
Define the day of the month for the software upgrade. The day of the month is
entered in one or two digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-95
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
TFTP_SERVER_IP_ ---.---.---.---
ADDR Default: None for initial entry; old entry for any new entry
Enter the IP address for the TFTP server that holds the UGW software version
upgrade file. Once an address is entered, the same address is retained and displayed
the next time an upgrade is requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-96
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-97
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
29-98
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
FlexSet-IP 280Ss with versions lower than 1.11, must be active in order to
receive the upgrade. Therefore, software upgrades via a TFTP server to
these types of IP Keysets must be done via the IP Address method.
P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450) telephones need FTP (not TFTP) access
for software upgrading. .
All other types of IP Keysets must be initialized, but need not be active in order to
upgrade their software versions via the TFTP server.
The Software Upgrade may be assigned for a future date. Should the upgrade need
to be cancelled before the requested time and date, a cancellation procedure is
possible from: IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Cancel (page 29-103).
This branch offers two different methods of upgrading the IP Keysets, either by
their dial numbers (0 - DIAL NUMBER), or by
their IP addresses (1 - IP ADDRESS).
29-99
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
MONTH 1..12
Default: Current month
Define the month for the software upgrade. The month is entered by the actual
number of the month in one or two digits; January = 1, December = 12.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DAY 1..31
Default: Current day
Define the day of the month for the software upgrade. The day of the month is
entered in one or two digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TFTP_SERVER_IP_ ---.---.---.---
ADDR Default: None for initial entry; old entry for any new entry
P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450) telephones need FTP (not TFTP) access
for software upgrading. .
29-100
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Enter the IP address for the TFTP server that holds the IP Keyset software version
upgrade file. Once an address is entered, the same address is retained and displayed
the next time an upgrade is requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-101
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
IP_ADDR ---.---.---.---
Enter the IP address for the IP Keyset to be upgraded.
When the IP Keyset is defined with dynamic IP addresses, change the definition to
a static IP address for this software upgrade. Once the upgrade is performed, the
request for dynamic IP addresses can be reassigned.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TFTP_SERVER_IP_ ---.---.---.---
ADDR
P-Seies (such as: P-335, P-450) telephones need FTP (not TFTP) access
for software upgrading. .
Enter the IP address for the TFTP server that holds the IP Keyset software version
upgrade file. Once an address is entered, the same address is retained and displayed
the next time an upgrade is requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Enter Yes to enable the request for the software upgrade to this IP Keyset. This
request is performed immediately and is final, no cancellation is possible.
Enter No to retract.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-102
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
Details for the IP Keyset Software Upgrade Cancellation are found on the
following pages:
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Cancel by Dial Number .........................29-104
IP Keyset Software Upgrade: Cancel by IP Address ............................29-105
29-103
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
29-104
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
IP_ADDR ---.---.---.---
Enter the IP address for the IP Keyset for which the software upgrade is to be
cancelled.
When the IP Keyset is defined with dynamic IP addresses, change the definition to
a static IP address for this software upgrade. Once the upgrade is performed, the
request for dynamic IP addresses can be reassigned.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-105
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Details for the Sentinel Software Upgrade Activation are found on the following
pages:
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Activate by Index Number .......................29-107
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Activate by IP Address.............................29-109
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Activate [ROOT,3,7,0,2]
29-106
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
MONTH 1..12
Default: Current month
Define the month for the software upgrade. The month is entered by the actual
number of the month in one or two digits; January = 1, December = 12.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
DAY 1..31
Default: Current day
Define the day of the month for the software upgrade. The day of the month is
entered in one or two digits.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-107
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
TFTP_SERVER_IP_ ---.---.---.---
ADDR Default: None for initial entry; old entry for any new entry
Enter the IP address for the TFTP server that holds the software version upgrade
file. Once an address is entered, the same address is retained and displayed the next
time an upgrade is requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-108
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
IP_ADDR ---.---.---.---
Enter the IP address for the Sentinel unit to be upgraded.
When the Sentinel is defined with dynamic IP addresses, change the definition to
a static IP address for this software upgrade. Once the upgrade is performed, the
request for dynamic IP addresses can be reassigned.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
TFTP_SERVER_IP_ ---.---.---.---
ADDR
Enter the IP address for the TFTP server that holds the Sentinel software version
upgrade file. Once an address is entered, the same address is retained and displayed
the next time an upgrade is requested.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-109
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
Details for the Sentinel Software Upgrade Cancellation are found on the following
pages:
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Cancel by Index Number ......................... 29-111
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Cancel by IP Address ............................... 29-112
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Cancel [ROOT,3,7,1,2]
29-110
PI Reference Manual IP — Voice Over IP
29-111
IP — Voice Over IP PI Reference Manual
IP_ADDR ---.---.---.---
Enter the IP address for the Sentinel for which the software upgrade is to be
cancelled.
When the Sentinel is defined with dynamic IP addresses, change the definition to
a static IP address for this software upgrade. Once the upgrade is performed, the
request for dynamic IP addresses can be reassigned.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
29-112
PI Reference Manual
29-113
IP — Voice Over IP
29-114
Sentinel Software Upgrade: Cancel by IP Address
30 Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
This chapter describes the programming options for the Coral Internal Traffic
feature.
Internal Traffic: Definition .........................................................................30-4
Internal Traffic: Features and Events Control............................................30-6
Internal Traffic: Reports: Format Parms ..................................................30-10
Internal Traffic: Reports: View ................................................................30-14
General
The Coral Internal Traffic feature allows the technician to create traffic reports
based on Coral Features and Events for a range of Coral entities such as stations,
trunks, etc. (see DIAL_NUMBER_TYPES (page 30-14) for entity types). These reports
may be stored and monitored for future use.
30-1
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
30-2
PI Reference Manual Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
Feature Name Feature Station Trunk Trunk Hunt Boss Library Wait_
Acronym Group Group Group Que
30-3
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
busy trunks or ports that have not been released, i.e., the connect time is greater
than the call time.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
30-4
PI Reference Manual Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
Option Description
After choosing one of the data initialization options, the following message is
displayed:
WARNING: Data initialization will be done.
ARE YOU SURE(Y/N)?
Enter Yes to initialize the information and continue.
Enter No to retract.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
30-5
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
Coral systems with limited memory may choose to set only specific
features and events to Yes, in order to save memory resources.
This does not include any of the special Call Forward All features such as
Call Forward All External or Internal or Attendant Call Forward feature.
Monitors all station Call Forward (default feature code: #141) events.
Internal Traffic: Features and Events Control Root,3,9,1
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
30-6
PI Reference Manual Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
TRAFFIC The following parameters, monitor the specific traffic event. Each of these traffic
EVENTS: events can occur on a Coral entity as described in Table 30-2 on page 30-3. Each
time an event occurs, its count is raised by one.
INTERNAL Yes/No
OUTGOING CALL
Monitors the outgoing internal calls for the chosen entity. The entity may be a
(ST_OUT)
station, trunk or any of the entities listed in Table 30-2 on page 30-3.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
30-7
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
CONGESTION Yes/No
(CONGES)
Monitors failed calls due to a lack of Coral shared resources such as Time Slots,
DTMF, DTD, or when the internal Coral call tables, call records or call pools are
full,.
The report only includes a count for each called table and does not describe the
reason for the call failure.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
ANSWER (WTIME)
Monitors the Wait time for Answer per station. This is the time duration that the
caller waited for the call to be answered.
This item is only counted for answered calls.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
30-8
PI Reference Manual Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
CONSTANTLY Yes/No
CONNECTED PORT
Monitors the number of trunks or ports that were not released within a reasonable
(CBUSY)
amount of time as defined in AVERAGE CONNECT TIME (page 30-4) in the Internal
Traffic: Definitions branch (Root,3,9,0).
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
30-9
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
30-10
PI Reference Manual Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
3-Traffic Records the number of Traffic • Above average wait time for No
Exception exception events that occurred answer
for a specific date.
• Above average call duration
These events are calculated
based on each event time • Unusual Call Time*
definition available from the PI. • Constantly Connected Port
Events that end before the • Trunk Overflow from...
TRAFFIC START TIME (page 30-4)
• Intercepted Calls
are recorded as part of the day
events. • Undefined Ports
30-11
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
SYSTEM WIDE Range: Yes/No (Set this to Yes for Congestion reports only)
Default: Reports 0 to 3: N
Report 4: Y
Reports 5 to 9: N
Set this parameter to Yes only when selecting system-wide items for the ON_LINE_
PARAMS parameter below when defining the report items.
Internal Traffic: Reports: Format Parms Root,3,9,2,0
Currently this parameter should be set to Yes only when the Congestion item
(17-CONGES) is selected in ON_LINE_PARAMS for the report.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
30-12
PI Reference Manual Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
30-13
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
This branch is used to view the reports. Reports can be printed one at a time. The
technician must choose the entity (station, trunk, group, etc.) for the report as well
the range of dial numbers for the requested entity.
Reports can be printed for any given day. Therefore, a full week’s report
must be printed one day at a time.
Select the Dial Number Types for the range of dial numbers selected above.
Enter one or more Dial Number Types between parenthesis.
All the dial numbers (from within the requested range listed above) matching the
requested NPL type are displayed.
30-14
PI Reference Manual Coral Traffic Report (CTR)
The report shows the day the report was printed and not the day for which
the report details are shown. See example report below.
Example Report
* Report7
30-15
Coral Traffic Report (CTR) PI Reference Manual
30-16
PI Reference Manual List of Abbreviations
2SK Two Station Key Telephone Card 4T-C 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
card with power failure (PF) transfer and a
2500 SET The basic SLT touch-tone desk telephone multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/
8CID card in piggyback fashion
3-Way Three Way Party Call
4T-Cipx 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
card with power failure (PF) transfer and a
30T,30T/E 30 Digital Trunk Circuit Card -
multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/
E1 European Standard
8CID card in piggyback fashion for Coral IPx
systems
30T Office 30 Digital Trunk Circuit Card -
E1 European Standard for the
4T-CID 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
Coral IPx Office
card with power failure (PF) transfer 4TBR with
a 4/8CID card in piggyback fashion
30T/M 30 Digital Trunk Circuit Card -
E1 Mexican Standard
4T-CIDipx 4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
card with power failure (PF) transfer and a
30T/x 30 Digital Trunk Circuit Card - multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/
E1 Standard Variations 8CID card in piggyback fashion for the Coral
IPx systems
4ALS Four ALS70 Trunk Circuit Card
4T-CID Office4 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
4BID Four Trunk Belgium Inward Dialing card with power failure (PF) transfer and a
Circuit Card multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4 CID
card in piggyback fashion for the Coral IPx
4CID Office Daughter Board on the 4T Office card in Coral Office
IPx Office systems
4TBR Four Trunk BRI Circuit Card
4DTR Four DTMF Receiver Circuit Card
4TBR Office Four Trunk BRI Circuit Card for the Coral IPx
4GC Four Circuit Group Controller Circuit Card Office
4IAA 4 Port Integrated Automated Attendant 4TEM Four Trunk E&M Tie-Line Circuit Card
4/8/20S OfficeFour, eight or 20 port, 2 Wire - Single Line 4TEMP Four Trunk E&M Pulsed Tie-Line Circuit Card
Telephone Interface Card for the Coral IPx
Office 4TMR Four Trunk with Metering Circuit Card
Provides a multi-pin connector for optional 8Fx
Office or 16Fx Office daughter board 4TPF Four Trunk Power Fail Circuit Card
4S8F Office Combination Station Card. Four Single Line 4TWL Four Two Way Loop Trunk Circuit Card
Telephone circuits (4S Office) and eight SFT
Office circuits (8Fx Office) Interface Card for 4VS Four Digitized Voice Circuit Card -
the Coral IPx Office No Longer Available
4S+8Fx OfficeCombination Station Card. Four Single Line 4VSN Four Digitized Voice Circuit Card- field
Telephone circuits (4S Office) and 16 SFT installable voice messages
Office circuits (16Fx Office) Interface Card for
the Coral IPx Office 500 SET The old SLT rotary dial telephone desk
Abbrv.-1
List of Abbreviations PI Reference Manual
8Fx Office Daughter Board on the 4S Office or 8S Office 8T-Cipx 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
cards in Coral IPx Office systems. card with power failure (PF) transfer and a
Supports 8 SFT ports. multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/
8CID card in piggyback fashion for Coral IPx
8SD Eight Station Data Circuit Card systems
8/16/24SDT Standard Digital 8, 16 or 24 Line Telephone 8T-CID 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
Interface Card card with power failure (PF) transfer 4TBR with
a 4/8CID card in piggyback fashion
8/16/24SFT Standard Digital 8, 16 or 24 Line Telephone (2-
wire) Interface Card supporting the FlexSet as 8T-CIDipx 8 port Loop-Start/Ground-Start trunk interface
well as the DKT/DST/GKT series. card with power failure (PF) transfer and a
multi-pin connector to attach an optional 4/
8CID card in piggyback fashion for the Coral
8/16SFTipx Standard Digital 8 or 16 Line Telephone
IPx systems
Interface Card for the Coral IPx 500 and
CDRS/CDRX 200E supporting the FlexSet as
well as the DKT/DST/GKT series. 8T-CID Office Combination Trunk Card. 8T Office and 8CID
card on 8T Office board in piggyback fashion
for the Coral IPx Office.
8S+8Fx OfficeCombination Station Card. Eight Single Line
Telephone circuits (8S Office) and eight SFT
Office circuits (8Fx Office) Interface Card for 8TBR Eight Trunk BRI Circuit Card
the Coral IPx Office
8TPF Eight Trunk with four Power Fail Circuit Cards
8S+16Fx
12Sx Office Daughter Board for the 8S Office card for Coral
Office Combination Station Card. Eight Single Line IPx Office systems that adds 12 SLT ports.
Telephone circuits (8S Office) and sixteen SFT Enables a total of 20 SLT ports.
Office circuits (16Fx Office) Interface Card for
the Coral IPx Office 16Fx Office Daughter Board on the 4S Office or 8S Office
cards in Coral IPx Office systems.
8/16/24SFT Supports 16 SFT ports.
Office Standard Digital 8, 16 or 24 Line Telephone
16SH/S 16 Single Line Telephone Interface Card with
(2-wire) Interface Card for the Coral IPx Office
Hotel Circuit
supporting the FlexSet as well as the DKT/
DST/GKT series.
16SKD 16 Station Key Digital Circuit Card
8SH/S Eight Single Line Telephone Interface Card
with Hotel Circuit A
8SK Eight Station Key Telephone Circuit Card
AA Automated Attendant (4IAA card)
8SKD Eight Station Key Digital Circuit Card
ACC Access
8/24SA 8 or 24 Line Standard 2-Wire Single Line
Station Interface Card for 2500 type phone ACCT Account Code
8/16/24SLS 8, 16 or 24 Line Standard 2-Wire Single Line ACD Automatic Call Distribution, Automatic Call
Station Interface Card for 500/2500 type phone Distributor
Abbrv.-2
PI Reference Manual List of Abbreviations
AE Application Entity
C
ALI Automatic Location Identification. This is the
cross referenced location information based on
the caller’s ID. CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
(Used for USA systems only). CAMA telephony
ALS70 (Abonnee Lijn Signalering 1970) Trunk protocol detects MF tones sent by the
Circuit Card - Netherlands Standard telephony equipment and deciphers the caller
ID.
ANF Additional Network Feature
CAP Computerized Attendant Position
ANI Automatic Number Identification
CC Country Code
ANS Answer
CCS Continuous Communication Systems
ANSI American National Standards Institute
CCM Coral Call Master: Coral system to run ACD
APA Application Processor Adapter For a DKT2000 applications.
Telephone
CDB Card Database
APDL Applications Processor Data Link
CEPT European Conference of Postal and
APDU Application Protocol Data Unit Telecommunications Administration
ASCII American Standard Code for Information CISC Call Independent Signalling Connection
Interchange
CKT Circuit
ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One
CLA CoraLINK Adaptor (piggy back) Baby card is
ASU Auxiliary Service Unit Circuit Card located on the MEX-IP2 or MCP-IPx2 card for
CTI applications.
ATT Attendant
CLI Calling Line Identification
Abbrv.-3
List of Abbreviations PI Reference Manual
Coral IPx Family of Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000 DIM Data Interface Module
Systems for 19” and 23” rack mounting
DISA Direct Inward System Access
COS Class of Service
DISC Disconnect
CPA Coral Paging Adapter
DKT Digital Key Telephone (Full Feature Phone), 2-
CPN Calling Party Number Wire Interface
CSLX Coral FlexiCom 200 Expansion Unit. Maximum DND Do Not Disturb
of 2 Expansion units per Coral SL or FlexiCom
200 Base unit. DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service
CSTA Computer Supported Telecommunication DOD Direct Outward Dialing (same as DDO)
Applications; OSI Layer 7 Communication
between a computing network and a CoraLINK DP Dial Pulse
System
DPC Digital Protocol Converter Card
CSTS Coral Supported Telephony Services
CSTS, is a Coral protocol and is used for DPEM Digital Programmable Expansion Module for
communication between the CCM 3 and the DKT 2000 sets (FlexSet 40B for FlexSet 280
Coral, providing more data transfer ability and Series)
better stability. Using the CSTS, Coral includes
ANI and DNIS information in the messages DSE Dialogue Service Element
among other relevant data.
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
CTI Computer Telephony Integration
DSP48 Display Module, 2 rows by 24 characters
CTR Coral Traffic Report
DSP80 Display Module, 2 rows by 40 characters
D
DSS Direct Station Selection
DI Diagnostics E
Dial Pad Telephone Dial Pad including the numbers 0
through 9 and * and #. E1 30 Digital Circuit Card - European Standards
Abbrv.-4
PI Reference Manual List of Abbreviations
ECMA European Computer Manufacturers Association HDLC High Data Level Control
EIS EKT to SLT Interface, Special Mode HI Human Interface (same as PI)
FCC Federal Communication Commission (USA) IPC Office/SFCSFC card for the Coral IPx Office
FKT Fonetasy Key Telephone uCMC uCMC card for the Coral IPx Office
GFT Generic Functional Transport IST Industry Standard Telephone (same as SLT)
Abbrv.-5
List of Abbreviations PI Reference Manual
L
N/A Not Applicable
LDN Listed Directory Number (site LDN) NP, NPL Numbering Plan
LED Light Emitting Diode NPID Numbering Plan Identification (PRI calls)
M
OAI Open Application Interface
MCP-ATS MCP Card for Coral FlexiCom 6000 and Coral O/G Outgoing Call
IPx 4000 Common Control
OHVA Off-Hook Voice Announce
MCP-IPx MCP Card for Coral IPx 500 and FlexiCom 200
Common Control in Software Versions 14.6x ONHK Onhook
MEX-IP2 MCP Card for Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000 PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
and Coral IPx 800, 3000 Common Control in
Software Versions 15 and later PAD Packet Assembly Disassembly
MFR Multi Frequency Receiver Card PC-ACD Personal Computer Automatic Call Distributor
MR Office Main Resources Card for the Coral IPx Office PEM Programmable Expansion Module for EKT and
VDK sets
MSDX Mass Storage DX
PEX Peripheral Expansion for DKT sets
Abbrv.-6
PI Reference Manual List of Abbreviations
PRI 30 Primary Rate Interface Card, (30B+D) 2 Mbps, SAU Software Authorization Unit for controlling
Enables Coral subscribers to connect to the system software packages plugged on the
ISDN public network 32GC, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2 or MCB Office card
PRI 30 OfficePrimary Rate Interface Card, (30B+D) 2 Mbps SCM Signalling Carriage Mechanism
for the Coral IPx Office.
Enables Coral subscribers to connect to the SDT Secondary Dial Tone
ISDN public network
SDT Digital Key (DKT &DST) Station Card
PRIO Priority
SEC Secondary
PRIV Private Library
SER Serial Number
PRM Primary
SERV Service
PROG Program
SFT Coral Peripheral Station Cards supporting
PTS Proceed to Send FlexSets as well as the DKT/DST/GKT series.
PWDS Ports Without Disconnect Supervision SKW Wireless Extension Interface Card with support
for base stations
RMI Remote Maintenance Interface Circuit Card SRC Source (used in database control)
RMI Office Remote Maintenance Interface Circuit Card for SS Supplementary Service
the Coral IPx Office
Abbrv.-7
List of Abbreviations PI Reference Manual
STR Start Time/Day VDM Voice Data Module for DKT 2000 Series
TERM Terminal X
TNNT Tenant
TRX/TX Transmit
UM Universal Messaging
UNATT Unattended
Abbrv.-8
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-1
Index PI Reference Manual
ISDN 26-9
Announcer Cards
Keyset Def. 9-60
IPC/SFC 10-14
Sizes 4-20
iVMFipx 10-14
SLT Def. 9-13
Answer From Any Phone
All Call Paging
See Pickup
See Zone Page, Voice Page
Answer Supervision
ALS70 8-135–8-145
4TEMP 8-65
Card Database 8-138–8-140
4TEMP, Detection Time 8-82
Configuration 8-136
4TEMP, Pulse Duration 8-81
DID Port Database 8-143
4TEMP, Wait Timer 8-73
Incoming 8-138
4VS, SAU requirement 3-22
Loop Start Port Database 8-142
CoraLINK, Wait Queue 27-18
Meter 8-140
Index-2
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-3
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-4
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-5
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-6
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-7
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-8
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-9
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-10
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-11
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-12
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-13
Index PI Reference Manual
control 3rd line display 9-103 Display NPL type per dial# 5-55
FlexSet IP Features 5-21
SAU requirement 3-10 Field/Index Order 5-17–??
FlexSet-IP 280S Special Feature Codes 5-50–5-52
Headsets 9-42 General Trunk Timers 8-3–8-6
FlexSets MLPP Reserve 8-4
120S/280S, Version 3.5, support VM 6-33 Recall 8-3
280S/120S, Headsets 9-41 GID 8-150–8-157
choose idle set 9-73 Card Database 8-151–8-154
Control 3rd line 9-73 DID 8-157
Cord Disconnect Activates Keyset Button 9-75 Numbering Plan 5-18
SAU requirement 3-9 Operator Access 6-19
Index-14
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-15
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-16
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-17
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-18
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-19
Index PI Reference Manual
Locked Out
SLTs 9-18 Make Dial
Login 4T/8T O/G Trunk 8-53
ACD, NPL 5-35 4TEM I/C Trunk 8-62
Primary Login, NPL 5-37 4TEM O/G Trunk 8-62
Look Ahead Routing 4TEMP, I/C Trunk 8-80
See LAR 4TEMP, O/G Trunk 8-82
Loop Make/Break Dial
P Network 15-18 30T/E, DID 8-127
30T/E, E&M 8-128
Loop Originating, Key 5-22
30T/E, O/G Trunk 8-125
Loop Start 30T/M, DID 8-118
Trunks 8-46, 8-47 30T/M, I/C E&M 8-118
Index-20
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-21
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-22
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-23
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-24
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-25
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-26
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-27
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-28
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-29
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-30
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-31
Index PI Reference Manual
Hookflash 6-21
Music Source, E&M 8-89 Trunk Incoming Only
Music Source, SLT 9-16 Attendant, NPL 5-26
Pass Account Code for Trunk upon Transfer Trunk Outgoing Only
6-10 Attendant, NPL 5-32
Recall Trunk, Timer 8-3 Trunk Timers
SIP Terminal 29-47 General 8-3–8-6
SIP Trunk 29-58 Supervision Recall 6-4, 6-36
SLT 6-31 Trunk To Trunk Connect
Automatic Unattended 9-9 Transfer 8-23
SMDR Split, COS 7-20 Trunk Group 8-23
Trunk Release After XFER, Timer 8-3 Trunk Type
Trunk to Station 6-8 define Pulse, DTMF, CAMA or mix 8-12
Index-32
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-33
Index PI Reference Manual
Index-34
PI Reference Manual Index
Index-35
Index PI Reference Manual
X
XDA
Reserve Boss Group 11-3
Xfer, Key 5-22
Y
Yes/No
Entering Values 2-10
Z
Zip Tone
FlexSet 280S/120S 9-41
Zone
for Sentinel 29-85
Zone Page
Group 10-24
Members 10-24
Tone Plan 6-100
Zones
IP, Sizes 4-19
See IP Zones
Index
Index-36
International Headquarters
Tadiran Telecom (TTL) L.P.
23 Hayetzira Street P.O.Box 7607
Petach Tikva 49517 Israel
Tel. +972-3-9262000, Fax. +972-3-9262310
USA Headquarters
Tadiran Telecom, Inc.
265 Executive Dr., Suite 250
Plainview, NY 11803
Tel. +1-516-632-7200, Fax. +1-516-632-7210
http://www.tadirantele.com
C o r a l TM I P x O f f i c e
TM
Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000, 4000
TM
Coral CDRS 200E
TM
Coral FlexiCom 400 (with HDC controller), 5000, 6000